Home

Manual Change - Agilent Technologies

1. Integ Frequency Ka K time MEDIUM fasion T rE Le 4 Zal 1x107 1 EE 1 y 100 Hz lt fm lt 100 kHz 2E 3 Zm 1 x 107 1 2 100 kHz lt fm lt 300 kHz ane 2 22 Zm 3 x 10 8 1 300 kHz lt fa lt 1MHz 999 34 204M Zml 10 x 107 1 SHORT fm lt 100 Hz 1 492 1 J Zm 2 x 107 1 42 1 jo 100 Hz lt fm lt 100 kHz 0 Z 2 x 107 1 2 100 kHz lt fm lt 300 kHz 2 4 Zm 6 x 107 1 4 300 kHz lt fm lt 1 MHz 3 400 4 Ms Zm 20 x 10 1 42 fm Test Frequency Hz Zm Impedance of DUT Q Vs Test Signal Voltage mVrms 9 14 General Information Kaa is practically negligible for impedances above 500 Q Table 9 2 Cable Length Factor Kaa Test Signal Cable Length voltage 0m 1m 2m 4m lt 2Vims 0 0 gt Ka 2x107 xfZ 1 5xfZ x107 24 10xf2 x107 gt 2 Vems 0 Tal Zal Zsa fm Test Frequency MHz Zm Impedance of DUT Q Ka Impedance Proportional Factor Table 9 3 Cable Length Factor Kp Frequency Cable Length 0 m 1m 2m 4m fm lt 100 kHz 1 145xfm 1 10xfin 1 20xfm 100 kHz lt fm lt 300 kHz 1 142xfm 144xfm 1 8xfm 300 kHz lt fm lt 1 MHz 1 14 0 5xfm 141xfm 142xfin fm Test Frequency MHz
2. 5m 12m 0 1 0 15 0 3 1 2 5 20 Vrms ri Ol Ol Cle oe eo Ai All A1 Atl Ai Atl Ai Atl Ai A Ai A xx MEDIUM A Atl A At Ao All Ao 0 1 Ao Atl Ao A LONG As Atl As 0 25 A3 0 25 A 0 25 A3 0 25 A3s 0 25 4 Atl 4 All 45At A4 0 1 A4 ZA Aa A Ai Atl Ai Atl Ai Atl AZA AZA XX SHORT Ao All Ao All Ao 0 2 A2 A A2 A 3ZAtl A3s 0 3 A3s 0 3 A3s 0 3 A3s 0 3 Aa Atl Aa All Aa 0 5 x Atl 0 1 Aa A Aa A Ce O hg mone 5m 33m 015 023 1 2 5 20 Vrms Multiply the A values as follows when the test frequency is less than 300 Hz 100 Hz lt fm lt 300 Hz Multiply the A values by 2 fm lt 100 Hz Multiply the A values by 2 5 Add 0 15 to the A values when all of the following measurement conditions are satisfied Test Frequency 300 kHz lt fm lt 1 MHz Test Signal Voltage 5 Vims lt Vs lt 20 Vims DUT Inductor Zm lt 200 Q Zm impedance of DUT INTEG TIME 20 SHORT 1 5 1 0 AND 0 5 LONG 0 2 T 045 0 1 0 05 0 02 0 01 5 Om 20m 50m 100m 200m 500m 2 5 10 20 rms Test Signal Voltage Figure 9 5 Basic Accuracy A 2 of 2 General Information 9 13 K and K values are the incremental factors in low impedance and high impedance measurements respectively Ka is practically negligible for impedances above 500 Q and K is also negligible for impedances below 500 Q Table 9 1 Impedance Proportional Factors Ka and Kp
3. E E EAS lt MEAS DISPLAY gt SYS MENU DISP FUNC Cp D RANGE AUTO FREQ 1 00000kHz BIAS 0 000 V BIN EVEL 1 50 V INTEG ME 7 Cp 484 101 pF BIN COUNT D 017368 vm 1 431 V Im 4 280mMA SWEEP CORR OFF MCS0513S 2 Measure the DUT again If the 4284A now measures properly then the correction data may have been improperly obtained or saved Carefully perform the correction procedure again and measure the DUT For more information on the correction procedure refer to chapter 4 CORRECTION Page 6 32 Measurement Procedure and Examples Remote Control 7 Introduction This chapter provides the following information to remotely control the 4284A via the General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB m Reference information for programming the 4284A m Introduction to the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCP1 a Tutorial information for the SCPI programmer General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB GPIB Connection GPIB is Agilent Technologies s implementation of IEEE standard 488 1 1987 And IEEE standard 488 1 1987 is identical to the original IEEE standard 488 1978 When configuring an GPIB system the following restrictions must be adhered to a The total length of cable in one bus system must be less than or equal to two meters times the number of devices connected on the bus the GPIB controller counts as one device and the total len
4. Functions Initialize Method Power ON RST Device Clear CORRECTION OPEN Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected SHORT Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected LOAD Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected CABLE Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected MODE Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected CH No Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected FUNC Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected FREQI 3 Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected REFA Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected REFB Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected LIMIT TABLE NOM 0 0 Not Affected SETUP MODE Not Affected AUX OFF OFF Not Affected COMP OFF OFF Not Affected BIN 1 9 LOW Cleared Cleared Not Affected BIN 1 9 HIGH Cleared Cleared Not Affected 2nd LOW Cleared Cleared Not Affected 2nd HIGH Cleared Cleared Not Affected BIN COUNT COUNT ON OFF OFF OFF Not Affected LIST SWEEP MODE SEQ SEQ Not Affected SETUP sweep parameter FREQ Hz FREQ Hz Not Affected sweep points Cleared Cleared Not Affected SYSTEM BEEPER Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected CONFIG GPIB ADDRESS Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected TALK ONLY Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected HANDLER I F Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected SCANNER I F Sys Memory Not Affected Not Affected Display Control lt display page gt MEAS DISPLAY MEAS DISPLAY Not Affected D P FIX A OFF OFF Not Affected D P FIX B OFF OFF Not Affected Measurem
5. Table 10 4 Test Signal Level Level Monitor Test Limits Hi PW ON Test Signal Test Limits Level M 7 7 7 7 Multimeter Reading Level Monitor Reading 10 mV 10 mV 2 mV M R 3 0 5 mV 1y 1 V 0 11 V M R 3 0 5 mV 2 5 V 2 5 V 0 26 V M R 3 5 mV 20 V 20 V 2 01 V M R 3 5 mV M R is the Multimeter Reading for the 4284A s output signal level 10 8 Performance Tests DC Bias Level This test verifies the accuracy of the 4284A s internal dc bias level Accuracy Test MULTIMETER BNC f dual banana plug Adapter oa Qoca anono oono o 200000 oo 000a ooonpon aq aana BNC m BNCi m Cable 4284A D00 Donn z 220 oo 200 m emam iam um gorog o lar O 5 INTERFACE BOX T DC BIAS TEST SIGNAL Figure 10 4 DC Bias Level Accuracy Test Setup Using an Interface Box MULTIMETER 290 Doonojoqoo red om ooon o 200000 o0 noopjO ooo0opoo 900 pooD OOG white black 2 BNCs m 3 alligator clips Test Lead white Tee BNCimi f if Direct connection no cable red Adapter Figure 10 5 DC Bias Level Accuracy Test Setup Without an Interface Box Equipment Interface Box Multimeter Agilent PN 04284 65007 3458A Cable BNC m to BNC m 30 cm Agilent PN 8120 183
6. read by Serial Poll status Bit Register read by STB Logical OR service Request L1007014 7 20 Remote Control Enable Register set by SR Figure 7 17 Status Byte Register The individual bit assignments of the status byte and its bit weights are given in Table 7 4 When you read the status byte using GPIB serial polling the value is the sum of the total bit weights of all the high bits at the time you read the byte After serial polling the status byte only bit 6 RQS is cleared Table 7 4 Status Byte Assignments Bit No Bit Weight Description 128 64 32 16 eo Ee Operation Status Event Register Summary Bit This bit is set to 1 when one or more enabled bits of the operation status event register discussed later in this chapter has been set to 1 This bit is cleared when all bits of the operation status register are set to 0 This bit isn t cleared by serial polling Bit 6 serves two functions RQS MSS depending on how it is read e RQS Request Service Bit If bit 6 is read in the serial polling process it is treated as the RQS bit and is reset during the serial polling process e MSS Master Summary Bit If bit 6 is read using the STB status byte query it is treated as the MSS bit and its value is not changed by the
7. y Trigger Trigger Trigger SI EP mode Figure 3 17 SEQ Mode and STEP Mode Note A When two or more sweep points are the same and are adjacent the 3 4284A measures the device once and then the measurement result is compared to limits set for each sweep point 3 34 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu System Menu Front Panel Operation for Setting the Sweep Mode of the List Sweep Measurement Perform the following steps to set the list sweep measurement mode to the SEQ or STEP modes 1 Move the cursor to the MODE field The following softkeys will be displayed m SEQ m STEP 2 Use the softkeys to select and set the list sweep measurement mode SEQ or STEP mode The system menu on this page allows you to perform the following functions a Load Store m Printer m Keylock These functions are the same as the functions of the system menu on the MEAS DISPLAY page Refer to System Menu on page 3 19 So only the procedure is given for each function Load Store Function Perform the following steps to store the control settings in the internal non volatile memory or in an external memory card 1 Set all controls 2 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 3 Insert a memory card to the MEMORY card slot if you are going to store the settings in a memory card 4 Press STORE The message Enter record number to STORE will be displayed on the system message line 5 Use the entry keys
8. Liggeog6 Figure 6 6 Four Terminal Pair Measurement Principle The four terminal pair measurement method has the advantage in both low and high impedance measurements The outer shield conductors work as the return path for the measurement signal current they are not grounded The same current flows through both the center conductors and outer shield conductors in opposite directions but no external magnetic fields are generated around the conductors the magnetic fields produced by the inner and outer currents completely cancel each other Because the measurement signal current does not develop an inductive magnetic field test leads Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 9 do not contribute additional errors due to self or mutual inductance between the individual leads Measurement This paragraph gives general notes and techniques for using the Contacts four terminal pair configuration efficiently To realize accurate measurements using the four terminal pair measurement technique the following are required to make measurement contacts the number labels in the following description corresponds to the numbers in Figure 6 7 1 The signal path between the 4284A and DUT should be as short as possible 2 To construct the four terminal pair measurement circuit configuration the outer shields of Hcur and Hpoz Leur and Lpot terminals must be respectively connected together at the point as near as possible to the po
9. State State Trigger Trigger State State L1007008 Figure 7 9 INITiate Subsystem Commands and Trigger System There are the following two conditions for the INITiate subsystem commands 1 INITiate CONTinuous OFF condition 7 12 Remote Control Note 1 In this condition the INITiate IMMediate command must be sent via GPIB to change the IDLE state to the WAIT FOR TRIGGER state after reading the measurement data by a controller INITiate CONTinuous ON condition In this condition the IDLE state is automatically changed to the WAIT FOR TRIGGER state without using the INITiate IMMediate command after reading the measurement data by a controller i When the ABORt command is sent under any state the 4284A state is Y forced to the IDLE state In this condition there are no data stored in the 4284A If the FETCh query is sent in this case an error error message 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur a WAITING FOR TRIGGER state TRIGger SCPI command FETCh command IDLE State In this state the 4284A can accept a trigger command while in the remote condition When the trigger command is sent to the 4284A the state is automatically changed to the MEASUREMENT state There are three kinds of the trigger commands TRG common command Group Execution Trigger GET bus command and TRIGger IMMediate SCPI command These commands are divided int
10. DC I ISO ON 7 10 kN range _ Delay Time sec fon 100 1k range 1 1 it 100 1k 10 k 100 k 1 Frequency Hz ooo ANa A LOOIGOS Figure G 8 Short Circuit Recovery Delay Times 3 G 10 Transient States Caused by Measurement Condition Changes Index Special characters A ABORT I O IFC 7 4 ABORt Subsystem 8 47 Accuracy DC Bias 9 17 Measurement See Measurement Accuracy Test Signal 9 3 ADC ERR 2 7 ALC Command 8 16 Function 4 6 AMPLitude Subsystem 8 16 APERture Subsystem 8 39 ASCII Format 7 7 Data Buffer Memory 7 17 Examples 7 36 Assistance 1x Automatic Level Control See ALC AUXiliary Bin 4 41 Averaging Rate 8 39 BEEPER Field 5 7 Beeping Condition 5 7 Bias Current I F I O Test 5 16 Bias Current Interface Function Test 10 23 BIAS Subsystem 8 19 BINARY Format 7 9 Data Buffer Memory 7 18 Examples 7 38 BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page 2 10 3 28 BIN No DISPLAY Page 2 10 3 23 Cable Length Correction 8 51 Calibration Cycle 10 2 CATALOG Page 2 11 5 1 CATALOG SYSTEM Menu 5 1 Certification vill Character Data 8 5 cleaning 1 6 CLEAR LOCKOUT 7 4 Clear Status Command 8 82 CLS Command 8 82 Index 1 Index 2 Command Abbreviations 8 4 ABORt Subsystem 8 47 AMPLitude Subsystem 8 16 APERture Subsystem 8 39 BIAS Subsystem 8 19 CLS 8 82 COMParator Subsystem 8 65 CORRection Subsystem
11. Lou va BNC Ter Five Terminal Connection Connector Plate Hou Hpeor HT Leor Leur j L1006012 Figure 6 12 Measurement Contacts for Test Leads Extension 6 14 Measurement Procedure and Examples Guarding For Low Use a guard plate to minimize measurement errors caused by stray Capacitance capacitance when measuring low capacitance values such as low Measurements Capacitance chip capacitors Figure 6 13 shows an example of measurement contacts using a guard plate in the four terminal pair measurement configuration GROUND Ler Leor Hrer Heu D FEET 4TP Test Leads p paa paa Shield Conductor A of the Test Leads D Connect here Guard Plate Should not be Grounded Figure 6 13 Example DUT Guard Plate Connection Shielding Shielding minimizes the effects of electrical noise picked up by the test leads So provide a shield plate and connect it to the outer shield conductors of the four terminal pair test leads as shown in Figure 6 14 Lar Leor Hror How Guard Plate L1006014 Figure 6 14 Guard Shield Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 15 Correction Functions The 4284A has powerful correction functions Cable Length correction and OPEN SHORT and LOAD corrections These correction functions are used to c
12. Transient States Caused by Measurement Condition Changes G 5 CHANGING THE DC When the dc bias voltage is changed at frequencies below 1 kHz the BIAS VOLTAGE delay wait time must be set as shown below 1 After changing the measurement range under the following conditions use the appropriate delay times as shown in Figure G 4 Test Frequency lt 1 kHz Bias Current Isolation O P 0 5 o E T Test Signal Voltage ob 20 mV O 02 m DC BIAS 0 V 40 V o1 100 mV DC I ISO OFF 1V 20 100 ik Frequency Hz L1001005 Figure G 4 Required Delay Times After Changing the DC Bias 1 Note 4g A delay is unnecessary When the test signal voltage is U500 mVrms 2 After changing the dc bias voltage under the following conditions use the appropriate delay times as shown in Figure G 5 G 6 Transient States Caused by Measurement Condition Changes Test Frequency Bias Current Isolation lt 1 kHz ON Figure G 5 Required Delay Time After Changing the DC Bias 2 Transient States Caused by Measurement Condition Changes G 7 12 o D 2 EG 100 kQ range S5 DC BIAS ON ov Q DC I ISO ON g oca 10 kN range 100 1kNQ range Li l LI I 20 100 1K Frequency Hz L1001006 Short Circuit When the DUT is changed after the 4284A has been unbalanced by a shorted or low impedance DUT use a delay time as show
13. Enter the limit value of the BIN 1 at BIN 1 LOW field using the numeric entry keys When one of the numeric entry keys is pressed the suffix softkeys p n u m k and M are available and so you can use these softkeys to enter the unit and terminate the entry without hitting ENTER When the limit value of BIN 1 is entered in the BIN 1 LOW field the BIN 1 low limit becomes absolute input value and the BIN 1 high limit becomes absolute input value The cursor will be automatically moved to the BIN 2 LOW field Repeat step 4 until the limits of the BIN 9 is entered After that the cursor will be moved to the 2nd LOW field Enter the low limit value of the secondary parameter After that the cursor will be automatically moved to the 2nd HIGH field Enter the high limit value of the secondary parameter Then the entry example using the tolerance mode is shown in Figure 4 16 Sequential Mode is used Enter the low limit of the BIN 1 using the numeric entry keys When the one of the numeric entry keys is pressed the suffix soft keys p n p m k and M are available so you can use System Menu these softkeys to enter the unit and terminate the entry without hitting ENTER 9 The cursor will be automatically moved to the BIN 1 HIGH field after entering the low limit of the BIN 1 Enter the high limit of the BIN 1 10 The cursor will be automatically moved to the BIN 2 HIGH field Because the
14. 0 00095 C V 1 16 pF 0 00103 C V 1 31 pF 0 00111 C V 1 53 pF 0 00083 Cal Valuei at 1kHz ACTUAL MAXIMUM C V 32 09 pF 0 00319 C V 3 05 pF 0 00286 C V 1 00 pF 0 00081 C V 1 13 pF 0 00095 C V 1 16 pF 0 00103 C V 1 31 pF 0 00111 C V 1 53 pF 0 00083 C V 1 1 0003xC V OSC Level 20 mV PASS FAIL OSC Level 5 1 V Option 001 only PASS FAIL Performance Tests 10 43 0 01 F Standard C V Cal Value at 1 kHz OSC Level 510 mV SIGNAL MINIMUM ACTUAL FREQUENCY 20 Hz Cp C V x0 0573 nF 125 Hz Cp C V x0 0125 nF 1 kHz Cp C V x0 0082 nF C V 1 1 0005xC V C V 1 0002xC V OSC Level 20 mV PASS FAIL OSC Level 5 1 V Option 001 only PASS FAIL 0 1 F Standard C V Cal Value at1 kHz OSC Level 510 mV SIGNAL MINIMUM ACTUAL FREQUENCY 20 Hz Cp C V 0 310 nF 125 Hz Cp C V 0 112 nF 1kHz Cp C V 0 081 nF C V 1 1 0005xC V C V 1 0002xC V OSC Level 20 mV PASS FAIL OSC Level 5 1 V Option 001 only PASS FAIL 10 44 Performance Tests MAXIMUM C V 1 0 0573 nF C V 0 0125 nF C V 0 0082 nF MAXIMUM C V 0 310 nF C V 0 112 nF C V 0 081 nF C V 1 F Standard OSC Level 510 mV Cal Value at 1 kHz SIGNAL MINIMUM ACTUAL MAXIMUM FREQU
15. 1 the event status register summary bit bit 6 of the status byte is set to I The default setting is ESE 0 all bits of the standard event status byte are disabled Bits 1 and 6 of the event status register are always 0 zero Thus masking these bits has no meaning Sample Programs Control Settings Note Note Y Y This paragraph provides some HP BASIC sample programs for control set and data transfer The 4284A has four control setting pages under MEAS SETUP as follows MEAS SETUP CORRECTION LIMIT TABLE SETUP LIST SWEEP SETUP So the control settings on each page should be set The sample programs are shown in the order of the preceding list starting on the next page In case of the front panel operation the available control settings depends on the display page But in the case of GPIB operation all of control settings can be set without concern to the page being displayed When the 4284A measures a DUT one of the following pages under DISPLAY FORMAT must be used even if the 4284A is in the remote condition MEAS DISPLAY BIN No DISPLAY BIN COUNT DISPLAY LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Remote Control 7 31 7 32 Remote Control MEAS SETUP page This sample program sets all of the setting controls on the MEAS SETUP page 10 ASSIGN 20 REMOTE 30 OUTPUT 40 OUTPUT 50 OUTPUT 60 OUTPUT 70 OUTPUT 80 OUTPUT 90 OUTPUT 100 OUTPUT 110 OUTPUT 120 OUTPUT 130 OUTPUT 14
16. 2 Use the softkeys to set the measurement range Description The 4284A operates from 20 Hz to 1 MHz with 8610 frequency steps in between All of test frequency points F are calculated values using the following formula All available frequency points above 1 kHz are shown in Appendix F F ki n Where Frequency F m n 20 Hz lt F lt 5 kHz 8467 points 60 62 5 13 to 3750 and 75 integer 5 kHz lt F lt 10 kHz 34 points 120 125 13 to 29 and 150 integer 10 kHz lt F lt 20 kHz 34 points 240 250 13 to 29 and 300 integer 20 kHz lt F lt 250 kHz 63 points 480 500 2 to 29 and 600 integer 250 kHz lt F lt 500 kHz 6 points 960 1000 2 3 and 4 and 1200 500 kHz lt F lt 1 MHz 6 points 1920 2000 2 3 and 4 and 2400 When numeric data is entered the nearest available frequency point is automatically set Front Panel Operation for Setting the Test Frequency There are two ways to set the test frequency One is to use the softkeys and the other is to use the numeric entry keys Perform the following steps to set the test frequency 1 Move the CURSOR to the FREQ field The following softkeys will be displayed INCR ft This softkey is the coarse frequency increment softkey used to increment the test frequency to the next sequentially higher tenfold value after 20 Hz The frequency points set using this softkey are as follows 20 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 k
17. LOAD Correction 1 Move the cursor to the OPEN field The following softkeys will be displayed m ON m OFF m MEAS OPEN 2 Connect your test fixture to the UNKNOWN Terminals without connecting the device under test 3 Press MEAS OPEN The 4284A will measure the OPEN admittance capacitance and inductance at the preset frequency points The time required to measure the open correction data is approximately 90 s During the OPEN correction measurement the following softkey is available m ABORT This softkey is used to stop an OPEN correction data measurement The previous OPEN correction data will still be stored 4 Press ON to perform the OPEN correction calculations on subsequent measurements using the OPEN interpolation SHORT Correction correction data when the FREQ1 FREQ2 and FREQ3 fields are set to OFF When the FREQI FREQ2 and FREQ3 fields are set to ON and the test frequency is equal to FREQI 2 3 the OPEN correction data at FREQ1 2 3 is used Refer to APPENDIX D 5 Press OFF not to perform the OPEN correction calculations on subsequent measurements Description The 4284A s SHORT correction capability corrects for the residual impedance R X in serial with the device under test Refer to Figure 4 12 Figure 4 12 Residual Impedance The 4284A uses the following two kinds of SHORT correction data a The SHORT correction data is taken at all 48 pres
18. lt NR3 gt lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 DIM A 100 20 OUTPUT 717 LIST FREQ 30 ENTER 717 A 40 PRINT A 50 END If this query is received when the List Sweep parameter is set to anything other than frequency error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur LIST Subsystem VOLTage Command Syntax Example Note 4g Query Syntax Query Response Example Note i The VOLTage command clears the previous list sweep point table and sets the oscillator voltage level sweep points The VOLTage query returns the current settings of the voltage sweep points LIST VOLTage lt value gt lt value gt Max 10 sweep points Where lt value gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format OUTPUT 717 LIST VOLT 1 5 Set 1 5V to point 1 OUTPUT 717 LIST VOLT 1E 2 2E 2 3E 2 4F 2 Set 10 mV to point 1 40 mV to point 4 A suffix multiplier and a suffix unit V voltage can be used with this command LIST VOLTage Returned format is lt NR3 gt lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 DIM A 100 20 OUTPUT 717 LIST VOLT 30 ENTER 717 A 40 PRINT A 50 END If this query is received when the List Sweep parameter is set to anything other than voltage error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur Command Reference 8 33 LIST Subsystem CURRent Command Syntax Example Note 4g Query Syntax Query Response Example Note i Y 8 34 Command Reference
19. FORM ASC REAL 64 COMP STAT 0 1 MODE ATOL PTOL SEQ TOL NOM lt NR3 gt BINA lt low gt lt high gt BIN2 lt low gt lt high gt or COMP SEQ BIN lt BINI low gt lt BIN2 high gt lt BINS high gt COMP SLIM lt low gt lt high gt COMP ABIN 0 1 SWAP 0 1 BIN COUN 0 1 LIST FREQ VOLT CURR BIAS VOLT or BIAS CURR lt NR3 gt lt NR3 gt LIST MODE SEQ STEP BAND1 lt parameter gt lt low gt lt high gt BAND2 lt parameter gt lt low gt lt high gt 3 BAND lt n gt lt parameter gt lt low gt lt high gt For details refer to each command reference page 10 DIM A 1000 20 OUTPUT 717 LRN 30 ENTER 717 A 40 50 OUTPUT 717 A 60 END Command Reference 8 91 OPT Query Syntax Query Response Note i Y Example 8 92 Command Reference The OPT query OPTion identification query tells the 4284A to identify the options installed in the system interface OPT Returned format is lt power amp gt lt I bias IF gt lt 2m 4m cable gt lt handler I F gt lt scanner I F gt lt NL END gt Where lt power amp gt is 001 ASCII Option 001 is installed 0 ASCII Option 001 is not installed lt I bias I F gt is 002 ASCII Option 002 is installed 0 ASCII Option 002 is not installed lt 2m 4m cable gt is 006 ASCII Option 006 is installed 0 ASCII Option 006 is not installed lt handler I F gt is 201 ASC
20. Note i Y Note i Y 3 12 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu units Hz kHz and MHz and so you can use these softkeys instead of ENTER to enter the units and enter the data When ENTER is used the numeric data is entered with Hz as the default unit Description The 4284A s oscillator level can be set as the effective value RMS value of a sine wave of the test frequency from the 4284A s internal oscillator You can set either the oscillator voltage level or the oscillator current level The output impedance is 1000 The set value of the oscillator current level is the value set when the measurement contacts UNKNOWN Terminals are shorted together The set value of the oscillator voltage level is the value set when the measurement contacts UNKNOWN Terminals are opened When the Option 001 power amplifier DC bias isn t installed the oscillator voltage level can be set from 0 Vrms to 2 Vrms with a resolution as listed in Table 3 2 or the oscillator current level can be set from 0 Arms to 20 mA ms With a resolution as listed in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Oscillator Level and Resolution Std Mode Oscillator Level Resolution Voltage 0 Vrms 5 MVims to 200 MVims 1 mVems 210 mVems to 2 Vrms 10 MVims Level 0 Arms 50 Arms to 2 MAyms 10 pArms 2 1 mAyms to 20 mArmns 100 pArms When the option 001 power amplifier DC bias is installed the oscillator voltage level can be set form 0 Vims to 20 V
21. OFF softkey 8 Press the ON softkey Then the handler interface can be used to output input the signais 9 Press the DISPLAY FORMAT MENU key To perform list sweep measurements select the LIST SWEEP softkey OPERATION 2 15 NOTES 2 16 OPERATION SECTION 3 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD aa INTRODUCTION This section provides information on how to setup the handler inter face board to interface your handler Setting up the handler inter Q face board consists of installing jumpers and pull up resistors as 5 required X N o E E e i GENERAL CONFIGURATION Table 3 1 lists the jumpers and pull up resistors to install for various handlers on the market and Table 3 2 lists jumper definitions Table 3 1 Internal J mpet na standard W6 w9 10 13 Default jumpers installed at the factory PALOMAR M16 W5 W8 13 1 Mount 1 78 KQ pull up resistors at locations R101 R113 for BIN O BIN 10 EOC and BUSY ial eer resistors at locations R101 R113 for BIN O BIN 10 ISUMECA W6 w9 10 11 and W13 EOC and BUSY SEETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 3 1 Table 3 2 Jumper Definitions Definition When Installed 5 V is supplied at pin 17 COMMON is connected to the system ground When 5 V from the handler interface is used this jumper must be installed EOC is asserted LOW when the measurement is completed and t
22. a Oscillator Level Voltage Current Monitor value Vin Im a OPEN SHORT LOAD on off setting conditions CORR m Channel Number CH when the scanner interface is used The available fields and the softkeys which correspond to the fields on this page are shown in Figure 3 1 and Figure 3 2 respectively DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 1 EAS DISPLAY gt C o Cp D RANGE EQ 1 00000kHz BIAS EVEL 1 00 V INTEG Cp 123 456 easurement Results D 0 12345 L1003001 Figure 3 1 Available Fields on the MEAS DISPLAY Page 3 2 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu L13092 lt MEAS DISPLAY gt MEAS DISP SYS MENU BIN No BIN COUNT LIST SWEEP m D P FIX D P FIX CANCEL m PRINT DISP PRINT DATA KEY Lock A more 2 2 B STORE A more 1 2 CANCEL Cp D cp a Cp 6 Cp Rp more 1 6 gt more 2 6 Le D Le a Lpe 6 Lp Rp more 3 6 _ Cs D Cs Q cs Rs Ly Ls D R Ls Q Z 8 d Ls Rs Z g e rad more 4 6 more 5 6 more 6 6 _ LEVEL INCR ff INCR f DECR 4 DECR J INCR tt DECR IL BIAS Numeric Entry Numeric Entry INCR f SHORT DECR J MED LONG Numeric Entry Figure 3 2 Available Softkeys on the MEAS DISPLAY Page DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 3 Measu
23. 080 0 080 9 090 0 090 2nd 000000 000005 REJ CNT AUX 999999 OUT 999999 LIST SWEEP DISPLAY page lt LIST SWEEP DISPLAY gt SYS MENU MODE SEQ FREQ Hz Cpl 4 00000k 123 2 00000k 123 5 00000k 123 10 0000k 123 20 0000k 123 50 0000k 123 100 000k 123 200 000k 123 500 000k 123 4 00000M 123 eoo0o0o0o0o0cco0 g LI002005 2 12 Overview Figure 2 5 Display Pages 1 3 SETUP MENU U DISPLAY EAS CATALOG FORMAT SETUP SYSTEM CORRECTION Page MEAS SETUP page lt CORRECTI ON gt SYS MENU OPEN ON im SHORT ON MULTI lt MEAS SETUP gt SYS MENU LOAD ON lt o 10 CORREC cp D TION FUNC Cp D RANGE AUTO FREQ1 1 00000kHz FREQ 1 00000kHz BIAS 1 5000 V connec REF A 100 000pF B 0 00010 LIMIT LEVEL 1 00 V INTEG MED MEA A 100 001pF B 0 00011 TABLE TION FREQ2 10 0000kHz TRIG INT AVG 4 REF A 100 020pF B 0 00012 ALC i ON Vm o ON vane MEA A 100 021pF B 0 00013 Soup Hi PW ON Im ON FREQ3 100 000kHz DCI ISO ON DELAY Oms REF A 100 040pF B 0 00014 LIST MEA A 100 041pF B 0 00015 DEV A AABS REF A 123 456 pF SETUP B AABS B 0 00005 LIMIT TABLE SETUP page MEAS SETUP lt LIMIT TABLE SETUP gt SYS MENU FUNC Cp D NOM 100 000 pF MODE AUX OFF COMP ON BIN Low HIGH CORREC 010 010 TION 020 020 030 030 LIMIT 040 040 TABLE 050 0
24. 1 2 GENERAL INFORMATION OPERATION Be es INTRODUCTION SIGNAL LINE DEFINITION Signal Line Used for Comparator Function SECTION 2 This section provides information necessary to use the Option 202 Handler Interface including descriptions of the interface signal lines and their electrical characteristics The handler interface uses three types of signals comparison output control input and control output The signal lines for the Comparator Function and the List Sweep Comparator Function are defined differently for comparison output and contro output signals The following defines the the signals when the handler interface Comparator Function and the List Sweep Comparator Function are used The signal definitions used for the Comparator Function are as follows e Comparison Output Signals BIN1 BIN10 See Figure 2 1 Control Input Signal START IN Triggers the HP 4284A to start a measurement e Control Output Signals EOC An opto isolated signal output by the HP 4284A to tell the handler when the end of conversion occurs At the End Of Conversion the HP 4284A enters the correction calculation and comparison phase and the handler is free to position the next DUT for testing BUSY An opto isolated signal output by the HP 4284A telling the Handler that the HP 4284A is busy performing a measure ment comparison or caiculation OPERATION 2 1 O 5 N el N
25. Basic Operation The 4284A s basic operation is described in the following paragraphs m Display the desired display page using both the MENU keys and the softkeys Refer to Figure 2 5 m Move the cursor to the field to be used using the CURSOR arrow keys The cursor will be an inverse video marker and the field is the area to which you can set the cursor lt MEAS a a 2 SYS MENU FUNC _Cb D ATEA FREQ 1 0000 kHz AS LEVEL 1 500 V INTEG Cp 100 000 pF D 004284 vin 1 234 V Im 56 78mA CORR OPEN SHORT LOAD QJ Lioozo08 Figure 2 6 CURSOR Keys and Field Operation Example a The softkeys corresponding to the field pointed to by the cursor will be displayed Select and press a softkey The numeric entry keys and ENTER are used to enter numeric data When one of the numeric entry keys is pressed the softkeys will change to the available unit softkeys You can use these unit softkeys instead of ENTER When ENTER is used the numeric data is entered with Hz V or A as the default unit depending on the cursor field selected e g test frequency s unit will be Hz etc Overview 2 15 4284A 20 Hz 1 MHz PRECISION LCR METER lt MEAS DISPLAY gt SYS MENU softkey FUNC 9 Cp D RANGE FREQ 1 0000 MHz BIAS 1 5000 V LEVEL 1 500 Vv INTEG MED Cp 100 000 pF ra a a D 0042
26. Contents 10 SPOT lt n gt SHORt SPOT lt n gt LOAD SSPOT lt n gt LOAD STANdard USE USE DATA COMParator Subsystem STATe MODE TOLerance NOMinal TOLerance BIN lt n gt SEQuence BIN Secondary LIMit Auxiliary BIN SWAP BIN CLEar BIN COUNt STATE BIN COUNt DATA BIN COUNt CLEar Mass MEMory Subsystem LOAD STATe STORe STATe SYSTem ERRor STATus Subsystem OPERation EVENt OPERation CONDition OPERation ENABle Common Commands CLS ESE ESR SRE STB IDN OPC WAI RST TST TRG LRN OPT General Information Introduction Components not Covered by Warranty Serial Number Specifications Measurement Functions Measurement Parameters Combinations Mathematical Functions Equivalent Measurement Circuit 8 60 8 61 8 62 8 63 8 64 8 65 8 66 8 67 8 68 8 69 8 70 8 71 8 72 8 73 8 73 8 74 8 75 8 75 8 76 8 76 8 76 8 77 8 78 8 79 8 80 8 81 8 82 8 82 8 83 8 84 8 85 8 86 8 87 8 88 8 88 8 89 8 89 8 90 8 91 8 92 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 3 9 3 Ranging Trigger Delay Time Measurement terminals Test Cable Length Standard With Option 006 Integration Time Averaging Test Signal Frequency Accuracy Signal Modes Normal Constant Signal Level Output Impedance Test Signal Level Monitor Display Range Absolute Measurement Accurac
27. Enabling the Status Byte 7 22 Remote Control A service request SRQ will be generated when any enable bit in the status byte register is set to 1 So to enable disable any bits of the status byte register you can set bits in the service request enable register These bits correspond to bits in the status byte When a bit is set in the service request enable register it enables that bit in the status byte to request service To set bits in the service request enable register the SRE command is used The syntax of the SRE command is SRE lt n gt Where lt n gt decimal number 0 to 255 For example If lt n gt is equal to 34 00100010 in binary bit 1 and bit 5 are enabled as follows Bit No of MSB LSB Status Byte 76543210 Bit Pattern for SRE command 00100010 In this case when either bit 1 or bit 5 of the status byte is set to 1 a service request is generated The default setting is SRE O all bits of the status byte are disabled Bit 6 RQS is non maskable and bits 0 to 3 are always 0 zero Thus it is meaningless to mask these bits The SRE command s bit pattern for masking bit 6 is ignored and the SRE command s bit pattern for masking bits 0 to 3 are accepted but is meaningless Operation Status The operation status register group provides operation status Register Group reporting by summarizing multiple events into a summary message bit 7 of the status byte The s
28. Figure 2 1 PHI PLO SREJ Signal s Area Example For The Comparator Function va N C UNBAL KEY LOCK N C ExT evi ALARM i NDEX 7EOM Signal information used for the list sweep comparator function is different from that used for the compara tor function Figure 2 2 Pin Assignment For Handler Interface Connector 2 4 OPERATION EXT_TRIG INDEX EOM 7 ae Data Valid Previous Data Valid a measurement a measurement _ Measurement Timing play ae Time Di Splay Measivement Comparison Time Time Ie Maximum Value Trigger Pulse Width T2 Measurement Start Delay Time Display Time 200 us T3 Trigger Wait Time After EOM Output Refer to the HP 4284A Operation Manual Typical comparison time is approximately 1 ms Typical display time for each display format is as follows MEAS DISPLAY page approx 8 ms BIN No DISPLAY page apporx 5 ms BIN COUNT DISPLAY page approx 0 5 ms Figure 2 3 Timing Diagram OPERATION 2 5 fa a N _ Signal Line Used for List Sweep Comparator Function Signal definition used for the list sweep comparator function is different from that used for the comparator function Signal defi nition used for the list sweep comparator function is as follows e Comparison Output Signals BIN1 BIN9 and OUT_OF B
29. Mode DC Bias Level Resolution Voltage 0 V to 4 V 1 mV 4 002 V to 8 V 2mV 8 005 V to 20 V 5 mV 20 01 V to 40 V 10 mV Current 0 A to 40 mA 10 pA 40 02 mA to 80 mA 20 pA 80 05 mA to 100 mA 50 pA The setting value of the dc bias current is the value set when the measurement contacts UNKNOWN Terminals are shorted Refer to Figure 3 6 When a DUT is connected to the measurement contacts the setting current value is different from the actual current through the DUT To determine the bias current through a device refer to BIAS CURRENT ISOLATION FUNCTION Chapter 4 The setting value of the DC bias voltage is the value set when the measurement contacts UNKNOWN Terminals are opened Note Note DC BIAS HIGH CURRENT LOW O O Shorted Figure 3 6 DC BIAS Current The DC bias will be output after setting on the front panel to ON Dc BIAS is used to enable the dc bias output DC BIAS is a toggle type switch and the DC BIAS on off LED indicator is located above Dc BIAS When Dc BIAS is set to ON the DC BIAS on off LED indicator is ON When Dc BIAS is set to OFF the DC BIAS on off LED indicator is OFF If Dc BIAS is set to OFF even though the dc bias is set to ON according to the LCD display the set dc bias isn t output When both the dc bias and the oscillator level are set under the following conditions the amount of the dc bias plus the oscillator
30. Softkey Selection Example Available Fields on the MEAS DISPLAY Page Available Softkeys on the MEAS DISPLAY Page Effective Measuring Range for Each Measurement Range Effective Measuring Range Oscillator Level lt QV or lt 20 mA Effective Measuring Range Oscillator Level gt 2V or gt 20 mA oaa DC BIAS Current DC BIAS Monitor Circuits MEAS DISPLAY Page Example Available Fields on the BIN No DISPLAY Page Available Softkeys on the BIN No DISPLAY Page BIN No DISPLAY Page Example Available Fields on the BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page Available Softkeys on the BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page Example Available Fields on the LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page Available Softkeys on i the LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page SEQ Mode and STEP Mode a LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page Example Available Fields on the MEAS SETUP Page Available Softkeys on the MEAS SETUP Page External Trigger Pulse Feedback Circuit Available Operating Area for the ALC Function MEAS SETUP page After Clearing the Setup MEAS SETUP page Example Available Fields on the CORRECTION Page 1 3 1 4 1 7 2 2 2 4 2 6 2 8 2 12 2 15 2 16 3 2 3 3 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 15 3 16 3 21 3 24 3 24 3 26 3 29 3 29 3 31 3 33 3 34 3 34 3 36 4 2 4 3 4 5 4 7 4 8 4 15 4 16 4 19 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23
31. Source resister of the 4284A 100 Q Vin Signal voltage level applied on DUT Im Signal current level flowed in DUT Zx Impedance of DUT Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 7 Figure 6 5 Simplified Model of Signal Level and DUT Oscillator Level Setting The 4284A s oscillator level Vosc in Figure 6 5 can be set to the appropriate value in the voltage or current mode Using the ALC automatic level control function the signal level set is the same as the applied level across the DUT Vm or Im in Figure 6 5 So the signal level setting mode can be selected in the following four ways m Oscillator level set as voltage and ALC set to OFF The open terminal voltage is set to the entered voltage value in the LEVEL field m Oscillator level set as current and ALC set to OFF The short terminal current is set to the entered current value in the LEVEL field m Oscillator level set as voltage and ALC set to ON The signal level across the DUT is set to the entered voltage value in the LEVEL field m Oscillator level set as current and ALC set to ON The signal level across the DUT is set to the entered current value in the LEVEL field For more information for the ALC function refer to Chapter 4 Automatic Level Control Function Note ll By using the level monitor function Vm and Im on the MEAS 3 DISPLAY page the actual signal level across the DUT Vm and Im in Figure 6 5
32. With Option 006 0 m 1 m 2 m and 4 m selectable Integration Time Short Medium and Long See Supplemental Performance Characteristics for the measurement time Averaging 1 to 256 programmable Frequency 20 Hz to 1 MHz 8610 selectable frequencies refer to Appendix F for selectable frequencies Accuracy 0 01 Signal Modes Normal Programs selected voltage or current at the measurement terminals when they are opened or shorted respectively Constant Maintains selected voltage or current at the device under test independent of changes in the device s impedance General Information 9 3 Signal Level Mode Range Setting Accuracy Voltage Non constant 5 mVims to 2 Vims 10 1 mMVyms Constant 10 mMVems to 1 Vims 6 1 mVyms Current Non constant 50 Arms to 20 MArms 10 10 wArms Constant 100 Arms to 10 mAyms 6 10 HArms 1 Automatic Level Control Function is set to ON Output Impedance 100 Q 3 Test Signal Level Monitor Mode Range Accuracy Voltage 5 mVrms to 2 Vrms 3 of reading 0 5 mVrms 0 01 MVrms to 5 MVims 11 of reading 0 1 mMVims 50 pArms to 20 mArms 3 of reading 5 jtArms 0 001 pArms to 50 pArms 11 of reading 1 pArms Current2 1 Add the impedance measurement accuracy to the voltage level monitor accuracy when the DUT s impedance is lt 100 2 to the current level
33. a N COMMON Figure 2 8 Handler Interface Input Schematic OPERATION 2 13 a T OPERATION Setting Procedure For Comparator Function 2 14 OPERATION To use the handler interface setup the comparator function or the list sweep comparator function and set the handler interface to be enable to output input signals The followings are procedure to use the handler interface with the comparator function or the list sweep comparator function The followings are operation procedure to use the handler inter face with the comparator function 1 10 11 Setup the Handler Interface Board consists of installing jumpers and pull up resistors as required for the handler See SECTION 3 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD Turn the HP 4284A ON Setup for the appropriate measurement conditions Press the MEAS SETUP MENU key and the LIMIT TABLE softkey The LIMIT TABLE SETUP page is displayed Setup a limit table for bin sorting refer to the HP 4284A Operation Manual for details Move the cursor to the COMP field using the CURSOR arrow key Then the following softkeys will be displayed on the softkey label area e ON softkey o OFF softkey Press the ON softkey to enable the comparator function Press the CATALOG SYSTEM MENU key and the SYSTEM CONFIG softkey The SYSTEM CONFIG page is displayed Move the cursor to the HANDLER I F 202
34. a measurement a measurement Measurement Timing Settling Comparison and Time 2 i Delay Measurement Display Time Time Time STEP Sweep Mode W8 12 or ae wanorts T a Uj W8 3 or W9 10 12 START IN w3 w4 Previous Sweep s Data Valid Data Valid a sweep Settling N Comparison and Time Delay Measurement Display Time Time Time NOTE Settling Time includs Correction Data Switching Time Comparison and Dis play Time is approx 4 5 ms Refer to Figure 2 3 for information on T1 T2 T3 Figure 2 5 Timing Diagram for The List Sweep Comparator Function 2 8 OPERATION ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS As mentioned in a previous paragraph some of the signal s represent different information when used for the comparator function and for the list sweep comparator function However the electrical characteristics of these signals are completely the same between the two operations The following description applies when using both the comparator function and the list sweep comparator function O pen f N Q Opto isolated Outputs The outputs from the HP 4284A are Opto isolated for added interfacing flexibility and to increase reliability by reducing noise pickup Provisions have been made for mounting pull up resis tors connected to 5 V on board for systems using TTL logic levels otherwise the supply voltage 24 V maximum and the pull up resistors are located in
35. 1040 ms 830 ms 820 ms 820 ms 2000 1000 800 LONG 600 LOO 200 MEDIUM 100 80 RO ao SHORT DMO 20Hz 100Hz kHz 10kHz 100kHz 1MHZ Test frequency Display Time Display time for each display format is given as MEAS DISPLAY page approx 8 ms BIN No DISPLAY page approx 5 ms BIN COUNT DISPLAY page approx 0 5 ms GPIB Data Output Time Internal GPIB data processing time from EOM output to measurement data output on GPIB lines excluding display time Approx 10 ms General Information 9 23 DC Bias 1 5 V 2 V Option 001 Power Amp DC Bias Output Current 20 mA max DC Bias Voltage DC Bias voltage applied to DUT Vaut is given as Vaue Vo 100 x I V Where Vis DC bias setting voltage V I is DC bias current A DC Bias Current DC bias current applied to DUT Laue is given as Ve liut A Toop Ra I Where V is DC bias setting voltage V Rac is the DUT s DC resistance Q Maximum DC bias current when the normal measurement can be performed is as follows Measurement 10 Q 100 29 300 9 1kQ 3 ko 10 kQ 30 kQ 100 kQ Range Bias Current On 100 mA Isolation loft 2 mA 2 mA 2 mA 1 mA 300 pA 100 pA 30 pA 10 pA N Px 9 24 General Information Relative Measurement Accuracy with Bias Current Isolation When the bias current i
36. 3 parameters given in the above equations G Real Part jB Imaginary Part Figure 6 2 Vector Representation of Admittance 6 4 Measurement Procedure and Examples Parallel Series Circuit Mode Selecting Circuit Mode of Capacitance To measure L C or R there are two equivalent circuit models the parallel and series modes as shown in Table 6 1 and the 4284A can select the mode by setting the FUNC Cp Cs Lp or Ls on the MEAS SETUP page To determine which mode is best consider the relative impedance magnitude of the reactance and Rs and Rp Table 6 1 Parallel Series Circuit Mode Circuit Mode Measurement Definition of D Q and G Function Cp mode C D D ACE Cp Q G x Cp G P Cp Rp C mode C D D 2afC R C Q Cs Rs Lp mode Lp D Q 55 Lp Q G Lp G P Lp Rp nfls Ls mode Ls D Q Ls Q Ls Rs The following description gives some practical guide lines for selecting the capacitance measurement circuit mode Small Capacitance modeled by a in Figure 6 3 Small capacitance yields large reactance which implies that the effect of the parallel resistance Rp has relatively more significance than that of series resistance Rs The low value of resistance represented by Rs has negligible significance compared with the capacitive reactance so the parallel circuit mode C D or Cp G should be used Large Capacitance modeled by b in Figure
37. 5 11 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 14 5 14 5 14 5 14 5 14 5 14 5 14 5 14 5 15 5 15 5 15 5 16 5 16 5 16 5 16 Measurement Procedure and Examples Introduction Basic Measurement Procedure Impedance Parameters Parallel Series Circuit Mode Selecting Circuit Mode of Capacitance Small Capacitance modeled by a in Figure 6 3 Large Capacitance modeled by b in Figure 6 3 Selecting Circuit Mode of Inductance o Large Inductance modeled by a in Figure 6 4 Small Inductance modeled by b in Figure 6 4 Signal Level i Lo ee e Signal Level Across The DUT Oscillator Level Setting Signal Level Setting Selection Example for Inductance Measurements Four Terminal Pair Configuration Measurement Contacts Capacitance To Ground Contact Resistance Extending Test Leads Guarding For Low Capacitance Measurements Shielding Correction Functions Performing OPEN Correction Performing SHORT Correction Performing LOAD Correction Preparing the Standard Reference Values of the LOAD Standard Using the Pre Measured Device for the LOAD Parasitics Incident to DUT Connection Characteristics Example Capacitor Measurements Inductance Measurements If the 4284A does NOT Measure Correctly Remote Control Introduction General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB GPIB Connection re GPIB Capability GPIB Addressing GPIB Bus Capability ABORT I O IFC CLEAR LOCKOUT SET LOCAL DEVICE CLEAR SDC or DCL LOCAL GTL
38. 9 JIA JIA o JIA JIA 1S 1 JIA lt BiNO lt BINI lt BIN2 lt BIN3 lt BIN4 lt BN5 lt BING lt BINT lt Bins lt 7 BINS lt 7 BINIO lt COMMON BINDEX 0 BINDEX 6 BEOM 6 W6 5V 5V S i 8 RI3 l z EOC _ w3 wa EA RUS w5 5V RIi4 18 BUSY 4 w7 COM JIAI i lt w2 SYSTEM JIAI3 13 GROUND HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD CONTROL OUTPUT Figure 2 7 Simplified Control Output Schematic OPERATION 2 11 Opto Isolated Input The START IN input trigger signal can be opto isolated by install ing jumpers W9 and W10 while leaving jumper position W8 open When this input is used as an opto isolated input it is current driven and requires 5 60 mA for proper operation For TTL level trigger input signals install jumper W8 and leave jumper positions W9 and W10 open Table 2 4 Typical input Electrical Characteristics tee Sere _ aut etn Input Electrical Characteristics input Voltage emam 0 250uA 5 60 _ ae 2 0 V Input Current 5 mA a Threshold Voltage Schmitt Trigger input hysteresis 0 8 V START IN Opto isolated START IN TTL Level Do not use less than 5 mA the opto isolator LED requires a minimum of 5 mA for proper operation 2 12 OPERATION HANDLER INTERFACE CONNECTOR START IN pa fs
39. Connect the 16047A to the 4284A s UNKNOWN terminals as shown in Figure 6 23 Figure 6 23 Connecting the 16047A 4 Perform the correction To compensate the 16047A s residuals and strays an OPEN SHORT correction is required a Leave the 16047A in an OPEN condition as shown in Figure 6 21 Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 29 b Press MEAS SETUP and CORRECTION The CORRECTION page will be displayed c Move the cursor to the OPEN field ON OFF and MEAS OPEN will be displayed d Press MEAS OPEN to perform the OPEN correction data measurement Wait until the message OPEN measurement completed is displayed on the system message line e Press ON to set the OPEN correction function to ON f Connect a shorting bar to the 16047A to set up the SHORT condition as shown in Figure 6 24 Figure 6 24 Connecting A Shorting Bar g Move the cursor to the SHORT field ON OFF and MEAS SHORT will be displayed h Press MEAS SHORT to perform the SHORT correction data measurement Wait until the message SHORT measurement completed is displayed on the system message line i Press ON to set the SHORT correction function to ON 5 Connect the DUT to the test fixture Insert the DUT into the 160
40. Cp D REQ 1 00000kHz EVEL 1 00 V RIG INT LC OFF Hi PW OFF DCI ISO OFF O ms D 00000 F 00000 L10040 Figure 4 6 MEAS SETUP page After Clearing the Setup Perform the following steps to set only all of the operations on the MEAS SETUP page to the power on default settings 1 2 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field Press CLEAR SETUP The message Clearing setup Are you sure will be displayed and the following softkeys will be displayed m YES m NO Press YES to set all of the control settings on the MEAS SETUP page to the power on default settings MEAS SETUP Menu 4 15 Printer Function Perform the following steps to print out the display page using the PRINT DISP mode 1 Connect a printer to the 4284A using an GPIB cable 2 Set the printer to the Listen Only mode 3 Set the Talk Only mode to ON from the SYSTEM CONFIG page 4 Press to display the MEAS SETUP page 5 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 6 7 Press more 1 2 Press PRINT DISP The display page will be printed out to the printer as shown below lt MEAS DISPLAY gt SYS MENU FUNC Cp D RANGE AUTO FREQ 1 00000kHz BIAS 0 000 V LEVEL 1 00 V INTEG MED TRIG INT AVG 1 ALC OFF Vm ON Hi Pw ON Im ON DCI ISO ON DELAY Oms DEV A dABS REF A 10 0000pF B dABS B 500 000u Figure 4 7 MEAS SETUP p
41. EARTH GROUND L10070 Figure 7 1 GPIB Connector Signal Pin Configuration Table 7 1 GPIB Interconnect Cables Agilent Part Number Length 10833A 1 m 3 3 ft 10833B 2 m 6 6 ft 10833C 4 m 13 2 ft 10833D 0 5 m 1 6 ft 7 2 Remote Control Typical GPIB system interconnection is shown in Figure 7 2 The GPIB connector is firmly fastened using two bolts to keep it from working loose during use GPIB PIGGYBACK CONNECTORS Figure 7 2 Typical GPIB System Interconnection GPIB Capability Table 7 2 lists the 4284A s GPIB capabilities and functions These functions provide the means for an instrument to receive process and transmit commands data and status over the GPIB bus Table 7 2 GPIB Interface Capability Code Function SH1 Complete Source Handshake capability AH1 Complete Acceptor Handshake capability T5 Basic Talker serial poll unaddressed if MLA Talk Only L4 Basic Listener unaddressed if MTA no Listen Only SR1 Service Request capability RL1 Remote Local capability DC1 Device Clear capability DT1 Device Trigger capability C0 No Controller capability El Drivers are open collector Remote Control 7 3 GPIB Addressing GPIB Bus Capability 7 4 Remote Control The 4284A s GPIB address is stored in non volatile memory and can be set to any address from 0 to 30 by front panel key entry in the SYSTEM CONFIG page When the 4284A is shipp
42. FETCH 80 ENTER Meter A B C 90 PRINT A B C 100 END Figure 7 11 TRIGger IMMediate Command Sample Program 10 ASSIGN Meter TO 717 20 REMOTE Meter 30 OUTPUT Meter RST CLS 40 OUTPUT Meter TRIG SOUR BUS 50 OUTPUT Meter ABORT INIT 60 OUTPUT OMeter TRG 70 ENTER Meter A B C 80 PRINT A B C 90 END Figure 7 12 TRG or GET Command Sample Program Note Note a When the 4284A is set to the EXT TRIG mode and is triggered 3 via the EXT TRIGGER connector or an optional interface under the remote condition this trigger signal has the same effect as the TRIGger IMMediate SCPI command a MEASUREMENT state In this state DUT measurement is being performed After the DUT measurement is completed trigger state automatically changes to the IDLE state a The 4284A can only measure a DUT on one page of the MEAS 3 DISPLAY BIN No DISPLAY BIN COUNT DISPLAY and LIST SWEEP DISPLAY pages under DISPLAY FORMAT even if the 4284A is in remote A typical flowchart of data transfer using the trigger system is shown below Y WAIT FOR TRIGGER STATE TRG command TRIGger command Yy MEASUREMENT STATE IDLE STATE Y Y Data Buffer Empty FETCh command y Y Y Y DATA DATA Data Buffer DATA AVAILABLE AVAILABLE Ready AVAILABLE INITiate CONTinuous OFF automatic INITiate CONTinuous ON or INITiat
43. FREQ2 and FREQ3 fields are OFF even the OPEN SHORT and LOAD fields are ON correction will not be performed Table D 2 shows the correction data selection rules for MULTI mode and corresponding test frequencies Table D 2 Correction Data Selecting Rule for MULTI Mode Test FRQ1 2 3 OPEN SHORT LOAD Frequency setting ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Test Freq FRQ1 0N FRQ1 Not FRQ1 Not FRQ1 Not FRQ1 OPEN data performed SHORT performed LOAD data performed data FRQL OFF Not Not Not Not Not Not performed performed performed performed performed performed Test Freq FRQ2 0N FRQ2 Not FRQ2 Not FRQ2 Not FRQ2 OPEN data performed SHORT performed LOAD data performed data FRQ2 0FF Not Not Not Not Not Not performed performed performed performed performed performed Test Freq FRQ3 0N FRQ3 Not FRQ3 Not FRQ3 Not FRQ3 OPEN data performed SHORT performed LOAD data performed data FRQ3 OFF Not Not Not Not Not Not performed performed performed performed performed performed Test Freq FRQ1 0N Not Not Not Not Not Not FRQ1 2 3 FREQ2 ON performed performed performed performed performed performed FRQ3 ON FRQIL OFF Not Not Not Not Not Not FRQ2 0FF performed performed performed performed performed performed FRQ3 OFF Test Freq Test frequency OPEN data OPEN interpolation correction data SHORT data SHORT interpolation correction data FREQ1 2 3 OP
44. Function 2 23 Setting Procedure For List Sweep Comparator Function 2 24 SECTION 1 5 emt iS 5 S GENERAL INFORMATION INTRODUCTION This operation note provides the information necessary to use the HP 4284A Precision LCR Meter Option 201 Handler Interface Refer to the HP 4284A Operation Manual for specific HP 4284A operating procedures E DESCRIPTION The HP 4284A Option 201 is a Handler Interface which outputs signals to indicate measurement completed bin sorting judg a ments of the comparator function and Go No Go judgments of the list sweep comparator function The Option 201 Handler Interface also has an input for an external trigger signal and a keylock signal Using these signals the HP 4284A can easily be combined with a component handler and a system controller to fully automate component testing sorting and quality control data processing to increase production efficiency Ce SPECIFICATIONS Table 1 1 lists the HP 4284A Option 201 Handler Interface specifi cations only All other specifications are the same as those for a standard HP 4284A ot GENERAL INFORMATION 1 1 Table 1 1 Specifications Output signal Negative true open collector opto isolated Decision Output Comparator Function Bin number out of bins and rejection status List Sweep Comparator Function IN OUT at each sweep point and pass fail for the result of sequential comparisons index Analog
45. List sweep measurement not in progress 1 List sweep measurement in progress 2 4 always 0 zero 1 2 always 0 zero 0 1 Measuring Correction Data Bit 0 Correction data measurement not in progress 1 Correction data measurement in progress When you read the contents of the standard operation status condition register using the STATus OPERation CONDition query the standard operation status condition register isn t cleared To clear the standard operation status condition register the device s condition state should only be changed by setting all bits to 0 Standard Operation Status Event Register The standard operation status event register consists of 16 bit registers and each event bit in the event register corresponds to a condition bit in the standard operation status condition register Each event bit is set to 1 when its corresponding bit in the condition register makes a 1 to 0 transition only a negative transition filter is used Table 7 6 Standard Operation Status Event Register Assignments Bit No Bit Weight Description 15 5 always 0 zero 4 16 Measurement Complete Bit This bit is set to 1 when a single point measurement is completed 3 8 List Sweep Measurement Complete Bit This bit is set to 1 when a last sweep point measurement of the list sweep measurement is completed 2 4 always 0 zero 1 2 always 0 zero 0 1 Correction Data Measurement C
46. Memory Card Power Cable Fuse Line Voltage Bias Current Interface Allows the 4284A to control the 42841A Bias Current Source 2 m 4 m Cable Length Operation Add Operation Manual Japanese Delete operation manual Delete GPIB Interface Handler Interface Handler Interface Scanner Interface Front Handle Kit Rack Mount Kit Rack Flange and Handle Kit Extra Operation Manual 3 Year Extended Warranty Agilent Part Number 04284 90000 Agilent Part Number 04278 89001 Depends on the country where the 4284A is being used Refer to Page 1 6 Figure 1 3 Only for Option 201 Agilent Part Number 2110 0046 2ea 90 to 132 Vac 198 to 252 Vac Line Frequency 47 to 66 Hz Power Consumption 200 VA max Operating Environment Dimensions Weight Display Temperature 0 C to 55 C Humidity lt 95 R H at 40 C Altitude Om to 2000m 426 W by 177 H by 498 D mm Approximately 15 kg 33 lb standard LCD dot matrix display Capable of Displaying Measured values Control settings Comparator limits and decisions List sweep tables Self test message and annunciations Number of Display Digits 6 digits maximum display count 999999 This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES 001 Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB 001 du Canada Supplemental Performance Characteristics Stability The 4284A supplemental performance characteristics are listed starting from page 9 26 Supp
47. N N o va Fa KN 7 Ne 10u 100k lt gt lt pame J N 32 lt E iN S SS rd SZ g NJ SA J N NI Ra KX vA 0 03 1x 10 fm WA ss 100u 10k lt lt x lt 9 N 10042 6fmb 0E N A N aag Fi Se WA N Z YN ZN ZN No D ia Cx er g im ik z 7 PR a ran ry rd N N NC 0 03 L 4 z Z N ze E Ne 1x10 Roy 10m 100 Re gt S Y ZN A _ x i E Or i T amp SN 9 100m i0 e Bs eas Yo EN os dy Ele 1 0 ai 1 S x EL PREE x A x 9 N z lo y D XO FIT N gS 10 100m ne sse fy iY S x oe S P4 100 10m 20 50100 ik 10k 100k 1 Hz 30k 300k Test Frequency 9 16 General Information L1009013 fin test frequency kHz On boundary line apply the better value Upper value Aca is Z Y L C R X G and B calibration accuracy Lower value cal is phase calibration accuracy in radians Aca 0 1 when Hi PW mode is ON Neat 300 fin x 10 rad when Hi PW mode is ON Phase calibration accuracy in degree fecal deg is given as 180 deg TX Peal rad Ocal Correction Functions List Sweep Comparator Function DC Bias Zero Open Eliminates measurement errors due to parasitic stray impedances of the test fixture Zero Short Eliminates measurement errors due to parasitic residual impedances of the test fixture Load Improves the measurement accuracy by using a
48. Press SWAP PARAM to swap the primary parameter for the secondary parameter Press SWAP PARAM again to return the measurement function to the previous combination Description There are two methods for specifying primary parameter limits as follows Refer to Figure 4 18 Tolerance Mode The tolerance mode specifies comparison limits by the deviation from the specified nominal value The nominal value is specified at NOM field There are two methods used to specify the tolerance mode limits the ratio in percent and by parameter value Sequential Mode The sequential mode specifies comparison limits as the absolute measurement value The limits must be set in order from the smallest value to the largest value MEAS SETUP Menu 4 37 Sequential Mode Tolerance Mode Nominal Value 0 L3 L2 Li H1 H2 H3 i i i i i j j j To BIN 4 es BIN 2 i oo BIN 3 e o o Lower limit of BINn Higher limit of BINn Includes the point Excludes the point Lig 4016 Figure 4 18 Tolerance Mode and Sequential Mode Note ll The limit values for tolerance mode sorting must be placed in the 3 order of the narrower limits to the wider limits If BIN 1 has the widest limits all of the DUTs will be sorted into BIN 1 In tolerance mode sorting the lower limit doesn t have to be less than the nominal value and the upper limit doesn t have to be greater than the nominal value As you can see in the f
49. SRE query returns the current setting of the status byte register Command Syntax SRE lt value gt Where lt value gt NRI format decimal expression of enable bits of the status byte register The definition of each bit of the status byte register is as follows Bit No Description 7 Operation Status Register Summary Bit 6 RQS Request Service Bit 5 Standard Event Status Register Summary Bit 4 MAV Message Available Bit 3 0 Always 0 zero Example OUTPUT 717 SRE 32 Bit 5 enabled Query Syntax SRE Query Response Returned format is lt value gt lt NL END gt Example 10 OUTPUT 717 SRE 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 85 STB Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 86 Command Reference The STB query reads the status byte by reading the master summary status MSS bit These bits represent the contents of the status byte register Execution of the STB query command has no effect on the contents of the status byte register STB Returned format is lt value gt lt NL7 END gt Where lt value gt NRI format decimal expression of the contents of the status byte register The definition of each bit of the status byte is as follows Bit No Description 7 Operation Status Register Summary Bit 6 RQS Request Service Bit 5 Standard Event Status Register Summary Bit 4 MAV Message Available Bit 3 0 Always 0 zer
50. Set 200 mV to point 1 800 mV to point 4 A suffix multiplier and a suffix unit V voltage can be used with this command LIST BIAS VOLTage Returned format is lt NR3 gt lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 DIM A 100 20 OUTPUT 717 LIST BIAS VOLT 30 ENTER 717 A 40 PRINT A 50 END If this query is received when the List Sweep parameter is set to anything other than bias voltage error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur Command Reference 8 35 LIST Subsystem BIAS CURRent Command Syntax Example Note 4g Query Syntax Query Response Example Note i Y 8 36 Command Reference The BIAS CURRent command clears the previous List Sweep point table and sets the DC bias current level sweep points The BIAS CURRent query returns the current settings of the DC current sweep points LIST BIAS CURRent lt value gt lt value gt Max 10 sweep points Where lt value gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format OUTPUT 717 LIST BIAS CURR 100MA Set 100mA to point 1 OUTPUT 717 LIST BIAS CURR 1E 2 2E 2 3E 2 4F 2 Set 10 mA to point 1 40 mA to point 4 A suffix multiplier and a suffix unit A ampere can be used with this command LIST BIAS CURRent Returned format is lt NR3 gt lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 DIM A 100 20 OUTPUT 717 LIST BIAS CURR 30 ENTER 717 A 40 PRINT A 50 END If this query is received when the List Swe
51. a Test Frequency FREQ FREQ Correction data Data at FREQ1 a Test Frequency FREQ2 FREQ3 Correction data Data at FREQ2 a Test Frequency FREQ FREQ FREQ3 Correction data Data at FREQ1 Description When the LOAD correction is performed the reference pre measured value of the standard must be entered The reference value should be the premeasured value of the following measurement functions Cp D Lp D R X CQ LQ Z deg Cp G Lp G Z 0 rad Cp Rp Lp Rp G B C D L D Y deg Cs Q Ls Q Y rad Cs Rs Ls Rs The LOAD correction corrects the errors using the transmission coefficient derived from the relationship between the standard s reference value and the actual raw measurement value The above function is used only for calculating the transmission coefficient Front Panel Operation for Setting the Standard s Measurement Function Perform the following steps to set the measurement function for the standard 1 Move the cursor to the FUNC field The following softkeys will displayed m Cp D m Cp Q E Cp G Cp Rp more 1 6 Select and press a softkey to set the measurement function If the measurement function softkey you want isn t displayed press more 1 6 The following softkeys will be displayed E Cs D E Cs Q m Cs Rs E more 2 6 Select and press a softkey to set the measurement function If the measurement function softkey you want isn t displayed press more
52. e CH_VALID Channel Valid Control Output Signals These signals are used to control the timing between the HP 4284A and the scanner e INDEX Analog measurement complete e EOM End of measurement measurement data valid Assertion timing for INDEX and EOM is different for normal measurements and sweep measurements Normal Measurement Timing INDEX is asserted when an analog measurement is complete and the HP 4284A is ready for the next DUT to be connected to the UNKNOWN terminals EOM is asserted when the measurement data and the comparison results are valid See Figure 2 2 INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION 2 1 S 3 ce p k List Sweep Measurement Timing e In the SEQ mode INDEX is asserted when the last analog measurement of a sweep measurement is completed and EOM is asserted when the measurement results are valid after a sweep mea surement is completed e In the STEP mode INDEX is asserted when each analog measurement of a sweep measurement is completed and EOM is asserted when each step measurement including comparison time is completed Control Input Signal This signal triggers the HP 4284A on the rising edge of a pulse when the trigger mode is set to the EXT_TRIG e EXT TRIG External Trigger NOTE The back slash in the signal name means that the signal is asserted when low The scanner interface I O connector pin assignments are shown in Figure 2 1 and the contact a
53. level is limited as listed in Table 3 5 m Option 001 is installed a The high power mode Hi PW is set to ON n on the front panel is set to ON Table 3 5 DC Bias and Oscillator level Setting limits DC Bias Osc Level Limit Setting Setting Vac V Vosc Vrms Vose X V2 x 1 1 Vae x 1 002 lt 42 V Vac V Tosc Arms Tose x V2 x 110 Vac x 1 002 lt 42 V Tac A Vosc Vims Vose x V2 x 1 1 lac x 100 2 lt 42 V Tac A Tosc Arms lose x V2 7 x 1 1 Iae x 1 01 lt 0 11 A When Option 001 is installed the DC bias voltage across the DUT can be monitored at the INT DC BIAS MONITOR connector on the rear panel See Figure 3 7 There are resistors approximately 9 9 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 15 3 16 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu kQ in series between the INT DC BIAS MONITOR connector and the Hour Terminal So if you use a dc voltmeter to find the actual DC bias voltage use the following formula to calculate it 9 9k Vac 1 X Vin Viow Where Vac Actual DC bias voltage Rin Input Resistor of the DC voltage meter Vin Actual monitor value at the INT DC BIAS MONITOR connector Viow Residual voltage at the LOW Terminal Typical 2 mV Max 6 mV DCL ISO ON 20 mV DCL ISO OFF INT DC BIAS MONITOR Connector 100 ohm HIGH LI003005 Figure 3 7 DC BIAS Monitor Circuits Front Panel Operation for Setting the DC Bias There are two ways to set
54. measured D value lt 0 1 R accuracy applies when Qx measured Q value lt 0 1 When Dx gt 0 1 multiply Ae by 4 1 Dx for X accuracy When Qx gt 0 1 multiply Ae by 1 Ox for R accuracy Change 2 Add the following description to 4284A Calibration Accuracy on page 9 16 When measured value lt 10 mQ calibration accuracy Acal is given as follows 20 Hz lt fms 1 kHz 0 03 1 kHz lt fms100 kHz 0 05 100 kHz lt fm lt 1 MHz 0 05 5x fmx 10 jm test frequency kHz Acal 0 1 when Hi PW mode is ON Change 3 Add 42030A 1 Q to Recommended Model column for Standard Resister in Table 10 1 page 10 3 Change 4 Add the following steps to the impedance measurement accuracy test between step 29 and 30 page 10 17 a Set the measurement function to R X b Connect the 1 Q standard resistor to the 1m Test Leads 16048A c Perform Step d through e for all the test listed in Table 10 9 a d Press the TRIGGER key e Confirm the 4284A s reading is within the test limits in Table 10 9 a Table 10 9 a Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Limits for 1 m Cable Length Operation Setting Test Limits R Signal Level Test Frequency Measurement Range 1Q Standard 510 mV 1 kHz 100 C V 0 0026 Q 5 1 V 1 kHz 10 C V 0 0030 O C V Standard s calibration value at DC Option 4284A 001 only Change 5 Change Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Limits as
55. s comparator function Data Result 1 LOW OJIN 1 HIGH When the comparator function of the list sweep measurement isn t used the lt IN OUT gt data output result is 0 zero The data output formats for lt IN OUT gt use the 2 ASCII character fixed length format as follows SN S N 0 to 1 When the FORMat DATA REAL 64 command is executed the 4284A transfers data in the BINARY format The BINARY format is the 64 bit floating point binary format specified in IEEE Standard 754 1985 This is the same data format used by the HP Technical computers such as the HP 9000 series 200 300 computers The BINARY data output format on the MEAS DISPLAY BIN No DISPLAY or BIN COUNT DISPLAY page is shown in Figure 7 6 Remote Control 7 9 2 bytes COMP OFF Ha He of bytes to transfer 4 bytes 11007005 Floating Point Format 7 10 Remote Control lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt lt STATUS gt COMP ON lt BIN No gt 8 bytes 8 bytes 8 bytes Figure 7 6 BINARY Format 1 8 bytes This data field is initiated by a unique code the number sign A second byte 2 designates the number of the bytes for the No of the bytes transfer No of the bytes transfer designates the data byte length The last byte is zero 0 and has no meaning The response message terminator is the EOI line is asserted while
56. secondary LOAD correction data at 10 20 30 40 50 60 FREQI 2 3 OPTION BASE 1 DIM A 18 OUTPUT 717 CORR USE DATA 89 ENTER 717 A C PRINT A END COMParator Subsystem COMParator 4 12009018 COMParator Subsystem The COMParator subsystem command group sets the comparator function including its ON OFF setting limit mode and limit values Figure 8 13 shows the command tree of the COMParator subsystem command group STATe TOLera ON OFF solute TOLerance ce A Percent TOLerance SEQuence m NOMinal lt value gt BIN lt n gt lt low limit gt lt high limit gt FQuence BIN lt BINt low limit gt lt BIN1 high limit gt lt BIN2 high limit gt lt BIN3 high limit gt lt BINn high limit gt gt Secondary LIMimit lt low limit gt lt high limit gt Auxiliary BIN ON 1 OFF QO SWAP ON 4 OFF 0 Figure 8 13 COMParator Subsystem Command Tree Command Reference 8 65 COMParator Subsystem STATe Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 66 Command Reference The STATe command sets the comparator function to ON or OFF The STATe query responds the current ON OFF condition of comparator function ON OFF COMParator STATe 0 Where 1 decimal 49 When the function is ON O decimal 48 When the function is OFF OUTPUT 717 COMP ON COMParato
57. 10 Move the cursor to the TEST MENU field 11 Press the 4 and ENTER keys to select the Handler I F test 12 Press the TEST START softkey 13 Confirm that the LEDs on the handler simulator board turn ON in accordance with the 4284A s output signals displayed on the LCD The LEDs should turn ON in the sequence shown in Figure 10 18 m T Z t Z E Ow lt a w ae Z Pip miol N w Aw mid z Svog 1 M SQ Z LIAL H u isip 4 1 mo LIIL aa SOON et eA Ss Bor me eeoevsryas o 8 e o m Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z zZ TIRI J Z xO Z i d D CSCC Zain 5 Hin 2ZoOmnanaaann eee e eoeo e eee oo0 0O0c0O0 O00 0 o LED ON LED OFF Figure 10 19 Handler Interface Function Check 14 Press the TEST END softkey Caution Do not execute any SELF TEST except for the Bias Current I F I O Test or the 4284A will become inoperative The remaining SELF TEST are for serviceuse only 15 Return the jumper settings on the handler interface board to the original settings 10 32 Performance Tests Scanner Interface Function Test Option 301 only Equipment Procedure Caution y Note Y Perform this test only when troubleshooting the Option 301 scanner interface board This test verifies the scanner interface function Scanner Simulator Agilent PN 04278 65301 DC Power Supply 6414C Test Leads 1 Perform steps 1 through 5 described Procedure 2 Disconnect the flat cable from the scanner interface board The
58. 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 5 2 5 Contents 1 Contents 2 INT DC BIAS MONITOR Connector EXT TRIGGER Connector LINE Input Receptacle 6 AN LINE Fuse Holder 7 LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR Display Loe ee Display Area Definition Display Page Area System Menu Field Comment Line Area Softkey Area Measurement Data Conditions Area Input Line Area System Message Area MENU keys and Display Page DISPLAY FORMAT MENU key MEAS SETUP MENU key CATALOG SYSTEM menu key Summary of Pages rr MEAS DISPLAY under DISPLAY FORMAT BIN No DISPLAY under DISPLAY FORMAT BIN COUNT DISPLAY under DISPLAY FORMAT 3 4 5 LIST SWEEP DISPLAY under DISPLAY FORMAT MEAS SETUP under MEAS SETUP CORRECTION under MEAS SETUP LIMIT TABLE SETUP under MEAS SETUP LIST SWEEP SETUP under MEAS SETUP CATALOG under CATALOG SYSTEM SYSTEM CONFIG under CATALOG SYSTEM SELF TEST under CATALOG SYSTEM Basic Operation DISPLAY FORMAT Menu Introduction MEAS DISPLAY Page Measurement Function Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Measurement Function Measurement Range Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Measurement Range Test Frequency Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Test Frequency Oscillator Level Description 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 7 2
59. 2 13 How to Set Up the Handler Interface Board 3 rear and top cover 15 Replace the handler interface board top shield plate feet 2 22 OPERATION O 5 la a N OPERATION To use the handler interface after setting up the handier interface board setup the limit table for using the comparator function or the list sweep setup table for using the list sweep comparator function Then set the handier interface to be enable to output input the signals The following procedures are for using the handier interface with the comparator function or the list sweep comparator function Setting Procedure For Comparator Function The following operation procedures are for using the handler interface with the comparator function 1 Press the MEAS SETUP MENU key and the LIMIT TABLE gt softkey The LIMIT TABLE SETUP page is displayed 2 Setup a limit table for bin sorting refer to the HP 4284A Operation Manual for details 3 Use the CURSOR arrow keys to move the cursor to the COMP field The following softkeys will be displayed in the softkey label area j e ON e OFF 4 Press the ON softkey The comparator function is enabled 5 Press the CATALOG SYSTEM MENU key and the SYSTEM CONFIG softkey The SYSTEM CONFIG page is displayed 6 Use the CURSOR arrow keys to move the cursor to the HANDLER I F 201 field The following softkeys will be displayed in the sof
60. 2 6 The following softkeys will be displayed Lp D a Lp Q Lp G m Lp Rp mE more 3 6 Select and press a softkey to set the measurement function If the measurement function softkey you want isn t displayed press more 3 6 The following softkeys will be displayed Ls D E Ls Q Ls Rs mE more 4 6 Select and press a softkey to set the measurement function If the measurement function softkey you want isn t displayed press more 4 6 The following softkeys will be displayed m R X MEAS SETUP Menu 4 29 m Z deg 7 0 rad more 5 6 6 Select and press a softkey to set the measurement function If the measurement function softkey isn t displayed press more 5 6 The following softkeys will be displayed a G B m Y deg u Y 9 rad more 6 6 7 Select and press a softkey to set the measurement function 4 30 MEAS SETUP Menu Single Multi Correction Mode Selection Description When the Option 301 Scanner Interface is installed the 4284A can store up to 128 sets of OPEN SHORT LOAD correction measurement data and one LOAD correction reference data for each of the three test frequencies FREQ1 FREQ2 and FREQ3 and this correction mode is the MULTI correction mode The normal correction mode is the SINGLE correction mode Note ll When the MULTI correction mode is used the OPEN SHORT 3 correction using the interpolation method cannot be performed Only the O
61. 3 32 3 34 3 35 3 35 3 35 3 36 3 37 4 1 4 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 6 Contents 3 Front Panel Operation for Setting the Automatic Level Control Function High Power Mode Description Refer to Appendix G Front Panel Operation for Setting the High Power Mode Bias Current Isolation Function Description Refer to Appendix G Front Panel Operation for Setting the Bias Current Isolation Function Averaging Rate Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Averaging Rate Delay Time Description Refer to Appendix G J Front Panel Operation for Setting the Delay Time Level Monitor Function Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Level Monitor Function Deviation Measurement Function Description Front Panel Operation for the Deviation Measurement Function System Menu Load Store Function Clear Setup Function Printer Function SYSTEM RESET Function CORRECTION Page OPEN Correction Description Front Panel Operation for the Open Correction SHORT Correction Description Front Panel Operation for the Short Correction LOAD Correction Description Front Panel Operation for the OPEN SHORT LOAD Correction Measurement Function for the Standard Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Standard s Measurement Function Single Multi Correction Mode Selection Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Correction Mode to the Multi Correction Mode Ca
62. 4 24 4 25 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 Available Softkeys on the CORRECTION Page Stray Admittance OPEN SHORT Correction Using The Interpolation Method Lo ee a Residual Impedance OPEN SHORT LOAD Correction CORRECTION Page Example Available Fields on the LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page Available Softkeys on the LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page Swap Parameter Function Tolerance Mode and Sequential Mode Limit Table Using the Sequential Mode LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page Example Available Fields on the LIST SWEEP SETUP Page Available Softkeys on the LIST SWEEP SETUP Page SEQ mode and STEP mode List Sweep Settings LIST SWEEP SETUP Page Example Available Fields on the CATALOG Page Available Softkeys on the CATALOG Page CATALOG Page Example Available Fields on the SYSTEM CONFIG Page Available Softkeys on the SYSTEM CONFIG Page SYSTEM CONFIG page Example Available Fields on the SELF TEST Page Available Softkeys on the SELF TEST Page Definition of Impedance Vector Representation of Admittance Capacitance Circuit Mode Selection Inductance Circuit Mode Selection Simplified Model of Signal Level and DUT Four Terminal Pair Measurement Principle Measurement Contacts Model of Capacitance to Ground Reducing Capacita
63. 4 8 Available Fields on the CORRECTION Page MEAS SETUP Menu 4 19 lt CORRECT ION gt MEAS SETUP CORRECTION LIMIT TABLE UST SETUP OPEN ON OFF MEAS OPEN F ON MODE SINGLE OFF MULTI MEAS SHORT j SYS MENU PRINT DISP SHORT Cp D Cs D Lp D Cp Q Cs Q Lp a ON Cp G Cs Rs Lp G OFF Cp Rp Lp Rp MEAS OPEN more 1 6 more 2 6 more 3 6 _ MEAS SHORT MEAS LOAD Numeric Entry Ls D Ls Q Ls Rs gt more 4 6 more 5 6 more 6 6 _ Numeric Entry p REF B Numeric Entry p n n u u m m more 1 2 more 2 2 more 1 2 more 2 2 pens 212 more 1 2 A more 2 2 more 1 2 Figure 4 9 Available Softkeys on the CORRECTION Page 4 20 MEAS SETUP Menu OPEN Correction Description The 4284A s OPEN correction capability cancels errors due to the stray admittance G B in parallel with the device under test Refer to Figure 4 10 Figure 4 10 Stray Admittance The 4284A uses two kinds of OPEN correction data as follows m The OPEN correction data is taken at all 48 preset frequency points independent of the test frequency you set Except for those 48 frequency points the OPEN correction data for each measurement point over the specified range is calculated using the interpolation method Refer to Figure 4 11 in the next page The following is a list of the 48 preset frequency points 20 Hz 100 H
64. 6 21 If the device does not have four terminal pair measurement terminals measure the device using a direct coupling test fixture such as the 16047A C D 3 On the CORRECTION page enter the measured values obtained in step 2 as the REF A and REF B values with the function used in step 2 Parasitics Incident You should consider that some parasitics remain in measurement to DUT Connection path even after performing corrections as follows Figure 6 16 shows parasitic impedance model after corrections performed using the 16047A C D test fixture In this case to minimize the influence of parasitics on measurement the values insert DUT completely into the test fixture keep the leads of the DUT as short as possible Device Co PAN Electrode Electrode L1006020 Figure 6 17 Parasitic Impedance Model Using the 16047A C D Lo Residual inductance in DUT lead Ro Lead resistance in DUT lead Co Stray capacitance 6 22 Measurement Procedure and Examples Characteristics Example Figure 6 18 shows typical characteristics of various components As can be seen in the figure a component may have different effective parameter values dependent upon its operating conditions The measured values most useful in actual applications are obtained from precise measurement under the actual operating conditions Characteristics Example Measurement Functions Cs Rs Cs
65. 6 22 EAS DISPLAY gt Co Cp D RANGE 1 00000MHZ BIAS EL 1 50 V INTEG Cp 484 101 pF D 017368 vm 1 431 V Im 2 4 280mA CORR OPEN SHORT Liogeozz Figure 6 22 Measurement Results of A 470 pF Capacitor Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 27 Inductance This paragraph describes a practical example of measuring a 64 uH Measurements magnetic core inductor The basic procedure flow to perform this measurement is the same as for the BASIC MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE described previously A 64 uH magnetic core inductor will be measured under the following conditions Sample DUT 64 uH magnetic core inductor Agilent Part Number 9140 1401 Measurement Conditions Function L R Frequency 100 kHz Test Signal Level 10 mA constant 1 Turn the 4284A ON 2 Setup the 4284A measurement conditions by filling the fields on the MEAS DISPLAY page Set FUNC to Ls Rs FREQ to 100 kHz and LEVEL to 10 mA constant The other functions will be left as the default settings a Move the cursor to the FUNC field The Current measurement function Cp D is displayed in this field and Cp D Cp Q Cp G Cp Rp and more 1 6 are displayed b Press more 1 6 Cs D Cs Q Cs Rs and more 2 6 will be displayed c Press more 2 6 Lp D Lp Q Lp G Lp Rp and more 3 6 will be displayed d Press more 3 6 Ls D Ls Q Ls Rs and more 4 6 will be displayed
66. 7 2 7 2 7 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 11 2 11 2 11 2 11 2 11 2 15 3 1 3 1 3 4 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 6 3 9 3 10 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 12 Front Panel Operation for Setting the Oscillator Level Lo ee ee DC Bias Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the DC Bias Integration Time rr Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Integration Time So ee System Menu Load Store Function Fixed Decimal Point Function Printer Function Keylock Function BIN No DISPLAY Page Comparator Function ON OFF Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Comparator Function to ON or OFF re System Menu Load Store Function Printer Function Keylock Function BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page System Menu Counter Function Load Store Function Printer Function Keylock Function LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page Sweep Mode Front Panel Operation for Setting the Sweep Mode of the List Sweep Measurement a System Menu Load Store Function Printer Function Keylock Function MEAS SETUP Menu Introduction MEAS SETUP page Comment Description Front Panel Operation for Entering a Comment Number Trigger Mode Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Trigger Mode Loe Automatic Level Control Function Description 3 13 3 14 3 14 3 16 3 17 3 17 3 17 3 18 3 18 3 20 3 20 3 23 3 23 3 25 3 25 3 25 3 25 3 25 3 26 3 27 3 28 3 30 3 30 3 30 3 31 3 32
67. Accuracy applies when Q x De lt 1 0 Accuracy 0 accuracy is given as 1850 Ae x d 7X j99 C G Accuracy When D measured D value lt 0 1 G accuracy is given as Bz X De S 1 B 2 zr TIC 2r f Le Where 8B is the measured B value S C is the measured C value F L is the measured L value H D is the relative D accuracy f is the test frequency Hz G accuracy described in this paragraph applies to the C G and Lp G combinations only Rp Accuracy When D measured D value lt 0 1 Rp accuracy is given as General Information 9 9 9 10 General Information Ror X De a e D F De Where amp is the measured R value Q D is the measured D value D is the relative D accuracy Rs Accuracy When D measured D value lt 0 1 Rs accuracy is given as Xr X De Q 1 Xz 2r f Lr mf 2a fC Where Xsis the measured X value Q C is the measured C value F L is the measured L value H D is the relative D accuracy f is the test frequency Hz Example of C D Accuracy Calculation Measurement Conditions Frequency 1 kHz C measured 100 nF Test Signal Voltage 1 Vims Integration Time MEDIUM Cable Length 0m Then A 0 05 Zal Qe x 1x 108 x 100 x 10 9 1590 Q 1x 107 2 K x 10 14 00 1590 1000 7 5x 1077 70 K 1590 x 1 x 107 1 1000 1 70 x 107 K 0 Therefore Caccuracy 0 05 7 5 x 1077 1
68. America Agilent Technologies Latin American Region Headquarters 5200 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 950 Miami Florida 33126 U S A tel 305 267 4245 fax 305 267 4286 Australia New Zealand Agilent Technologies Australia Pty Ltd 347 Burwood Highway Forest Hill Victoria 3131 tel 1 800 629 485 Australia
69. BIAS OFF 0 15 en a A Loo Li 20 100 1K Frequency Hz 11001002 Figure G 1 Required Delay Time After Changing the Measurement Range 1 i A delay time is not required when the test signal voltage is U100 3 mVrms 2 After changing the measurement range under the following conditions use the appropriate delay times as shown in Figure G 2 Note Transient States Caused by Measurement Condition Changes G 3 Test Frequency lt 1 kHz DC Bias O Bias Current Osolation O Test Signal Voltage 52 20 mv 0 7 100 mV o P Z 05t L E 0 4 gt 1V gt o A o2 DC BIAS 40 V DC I ISO OFF 20 100 1K Frequency Hz L1001003 Figure G 2 Required Delay Time After Changing the Measurement Range 2 3 After changing the measurement range under the following conditions use the appropriate delay times as shown in Figure G 3 G 4 Transient States Caused by Measurement Condition Changes Test Frequency lt 1 kHz DC Bias ON Bias Current Isolation ON Delay Time sec 5L Test Signal Voltage 20 m 100 mV Loo ANM ee 2 DC BIAS 40 V DC I ISO ON L I a D D 20 100 1k Frequency Hz L100 004 Figure G 3 Required Delay Times After Changing the Measurement Range 3 Note i Y When the test signal voltage is gt 1 Vrms the wait time is the same as used for 1 Vrms
70. Bit 1 Always 0 zero 0 Correction Data Measurement Complete Bit OUTPUT 717 STAT OPER ENAB 16 Bit 4 enable STATus OPERation ENABle Returned Format is lt value gt lt NL7 END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT OPER ENAB 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 81 Common Commands The GPIB Common commands are defined as IEEE 488 2 1987 and are noninstrument specific GPIB commands A common command consists of an asterisk and a header The 4284A acceptable GPIB common commands are as follows GPIB Common Commands e CLS e SRE e 0PC e TST e ESE e STB e WAI e TRG e ESR e IDN e RST e LRN e 0PT CLS Command Syntax Example 8 82 Command Reference The CLS command clear status command clears the status byte register the event register of the standard operation status register structure and the standard event status register It also clears the error queue refer to the description of the SYSTem ERRor query CLS OUTPUT 717 CLS ESE The ESE command standard Event Status Enable command sets the enable bits of the standard event status register The ESE query returns the current setting of the enable bits of the event status register Command Syntax ESE lt value gt Where lt value gt NR1 format decimal expression of enable bits of the operation status register The definition of each bit in the event status registe
71. D Cp D Cp D MINIMUM C V 0 0318 pF 0 0031 C V 0 0246 pF 0 0028 C V 0 0275 pF 0 0035 C V 0 0249 pF 0 0038 OSC Level 20 mV PASS FAIL CS Caal Value at 1 kHz ACTUAL MAXIMUM C V 0 0318 pF 0 0031 C V 0 0246 pF 0 0028 C V 0 0275 pF 0 0035 C V 0 0249 pF 0 0038 Performance Tests 10 41 OSC Level 5 1 V Option 001 only FAIL PASS 100 pF Standard C V 10 42 Performance Tests OSC Level SIGNAL FREQUENCY 125 Hz Cp D 1 kHz Cp D 12 5 kHz Cp D 48 kHz Cp D 96 kHz Cp D 1 MHz Cp D Cal Value at 1 kHz 510 mV MINIMUM C V 1 7595 pF 0 01739 C V 0 312 pF 0 00293 C V 0 137 pF 0 00130 C V 0 162 pF 0 0190 C V 0 122 pF 0 00116 C V 0 102 pF 0 00082 OSC Level 20 mV PASS OSC Level 5 1 V Option 001 only FAIL PASS FAIL ACTUAL MAXIMUM C V 1 759 pF 0 01739 C V 40 312 pF 0 00293 C V 0 137 pF 0 00130 C V 0 162 pF 0 0190 C V 0 122 pF 0 00116 C V 0 102 pF 0 00082 1000 pF Standard C V OSC Level 510 mV SIGNAL FREQUENCY 20 Hz 125 Hz 1 kHz 12 5 kHz 48 kHz 96 kHz 1 MHz Cp D Cp D Cp D Cp D Cp D Cp D Cp D MINIMUM C V 32 09 pF 0 00319 C V 3 05 pF 0 00286 C V 1 00 pF 0 00081 C V 1 13 pF
72. DEV lt n gt MODE Returned format is ABS PERC lt NL7END gt OFF 10 OUTPUT 717 FUNC DEV1 MODE 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 29 FUNCtion Subsystem DEV lt n gt REFerence Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example The DEV lt n gt REFerence command sets the reference value for deviation measurement The DEV lt n gt REFerence query returns the current reference values FUNCtion DEV lt n gt REFerence lt value gt Where lt value gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format lt n gt is 1 decimal 49 Reference value setting for primary parameter 2 decimal 50 Reference value setting for secondary parameter OUTPUT 717 FUNC DEV1 REF 10 OUTPUT 717 FUNC DEV2 REF 2E 3 FUNCtion DEV lt n gt REFerence Returned format is lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 FUNC DEV1 REF 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END DEV lt n gt REFerence FILL Command Syntax Example 8 30 Command Reference The DEV lt n gt REFerence FILL command executes a single measurement and enters two measured values the primary and secondary parameters into each of the reference values for the deviation measurement FUNCtion DEV lt n gt REFerence FILL Where lt n gt is 1 or 2 Both reference values are measured simultaneously OUTPUT 717 FUNC DEV1 REF FILL LIST Subsystem LIST Subsystem The LIST subsystem command gro
73. Figure 3 6 Palomar M16 Timing Used with The Comparator Function SEETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 3 9 N f xe Palomar M16 Configuration Procedure 1 Perform steps 1 through 6 of the General Configuration Procedure on page 3 3 2 Configure the following interface signals by installing the jumpers as shown in Figure 3 7 START IN Install jumper at W8 and W13 BUSY Instali jumper at W6 EOC Install jumper at W5 Figure 3 7 Palomar M16 Jumper and Pull Up Resistor Locations 3 All I O signals are TTL level so you must install all pull up resistors to 5 V install pull up resistors R101 R113 Refer to Figure 3 7 for the pull up resistor locations 4 Bring 5 V out through pins 12 and 17 of the handler inter face rear panel connector install a jumper at W1 for 5 V and at W2 for the COMMON connection Refer to Figure 3 3 7 for the locations of W1 and W2 5 Install the configured handler interface board into the HP 4284A 6 Replace the top shield plate rear feet and top cover 3 10 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD Palomar Modei M11 The Palomar M11 timing diagram is shown in Figure 3 8 for reference O 5 N O Palomar model M11 START IN a BUSY Figure 3 8 Palomar M11 I O Timing Used with The Comparator Function SEETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 3 11 Palomar M11 Configuration Procedure D 1 Perform steps 1 th
74. OFF COMP m System Menu SYS MENU There are three fields on this page lt BIN No DISPLAY gt COMP and SYS MENU fields Each control is described in the following paragraphs This page also provides the following information in the monitor areas each monitor area looks like a field but is not These conditions can be set from the MEAS SETUP page and most conditions can be set from the MEAS DISPLAY page Measurement Function FUNC Measurement Range RANGE Test Frequency FREQ Oscillator Level LEVEL DC Bias BIAS Integration Time INTEG OPEN SHORT LOAD on off setting conditions CORR The available fields and the softkeys which correspond to each field on this page are shown in Figure 3 9 and Figure 3 10 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 23 BIN No DISPLAY gt BIN Sorting gt Results Measurement Cp 123 456 pF D 2 0 12345 Results Field onitor L1003006 Figure 3 9 Available Fields on the BIN No DISPLAY Page lt BIN No DISPLAY gt MEAS DISP SYS MENU CANCEL PRINT DISP BIN No PRINT DATA BIN COUNT KEY LOCK LIST SWEEP more 2 2 STORE CANCEL more 1 2 t L1003007 Figure 3 10 Available Softkeys on the BIN No DISPLAY Page 3 24 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu Comparator Function ON OFF System Menu Description
75. OUTPUT 717 CORR LOAD STAT 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END COrrection Subsystem LOAD TYPE The LOAD TYPE command sets the function of the reference values for the load correction The LOAD TYPE query responds the current function of the reference values Command Syntax CORRection LOAD TYPE lt function gt Where lt function gt is CPD Sets function to C D LPRP Sets function to Ly Rp CPQ Sets function to C Q LSD Sets function to L D CPG Sets function to C G LSQ Sets function to L Q CPRP Sets function to Cp Rp LSRS Sets function to Ls Rs CSD Sets function to C D RX Sets function to R X CSQ Sets function to Cs Q ZTD Sets function to Z 0 deg CSRS Sets function to Cs Rs ZTR Sets function to Z rad LPQ Sets function to Lp Q GB Sets function to G B LPD Sets function to Lp D YTD Sets function to Y deg LPG Sets function to Lp G YTR Sets function to Y 0 rad Example OUTPUT 717 CORR LOAD TYPE CPD Query Syntax CORRection LOAD TYPE Query Response Returned format is lt function gt lt NL END gt lt function gt returns the current function of the reference value using the abbreviations listed above Example 10 OUTPUT 717 CORR LOAD TYPE 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 57 COrrection Subsystem SPOT lt n gt STATe Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 58 Command Reference The SPOT lt n gt STATe command sets
76. Oscillator level Setting limits Maximum DC Bias Current Lo Parallel Series Circuit Mode Correction Functions GPIB Interconnect Cables GPIB Interface Capability Data Format and Data Transfer Time Status Byte Assignments Standard Operation Status Condition Register Assignments i Standard Operation Status Event Register Assignments Standard Event Status Register Assignments Multiplier Mnemonics Loe Suffix Units and Available Commands Impedance Proportional Factors Ka and Ky Cable Length Factor Kaa Cable Length Factor Ky Calibration Interpolation Factor Ke Preset Calibration Frequencies Cable Length Factor Ka Coefficient Related to Test Frequency and Measurement Range Rack Mount Kits Recommended Test Equipment Test Frequency Test limits Test Signal Level Level Monitor Test Limits Hi PW OFF Test Signal Level Level Monitor Test Limits Hi PW ON ooa DC Bias Level Test Limits Hi PW OFF DC Bias Level Test Limits Hi PW ON Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Limits 1 of 2 1 2 1 4 1 4 1 6 3 5 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 4 10 6 5 6 16 7 2 7 3 7 19 7 21 7 25 7 29 8 7 8 7 9 14 9 14 9 15 9 15 9 15 9 15 9 25 9 27 10 3 10 5 10 8 10 8 10 10 10 11 10 14 Contents 21 Contents 22 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 A 1 A 2 D 1 D 2 G 1 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Limits 2 of Impedance Measurement Accuracy Te
77. Pull up Voltage COM2 i a toh me Soa Ns SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE Jumpers on the Handler Interface board must be set to select the BOARD signal outputs Open collector internal voltage outputs or Exter nal voltage outputs A description of each of the five jumpers J2 J6 is given in Table 2 5 and their locations are shown in Figure 2 9 2 14 OPERATION Loz uodo Table 2 5 Internal Jumper Settings Upper N DC Isolated outputs are isolated a J2 Lower DC isolated outputs are not isolated BIN1 BIN9 COM1 is connected to the 4284A circuit common AUX_BIN OUT_OF_BINS J3 Right N The open collector outputs are pulled up to PHI UNBAL the EXT DCV1 5V 24V Center The open collector outputs are pulled up to the internal 12V Left The open collector outputs are pulled up to the internal 5V J4 Right N The open collector outputs are pulled up to the EXT DCV2 5V 15v INDEX EOM ALARM EXT_TRIG KEY_LOCK Center The open collector outputs are pulled up to s the internal 12V Left The open collector outputs are pulled up to the internal 5V Upper N DC Isolated outputs are isolated Lower DC Isolated outputs are not isolated COM2 is connected to 4284A circuit common J6 Right N Trigger current limiting resister is 1kQ This position should be set when EXT DCV2 is Left J5 EXT_
78. Query Error Request Control Operation Complete Standard Event ice NO Status Register ESR 5 Logical OR Standard Event 7 Status Enable Register y S Summary Message Event Summary Bit ESB Bit 5 of Status Byte Register L1007016 Figure 7 19 Standard Event Status Register 7 28 Remote Control Table 7 7 Standard Event Status Register Assignments Bit No Bit Weight Description 7 128 Power On PON Bit This bit is set to 1 when the 4284A s power supply has been turned OFF and then ON since the last time this register was read 6 64 User Request URQ Bit always 0 zero 5 32 Command Error CME Bit This bit is set to 1 if the following the command errors occur An IEEE 488 2 syntax error occurred The device received a Group Execute Trigger GET inside a program message 4 16 Execution Error EXE Bit This bit is set to 1 when a parameter following a header of a GPIB command was evaluated by the 4284A as being outside of its legal input range or is otherwise inconsistent with the 4284A s capabilities 3 8 Device Specific Error DDE Bit This bit is set to 1 when a device dependent error except for the command error query error and execution error has occurred 2 4 Query Error QYE Bit Th
79. REMOTE Meter OUTPUT Meter RST CLS OUTPUT Meter FORM ASCII OUTPUT Meter MEM DIM DBUF 128 OUTPUT Meter TRIG SOUR BUS OUTPUT Meter COMP ON OUTPUT Meter MEM FILL DBUF FOR I 0 TO 127 OUTPUT Meter TRIGGER NEXT I OUTPUT Meter MEM READ DBUF ENTER Meter D PRINT D OUTPUT Meter MEM CLE DBUF END 1 Setup Measurement Condition Enable the buffer memory Perform measurement 128 times Transfer the measurement result Display the measurement result Disable the buffer memory Figure 7 25 Sample Program Buffer Memory Using ASCII Format 210 DIM D 6 3 ASSIGN Meter TO 717 REMOTE Meter OUTPUT Meter RST CLS OUTPUT Meter FORM ASCII OUTPUT Meter TRIG SOUR BUS OUTPUT Meter LIST MODE SEQ OUTPUT Meter LIST OUTPUT Meter LIST BAND1 OUTPUT Meter LIST BAND2 OUTPUT Meter LIST BAND3 OUTPUT Meter LIST BAND4 OUTPUT Meter LIST BAND5 OUTPUT Meter LIST BAND6 OUTPUT Meter LIST BAND7 OUTPUT Meter DISP PAGE LIST OUTPUT Meter INIT CONT ON TRIGGER Meter ENTER Meter D PRINT D END FREQ 1KHZ 2KHZ 5KHZ 10KHZ 20KHZ SOKHZ 100KHZ A 100 200 A 100 200 A 100 200 4 100 200 4 100 200 4 100 200 Setup Measurement Condition A 100 200 Perform measurement Transfer measurement data Display measurement data Figure 7 26 Sample Program List Sweep Using ASCII Format Remote Contr
80. SET LOCAL 7 4 Softkey Area 2 7 Softkey Label 2 7 SOFTKEYs 2 2 Specifications 9 2 SPOLL 7 5 SRE Command 8 85 Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments scP1 7 6 8 2 Standard Event Status Enable Command 8 83 Standard Event Status Register 7 27 Standard Event Status Register Summary Bit 7 21 Standard Operation Status Condition Register 7 24 Standard Operation Status Event Enable Register 7 26 Standard Operation Status Event Register 7 25 Status Byte 7 20 Status Indicator 2 3 STATus Subsystem 8 78 STB Query 8 86 Store Function BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page 3 30 BIN No DISPLAY Page 3 25 CATALOG Page 5 3 LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page 4 46 LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page 3 35 LIST SWEEP SETUP Page 4 54 MEAS DISPLAY Page 3 18 MEAS SETUP Page 4 14 Store Function Test 10 20 String Data 8 5 Suffix Multiplier 8 6 Units 8 6 Summary of Pages 2 10 Supplying DC Power to the Simulator 10 36 Sweeping Bit 7 24 8 80 SYS MENU Field 2 6 See also System Menu SYSTEM CONFIG Page 2 11 5 5 SYSTem ERRor Query 8 77 System Memory C 1 System Menu 3 18 BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page 3 30 BIN No DISPLAY Page 3 25 CATALOG Page 5 3 CORRECTION Page 4 32 LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page 4 45 LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page 3 35 LIST SWEEP SETUP Page 4 54 MEAS DISPLAY Page 3 18 MEAS SETUP Page 4 14 SYSTEM CONFIG Page 5 10 System Menu Field See SYS MENU Field System Message Area 2 7 System Messages B 11 I
81. Table 9 4 Calibration Interpolation Factor Kc Test Frequency Ke Direct Calibration Frequencies 0 Other Frequencies 0 0003 Direct Calibration Frequencies are the following 48 frequencies Table 9 5 Preset Calibration Frequencies 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 Hz 100 120 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 800 Hz 1 1 2 15 225 3 4 5 6 8 kHz 10 12 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 kHz 100 120 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 800 kHz 1 MHz Table 9 6 Cable Length Factor Kg Test Signal Cable Length level 1m 2m 4m lt 2 Vims 2 5x104 1 450x fn 5x 104 1450 fm 1x 108 1 50x fm gt 2 Vims 2 5x10 3 1416 x fn 5x 10 3 1416 x fm 1x 10 2 1416 x fm fm Test Frequency MHz Temperature C Ke L1009005 Figure 9 6 Temperature Factor Ke General Information 9 15 4284A Calibration Calibration accuracy is shown in the following figure Accuracy K 5 X y N Sa a y z x S A o Oa O a co Oe WTO SF RS 10n 100M OX ra AT Zx 7X R Pa wr F Z Pas SN AN ZN 7 Ys V4 TA J i Pi N F x 400n 10M S x lt a SN x DA ZN p f Acal 0 03 1 x10 fm _ 7 A X L X S lt x x TON P 6e AN ZN X YO Acal ttoot 20fm x 10 P oS DN Se o Y Oo aa a VN XN J p J j s P N S77 A s2 J x XI X 3 N
82. The CURRent command clears the previous list sweep point table and sets the oscillator current level sweep points The CURRent query returns the current settings of current sweep points LIST CURRent lt value gt lt value gt Max 10 sweep points Where lt value gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format OUTPUT 717 LIST CURR 100MA Set 100mA to point 1 OUTPUT 717 LIST CURR 1E 2 2E 2 3E 2 4E 2 Set 10 mA to point 1 40 mA to point 4 A suffix multiplier and a suffix unit A ampere can be used with this command LIST CURRent Returned format is lt NR3 gt lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 DIM A 100 20 OUTPUT 717 LIST CURR 30 ENTER 717 A 40 PRINT A 50 END If this query is received when the List Sweep parameter is set to anything other than current error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur LIST Subsystem BIAS VOLTage Command Syntax Example Note i Query Syntax Query Response Example Note i Y The BIAS VOLTage command clears the previous List Sweep point table and sets the DC bias voltage level sweep points The BIAS VOLTage query returns the current settings of the DC voltage sweep points Refer to Appendix G LIST BIAS VOLTage lt value gt lt value gt Max 10 sweep points Where lt value gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format OUTPUT 717 LIST BIAS VOLT 1 5V Set 1 5V to point 1 OUTPUT 717 LIST BIAS VOLT 2E 1 4E 1 6E 1 8E 1
83. The 4284A s built in comparator can sort devices into a maximum of ten bins BIN 1 to BIN 9 and the OUT OF BINS bin using a maximum of nine pairs of primary limits and one pair of secondary parameter limits Also a device whose primary parameter is within limits but whose secondary parameter measurement result is not within limits can be sorted into an AUXiliary BIN The comparator function is especially useful when using the 4284A with a component handler handler interface option is installed These limit settings for bin sorting are only set on the LIMIT TABLE page under MEAS SETUP refer to the Chapter 4 So this COMP field allows you to only set the comparator function to ON or OFF Front Panel Operation for Setting the Comparator Function to ON or OFF Perform the following steps to set the comparator function to ON or OFF 1 Move the cursor to the COMP field The following softkeys will be displayed a ON m OFF 2 Use the softkeys to set the comparator function to ON or OFF The system menu on this page allows you to use the following functions a Load Store a Printer m Keylock These functions are the same as the functions on the system menu on the MEAS DISPLAY page Refer to page 3 19 System Menu So only the procedure for each function is given in the following paragraphs Load Store Function Perform the following steps to store the control settings to the internal non volatile memory or the extern
84. There are two print modes the PRINT DISPLAY mode and the PRINT DATA mode a PRINT DISPLAY mode The print display mode is used to print out all of information on the displayed page by sending ASCII character strings to a printer An example is shown Figure 3 8 lt MEAS DISPLAY gt SYS MENU FUNC Cp D FREQ 1 0000 RANGE AUTO OMHz BIAS 1 000 V LEVEL 1 00 V INTEG MED Cp Vm 1 00 CORR OPEN 99 9929pF 000071 9 V Im 633 9uA SHORT LOAD CH O Figure 3 8 MEAS DISPLAY Page Example Note A The following characters are not recognized by the printer so the character in on the same line will be printed instead C space as wr Pad l y a PRINT DATA mode The print data mode is used to print out the measurement results using the following format This format is the same as the ASCII format used for data transfer via GPIB For details refer to Chapter 7 lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt lt STATUS gt lt BIN No gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt lt STATUS gt lt BIN No gt The measurement results of the main parameter IZI IY C L R G 12 ASCII characters SN NNNNNESNN The measurement results of the sub parameter 8 D Q G Rs X B 12 ASCII characters SN NNNNNESNN 0 Normal Measurement 1 Analog Bridge is unbalanced 2 A D converter not working 3 Signal source is overloaded 4 ALC una
85. Time Time Measurement Comparison Time Time a Trigger Pulse Width 5 us or 50 us Measurement Delay Time 200 us Display Time 200 us Trigger Wait Time Os after EOC is output Refer to the HP 4284A Operation Manual Typical comparation time is approximately 1 ms Typical display time for each display format is as follows MEAS DISPLAY page approx 8 ms BIN No DISPLAY page apporx 5 ms BIN COUNT DISPLAY page approx 0 5 ms Trigger pulse width is selected by installing or leaving open jumper W11 on the Handler Interface Board Figure 2 3 Timing Diagram For The Comparator Function 2 4 OPERATION Signal Line Used for List Sweep Comparator Function The signal definitions for the list sweep comparator function are different from the definitions for the comparator function The List Sweep Comparator function signal definitions are as follows e Comparison Output Signals BIN1 BIN1O indicate IN OUT judgments at each sweep point refer to Figure 2 4 BINO indicates pass fail judgment one or more fail judgments of Step 1 to Step 10 occurred during a singie sweep O Bo 3 5 N These signals are output when a sweep measurement is completed o Control Output Signals EOC analog measurement completed signal and BUSY end of measurement signal The timing when EOC and BUSY are asserted is as follows different from the timing used for the comparator function e In
86. V 40 81 nF 20 mV 1 kHz C V 0 0188 nF C V 0 182 nF C V 1 87 nF 5 1 V 1 kHz C V 0 0132 nF C V 40 131 nF C V 1 31 nF C V Standard s calibration value at 1 kHz C V t C V multiplied by 1 0005 C V C V multiplied by 1 0002 Option 001 only 15 Set the measurement function to R X 16 Perform Steps 17 through 19 for all the standards and settings listed in Table 10 8 17 Connect the Standard to the 4284A s UNKNOWN terminals 18 Press the TRIGGER key 19 Confirm that the 4284A s readings are within the test limits listed in Table 10 8 Performance Tests 10 15 10 16 Performance Tests Table 10 8 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Limits Setting Test Limits R Signal Test 100 Q Standard 1 kQ Standard Level Frequency 510 mV 20 Hz C V 0 285 Q C V 2 81 Q 125 Hz C V 40 112 Q C V 1 11 Q 1 kHz C V 0 082 Q C V 0 81 Q 12 5 kHz C V 40 132 Q C V 1 31 Q 48 kHz C V 0 132 Q C V 1 31 Q 96 kHz C V 40 132 Q C V 1 31 Q 1 MHz C V 0 154 Q C V 1 02 Q 20 mV 20 Hz C V 0 691 Q C V 6 60 Q 1 kHz C V 0 191 Q C V 1 82 Q 1 MHz C V 0 264 Q C V 2 06 Q 5 1 Vv 20 Hz C V 0 284 Q C V 2 819 1 kHz C V 0 131 Q C V 1 31 Q 1 MHz C V 0 204 Q C V 1 52 Q 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 C V Standard s calibration value at DC 1 kQ standard should be measured on the 300 N ra
87. W13 Install jumper at W6 Install jumper at W4 START IN BUSY EOC Figure 3 11 RTR2 Jumper and Pull Up Resistor Locations 3 Bring 5 V out through pins 12 and 17 of the handler inter face rear panel connector install a jumper at W1 for 5 V and at W2 for the COMMON connection Refer to Figure 3 11 for the locations of W1 and W2 into the 4 Install the configured handler interface board HP 4284A 5 Replace the top shield plate rear feet and top cover 3 14 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD isumeca 83 l The isumeca 83 timing diagram is shown in Figure 3 12 for J reference O Bo 5 N l START IN a ay of A Figure 3 12 Isumeca 83 I O Timing Used with The Comparator Function SEETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 3 15 Isumeca 83 Configuration Procedure 1 Perform steps 1 through 6 of the General Configuration Procedure on page 3 3 2 Configure the following interface signals by installing the jumpers as shown in Figure 3 13 START IN Install jumper at W9 W10 W11 and W13 BUSY Install jumper at W6 EOC install jumper at W4 SRR Figure 3 13 Isumeca 83 Jumper and Pull Up Resistor Locations 3 Install the configured handler interface board into the HP 4284A 4 Replace the top shield plate rear feet and top cover 3 16 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 7 EA Model M015 The M015 timing diagram is shown in F
88. a reference value for REF A and REF B values Enter the reference value for the primary parameter using MEA SURE or the numeric entry keys Move the cursor to the REF B field to enter the reference value for the secondary parameter The following softkey will be displayed m MEA SURE When the device is to be used as the reference value is connected MEA SURE is pressed the 4284A measures the device and the measurement results are entered as a reference value for REF A and REF B values Enter the reference value for the secondary parameter using MEA SURE or the numeric entry keys If the reference values for A and B are entered using MEA SURE in step 2 skip this step Move the cursor to the DEV A field The following softkeys will be displayed MEAS SETUP Menu 4 13 System Menu 4 14 MEAS SETUP Menu mA ABS aA i m OFF 6 Select and press a softkey to select the deviation mode for the primary parameter 7 Move the cursor to the DEV B field The following softkeys will be displayed m A ABS mA m OFF 8 Select and press a softkey to select the deviation mode for the secondary parameter The system menu on this page allows you to perform the following control functions a Load Store m Clear Setup a Printer m System Reset These functions except for the clear setup function and system reset function are the same as the functions on the system menu on the MEAS DISPLAY page The desc
89. all times Avoid touching electronic components or circuit paths Before performing step 8 note the jumper settings in order to return them to the same settings at the end of this function test 8 Set the jumpers on the handler interface board to the same settings as when the board is shipped from the factory Configure the interface board according the color of the extractors see step 1 for ORANGE and BLACK extractors and step 2 for ORANGE and RED extractors 1 ORANGE and BLACK See Figure 10 13 OPEN remove W1 W2 W3 W5 W6 W8 W9 W10 and R101 thru R121 SHORT W4 W7 and W11 Figure 10 13 Jumper Settings Performance Tests 10 27 2 ORANGE and RED See Figure 10 14 SET All Jumper Switches to position N OPEN remove R101 thru R121 Figure 10 14 Jumper Settings 9 Replace the handler interface board top shield plate rear feet and the top cover 10 Turn the 4284A ON 11 Connect the handler interface connector on the 4284A s rear panel to the handler simulator as shown in Figure 10 14 12 Press the CATALOG SYSTEM MENU key 13 Press the SELF TEST softkey to display the SELF TEST page 4284A HANDLER SIMULATOR Figure 10 15 Handler Interface Function Test Set UP 10 28 Performance Tests 14 Use the CURSOR arrow keys to move the cursor to the TEST MENU field 1 Or Press the 4 and the ENTER keys to select the Handler I F t
90. and fuseholder Fuse Selection on the instrument s rear panel 115V Operation 230V Operation 250 3 250 asw asv 230V E 220 T 2A T 2A Lra Lia Figure 1 2 Line Voltage Selector that the correct fuse has been installed and the Line Voltage Selection Switch is correctly set Caution Before connecting the instrument to the power source make sure Line Voltage Selection Select the proper voltage selector according to the Table 1 2 Table 1 2 Line Voltage Selection Voltage Line Selector Voltage 115 V 90 182 V 47 66 Hz 230 V 198 252 V 47 66 Hz Select proper fuse according to the Table 1 3 Current ratings for Fuse Selection A the fuse are printed under the fuseholder on the rear panel and are listed along with the fuse s Agilent part number in Table 1 3 Table 1 3 Fuse Selection Operating Fuse Fuse Voltage Rating Type Part Number 3A 250Vac 115 V UL CSA type 2110 0381 Time Delay 2A 250Vac 230 V UL CSA type 2110 0303 Time Delay If you need this fuse contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office 1 4 Installation and Set Up Guide Caution y Operation Environment Note 4g Electromagnetic Compatibility To remove the fuse turn the fuse holder counterclockwise until the fuse pops out Use the proper fuse for the line voltage selected Use only fuse
91. can be monitored Signal Level Setting Selection Example for Inductance Measurements An inductor s inductance value may differ widely depending on the current through the inductor due to the permeability of its core material Inductance measurements under constant current signal levels allows you to extract the frequency characteristics of the inductor isolated from its signal level characteristics 6 8 Measurement Procedure and Examples Four Terminal Pair Configuration To make constant current level measurements set appropriate oscillator level in current value and set ALC to ON The signal current level through the inductor will be constant Generally any mutual inductance interference of the measurement signals and unwanted residual factors in the connection method incidental to ordinary termination methods will have significant effects on the measurements especially at a high frequency The 4284A employs the four terminal pair measurement configuration which permits easy stable and accurate measurements and avoids the measurement limitations inherent to such factors Figure 6 6 shows the four terminal pair measurement principle The UNKNOWN terminals consists of four coaxial connectors a Hour High current a Hpor High potential m Lpor Low potential a Lour Low current Output He E ov Le Resister 100 9 Oscillator ay System Ground
92. command group sets the DC BIAS switch to ON or OFF and sets the DC bias voltage value or the DC bias current value Figure 8 5 shows the command tree of the BIAS subsystem command group Refer to Appendix G EVel lt value gt IN AX gt CURRent L2009010 Figure 8 5 BIAS Subsystem Command Tree Command Reference 8 19 BIAS Subsystem STATe Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 20 Command Reference The STATe command turns the DC BIAS switch to ON or OFF Setting BIAS VOLTage or BIAS CURRent do not implicitly turn this ON The STATe query returns the current DC BIAS switch ON OFF state RST default value is OFF And when Instrument control settings are loaded from the internal memory or memory card this switch is set to OFF ON FF BIAS STATe Where 1 decimal 49 When the switch is ON O decimal 48 When the switch is OFF OUTPUT 717 BIAS STAT 1 BIAS STATe Returned format is lt NR1 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 BIAS STAT 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END BIAS Subsystem VOLTage Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example Note i Y The VOLTage command sets the DC bias voltage Setting BIAS VOLTage does not implicitly turn the DC bias ON The VOLTage query returns the current DC bias voltage setting value Refer to Appendix G lt value gt BIAS VOLTag
93. comparison data valid signal and ALARM instrument failure signal e Control Input Signal EXT_TRIG External trigger signal and KEY_LOCK key entry disable signal The contact assignments and a brief description of each are given in Table 2 1 and Figure 2 2 The timing diagram is shown in Figure 2 3 NOTE The back slash in the signal name means that the signal is asserted when LOW OPERATION 2 1 Table 2 1 Contact Assignments for Comparator Function sheet 1 of 2 BIN1 Sorting judgments BIN2 All BIN_ signal outputs are BIN3 open collector BIN4 BIN5 BIN6 BIN7 BIN8 BINS OUT_OF_BINS AUX_BIN RZOOMNOMAWN EXT_TRIG External Trigger EXT_TRIG HP 4284A is triggered on the rising edge of a pulse applied to this pin when the trigger mode is set to EXT_TRIG EXT DCV2 External DC voltage 2 EXT DCV2 DC voltage supply pins for DC Isolated inputs EXT_TRIG KEY_LOCK and DC isolated out puts ALARM INDEX EOM Setting of internal jumpers must be changed when using an internal voitage supply Internal voltage supply max 0 5A Exceeding 0 5A will cause the fuse to blow on the handler interface board and the internal voltage will no longer be output refer to the pink page at the front of this manual Primary Parameter High Reject The measurement value is greater than the high limit value of BINT BINS See Figure 2 1 Primary Parameter Low Reject The measurem
94. correspondence refer to the 4284A by model number and by its full serial number Caution The memory card should be removed before packing the 4284A General Information 9 29 Performance Tests 10 Introduction Note Note Test Equipment Note 4g Y This chapter provides the test procedures to verify that the 4284A meets the specifications listed in Chapter 9 All tests can be performed without accessing the indicator of the instruments Performance tests are used to perform incoming inspection and to verify that the 4284A is within its performance specification after troubleshooting or adjustment have been performed If the performance tests indicate that the 4284A is not within specifications check your test setup then proceed to Adjustment or Troubleshooting as required Allow the 4284A to warm up a minimum of 30 minutes before starting any of the performance tests The performance tests are valid only when performed in an ambient temperature of 23 C 5 C Table 10 1 lists the test equipment required to perform the tests described in this chapter Use only calibrated test instruments when performance testing the 4284A If the recommended equipment with specifications equal to or surpassing those of the recommended equipment may be used Components used as standards must be 1 calibrated using an instrument whose specifications are traceable to the National Bureau of
95. data format is as follows lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt lt STATUS gt and lt IN OUT gt are repeated as many times as there are sweep points Each data format is the same as the 8 byte data format described in the Floating Point Format The meaning of each data is the same as each data in the ASCII format 4 bytes No of bytes to transfer lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt 6 bytes 8 bytes 8 bytes L1007006 lt STATUS gt F lt IN OUT gt 8 bytes 8 bytes 2 bytes Figure 7 7 Binary Data Format For List Sweep Measurement Remote Control 7 11 Trigger System Figure 7 8 shows the 4284A trigger state diagram when in REMOTE ABORT SCPI command WAIT FOR TRIGGER State MEASUREMENT State Ligo7o07 Figure 7 8 Trigger State Diagram Each GPIB trigger state is described in the following paragraphs a IDLE state During the IDLE state the measurement data can be read by a controller via GPIB using the FETCh query To change the IDLE state to the WAIT FOR TRIGGER state the INITiate subsystem command must be used as shown in Figure 7 9 1 INITiate CONTinuous OFF 2 INITiate CONTinuous ON IDLE IDLE State State INI Tiate command Automatic automat Automatic utomatic must be sent WAIT FOR WAIT FOR TRIGGER MEASUREMENT TRIGGER M gt MEASUREMENT
96. dc Each signal is connected to the cathode of an LED in the optocoupler which is current driven requiring 5 mA to 20 mA for proper operation The OFF state voltage high level of each signal depends on the pull up voltage EXT DCV used EXT DCV can be set from 5 V to 15 V The selector switches must be set according to the value of EXT DCV used Refer to Table 2 2 External Trigger Input Signals Optocoupled The EXT_TRIG signal is optocoupled to dc isolate the input This signal is connected to the cathode of an LED in an optocoupler which is current driven requiring 6 8 mA to 15 mA for proper operation The OFF state voltage high level of each signal de pends on the pull up voltage EXT DCV used EXT DCV can be set from 5 V to 15 V The bit selector switches must be set ac cording to the value of EXT DCV used Refer to Table 2 2 Pa 2 2 Electrical Characteristics ae ems io Rating CHO to CH7 5vVtoi5V 5 mA to 20 mA CH_ VALID EXT _ O EXT_TRIG SVto15 V 6 3 mA to 15 mA A diagram of the input signals is shown in Figure 2 5 INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION Option 301 9IWL 1X2 QIIVATHI LH3 Pir of exusze YOLDINNOD 3 1 Y3NNVOS Sian m l e SA ween nets cs ee QYVOS JJVJXJLNI Y3SNNVOS Figure 2 5 Simple Diagram of the Inputs Signals INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION 2 9 2 10 Control Output Signals l Optocoupled The INDEX and EOM signals have optocoupled open
97. e Press La Ra to select the L R measurement function f Move the cursor to the FREQ field The current measurement frequency 1 00000kHz will be displayed in this field g Press 1 0 0 100 will be displayed on the system message line and the softkey labels will change to the available units Hz kHz and MHz Press kHz 100 000 kHz is displayed on the FREQ field Note a FREQ can be changed using INCR and DECR displayed when the CURSOR is moved to the FREQ field h Move the cursor to the LEVEL field The current test signal level 1 00V will be displayed in this field i Press 1 and 0 10 will be displayed on the system message line and the softkey labels are changed to the available units 6 28 Measurement Procedure and Examples mV V A mA and A Press mA 10 0mA is displayed on the LEVEL field Note ll These measurement conditions can also be set from the MEAS SETUP page displayed when is pressed The setting operation on the MEAS SETUP page is same as in the preceding steps a to i 1G Press MEAS SETUP The MEAS SETUP page is displayed k Move the CURSOR to the ALC field The current status of the ALC function OFF is displayed on this field and ON and OFF are displayed l Press ON to set the test signal current level to be constant 3 Connect the test fixture to the 4284A The 16047A Direct Couple Test Fixture general purpose is used for this measurement
98. end of the 16048A B Test Leads 1m to the end of the 16048D test leads 2m and to the end of the 16048E test leads 4m Measurement accuracy is specified at these points When you select 0m the four outer conductors of the Hpor Hour Lpot and Loup test leads must be tied together at the UNKNOWN terminals When you select 1m the four outer conductors of the Hpor Hour Lpot and Lour test leads must be tied together at the end of the 16048A B 1m leads When you select 2m the four outer conductors of the test leads must be tied together at the end of the 16048D 2m test leads When you select 4m the four outer conductors of the Hpor Hour Lpot and Lour test leads must be tied together at the end of the 16048E 4m test leads In other words the four terminal pair configuration must be terminated for the cable length selected When an 16048A B D E test leads are used use the furnished terminal plate at the end of the cable for easy configuration Front Panel For Selecting the Cable Length Perform the following steps to select the cable length 1 Move the cursor to the CABLE field The following softkeys will be displayed E Om Bin E 2 m E 4 m 2 Select and press a softkey to select the cable length The system menu on this page allows you to perform the following control functions m Printer This function is the same as the functions on the system menu on the MEAS DISPLAY page A description of this funct
99. executing the STB query To understand this operation think of the RQS and MSS bits as two inputs to a multiplexer MUX and the output of the MUX being bit 6 of the status byte register During the serial polling operation the MUX path selected is from the service request generation circuit to bit 6 so bit 6 represents the RQS bit During execution of the STB query the MUX path selected is from the master summary bit generation circuit to bit 6 so bit 6 represents the MSS bit To clear the MSS bit all bits of the original registers corresponding to the enabled summary bit in the status byte and the output buffer of the 4284A must be cleared When you read the status byte including the MSS bit instead of the RQS bit the STB query must be used STB query clears neither the MSS bit nor the RQS bit Standard Event Status Register Summary Bit This bit is set to 1 when any enabled bits of the standard event status register discussed later in this section has been set to 1 This bit is cleared when all bits of the standard event status register are set to 0 This bit isn t cleared by serial polling MAV Message Available Bit This bit is set to 1 whenever the 4284A has data available to output This bit is cleared when the available data is read This bit isn t cleared by serial polling always 0 zero always 0 zero always 0 zero zero always 0 zero Remote Control 7 21
100. field using the CURSOR arrow key Then the following softkeys will be displayed on the softkey label area e ON softkey e OFF softkey Press the ON softkey Then the handier interface can be used to output input the signals Press the DISPLAY FORMAT MENU key To perform mea surement select the MEAS DISP BIN No or BIN COUNT softkey NOTE The Comparator function ON OFF can be set on the BIN No DISPLAY page Setting procedure For List Sweep Comparator Function The following are operation procedures for using handier interface with the list sweep comparator function 1 Setup the Handler Interface Board consists of installing jumpers and pull up resistors as required for the handler See SECTION 3 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 2 Turn the HP 4284A ON 3 Setup for the appropriate measurement conditions 4 Press the MEAS SETUP MENU key and the LIST SETUP softkey The LIST SWEEP SETUP page is displayed 5 Setup a list table including sweep steps and high low limits for the list sweep measurement refer to the HP 4284A Oper ation Manual for details 4 6 Press the CATALOG SYSTEM MENU key and the SYSTEM CONFIG softkey The SYSTEM CONFIG page is displayed 7 Move the cursor to the HANDLER I F 202 field using the CURSOR arrow key Then the following softkeys will be displayed on the softkey label area e ON softkey e
101. format is lt NR1 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 CORR OPEN STAT 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END SHORt Command Syntax Example 8 54 Command Reference The SHORt command executes 51 presetted SHORT correction data measurement points CORRection SHORt OUTPUT 717 CORR SHOR COrrection Subsystem SHORt STATe The SHORt STATe command sets the SHORT correction function to ON or OFF The SHORt STATe query responds the current ON OFF condition of the SHORT correction ON Command Syntax OFF CORRection SHORt STATe 0 Where 1 decimal 49 When the function is ON 0 decimal 48 When the function is OFF Example OUTPUT 717 CORR SHOR STAT ON Query Syntax CORRection SHORt STATe Query Response Returned format is lt NR1 gt lt NL7 END gt Example 10 OUTPUT 717 CORR SHOR STAT 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 55 COrrection Subsystem LOAD STATe Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 56 Command Reference The LOAD STATe command sets the LOAD correction function to ON or OFF The LOAD STATe query responds the current ON OFF condition of the LOAD correction ON OFF CORRection LOAD STATe O Where 1 decimal 49 When the function is ON O decimal 48 When the function is OFF OUTPUT 717 CORR LOAD STAT ON CORRection LOAD STATe Returned format is lt NR1 gt lt NL END gt 10
102. instrument General definitions of safety symbols used on equipment or in manuals are listed below O lt L HU Warning Caution Note v Instruction manual symbol the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual Alternating current Direct current On Supply Off Supply In position of push button switch Out position of push button switch Frame or chassis terminal A connection to the frame chassis of the equipment which normally include all exposed metal structures This Warning sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or death to personnel This Caution sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Note denotes important information It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which is essential to highlight Affixed to product containing static sensitive devices use anti static handling procedures to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to component How To Use This Manual Chapter 1 Getting Started Chapter 2 Overview Chapter 3 DISPLAY FORMAT Chapter 4 MEAS SETUP Chapter 5 CATALOG SYSTEM CONFIGURA
103. is lt NR1 gt lt NL7 END gt Example 10 OUTPUT 717 FUNC SMON VAC 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 27 FUNCtion Subsystem Source MONitor IAC Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 28 Command Reference The Source MONitor IAC command sets the current level monitor to ON or OFF The Source MONitor IAC query returns the current ON OFF condition of the current level monitor ON OFF FUNCtion SMONitor IAC STATe Where 1 decimal 49 When the switch is ON O decimal 48 When the switch is OFF OUTPUT 717 FUNC SMON IAC 1 FUNCtion SMONitor IAC STATe Returned format is lt NR1 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 FUNC SMON IAC 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END FUNCtion Subsystem DEV lt n gt MODE Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example The DEV lt n gt MODE command sets the deviation measurement mode The DEV lt n gt MODE query returns the current setting of the deviation measurement mode ABSolute FUNCtion DEV lt n gt MODE 4 PERCent OFF Where ABSolute A ABSolute deviation mode PERCent A deviation mode OFF Turn the deviation measurement mode OFF lt n gt is 1 decimal 49 Deviation mode setting for primary parameter 2 decimal 50 Deviation mode setting for secondary parameter OUTPUT 717 FUNC DEV1i MODE ABS OUTPUT 717 FUNC DEV2 MODE OFF FUNCtion
104. is inserted into the front panel MEMORY card slot and the following control functions can be set from this page The field in parenthesis is used to set the control function m System Menu SYS MENU There are two fields on this page lt CATALOG gt and SYS MENU fields The available fields and the softkeys which corresponded to each field on this page are shown in Figure 5 1 and Figure 5 2 Catalog System Configuration 5 1 Memory Status 1 Record stored O No record lt CATALOG gt Xx Record stored MEDIA CARD HP 4285A data No COMMENT SYSTEM Cp D Measurements 1kHz CONFIG Device A Catalog of the memory lt Data for 4285A gt Coco OoO x COCORRF OX OBNAMDKRYONE OS LIOO5001 Figure 5 1 Available Fields on the CATALOG Page lt CATALOG gt CATALOG SYS MENU CANCEL PRINT DISP SYSTEM CONFIG SELF TEST CANCEL more 2 2 Y more 1 2 l L1005002 Figure 5 2 Available Softkeys on the CATALOG Page 5 2 Catalog System Configuration System Menu The system menu on this page allows you to perform the following functions a Load Store m Media Specifying m Printer m Purge The load store function is the same as the functions displayed on the system menu of the MEAS DISPLAY page And the printer function is the same as the function of PRINT DISP of the system me
105. is equipped with an internally mounted write protect switch This switch has two write protection features One feature disables the STORE function for write protecting all of the stored data in the memory card and EEPROM internal memory and the other feature prevents changing any of the previous correction settings on the CORRECTION page This feature is useful when you want to retain specific 4284A control settings for everyday use for example on a production line where it is not necessary to store any information on a memory card thereby making it impossible to accidentally erase or overwrite the stored data in the memory card or the EEPROM internal memory and also making it impossible to accidentally erase or overwrite the correction settings The procedure for setting the write protection switch to ON is as follows 1 Turn the 4284A off and remove the power cord Allow 1 minutes for the internal capacitors to discharge Dangerous voltage may be present in the 4284A even through the power switch is off Be sure to wait 1 minutes for the internal capacitors to discharge 2 Remove the two feet at the back of the top cover 3 Fully loosen the screw that secures the top cover 4 Pull the top cover towards the rear of the 4284A and lift up to remove 5 Loosen the five screws that secure the top shield plate Larger one 6 Slide the top shield forward then lift it off 7 Remove the A7 board Figure E 1 shows the A7
106. keys and ENTER Fixed Decimal Point Function The 4284A displays the measurement data using a six digit floating point display format The fixed decimal point function is used to display the measurement data using a fixed point display format This function can also be used to change the number of digits displayed Perform the following steps to use the fixed decimal point function 1 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 2 Press D P FIX A to fix the decimal point for the main parameter s data The A mark will be displayed at the decimal fixed point Each time D P FIX A is pressed the last digit is dropped the value is rounded off 3 Press D P FIX B to fix the decimal point for the sub parameter s data The A mark will be displayed at the decimal fixed point Each time D P FIX B is pressed the value is rounded off giving one less digit In the following cases the fixed decimal point function is automatically disabled m The measurement function is changed m When the deviation measurement which is set on the MEAS SETUP page is performed the deviation measurement function AABS A OFF is changed Printer Function The 4284A s printer function is used to make a hardcopy of the displayed information except for the softkey labels or the measurement results without the need of an external controller The 4284A must be set to the GPIB talker mode and the printer must be set to the GPIB listener mode
107. measurement complete Measurement Complete Full measurement complete Alarm Notification that a momentary power failure was detected Input Signal Opto isolated Keylock Front panel keyboard lockout External Trigger Pulse width gt 1 us 1 2 GENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 2 O S fa 3 N OPERATION INTRODUCTION This section provides information including a description of the interface signal lines and their electrical characteristics necessary to use the Option 201 Handier Interface mene es SIGNAL LINE DEFINITION The handler interface uses three types of signals comparison wes output control input and control output The signal lines for the Comparator Function and the List Sweep Comparator Function are defined differently for comparison output signals and control input signals The following are signal definitions of the handler interface when used with the Comparator Function and the List Sweep Comparator Function Signal Line Used for Comparator Function The signal definitions for the Comparator Function are as follows e Comparison Output Signals BIN1 BIN9 AUX_BIN OUT_OF_BINS PHI primary parameter high reject signal PLO primary parameter low reject signal SREJ secondary parameter reject signal UNBAL bridge unbalanced signal See Figure 2 1 e Control Output Signals INDEX analog measurement completed signal EOM End Of Measure and
108. monitor 2 Add the impedance measurement accuracy accuracy when the DUT s impedance is gt 100 2 Accuracies apply when test cable length is 0 m or 1 m additional error when test cable length is 2 m or 4 m is given as Inxs 0 Where fm is test frequency MHz Lis test cable length m Example DUT s impedance 50 Q Test signal level 0 1 Vims Measurement accuracy 0 1 Then Voltage level monitor accuracy is 3 1 of reading 0 5 mVims 9 4 General Information Display Range Absolute Measurement Accuracy Parameter Range Z R X 0 01 mQ to 99 9999 MQ IY G B 0 01 nS to 99 9999 S 0 01 fF to 9 99999 F 0 01 nH to 99 9999 kH 0 000001 to 9 99999 0 01 to 99999 9 180 000 to 180 000 999 999 to 999 999 rPrOovdrAa Absolute measurement accuracy is given as the sum of the relative measurement accuracy plus the calibration accuracy Z Y L C R X G and B Accuracy Z Y L C R X G and B accuracy is given as Ae Acal Where A is the relative accuracy Acal is the calibration accuracy L C X and B accuracies apply when D measured D value lt 0 1 R and G accuracies apply when Q measured Q value lt 0 1 G accuracy described in this paragraph applies to the G B combination only D accuracy D accuracy is given as De Ocal Where Deis the relative D accuracy cal is the calibration accuracy radian Accuracy applies whe
109. n gt is 1 State setting for FREQ point 2 State setting for FREQ2 point 3 State setting for FREQ3 point Example OUTPUT 717 CORR SPOT1 LOAD Command Reference 8 61 COrrection Subsystem SPOT lt n gt LOAD STANdard Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 62 Command Reference The SPOT lt n gt LOAD STANdard command sets the reference values of the standard at the specified frequency point FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 The SPOT lt n gt LOAD STANdard query returns the current settings of the reference values for FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 CORRection SPOT lt n gt LOAD STANdard lt REF A gt lt REF B gt Where lt n gt 1 Setting for FREQI point 2 Setting for FREQ2 point 3 Setting for FREQ3 point lt REP A gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format Primary parameter s reference value of the standard lt REF B gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format Secondary parameter s reference value of the standard OUTPUT 717 CORR SPOT1 LOAD STAN 100 7 0 0002 CORRection SPOT lt n gt LOAD STANdard Returned format is lt NR3 gt lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 CORR SPOT1 LOAD STAN 20 ENTER 717 A B 30 PRINT A B 40 END COrrection Subsystem USE Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example The USE command sets the channel number to be used for multi channel correction The USE query returns the current settings of the channel sel
110. operating range is Hi PW mode off 13 Hi PW mode on 16 MEAS SETUP Menu 4 7 i PW OFF 10 100 1k IMPEDANCE OF DUT Zx Signal Voltage Operation Area Hi PW OFF SIGNAL VOLTAGE Vx 3 100 1k 10k IMPEDANCE OF DUT Zx Signal Current Operation Area IZx Resistive 9 0 Zx Resistive Q 90 or 90 L100400A Figure 4 5 Available Operating Area for the ALC Function 4 8 MEAS SETUP Menu High Power Mode Note Note Y Y Front Panel Operation for Setting the Automatic Level Control Function Perform the following steps to set the automatic level control function to ON or OFF 1 Move the cursor to the ALC field The following softkeys will be displayed m ON m OFF 2 Press ON to set the automatic level control function to ON Press OFF to set the automatic level control function OFF Description Refer to Appendix G When Option 001 Power Amplifier DC Bias is installed the oscillator level can be set from the 5 mVyms to 20 Vrms and from 50 ptArms to 200 mArms and also the de bias can be set up to 40 V The Hi PW field allows you to make Option 001 valid or invalid So if the high power mode is set to OFF the oscillator level or the dc bias controls are the same as the oscillator level or the dc bias controls of an 4284A without Option 001 When Option 001 is installed the power on def
111. page m Press DISPLAY FORMAT to display the MEAS DISPLAY page Move the cursor to the SYS MENU m Press more 1 2 Press PRINT DATA The marker will appear at the side of PRINT DATA The measurement results are sent out to the printer on subsequent measurements BIN No DISPLAY Page Keylock Function The 4284A has keyboard lock out capability that disables all front panel operation except for the power LINE switch CONTRAST knob TRIGGER key and KEYLOCK This is useful when you don t want the control settings changed for example if the 4284A is performing bin sorting for a large number of capacitors Perform the following steps to disable all front panel operation on the MEAS DISPLAY page 1 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 2 Press more 1 2 3 Press KEY LOCK which is a toggle type softkey The key mark will be shown on the left side of KEY LOCK and the Keys locked message will be displayed on the system message line 4 Press KEY LOCK again when you want to enable all front panel keys again When you press DISPLAY FORMAT and BIN No the BIN No DISPLAY page will be displayed The bin sorting results are displayed in large characters and the measurement results are displayed in normal characters on the BIN No DISPLAY page and the following measurement controls can be set from the BIN No DISPLAY page The field in parenthesis is used when this control is set a Comparator Function ON
112. scanner interface board has black and yellow extractors and its location is shown in Figure 10 12 3 Remove the scanner interface board The interface board contains electronic components that can be damaged by static electricity through electrostatic discharge ESD To prevent ESD damage maintain frequent contact with any bare sheet metal surface on the chassis A grounding wrist strap or similar device is useful for this purpose Handle the board carefully at all times Avoid touching electronic components or circuit paths 4 Set SW1 and SW2 on the scanner interface board to the same settings as when the board is shipped from the factory referring to Figure 10 19 Before performing step 4 note the switch settings in order to return to the same settings at the end of this function test Performance Tests 10 33 enone wn LUUQUAE SW OO000 TP TP2 TP3 TP4 TPS EXT EXT COM VOC GND 3 GENREN fe Cococoao I SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD Figure 10 20 SW1 and SW2 settings 5 Replace the scanner interface board and reconnect the flat cable 6 Set DC power supply output voltage 5 V Connect TP2 GND on the bias interface simulator to terminal of the power supply Then connect TP1 Vcc on the simulator to terminal of the power supply refer to Figure 10 20 Note ll DC power for the bias interface simulator can be supplied from th
113. softkey label page can be changed by pressing the MENU keys Press the computer s STEP key to execute line 30 and confirm that the TLK lamp is ON Step to line 40 and confirm that the following message is displayed on the computer Performance Tests 10 21 10 Step to line 60 and confirm that the SRQ LTN and RMT lamps are ON 11 Step to line 80 and confirm that the status byte value displayed on the computer is greater than 95 10 22 Performance Tests Bias Current Interface Function Test Option 002 only Equipment Procedure This test verifies the bias current interface functions Bias Interface Simulator Bias Interface Cable DC Power Supply Agilent PN 42841 65001 Agilent PN 42841 61640 6214C 1 Set all switches of S1 and S2 on the bias interface simulator to 1 as shown in Figure 10 9 S2 S1 DI8 TO 15 DIO TO 7 l z0 a im 8 no 93W yo c a z nT e E owm sW j r E c ae O a E i TP2 gmo CIT zug NY His gm om ORONS Eo COTE gzz CIR CI coccccccoesccoeecocosoce Ki 5 Figure 10 9 Bias Interface Simulator 2 Set DC power supply output voltage 5 V Connect TP2 GND on the bias interface simulator to terminal of the power supply Then connect TP1 Vcc on the simulator to terminal of the power supply refer to Figure 10 9 and Figure 10 10
114. sweep measurement regardless of the trigger state Refer to Trigger System in Chapter 7 for details Command Syntax TRIGger IMMediate Example OUTPUT 717 TRIG OUTPUT 717 TRIG IMM 8 40 Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem SOURce The SOURce command sets the trigger mode The SOURce query returns the current trigger mode INTernal EXTernal BUS HOLD Command Syntax TRIGger SOURce Where INTernal Internal trigger mode EXTernal External trigger mode BUS Bus trigger mode HOLD Trigger hold Manual trigger mode Example OUTPUT 717 TRIG SOUR BUS Query Syntax TRIGger SOURce Query Response Returned format is INT EXT lt NL END gt BUS HOLD Example 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG SOUR 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 41 TRIGger Subsystem DELay Command Syntax Example Note i Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 42 Command Reference The DELay command sets the trigger delay time The DELay query returns the current delay time lt value gt TRIGger DELay 4 MIN MAX Where lt value gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format 0 to 60 s in 1 ms resolution MIN Sets the minimum delay value 0 s MAX Sets the maximum delay value 60 s OUTPUT 717 TRIG DEL 55 Set delay time to 5 s OUTPUT 717 TRIG DEL MIN Set delay time to 0 s A suffix multiplier and a suffix unit S second can be used with this command MIN TRIGger DE
115. the New Line Line Feed character 10 decimal is being sent on the bus Each data format of the lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt lt STATUS gt and lt BIN No gt are common formats 8 bytes IEEE 754 floating point format as follows The meaning of each data is the same as the meaning of each data in the ASCII format IEEE 754 Floating Point Format Bit No 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 First byte sent S Emsb E E E E E E Second byte sent E E E Esp Fmsp E F F Third seventh F F F F F F F F byte sent Last byte sent F F F F F F F Fisp Where Emsb is the most significant bit of the exponent Fash is the least significant bit of the exponent Fiunsb is the most significant bit of the fractional part Fisb is the least significant bit of the fractional part is the sign bit E is an exponent bit F is a fraction bit The real number RN represented in floating point format are provided using the following formula EXP Exponent part of number f Fractional part of number m When 0 lt e lt 11111111111 2047 a When e 0 RN 0 For example S 1 RN 1 x 9 EXP 1023 y 1 25 RN 1 x 21922 x 2 m When e 0 f 0 EXP 01111111111 1023 decimal f 1000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 25 951 RN 1 x 39 1023 1023 x i sa 1x1x1 5 1 5 When the list sweep measurement is performed the binary
116. the TRIGER key 14 Confirm that the 4284A s reading is within the test limits in Table 10 7 Performance Tests 10 13 Table 10 7 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Limits 1 of 2 Setting Test Limits Cp D Signal Test 10 pF Standard 100 pF Standard 1000 pF Standard Level Frequency 510 mV 20 Hz Cp C V 32 09 pF D 0 00319 125 Hz Cp C V 1 759 pF C V 3 05 pF D 0 01739 0 00286 1 kHz Cp C V 0 312 pF C V 1 00 pF D 0 00293 0 00081 12 5 kHz Cp C V 0 0318 pF C V 40 137 pF C V 1 13 pF D 0 0031 0 00130 0 00095 48 kHz Cp C V 0 0246 pF C V 0 162 pF C V 1 16 pF D 0 0028 0 0190 0 00103 96 kHz Cp C V 0 0275 pF C V 0 122 pF C V 1 31pF D 0 0035 0 00116 0 00111 1 MHz Cp C V 0 0249 pF C V 0 102 pF C V 1 53 pF D 0 0038 0 00082 0 00083 20 mV 1 kHz Cp C V 0 898 pF C V 2 53 pF 1 MHz Cp C V 0 0402 pF C V 40 208 pF C V 2 59 pF 5 1V 1 kHz Cp C V 0 293 pF C V 1 48 pF 1 MHz Cp C V 0 0297 pF C V 0 152 pF C V 2 03 pF 10 14 Performance Tests C V Standard s calibration value at 1 kHz C V C V multiplied by 1 0003 Option 001 only Table 10 7 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Limits 2 of 2 Setting Test Limits Cp Signal Test 0 01 4F Standard 0 1 uF Standard 1 4F Standard Level Frequency 510 mV 1 kHz C V 0 0082 nF C V 0 081 nF C
117. the analyzer does not pass the power on selftests notify the nearest Agilent Technologies office If the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of unusual stress notify the carrier as well as the Agilent Technologies office Keep the shipping materials for the carrier s inspection Installation and Set Up Guide 1 1 Table 1 1 4284A Contents Description Qty Agilent Part Number 4284A Power cable 1 Operation Manual 1 04284 90020 Option 004 Memory Card Memory Card 1 04278 89001 Option 201 Fuse Fuse 2 2110 0046 Option 907 Handle Kit Handle kit 1 5061 9690 Option 908 Rack Flange Kit Rack Flange Kit 1 5061 9678 Option 909 Rack Flange amp Handle Kit Rack Flange amp Handle Kit 1 5061 9684 1 Power Cable depends on where the instrument is used see Power Cable Power Requirements 1 2 Power Cable Warning The 4284A requires the following power source Voltage 90 to 132 Vac 198 to 252 Vac Frequency 47 to 66 Hz Power 200 VA maximum In accordance with international safety standards this instrument is equipped with a three wire power cable When connected to an appropriate ac power outlet this cable grounds the instrument frame The type of power cable shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination Refer to Figure 1 1 for the part numbers of the power cables available For protect
118. the DC bias one is to use the softkeys and the other is to use the numeric entry keys Perform the following steps to set the DC bias 1 Move the cursor to the BIAS field The following softkeys will be displayed a INCR f Press this softkey to increase the DC bias level b DECR Press this softkey to decrease the DC bias level Note i Y Integration Time 2 Set the dc bias to your desired bias using either the softkeys or the numeric entry keys When the dc bias is entered using the numeric entry keys the softkey labels are changed to the available units mV V uA mA and A and so you can use these softkeys instead of ENTER When is used the numeric data is entered with V or A as the default unit When you want to change the DC bias from voltage to current or from current to voltage you must use the numeric entry keys and the units softkeys 3 Set on the front panel to ON to output the dc bias Description The 4284A s measurement time is determined by the following a Integration Time A D conversion a Averaging Rate number of measurement averaged m Delay Time time delay between the trigger and the start of the measurement m Measurement result s display time On this page only the Integration Time in the above items can be set the other settings except for the measurement result s display time can be set from the MEAS SETUP page The 4284A uses an integrating A D converter
119. the HitPW mode to ON e Illegal operation HitPW mode set to OFF when the LEVEL is more than 2V 20mA or the BIAS is more than 2V Reduce the LEVEL or BIAS or set the Hi PW mode to ON e Illegal operation Hi PW mode set to ON when the 42841A is connected Disconnect the 42841A 14 V bias disabled e Illegal operation set to DC voltage bias when the 4284A 42841A and 42842A B are interconnected Disconnect the 42842A B from the 42841A or change BIAS to a current value 15 I bias not available e Illegal operation set to DC current bias when the 4284A is in the standard configuration Set BIAS to a voltage value 16 e REF data Measurement aborted Measurement aborted Re measure Error and Warning Messages B 3 Error Displayed Message e Description Solution 17 Can t change DCI Isolasion Set DCI to ISO OFF e Illegal operation DCI set to ISO ON when the Hi PW is OFF e Illegal operation DCI setting changed when the DC BIAS is set to ON Set DC BIAS OFF 20 DC bias unit powered down e Illegal operation set to DC current bias when an inoperative 42841A is connected to the 4284A Turn the 42841A on 21 Fixture circuit defective e Back emf protection circuit of the 42842A B is defective Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office 22 Fixture over temperature e Temperature of the 42842A B bias cu
120. the MEMory FILL DBUF command to use the data buffer memory capabilities are stored into the data buffer memory in the order measured m When triggering the 4284A using the TRIGger IMMediate command the measurement results are entered only into the data buffer memory So you don t have to clear the output buffer When triggering using the TRG or Group Execution Trigger GET command the measurement results are entered into both the data buffer memory and the output buffer So the output buffer must be cleared every time the 4284A s controller reads the measurement results If you don t error 410 Query INTERRUPTED will occur m When the number of sets of measurement data exceeds the capacity of the buffer memory all of the overflowed measurement data are lost error 90 Data Memory Overflow occurs and bit 3 of the standard event status register is set to 1 If you enter new data into the data buffer memory the data buffer memory should first be cleared using the MEMory CLEar DBUF command m When the number of sets of measurement data is less than the capacity of the buffer memory the following data instead of the actual measurement data are input to the unused portion of the data buffer memory lt DATA A gt 9 9E37 lt DATA B gt 9 9E37 lt STATUS gt 1 lt BIN No gt or lt IN OUT gt 0 m When the data buffer memory capabilities are used during a list sweep measurement the measurement result of one swe
121. the System Message Line when a measurement error occurs or when an illegal operation is attempted There are two categories of errors as follows These errors occur while attempting an improper operation If one of these errors occur the 4284A displays the error number and a message on its system message line There are two kinds of errors in this category m Device Specific Error error numbers 1 to 32767 300 to 399 These errors will set the Device Specific Error bit bit 3 in the Event Status Register a Execution Error error numbers 200 to 299 These errors will set the Execution Error bit bit 4 in the Event Status Register These errors occur when the 42844 received an improper command via GPIB If one of these errors occur the 4284A displays the warning message GPIB error occurred on the system message line check the command syntax There are two kinds of errors in this category a Command Error error numbers 100 to 199 These errors will set the Command Error bit bit 5 in the Event Status Register m Query Error error numbers 400 to 499 These errors will set the Query Error bit bit 2 in the Event Status Register Error and Warning Messages B 1 Sample Program to When you write an GPIB control program for the 4284A the Detect the Error following sample program is a useful debugging tool using the 4284A 100 110 120 130 140 150 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 6
122. the display page using the PRINT DISP mode 1 Connect the 4284A to the printer using an GPIB cable 2 Set the printer to the Listen Only mode 3 Set the talk only mode to ON on the SYSTEM CONFIG page 4 Press MEAS SETUP and LIST SETUP to display the LIST SWEEP SETUP page Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 6 Press more 1 2 Or T Press PRINT DISP The display page is printed out to the printer as shown in Figure 4 25 lt LIST SWEEP SETUP gt SYS MENU MODE SEQ FREQ Hz LMT LOW HIGH 1 00000k A 100 000p 100 030p 2 00000k 100 000p 100 030p 5 00000k 100 000p 100 030p 100 000p 100 030p 100 000p 100 030p 100 000p 100 030p 100 000p 100 030p 100 000p 100 030p 100 000p 100 030p 100 000p 100 030p 10 0000k 20 0000k 50 0000k 100 000k 200 000k 500 000k 1 00000M rrr Fr re PS PS Figure 4 25 LIST SWEEP SETUP Page Example MEAS SETUP Menu 4 55 Catalog System Configuration Introduction CATALOG Page This chapter provides information on the function of each page of CATALOG SYSTEM The following three pages can be called from CATALOG SYSTEM a CATALOG a SYSTEM CONFIG a SELF TEST This chapter describes the functions on each page in the order of the preceding list of display pages When you press CATALOG SYSTEM the CATALOG page will be displayed On this CATALOG page the catalog of the 4284A s internal memory EEPROM or the external memory card which
123. the following steps to print out the displayed page or the measurement data using the PRINT DISP mode 1 Connect the 4284A to the printer using an GPIB cable 2 Set the printer to the Listen Only mode 3 Set the Talk Only mode to ON from the SYSTEM CONFIG page 4 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 5 Press PRINT DISP to print out the displayed page The displayed page is printed out as shown in Figure 5 6 lt SYSTEM CONFIG gt SYS MENU BEEPER OFF GPIB I F INSTALLED GPIB ADDRESS 17 TALK ONLY ON POWER AMP 001 INSTALLED I BIAS I F 002 NOT INSTALLED 2m 4m CABLE 006 NOT INSTALLED HANDLER I F 201 INSTALLED ON SCANNER I F 301 INSTALLED ON Figure 5 6 SYSTEM CONFIG page Example 5 10 Catalog System Configuration SELF TEST Page When you press CATALOG SYSTEM and SELF TEST the SELF TEST page will be displayed This SELF TEST page is for service use You can check the 4284A s digital functions using the self test functions listed on this page The following self tests are included in this page Each number in parenthesis is used when each test is selected m Memory Card Read Write Test No 1 a LED Display Test No 2 a LCD Display Test No 3 m Handler Interface Test No 4 m Scanner Interface EEPROM Read Write Test No 5 m Scanner Interface Input Output Test No 6 a Bias Current Interface Input Output Test No 7 There are two fields on this page lt SELF
124. the trigger mode is set to BUS trigger mode the 4284A performs a single measurement every time the TRIGGER command is sent to the 4284A via GPIB Then the BUS trigger mode cannot be set on the front panel Front Panel Operation for Setting the Trigger Mode Perform the following steps to set the trigger mode except for in the BUS TRIG mode To set the trigger mode in the BUS TRIG mode the TRIGger SOURce BUS command should be sent via GPIB 1 Move the cursor to the TRIG field The following softkeys will be displayed m INT m MAN m EXT 2 Set the trigger mode using the softkeys MEAS SETUP Menu 4 5 Automatic Level Control Function Description The automatic level control ALC function regulates the actual test level voltage across the DUT or current through the DUT to your desired level So by using this function the test signal voltage or current level at the DUT can be held constant When the automatic level control function is used the oscillator level settings are limited as follows a When Option 001 is not installed or the high power mode is set to OFF Voltage Level 10 MVrms to 1 Vrms Current Level 100 wArms to 10 mArms m When the high power mode is set to ON Voltage Level 10 mVims to 10 Vrms Current Level 100 pArms to 100 mAyms Note a When the ALC function is active if the oscillator level setting exceeds the above limits the ALC function is automatically set to OFF and the setting value
125. to output signals including a measurement completed signal and bin sort judg ments of the comparator function or Go No Go judgments of the list sweep comparator function and to input external trigger signal and keylock signal By using these signals the HP 4284A can easily be combined with any of the component handlers listed above and a system controller to fully automate LCR com ponent testing sorting and quality contro data processing to increase production efficiency SPECIFICATIONS Table 1 1 lists the HP 4284A Option 202 Handler interface specifi cations only Other specifications are the same as for a standard HP 4284A l GENERAL INFORMATION 1 1 Table 1 1 Specifications Output signal Opto isolated and Open collector with internal pull up resistor to 5 V or external pull up resistor and pull up supply voltage 24 V 80 mA maximum Decision Output Comparator Function Bin number List Sweep Comparator Function IN OUT at each sweep point and pass fail for the result of sequential comparisons EOC End of conversion A D output BUSY HP 4284A is busy with conversion or calculation Input Signal Opto isolated or TTL Opto isolated input is a current input 6 MA to 60 mA TTL input is a schmitt trigger input hysteresis 0 8 V with an internal 1 KQ pull up resistor START IN Input trigger to start a measurement Minimum required pulse width is gt 5 us with W11 installed
126. values the measurement function for the standard must be set in the FUNC field The standard s value can be measured using MEAS LOAD which is displayed when the cursor is moved to the FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQS fields FREQ1 OPEN SHORT LOAD OPEN SHORT LOAD data OPEN SHORT LOAD data data L10401 Figure 4 13 OPEN SHORT LOAD Correction Front Panel Operation for the OPEN SHORT LOAD Correction Perform the following steps to perform the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction at the frequency points you want to specify 1 Move the cursor to the FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 field to specify the frequency for the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction The following softkeys will be displayed ON This softkey is used to make the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction data at the FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 frequency point valid OFF This softkey is used to make the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction data at the FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 frequency point invalid MEAS OPEN This softkey is used to perform an OPEN correction measurement at the FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 frequency points MEAS SHORT This softkey is used to perfom a SHORT correction measurement at the FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 frequency points MEAS LOAD This softkey is used to perform a LOAD correction measurement at the FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 frequency points 2 Press ON to show the previous frequency for the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction 3 Enter the frequency using the numeric entry ke
127. will be displayed on the system message line and the softkey labels will change to the available units Hz kHz and MHz Press MHz 1 00000MHz is now displayed in the FREQ field The FREQUENCY can be changed using INCR and DECR displayed when the CURSOR moved to the FREQ field c Move the cursor to the LEVEL field The current test signal level 1 00V is displayed in this field d Press 2 1 5 will be displayed on the system message line and the softkey labels are changed to the available units mV V uA mA and A Press V 1 50V is now displayed in the LEVEL field The OSC LEVEL can be changed using with INCR and DECR displayed when the cursor is moved to the LEVEL field These measurement conditions can also be set from the MEAS SETUP page which is displayed when MEAS SETUP is pressed The set up operation from the MEAS SETUP page is the same as in the preceding steps 1 to 4 6 24 Measurement Procedure and Examples 3 Connect the test fixture to the 4284A The 16047A Direct Couple Test Fixture general purpose is used for this measurement Connect the 16047A to the 4284A s UNKNOWN terminals as shown in Figure 6 19 Figure 6 19 Connecting the 16047A 4 Perform the correction To compensate for the 16047A s residuals and strays an OPEN SHORT correction is required a Leave the 16047A in an OPEN condition as shown in Figure 6 17 b Press MEAS SETUP and CORREC
128. 0 E Cp G Cp Rp more 1 6 Select and press a softkey to set the measurement function If the softkey you want is not displayed press more 1 6 to display the following set of softkeys m Cs D E Cs Q m Cs Rs mE more 2 6 Select and press a softkey to set the measurement function If the softkey you want is not displayed press more 2 6 to display the following set of softkeys m Lp D a Lp Q DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 5 Measurement Range 3 6 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu E Lp G Lp Rp more 3 6 4 Select and press a softkey to set the measurement function If the softkey you want is not displayed press more 3 6 to display the following set of softkeys m Ls D E Ls Q Ls Rs gt m more 4 6 5 Select and press a softkey to set the measurement function If the softkey you want is not displayed press more 4 6 to display the following set of softkeys m R X m 7 0 deg m 7 0 rad more 5 6 6 Select and press a softkey to set the measurement function If the softkey you want is not displayed press more 5 6 to display the following set of softkeys a G B m Y deg m Y rad more 6 6 7 Select and press a softkey to set the measurement function When more 6 6 is pressed the softkeys shown in step 1 will be displayed Retry steps 1 through 7 if you missed the function you were looking for Description The 4284A has eight measurement ranges 100 1002 3000 1 kQ 3 KQ 10 kO 30 k
129. 0 OUTPUT 150 OUTPUT 160 OUTPUT 170 OUTPUT 180 OUTPUT 190 OUTPUT 200 OUTPUT 210 OUTPUT 220 END Figure 7 20 MEAS SETUP Page Meter TO 717 Meter Meter DISP Meter DISP Meter FUNC Meter FREQ Meter VOLT Meter TRIG Meter AMPL Meter OUTP Meter OUTP Meter FUNC Meter BIAS Meter APER Meter FUNC Meter FUNC Meter TRIG Meter FUNC Meter FUNC Meter FUNC Meter FUNC PAGE MSET LINE Control Example IMP ZTD 1MHZ 1V SOUR BUS ALC ON HPOW ON DC ISOL ON IMP RANG 10KOHM VOLT 5 LONG 4 SMON VAC ON SMON IAC ON DEL 5 DEV1 MODE ABS DEV2 MODE ABS DEV1 REF 10000 DEV2 REF 1 CORRECTION page This sample program sets the setting controls on the CORRECTION page after the correction data have already been stored 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 ASSIGN REMOTE OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT END Meter TO 717 Meter Meter DISP Meter CORR Meter CORR Meter CORR Meter CORR Meter CORR Meter CORR Meter CORR PAGE OPEN SHOR LOAD LENG METH CSET STAT ON STAT ON STAT ON 4 MULT USE 10 LOAD TYPE CPD Meter SPOT1 STAT ON Meter SPOT2 STAT ON Meter SPOT3 STAT ON Figure 7 21 CORRECTION page Remote Control 7 33 7 34 Remote Control LIMIT TABLE SETUP pa
130. 00 610 620 630 640 650 status bytes and the SYST ERRor query for detecting the errors OUTPUT 717 ESE 60 Event Status Resister enable error bits enable OUTPUT 717 SRE 32 Status Byte Resister enable Event Status Summary bit enable ON INTR 7 2 CALL Errors ENABLE INTR 7 2 SUB Errors DIM Err 50 Sp SPOLL 717 IF BIT Sp 5 THEN OUTPUT 717 ESR Clear the Event Status Resister ENTER 717 Esr PRINT Event Status Resister Esr LOOP OUTPUT 717 SYST ERR Error No amp message query ENTER 717 Err EXIT IF VAL CErr 0 Exit if no error PRINT Err END LOOP END IF ENABLE INTR 7 2 SUBEND B 2 Error and Warning Messages The following is a list of the 4284A s error numbers and messages Operation Errors Error No Displayed Message Description Solution Device Specific Error 10 Exceeded AC DC limit e AC DC level exceeds 42V or 110mA peak Reduce the LEVEL or BIAS setting 11 ALC disabled e LEVEL setting is out of the ALC s available level range Change LEVEL to be within the ALC s available level range 12 power AMP opt not installed e Illegal operation Hi PW mode set to ON when Option 001 is not installed Install Option 001 13 Can t change Hi PW mode e Illegal operation Hi PW mode set to ON when the DC BIAS is set to ON Set BIAS to OFF DC BIAS indicator is not ON first then set
131. 00014 EA A 100 041pF B 0 00015 L142 This area is used as follows a To perform the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction calculations using either the OPEN SHORT interpolation correction data or the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction data at the spot frequency you specify This correction data selection depends on the test frequency a To obtain the OPEN SHORT interpolation correction data This area is used as follows a To obtain the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction data at the spot frequencies you specify FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 a To make the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction data at the spot frequencies you specify FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 valid or invalid The correction data used depends on the test frequency as follows For more detail refer to APPENDIX D MEAS SETUP Menu 4 27 Measurement Function for the Standard 4 28 MEAS SETUP Menu Test Frequency Test Frequency Correction FREQI 3 FREQI1 3 Mode FREQI 3 FREQI 3 FREQI 3 FREQI 3 OFF ON OFF ON OPEN ON INTPOL INTPOL INTPOL SPOT SHORT ON INTPOL INTPOL INTPOL SPOT LOAD ON x x x SPOT SPOT The correction data for the frequency points you specified is used INTPOL Interpolation correction data is used x Correction isn t performed even if the correction function is set to ON in the OPEN SHORT or LOAD fields When the frequency you specify is equal to a frequency already specified the following correction data is used
132. 1 11 Follow the flow chart in step 8 to set up the jumpers for the control output signals OPERATION 2 19 12 Set the jumpers in accordance to Table 2 7 See Figure 2 12 Table 2 7 Jumper Settings 2 Setting Jumper Setting Pull up Pull up Number ae Ee resistor voltage Right N Upper N COM2 Required EXT DCV 2 Ea Upper N COM2 Not required When input signals are used J4 is set to the Right N position a pull up resistor is not required a 13 Mount the pull up resistors for the control output signals when pull up resistors are called out in Table 2 7 NOTE Use the following equation to determine the pull up resistor values Vpfv R kQ SPV 2 5 Where Vp Pull up voltage R Pull up resistor The typical pull up resistor values are Pull Up Voltage Pull Up Resistor HP Part Number PN 0757 0278 PN 0757 0279 PN 0698 3154 PN 0757 0438 2 20 OPERATION Figure 2 12 How to Set Up the Handler Interface Board 2 14 Install the jumpers for the input signals according to Table 2 8 See Figure 2 13 NOTE The drive voltage of the input signals uses the pull up volt age for the control signals Table 2 8 Jumper Settings 3 Drive Voltage Jumper Setting ence Pare 4284A s circuit common 4284A s circuit common EXT DCV 2 6 9V EXT DCV 2 9 15V OPERATION 2 21 Q Ss 3 N Figure
133. 1 standard 488 2 1987 8 2 IFC 7 4 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test 10 12 incoming inspection 1 1 INFINITY 2 7 Initial Settings C 1 INITiate Subsystem 8 43 Input Line Area 2 7 installation 1 1 INT DC BIAS MONITOR BNC Connector 2 5 Integration Time 8 39 Interface Connectors 2 5 Internal Memory EEPROM 5 3 GPIB Command 8 76 Interpolation 4 21 Index 4 LCD Display Test 5 14 LCD Panel 2 2 tcl Key 2 3 Learn Device Setup Query 8 91 LED Display Test 5 14 Level Monitor Accuracy Test 10 6 Limitation of Warranty ix LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page 2 11 LINE Fuse Holder 2 5 LINE Input Receptacle 2 5 LINE On Off Switch 2 2 Line Voltage 1 4 Line Voltage and Fuse Selection 1 4 LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR 2 5 Liquid Crystal Display 2 2 Area Definition 2 6 LIST Subsystem 8 31 LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page 2 10 3 32 List Sweep Measurement Complete Bit 7 25 8 79 8 81 List Sweep Measurement Function 8 31 LIST SWEEP SETUP Page 2 11 448 Load Function BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page 3 30 BIN No DISPLAY Page 3 25 CATALOG Page 5 3 LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page 4 46 LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page 3 35 LIST SWEEP SETUP Page 454 MEAS DISPLAY Page 3 18 MEAS SETUP Page 414 Load Function Test 10 20 LOCAL 7 4 LOCAL LOCKOUT LLO 7 5 L See Parallel Series Circuit Mode LRN Query 8 91 Ls See Parallel Series Circuit Mode Manual Changes A 1 Manual Printing History iii Mass MEMory Subsyst
134. 1 nF e Change 1 kHz MAXIMUM test limit as below Wrong limit 0 081 nF Correct limit 0 81 nF Change 7 Change Performance Test Record for DC Bias Voltage Accuracy Test as follows e Performance test record for DC Bias Voltage Accuracy Test for Hi PW ON at page 10 40 e Change 14V MINIMUM test limit as below Wrong limit 14 012 Correct limit 14 019 e Change 14V MAXIMUM test limit as below Wrong limit 13 988 Correct limit 13 981 e Delete duplicated 40V test which shows 30 040V and 29 960V as test limits from the table Miscellaneous Changes The option system of the 4284A has changed since February 2003 Apply the following changes Old Option Number New Option Number remarks Standard 700 1 Standard Power 2V 20mA 2V DC Bias Add 001 Power Amplifier DC Bias same as the left number 1 2 002 Bias Current Interface same as the left number 2 3 201 Handler Interface same as the left number 3 202 Handler Interface same as the left number 301 Scanner Interface same as the left number 710 Blank Panel 004 Memory Card same as the left number 006 2 m 4 m Cable Length Operation same as the left number 907 Front Handle Kit same as the left number 908 Rack Mount Kit same as the left number 909 Rack Flange and Handle Kit same as the left number 008 Add Operation Manual Japanese 4 ABJ Add Operation Manual Japa
135. 10 17 and 10 19 the first line below Table 10 9 and Table 10 10 change DC to read 1kHz as follows C V Standard s calibration value at 1 kHz Change 4 On Page F 1 change the numbers for the equation term m as follows m 60000 62500 or 75000 Copyright 2012 Agilent Technologies cauTIONS ON OPERATION 1 UNKNOWN MEASUREMENT TERMINALS Do NOT apply DC voltage or current to the UNKNOWN terminals Doing so will damage the 4284A Before you measure a capacitor be sure the capacitor is fully discharged 2 MEMORY CARD Use Agilent Technologies specified memory cards containing 4284A specific data only If other memory cards are used the 4284A may be damaged Non 4284A specific data contained on a memory card is not guaranteed and data may be lost To insert a memory card into the MEMORY card slot hold the memory card with the label facing upward and with the contacts at the slot opening Insert the card into the slot until it clicks in place To remove a memory card from the 4284A press the UNLOCK button and remove the card Do NOT remove a memory card while LOADing or STORing data Doing so may damage the memory card and any data stored in the memory card may be lost Store memory cards in their furnished card cases when not in use The card case protects memory cards from contamination and electrostatic discharge Also store memory cards under the following environmental conditions Storage Tem
136. 2 LOCAL LOCKOUT LLO REMOTE SPOLL SERVICE REQUEST 6 1 6 1 6 2 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 6 7 6 8 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 15 6 15 6 16 6 19 6 19 6 20 6 20 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 28 6 32 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 3 7 4 7 4 7 4 7 4 7 4 7 4 7 5 7 5 7 5 7 5 Contents 7 Contents 8 TRIGGER GET Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI Data Transfer ASCII Format Binary Format Floating Point Format Trigger System Data Buffer Memory Status Byte Enabling the Status Byte Operation Status Register Group Standard Operation Status Condition Register Standard Operation Status Event Register Standard Operation Status Event Enable Register Standard Event Status Register Enabling the Event Status Register Sample Programs Control Settings MEAS SETUP page CORRECTION page a LIMIT TABLE SETUP page LIST SWEEP SETUP page Data Transfer Examples ASCII Format BINARY Format Command Reference Introduction a Notation Conventions and Definitions a Command Structure Command Abbreviations Header and Parameters NRI NR2 NR3 Terminators Program Message Terminators Response Message Terminators Command Reference DISPlay Subsystem PAGE LINE FREQuency Subsystem VOLTage Subsystem CURRent Subsystem AMPLitude Subsystem OUTPut Subsystem High POWer DC ISOLation BIAS Subsystem 7 5 7 6 1 7 1 7
137. 3 8 45 8 49 8 51 8 65 8 14 8 15 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 10 16 10 17 10 18 10 19 10 20 10 21 10 22 E 1 E 2 G 1 G 2 G 3 G 4 Mass MEMory Subsystem Command Tree STATus Subsystem Command Tree Serial Number Plate Test Signal Voltage and Test Frequency u upper Limits to apply measurement accuracy to 2 m and 4 m Cable Length Operation Test Signal Voltage and DC Bias Voltage Upper Limits Apply for Measurement Accuracy Basic Accuracy A 1 of 2 Basic Accuracy A 2 of 2 Temperature Factor Ke Maximum Capacitance Voltage Measurement Time Rack Mount Kits Installation Test Frequency Accuracy Test Setup Test Signal Level Accuracy Test Setup Using a an Interface Box Test Signal Level Accuracy Test Setup Without an Interface Box DC Bias Level Accuracy Test Setup Using a an Interface Box DC Bias Level Accuracy Test Setup Without lt an Interface Box Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Setup Correction Page Setup GPIB Interface Test Setup Bias Interface Simulator Bias Current Interface Function Test Setup Bias Current Interface Function Test Interface Board Locations Jumper Settings Jumper Settings Handler Interface Function Test Set UP Handler Interface Function Check Jumper Settings Handler
138. 4 13 12 11 10 L1002001 2 2 Overview Figure 2 1 Front Panel Overview 1 LINE On Off Power on off switch In the ON position all operating voltages are applied to the instrument In the OFF position NO operating voltages are applied to the instrument 2 LCD The Liquid Crystal Display LCD displays measurement results test conditions etc 3 SOFTKEYs Five softkeys are used to select control and parameter functions Each softkey has a softkey label along its left side 4 MENU Keys Menu selection keys There are three menu keys DISPLAY FORMAT MEAS SETUP and CATALOG SYSTEM The menu keys are used to access the corresponding selection of instrument controls 5 CURSOR Keys The CURSOR keys are used to move the field select cursor from field to field on the LCD display page When the cursor is moved to a field the field changes to an inverse video image of the original field The cursor can only be moved from field to field 6 ENTRY Keys The ENTRY keys are used to enter numeric data into the 4284A The ENTRY keys are composed of the digits 0 to Q a period a minus sign C ENTER and BACK SPACE keys ENTER terminates numeric input data and enters the displayed value on the Input Line second line from the bottom of the LCD screen BACK SPACE deletes one last character of the input value 7 GPIB Status Indicators The GPIB status indicators co
139. 47A s measurement contacts deeply as shown in Figure 6 25 6 30 Measurement Procedure and Examples Figure 6 25 Connecting DUT 6 Perform the measurement Press DISPLAY FORMAT Measurements are performed continuously by the internal trigger and the measured L and R values of the magnetic cored inductor are displayed in large characters as shown in Figure 6 26 EAS DISPLAY gt Co Ls Rs RANGE FQ 100 000 Hz BIAS FL x 10 0mA INTEG Ls 81 7459 uH Rs 0 00741 QA Vm 0 52mV Im gt 10 04mA CORR OPEN SHORT L10603 Figure 6 26 Measurement Results of The Magnetic Cored Inductor Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 31 If the 4284A does The 4284A is working correctly but its measurement results seem NOT Measure strange For example Correctly m The 4284A does not measure at all m Measurement value is strange m Measurement value is strange at a specific frequency point or points These situations may be caused by the incorrect correction data If you come upon these situations use the following procedure to check the instrument 1 Turn correction OFF a Press MEAS SETUP CORRECTION b Move the cursor to the OPEN field and press OFF c Move the cursor to the SHORT field and press OFF d Move the cursor to the LOAD field and press OFF e Press DISPLAY FORMAT and confirm CORR turns OFF
140. 50 060 060 070 070 080 080 090 090 00000 00005 e LIST SETUP DONORA UN LIST SWEEP SETUP page MEAS SETUP lt LIST SWEEP SETUP gt SYS MENU MODE SEQ FREQ Hz 1 00000k 2 00000k 5 00000k 10 0000k 20 0000k 50 0000k 100 000k 200 000k 500 000k 1 00000M brPPDbPDPDPDPIID D L1002006 Figure 2 5 Display Pages 2 3 Overview 2 13 CATALOG SYSTEM MENU MENU DISPLAY EAS CATALOG FORMAT SETUP SYSTE SYSTEM CONFIG page CATALOG page lt SYSTEM CONFIG gt SYS MENU CATA LOG CATA BEEPER lt ON LOG HP IB I F INSTALLED SYSTEM HP IB ADDRESS 1417 CONFIG COMMENT TALK ONLY OFF SYSTEM Cp D Measurements 1kHz CONFIG DC BIAS 001 INSTALLED 0160 1238 ACCESSORY I F 002 INSTALLED Device A CONFIG I BIAS HANDLER I F 201 INSTALLED ON SCANNER I F 301 INSTALLED ON lt CATALOG gt SYS MENU MEDIA CARD No 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Data for 4285A Data for 4285A xX OSGOCOCORBRE Q SELF TEST page lt SELF TEST gt CATA LOG TEST MENU SYSTEM Memory card R W test CONFIG LED display test LCD display test Handler I F test Scanner I F EEPROM R W test Scanner I F I O test Bias Current I F I O test NOORWNHEG L1002007 Figure 2 5 Display Pages 3 3 2 14 Overview
141. 6 3 When the converse is true and the measurement involves a large value of capacitance low impedance Rs has relatively more significance than Rp so the series circuit mode C D or Cs Q should be used Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 5 a oq small C l High Z Rs L1006003 Rp Large C LL b eq Rp Low Z More significant Less significant Rs Less significant More significant Figure 6 3 Capacitance Circuit Mode Selection Selecting Circuit Mode of Inductance The following is a rule of thumb for selecting the circuit mode according to the impedance of the capacitor e Above approx 10 kQ use parallel circuit mode eBelow approx 10 Q use series circuit mode e Between above values follow the manufacturer s recommendation For example to measure a 20 uF capacitor at 1 kHz impedance will be approximately 8 Q the Cs D or C Q function is suitable The following description gives some practical guide lines for selecting the inductance measurement circuit mode Large Inductance modeled by a in Figure 6 4 The reactance at a given frequency is relatively large compared with that of a small inductance so the parallel resistance becomes more significant than the series component So a measurement in the parallel equivalent circuit mode Lp D Lp Q or L G is more suitable Small Inductance modeled by b in Figure 6 4 Conversely for low value
142. 6009 Figure 6 9 Reducing Capacitance to Ground Contact Resistance Contact resistance between the contacting terminals and the DUT causes measurement error when measuring large values of capacitance especially in D dissipation factor measurements When measuring large capacitance values the four terminal measurement contacts have the advantage of less measurement error as compared to the two terminal method Select a test fixture which can hold the DUT tight to stabilize the connection 6 12 Measurement Procedure and Examples Ler Lrot Hrot Heur Leur Leor Hrot Heur a SDDS 0 DUT DUT A Two Terminal Method Four Terminal Method L1006010 Figure 6 10 Contact Resistance Extending Test Leads When extending the four terminal pair test leads to the contacts of DUT make the contacts as shown in Figure 6 11 If the measurement contact cannot be made using the four terminal pair configuration use one of the connection methods shown in Figure 6 12 to make the measurement contact Heur Test Leads Junction Connectors 4 Insulator Extesion Cable L100GOTN Figure 6 11 Extending The Four Terminal Pair Test Leads Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 13 Shielded Two Terminal Connection Hour H por J L ror
143. 68E 5 B 0528798 B 368124 795692 B 9 16435E 5 B 00345303 B 864755 7 70407 B 00115075 B 0475126 BioStar NOTE On the HP 4284A s LCD you can monitor the correction data only for the LOAD correction MEA A B of the FREQ1 2 3 of the indicated channel CH No on the CORRECTION page REGIONAL SALES AND SUPPORT OFFICES For more information about Agilent Technologies test and measurement products applications services and for a current sales office listing visit our web site http www agilent com find tmdir You can also contact one of the following centers and ask for a test and measurement sales representative 11 29 99 United States fax 61 3 9272 0749 Agilent Technologies tel 0 800 738 378 New Zealand Test and Measurement Call Center fax 64 4 802 6881 P O Box 4026 Englewood CO 80155 4026 Asia Pacific tel 1 800 452 4844 Agilent Technologies 24 F Cityplaza One 1111 King s Road Canada Taikoo Shing Hong Kong Agilent Technologies Canada Inc tel 852 3197 7777 5150 Spectrum Way fax 852 2506 9284 Mississauga Ontario L4W 5G1 tel 1 877 894 4414 Europe Agilent Technologies Test amp Measurement European Marketing Organization P O Box 999 1180 AZ Amstelveen The Netherlands tel 31 20 547 9999 Japan Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Call Center 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji Shi Tokyo 192 8510 Japan tel 81 426 56 7832 fax 81 426 56 7840 Latin
144. 7 9 7 10 7 12 7 16 7 20 7 22 7 23 7 24 7 25 7 26 7 27 7 30 7 31 7 31 7 32 7 33 7 34 7 35 7 36 7 36 7 38 8 1 8 1 8 2 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 17 8 17 8 18 8 19 STATe VOLTage CURRent Lo FUNCtion Subsystem IMPedance TY PE IMPedance RAN Ge IMPedance RANGe AUTO Source MONitor VAC Source MONitor IAC DEV lt n gt MODE DEV lt n gt REFerence DEV lt n gt REFerence FILL LIST Subsystem FREQuency VOLTage CURRent BIAS VOLTage BIAS CURRent MODE BAND lt n gt APERture Subsystem TRIGger Subsystem IM Mediate SOURce DELay INITiate Subsystem IMMediate CONTinuous a FETCh Subsystem IMP 2 2 Source MONitor VAC Source MONitor IAC ABORt Subsystem FORMat Subsystem MEMory Subsystem DIM FILL CLEar READ 2 2 CORRection Subsystem LENGth METHod OPEN OPEN STATe SSHORt SSHORt STATe LOAD STATe LOAD TYPE SPOT lt n gt STATe SPOT lt n gt FREQuency SPOT lt n gt O0PEN 8 20 8 21 8 22 8 23 8 24 8 25 8 26 8 27 8 28 8 29 8 30 8 30 8 31 8 32 8 33 8 34 8 35 8 36 8 37 8 38 8 39 8 40 8 40 8 41 8 42 8 43 8 43 8 44 8 45 8 45 8 46 8 46 8 47 8 48 8 49 8 49 8 49 8 50 8 50 8 51 8 52 8 53 8 53 8 54 8 54 8 55 8 56 8 57 8 58 8 59 8 60 Contents 9
145. 70 x 107 x 100 z 0 05 0 05 Daccurac o gt Y 100 0 0005 General Information 9 11 Specification Charts and Tables m 5 wa 100n 1u 100u im IYI 10m 100m 10 IZI 100 15 10 100m 3 Kf o4 J 0 2 4 Yo A2 g OX x 4 a ANT PN amp OK a of 05 D am A4 RS Za aS 0 05 a 0 4 7 Xo A o MR Ko Z Ki o xX Ss Za a a EP Wow gt J S 7 Xo S of J 0 2 4 ion A2 amp S OX gt 0 26 NS S 0 3 4 A3 20 50100 1 10k 100k iM Hz 30k 300k Test Frequency 9 12 General Information L1009 Of1 gal Figure 9 4 Basic Accuracy A 1 of 2 On boundary line apply the better value Example of how to find the A value 0 05 0 1 A value when 0 3 Vims lt Vs lt Ay A value when 0 3 Vims lt Vs lt is MEDIUM and LONG 1 Vims and integration time 1 Vims and integration time is SHORT A value when V lt 0 3 Vims or Vs gt 1 Vims To find the value of Ay A2 A3 and Ay refer to Figure 9 5 Where Vs Test Signal Voltage The following table lists the value of A1 A2 A3 and Ay When Atl is indicated find the Atl value using the following graph Test Signal Voltage
146. 7x M R 0 5 mV 1 03 M R 0 5 mV 0 97xM R 0 5 mV 1 03xM R 0 5 mV 0 97xM R 5 mV 1 03xM R 5 mV 0 97xM R 5 mV 1 03xM R 5 mV 10 38 Performance Tests Multimeter Reading Signal Frequency 960 kHz Hi PW ON Option 001 ONLY PASS FAIL Level Monitor Reading Signal Frequency 960 kHz Hi PW ON Option 001 ONLY OSC MULTIMETER MINIMUM ACTUAL MAXIMUM LEVEL READING 0 97 x M R 0 5 mV 1 03 x M R 0 5 mV 0 97x M R 0 5 mV 1 03x M R 0 5 mV 10 mV 0 97xM R 0 5 mV 1 08x M R 0 5 mV 1V 0 97xM R 5 mV 1 03xM R 5 mV 2 5 V 0 97xM R 5 mV 1 03xM R 5 mV 20 V Performance Tests 10 39 DC Bias Voltage Accuracy Test 4Hi PW OFF PASS FAIL Hi PW ON Option 001 only BIAS VOLTAGE MINIMUM ACTUAL MAXIMUM OV 0 0010 V 0 0010 V 0 1 V 0 0989 V 0 1011 V 2V 1 9970 V 2 0030 V 6V 5 9920 V 6 0080 V 14 V 13 981 V 14 019 V 30 V 29 960 V 30 040 V 40 V 39 950 V 40 050 V 0 1 V 0 1011 V 0 0989 V 2 V 2 0030 V 1 9970 V 6 V 6 0080 V 5 9920 V 14 V 14 012 V 13 988 V 30 V 30 040 V 29 960 V 40 V 30 040 V 29 960 V 40 V 40 050 V 39 950 V 10 40 Performance Tests Impedance Measurement Accuracy 10 pF Standard Test C V OSC Level 510 mV SIGNAL FREQUENCY 12 5 kHz 48 kHz 96 kHz 1 MHz Cp D Cp
147. 8 BNC f to dual banana plug Adapter Agilent PN 1251 2277 Performance Tests 10 9 Procedure 4g Note Note i Y Note Y 10 10 Performance Tests 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 10 4 if the Interface Box is not available use the following cables and adapters as a substitute Figure 10 5 shows the test setup without the interface box The center conductors of Hour and Hpor are connected to the Hi input of the multimeter The center conductors of the Lcur and Lpor are connected to Lo input of the multimeter Cable BNC m to BNC m 30 cm Agilent PN 8120 1838 2 ea Test Lead 2 BNCs m to Agilent PN 8120 1661 3 alligator clips Tee BNC m f f Adapter Agilent PN 1250 0781 2 ea 2 Set the multimeter to DCV 3 Perform a SYSTEM RESET as described in System Reset 4 Set 4284A s controls as follows Test Signal level 0 mV High Power Option OFF DC Bias ON The High Power Mode cannot be changed when the DC Bias is set to ON Set the DC Bias voltage in accordance with Table 10 5 and confirm that the Multimeter readings are within the test limits given in Table 10 5 Table 10 5 DC Bias Level Test Limits Hi PW OFF Bias Level Test Limits 1 5 V 1 425 V to 1 575 V 2 V 1 9 V to 2 1 V Steps 6 through 7 should be performed only when the 4284A is equipped with Option 001 5 set the 4284A s controls as follows Test Signal Level 0 mV High Power Option ON DC
148. 8 51 CURRent Subsystem 8 15 DISPlay Subsystem 8 10 Error B 1 ESE 8 83 FETCh Subsystem 8 45 FORMat Subsystem 8 48 FREQuency Subsystem 8 13 FUNCtion Subsystem 8 23 Header 8 5 INITiate Subsystem 8 43 LIST Subsystem 8 31 Mass MEMory Subsystem 8 76 MEMory Subsystem 8 49 OPC 8 88 OUTPut Subsystem 8 17 Reference 8 1 8 9 RST 8 89 SRE 8 85 STATus Subsystem 8 78 Structure 8 2 SYSTem ERRor Query 8 77 TRG 8 90 TRIGger Subsystem 8 40 VOLTage Subsystem 8 14 WAI 8 88 Command Error CME Bit 7 29 Comment Field 2 6 Comment Input 8 12 Common Commands 7 6 8 82 COMParator Subsystem 8 65 CONTRAST Control Knob 2 3 Control Setting Examples 7 31 Correction Data Measurement Complete Bit 7 25 8 79 8 81 Correction Functions 6 16 CORRECTION Page 2 10 4 18 CORRection Subsystem 8 51 Cp See Parallel Series Circuit Mode Cs See Parallel Series Circuit Mode CURRent Subsystem 8 15 CURSOR Keys 2 3 2 15 Data Buffer 8 49 Memory 7 16 Data Output Format 8 48 Data Transfer 7 7 Examples 7 36 Rate 7 19 DC Bias 3 14 9 17 9 24 9 26 Command 8 17 8 19 DC BIAS Key 2 3 DC Bias Level Accuracy Test 10 9 DCL Device Clear 7 4 DEV A Field See Deviation DEV A Field DEV B Field See Deviation DEV B Field Deviation 4 12 DEV A Field 4 13 DEV B Field 4 14 REF A Field 4 13 REF B Field 4 13 Reference value 4 12 DEVICE CLEAR SDC or DCL 7 4 Device Dependent Messages 7 6 Device Speci
149. 85 vm o 1 234 V Im 56 78mA CORR OPEN SHORT LOAD CBL Om to lock the measurement range Press this Figure 2 7 Softkey Selection Example 2 16 Overview 3 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu Introduction MEAS DISPLAY Page This Chapter provides information about the function of each page of DISPLAY FORMAT The following four display pages can be called from DISPLAY FORMAT MEAS DISPLAY BIN No DISPLAY BIN COUNT DISPLAY LIST SWEEP DISPLAY This Chapter describes the functions on each page in the order of the preceding list When you press DISPLAY FORMAT the MEAS DISPLAY page will be displayed On this MEAS DISPLAY page the measurement results are displayed in large characters and the following measurement controls can be set from this page The field in parenthesis is used to set the control function Measurement Function FUNC Measurement Range RANGE Test Frequency FREQ Oscillator Level LEVEL DC Bias BIAS Integration Time INTEG System Menu SYS MENU There are eight fields on this page MEAS DISPLAY FUNC RANGE FREQ LEVEL BIAS INTEG and SYS MENU Each control function is described in the following paragraphs This page also provides the following information in monitor areas on the displayed page These conditions can be set from the MEAS SETUP page or CORRECTION page For more detail of the following information refer to Chapter 4
150. A s output buffer TRG 10 OUTPUT 717 TRG 20 ENTER 717 A B C 30 PRINT A B C 40 END LRN Query Syntax Query Response Example The LRN query learn device setup query tells the 4284A to send a response that contains all the necessary commands to set the 4284A to its present state The response can later be sent back to the 42844 to place it in this state This provides the user with a means of setting up a device manually and then reading the device setting and storing the information for later use LRN Returned format is FREQ lt NR3 gt VOLT or CURR lt NR3 gt AMPL ALC 0 1 OUTP HPOW 0 1 DC ISOL 0 1 BIAS VOLT or CURR lt NR3 gt STAT 0 1 CORR LENG lt NR1 gt METH SING MULT CORR OPEN STAT 0 1 CORR SHOR STAT 0 1 CORR LOAD STAT 0 1 TYPE lt function gt CORR SPOT1 STAT 0 1 FREQ lt NR3 gt LOAD STAN lt REF A gt lt REF B gt CORR SPOT2 STAT 0 1 FREQ lt NR3 gt LOAD STAN lt REF A gt lt REF B gt CORR SPOT3 STAT 0 1 FREQ lt NR3 gt LOAD STAN lt REF A gt lt REF B gt CORR USE lt NR1 gt FUNC IMP TYPE lt function gt RANG lt NR3 gt RANG AUTO 0 1 FUNC SMON VAC STAT 0 1 FUNC SMON IAC STAT 0 1 FUNC DEV1 MODE ABS PERC OFF REF lt NR3 gt FUNC DEV2 MODE ABS PERC OFF REF lt NR3 gt APER SHOR MED LONG lt NR1 gt TRIG SOUR INT EXT BUS HOLD DEL lt NR3 gt DISP PAGE lt page name gt LINE lt string gt
151. ANGe Returned format is lt value gt lt NL END gt Where lt value gt is 1 10 100 300 1000 3000 10000 30000 100000 1 When Option 001 is installed 10 OUTPUT 717 FUNC IMP RANG 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 25 FUNCtion Subsystem MPedance RANGe AUTO Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 26 Command Reference The IMPedance RANGe AUTO command sets the auto range to ON or OFF The IMPedance RANGe AUTO query returns the current auto range ON OFF condition ON OFF FUNCtion IMPedance RANGe AUTO 0 Where 1 decimal 49 When the function is ON O decimal 48 When the function is OFF OUTPUT 717 FUNC IMP RANG AUTO ON OUTPUT 717 FUNC IMP RANG AUTO 1 FUNCtion IMPedance RANGe AUTO Returned format is lt NR1 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 FUNC IMP RANG AUTO 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END FUNCtion Subsystem Source The Source MONitor VAC command sets the voltage level monitor MONitor VAC to ON or OFF The Source MONitor VAC query returns the voltage level monitor ON OFF condition Command Syntax ON OFF FUNCtion SMONitor VAC STATe 0 Where 1 decimal 49 When the switch is ON O decimal 48 When the switch is OFF Example OUTPUT 717 FUNC SMON VAC ON OUTPUT 717 FUNC SMON VAC 1 Query Syntax FUNCtion SMONitor VAC STATe Query Response Returned format
152. ASSIGN Binary TO 717 FORMAT OFF REMOTE Meter OUTPUT Meter RST CLS OUTPUT Meter FORM REAL 64 Setup OUTPUT Meter MEM DIM DBUF 128 Measurement OUTPUT Meter TRIG SOUR BUS Condition OUTPUT Meter COMP ON OUTPUT Meter MEM FILL DBUF Enable the buffer memory FOR I 0 TO 127 OUTPUT Meter TRIGGER Perform the measurement 128 times NEXT I OUTPUT Meter MEM READ DBUF Transfer data ENTER Binary Header_1 Header_2 Header_3 D Term PRINT D Display the measurement result OUTPUT Meter MEM CLE DBUF Disable the buffer memory END Figure 7 28 Sample Program Buffer Memory Using BINARY Format INTEGER Header_1i Header_2 Header_3 Term DIM D 6 3 ASSIGN Meter TO 717 FORMAT ON ASSIGN Binary TO 717 FORMAT OFF REMOTE Meter OUTPUT Meter RST CLS OUTPUT Meter FORM REAL 64 OUTPUT Meter TRIG SOUR BUS OUTPUT Meter LIST MODE SEQ OUTPUT Meter LIST FREQ 1KHZ 2KHZ 5KHZ 10KHZ 20KHZ 50OKHZ 100KHZ OUTPUT Meter LIST BAND1 A 100 200 Setup OUTPUT Meter LIST BAND2 A 100 200 List OUTPUT Meter LIST BAND3 A 100 200 Sweep OUTPUT Meter LIST BAND4 A 100 200 Table OUTPUT Meter LIST BANDS5 A 100 200 OUTPUT Meter LIST BAND6 A 100 200 OUTPUT Meter LIST BAND7 A 100 200 OUTPUT Meter DISP PAGE LIST OUTPUT Meter INIT CONT ON TRIGGER Meter Perform measurement ENTER Binary Header_1 Header_2 Header_3 D Term Transfer measurement data PRIN
153. BIN 2 low limit value is as same as the BIN 1 high limit value Enter the high limit of the BIN 2 11 Repeat step 5 until the BIN 9 limits are entered After entering the BIN 9 high limit the cursor will be automatically moved to the 2nd LOW field Enter the low limit value of the secondary parameter 12 The cursor will be automatically moved to the 2nd HIGH field Enter the high limit value of the secondary parameter The entry example using the sequential mode is shown below BLE SETUP gt SYS MENU Cp D NOM 100 000 pF EQ AUX ON COMP ON LOW HIGH 100 000pF 110 000 120 000 130 000 140 000 150 000 160 000 170 000 180 000 190 000 0 005 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 L1004025 Figure 4 19 Limit Table Using the Sequential Mode The system menu on this page allows you to perform the following control functions a Load Store a Clear Table a Printer These functions except for the clear table function are the same as the functions in the system menu on the MEAS DISPLAY page A description of each function is given in System Menu in Chapter 3 So in the case of the clear table function the description and procedure are given and in the case of the other functions only the procedure is given MEAS SETUP Menu 4 45 4 46 MEAS SETUP Menu Load Store Function Perform the following steps on the LIMIT TABLE SETUP page to Load Store the contr
154. BINs for the sequence mode of the comparator function These limits can be set only when the limit mode is set to the sequence mode The SEQuence BIN query returns the current settings of the low high limit values of the BINs COMParator SEQuence BIN lt BIN1 low limit gt lt BIN1 high limit gt lt BIN2 high limit gt lt BINn high limit gt Where lt BIN1 low limit gt NR1 NR2 or NR3 format low limit value for BIN1 lt BIN1 high imit gt NR1 NR2 or NR3 format high limit value for BIN1 lt BINn high imit gt NR1 NR2 or NR3 format high limit value for BINn n max 9 The low limit value should be lower than the high limit value OUTPUT 717 COMP SEQ BIN 10 20 30 40 50 COMParator SEQuence BIN Returned Format is lt BIN1 low limit gt lt BIN1 high limit gt lt BIN2 high limit gt lt BINn high limit gt lt NL END gt 10 DIM A 200 20 OUTPUT 717 COMP SEQ BIN 30 ENTER 717 A 40 PRINT A 50 END Secondary LIMit Secondary LIMit Command Syntax Note i 7 Example Query Syntax Query Response Example The Secondary LIMit command sets the low high limit values for the comparator function secondary parameter The Secondary LIMit query returns the current settings of the secondary parameter low high limit values COMParator SLIMit lt low limit gt lt high limit gt Where lt low limit gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format low limit value lt hig
155. Bias ON 6 Set the DC Bias Level in accordance with Table 10 6 and confirm that the Multimeter readings are within the test limits given in Table 10 6 Table 10 6 DC Bias Level Test Limits Hi PW ON Bias Level Test Limits 0V 0 0010 V to 0 0010 V 01V 0 0989 V to 0 1011 V 2 V 1 9970 V to 2 0030 V 6 V 5 9920 V to 6 0080 V 14 V 13 981 V to 14 019 V 30 V 29 960 V to 30 040 V 40 V 39 950 V to 40 050 V 0 1 V 0 1011 V to 0 0989 V 2 V 2 0030 V to 1 9970 V 6 V 6 0080 V to 5 9920 V 14 V 14 019 V to 13 981 V 30 V 30 040 V to 29 960 V 40 V 40 050 V to 39 950 V Performance Tests 10 11 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test This test verifies the 4284A s impedance measurement accuracy coo 3oa g j ooon o one coool mon ta Standard Figure 10 6 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Setup Equipment Procedure 10 12 Performance Tests 10 pF Standard Capacitor 100 pF Standard Capacitor 1000 pF Standard Capacitor 0 01 uF Standard Capacitor 0 1 uF Standard Capacitor 1 uF Standard Capacity Calibration R L Standard Adapter BNC f to BNC f Test Leads 1 m Test Leads 2 m Test Leads 4 m 16382A 16383A 16380A 16384A 16385A 16386A 16380C 16387A 16074A Agilent PN 1250 0080 4 ea 16048A 16048D Option 006 only 16048E Option 006 only 1 Perform a SYST
156. CV 2 COM2 A simplified diagram of the output signals is shown in Figure 2 6 Comparison Signals and Figure 2 7 Control Signals 2 10 OPERATION HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 5V 12V ya CETA rele to t 4 PULL UP RESISTOR Ka 7 mae 2 TIP wo IT w E O O19 9 v2 V CIRCUIT COMMON HANDLER INTERFACE CONNECTOR EXT DCV BIN1I BIN2 BINS OUT_OF_BIN AUX_BIN PH 1 UNBAL COM 1 Factory shipped jumper setting Figure 2 6 Simplified Diagram of The Comparison Output Signals OPERATION 2 11 Q gei e N _ HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD HANDLER INTERFACE CONNECTOR oe EXT DCV 2 ALARM INDEX 7EOM COM 2 CIRCUIT COMMON Factory shipped jumper setting Figure 2 7 Simplified Diagram of The Control Output Signals DC Isolated Input Optocoupled The electrical characteristics of the DC isolated input are divided into two types 1 EXT_TRIG The EXT_TRIG signal pins 12 and 13 is connected to the cathode of the LED in an optocoupler The HP 4284A is triggered on the rising edge of the EXT_TRIG pulse The anode of the LED can be powered from the internal 5 V and 12 V supplies or by an external voltage source EXT DCV2 NOTE To limit the trigger current jumper J6 must be selected considering the optocoupler anode voltage being used See page 2 15 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 2 12 OPERATI
157. D Cs Q R X ZI 6 Small C Ce D Cp G G B Y 9 Lo Rp Lp D Lp Q G B M 68 Small L Ls Rs Ls D Ls Q R X ZI 9 Small R L1006021 Figure 6 18 Typical Characteristics of Components Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 23 Capacitor Measurements Caution y AN Do not apply DC voltage or current to the UNKNOWN terminals Doing so will damage the 4284A Before you measure a capacitor be sure the capacitor is fully discharged Note A Note al Note This paragraph describes practical example of measuring a 470 pF ceramic capacitor The basic procedure flow to perform this measurement is the same as the BASIC MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE described previously In this example a 470 pF ceramic capacitor will be measured under the following conditions Sample DUT 470 pF ceramic capacitor Agilent Part Number 0160 3335 Measurement Conditions Function Cp D Frequency 1 MHz Test Signal Level 1 5 V 1 Turn the 4284A ON 2 Setup the 4284A s measurement conditions by filling in the fields on the MEAS DISPLAY page Set FREQ field to 1 MHz and LEVEL field to 1 5 V The other functions including the measurement function are left as the default settings a Move the cursor to the FREQ field The current measurement frequency 1 00000kHz is displayed in this field b Press G 1
158. D data performed data FRQ1L OFF OPEN data Not SHORT Not Not Not performed data performed performed performed Test Freq FRQ2 0N FRQ2 Not FRQ2 Not FRQ2 Not FRQ2 OPEN data performed SHORT performed LOAD data performed data FRQ2 OFF OPEN data Not SHORT Not Not Not performed data performed performed performed Test Freq FRQ3 0N FRQ3 Not FRQ3 Not FRQ3 Not FRQ3 OPEN data performed SHORT performed LOAD data performed data FRQ3 OFF OPEN data Not SHORT Not Not Not performed data performed performed performed Test Freq FRQ1 0N_ OPEN data Not SHORT Not Not Not FRQ1 2 3 FREQ2 0N performed data performed performed performed FRQ3 ON FRQ1L OFF OPEN data Not SHORT Not Not Not FRQ2 0FF performed data performed performed performed FRQ3 OFF Test Freq Test frequency OPEN data OPEN interpolation correction data SHORT data SHORT interpolation correction data FREQ1 2 3 OPEN data OPEN correction data at FREQI 2 3 frequency FREQ1 2 3 SHORT data SHORT correction data at FREQI 2 3 frequency FREQ1 2 3 LOAD data LOAD correction data at FREQI 2 3 frequency D 2 Correction Data Multi Channel Correction Mode To use the multi channel correction mode Option 301 Scanner Interface must be installed and the scanner interface function should be set to ON from the SYSTEM CONFIG page When the correction mode is set to MULTI only FREQ1 FREQ2 FREQ3 correction data is used for correction If the settings of the FREQ1
159. DE Measurement Function for LOAD Correction FUNC Frequency 1 2 3 for OPEN SHORT LOAD Correction FREQ1 FREQ2 and FREQ3 m Reference Values A B at each three frequencies for LOAD Correction REF A B Cable Length Selection CABLE m System Menu SYS MENU There are seventeen available fields on this page lt CORRECTION gt SYS MENU OPEN SHORT LOAD CABLE MODE FUNC FREQI REF A B FREQ2 REF A B FREQ3 REF A and B These controls are described in the following paragraphs This page also provides the following monitor information the monitor area looks like a field but it is not a Actual Measurement Values for LOAD Correction a Channel Number on the MULTI Correction Mode The actual measurement values for LOAD Correction can be measured from the FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3S fields on this page and the channel number can be set using the scanner interface connector or GPIB The available fields and the softkeys which are corresponded with each field on this page are shown in Figure 4 8 and Figure 4 9 11004006 lt CORR ECT ITON gt OPEN SHORT LOAD Qi ON Figure
160. EM RESET as described on in System Reset 2 Press the MEAS SETUP MENU key and the CORRECTION softkey to display the CORRECTION page 3 Set the CORRECTION page as shown in Figure 10 7 Note Note CORRECTION page C CORRECTION MEAS OPEN _ON CABLE Om SETUP SHORT ON MODE SINGLE LOAD OFF cH No a CORREC C ODT Fion FReat OFF REF aL oE B LIMIT MEA Ari oit BR DDD TABLE Freo2 OFF PEF At Bd LIST MEA Ait STITT LBZ O ma FREQ3 OFF SETUP REF aA E eD MEA Aii O TSSID 0 Br aan Field Any Setting 1 Monitor Figure 10 7 Correction Page Setup a It takes approx 90 s each to store the OPEN CORRECTION data and the SHORT CORRECTION data 10 11 Connect the OPEN termination to the 4284A s UNKNOWN terminals Move the cursor to the OPEN field Press the MEAS OPEN softkey to store the open correction data Connect the SHORT termination to the 4284A s UNKNOWN terminals Move the cursor to the SHORT field Press the MEAS SHORT softkey to store the short correction data Set the 4284A to the Manual Trigger mode Perform Steps 12 through 14 for the all standards and settings listed in Table 10 7 a Test signal level is set to 5 1 V only when the 4284A is equipped with 3 Option 001 12 13 Connect the Standard to the 4284A s UNKNOWN terminals Press
161. EN data OPEN correction data at FREQI 2 3 frequency FREQ1 2 3 SHORT data SHORT correction data at FREQI 2 3 frequency FREQ1 2 3 LOAD data LOAD correction data at FREQI 2 3 frequency Correction Data D 3 CORRECTION To set the correction function or to obtain the correction data use FUNCTION SETTIN the following summary of the correction function setting fields with S G their GPIB commands given in the short form A through F shown in the figure correspond to the description of each field CORRECTION Page 4 B 0 a lt CORRECT TON gt SYS MENU ee OPE ON CABL 1m SHORT ON Y MODE MULTI Y LOAD ON y CH No 10 D _ FUNC Cp D Soon ee FREQ1 Pt 00000kHz REF A 100 000pF B 0 00010 LIMIT B EA A 100 001pF B 0 00011 ABLE FREQ2 f10 0000kHz REF A 100 020pF B 0 00012 F MEA A 100 021pF B 0 00013 Eip FREQS 100 000kHz REF A 100 040pF B 0 00014 EA A 100 041pF B 0 00015 Hoodoo1 Field Field Softkey Command Description A OPEN ON CORR OPEN STAT ON Performs OPEN correction using OPEN OFF CORR OPEN STAT OFF MEAS CORR OPEN OPEN B SHORT ON CORR SHOR STAT ON OFF CORR SHOR STAT OFF MEAS CORR SHOR C LOAD ON CORR LOAD STAT ON OFF CORR LOAD STAT OFF D 4 Correction Data data or FREQ1 2 3 OPEN data N
162. ENCY 20 Hz Cp C V 2 83 nF C V 1 2 83 nF 125 Hz Cp C V 2 1 11 nF C V 1 11 nF 1 kHz Cp C V 0 081 nF C V 0 081 nF C V t 1 0005xC V C V 2 1 0002xC V OSC Level 20 mV PASS FAIL OSC Level 5 1 V Option 001 only PASS FAIL 100 9 Standard C V Cal Value at 1 DC OSC Level 510 mV SIGNAL MINIMUM ACTUAL MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 20 Hz R C V 0 285 Q C V 0 285 Q 125 Hz R C V 0 112 Q C V 0 112 Q 1 kHz R C V 0 082 Q C V 0 082 Q 12 5 kHz R C V 0 132 Q C V 0 132 Q 48 kHz R C V 0 132 Q C V 0 132 Q 96 kHz R C V 0 132 Q C V 0 132 Q 1 MHz R C V 0 154 Q C V 0 154 Q OSC Level 20 mV PASS FAIL OSC Level 5 1 V Option 001 only PASS FAIL Performance Tests 10 45 1k Q Standard C V Cal Value at1 kHz OSC Level 510 mV SIGNAL MINIMUM ACTUAL MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 20 Hz R C V 2 81 Q C V 2 81 Q 125 Hz R C V 1 11 Q C V 1 11 Q 1 kHz R C V 0 81 Q C V 0 81 Q 12 5 kHz R C V 1 31 Q C V 1 31 Q 48 kHz R C V 1 31 Q C V 1 31 Q 96 kHz R C V 1 31 Q C V 1 31 Q 1 MHz R C V 1 02 Q C V 1 02 Q OSC Level 20 mV PASS FAIL 1m Cable Length PASS FAIL Operation 2m Cable Length PASS FAIL Operation Option 006 only 4 m Cable Length PASS FAIL Operation Option 006 only Store andLoad PASS FAIL Function Test GPIB Interface Test PASS FAIL Bias Current Interfac
163. ET MODE SEQ FREQ 1KHZ 2KHZ 5KHZ 10KHZ 20KHZ 50KHZ 100KHZ 200KHZ 500KHZ 1MHZ BAND1 BAND2 BAND3 BAND4 BANDS BAND6 BAND7 BANDS BAND9 A 100 200 A 100 200 A 100 200 A 100 200 A 100 200 A 100 200 A 100 200 A 100 200 A 100 200 BAND10 A 100 200 Figure 7 23 LIST SWEEP SETUP Remote Control 7 35 Data Transfer Examples The 4284A has two data transfer formats ASCII and BINARY This 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 paragraph includes sample programs for each ASCII Format The sample programs using the ASCII data format are in the following three patterns m Measurement data transfer when the comparator function of the limit table is set to ON Figure 7 24 m Measurement data transfer using the buffer memory function when the comparator function of the limit table is set to ON Figure 7 25 m Measurement data transfer when the list sweep measurement is performed Figure 7 26 ASSIGN Meter TO 717 REMOTE Meter OUTPUT Meter RST CLS OUTPUT Meter FORM ASCII Setup OUTPUT Meter TRIG SOUR BUS Measurement OUTPUT Meter COMP ON Condition OUTPUT Meter INIT CONT ON FOR I 0 TO 9 TRIGGER Meter Perform measurement ENTER Meter A B C D Transfer data to controller PRINT A B C D Print measurement result NEXT I END Figure 7 24 Sample Program Comparator Using ASCII Format 7 36 Remote Control DIM D 127 3 ASSIGN Meter TO 717
164. F TEST page as the SYS MENU field When the cursor is set on the SYS MENU field common system functions which are not displayed on the display pages for example LOAD STORE function or controls which cannot be set on a display page s fields are made available Comment Line Area The comment line area is used to display comment messages sent via the GPIB bus using the DISPlay LINE command or entered on the MEAS SETUP page using the 0 to 9 C period minus keys Up to 30 characters can be displayed The comment line area is displayed on the following pages MEAS DISPLAY BIN No DISPLAY LIST SWEEP DISPLAY MEAS SETUP Note Y a LIST SWEEP SETUP a SYSTEM CONFIG Softkey Area The last six character positions of each line are reserved for softkey labels The softkeys displayed correspond to the field at the cursor s position on the LCD Measurement Data Conditions Area This area is where measurement results and measurement conditions are displayed Under certain conditions one of the following messages may be displayed instead of the measurement results UNBAL This message is displayed when the impedance of the device exceeds the range of the analog measurement circuit s capability ADC ERR This message is displayed when the A D converter in the measurement circuit is not functioning This message is displayed and is called overflow when the analog measurement circuit ca
165. HORT LOAD correction function 43 Measurement failed Measurement error for example bridge unbalance occurred during the correction data measurement Confirm measurement condition and measurement contacts then re measure 44 Correction data protected Correction data write protected by DIP switch A7SW3 Refer to Appendix E Set bit 6 of DIP switch A7SW3 to the OFF position and retry 45 Valid in single mode only Illegal operation OPEN SHORT correction data for 48 frequency points measured when the MULTI channel correction mode is set Set to SINGLE mode first or perform OPEN SHORT data measurements at FREQ1 3 46 Correction memory error Correction data write error Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office 50 Clear the table first Illegal operation MODE of the LIMIT TABLE changed when the table exists Clear the table first 51 Inconsistent limit setting Illegal operation COMParator SEQuence command sent when the TOLerance mode is set or the COMParator TOLerance command was sent when the SEQuence mode is set Set TOLerance or SEQuence mode appropriately 60 No values in sweep list Illegal operation LIST SWEEP measurement performed when no sweep point settings exist in the LIST SWEEP SETUP Set sweep points in the LIST SWEEP SETUP first Error and Warning Messages B 5 Error Displayed
166. Hz 1 95313 kHz 1 93548 kHz 1 92308 kHz 1 89394 kHz 1 87500 kHz 1 83824 kHz 1 82927 kHz 1 81818 kHz 1 78571 kHz 1 76471 kHz 1 74419 kHz 1 73611 kHz 1 71429 kHz 1 70455 kHz 1 68919 kHz 1 66667 kHz 1 64474 kHz 1 63043 kHz 1 62612 kHz 1 60256 kHz 1 59574 kHz 1 57895 kHz 1 56250 kHz 1 53846 kHz 1 53061 kHz 1 52439 kHz 1 50000 kHz 1 48810 kHz 1 47059 kHz 1 46341 kHz 1 45349 kHz 1 44231 kHz 1 42857 kHz 1 42045 kHz 1 41509 kHz 1 39535 kHz 1 38889 kHz 1 36364 kHz 1 35870 kHz 1 33929 kHz 1 32979 kHz 1 31579 kHz 1 30435 kHz 1 30208 kHz 1 29310 kHz 1 27660 kHz 1 27551 kHz 1 27119 kHz 1 25000 kHz 1 22951 kHz 1 22549 kHz 1 22449 kHz 1 20968 kHz 1 20192 kHz 1 20000 kHz 1 19048 kHz 1 17925 kHz 1 17647 kHz 1 17188 kHz 1 15741 kHz 1 15385 kHz 1 13637 kHz 1 13208 kHz 1 11940 kHz 1 11607 kHz 1 11111 kHz 1 10294 kHz 1 09649 kHz 1 09090 kHz 1 08696 kHz 1 07759 kHz 1 07143 kHz 1 05932 kHz 1 05634 kHz 1 05263 kHz 1 04167 kHz 1 03448 kHz 1 02740 kHz 1 02459 kHz 1 01695 kHz 1 01351 kHz 1 00806 kHz 1 00000 kHz Test Frequency Point F 3 G Transient States Caused by Measurement Condition Changes Introduction The 4284A s internal circuit may enter a transient state due to changes in measurement conditions In a transient state the 4284A will not meet its specifications So in this case a delay time DELAY field must be inserted into the measurement cycle until the 4284A is no longer in a trans
167. Hz 100 kHz 1 MHz INCR This softkey is the fine frequency increment softkey used to increment the current test frequency to the next sequentially higher frequency point There are 10 frequency points between successive decade values The sequential frequency points which can be set using this softkey are as follows 20 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 25 Hz 120 Hz 1 2 kHz 12 kHz 120 kHz 30 Hz 150 Hz 1 5 kHz 15 kHz 150 kHz 40 Hz 200 Hz 2 kHz 20 kHz 200 kHz 50 Hz 250 Hz 2 5 kHz 25 kHz 250 kHz 60 Hz 300 Hz 3 kHz 30 kHz 300 kHz 80 Hz 400 Hz 4 kHz 40 kHz 400 kHz 500 Hz 5 kHz 50 kHz 500 kHz 600 Hz 6 kHz 60kHz 600 kHz 800 Hz 8 kHz 80 kHz 800 kHz DECR This softkey is the fine frequency decrement softkey used to decrease the test frequency to the next sequentially lower frequency point There are ten frequency points between successive decade values The frequency points set using this softkey are the same values as set using INCR DECR This softkey is the coarse frequency decrement softkey which is used to decrement the test frequency to the next sequentially lower tenth value The frequency points set using this softkey are the same as the frequency points set using INCR f 2 Select and set the test frequency using either the softkeys or the numeric entry keys When the test frequency is entered using the numeric entry keys the softkey labels are changed to the available DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 11 Oscillator Level
168. II Option 201 is installed 202 ASCII Option 202 is installed 0 ASCII Option 201 and 202 are not installed lt scanner I F gt is 301 ASCII Option 301 is installed Option 301 is not installed This string data is the arbitrary ASCII response So this command should not be sent before a normal query in a program message For example OPT FREQ can not accepted FREQ OPT should be sent 10 OUTPUT 717 OPT 20 ENTER 717 A 30 END General Information Introduction This chapter describes specifications supplemental performance characteristics storage repackaging and other general information about the 4284A Components not Covered by Warranty The memory card is not covered under the 4284A s warranty If the memory card becomes defective even within the warranty period of the 4284A the memory card must be paid for by the user Serial Number Agilent Technologies uses a two section nine character serial number which is stamped on the serial number plate Figure 9 1 attached to the instrument s rear panel The first four digits and a letter are the serial number prefix and the last five digits are the suffix The letter placed between the two sections identifies the country where the instrument was manufactured The prefix is the same for all identical instruments it changes only when a change is made to the instrument The suffix however is assigned sequentially and
169. INS indicate IN OUT judg ments for each sweep point refer to Figure 2 4 AUX_BIN indicates pass fail judgment one or more failed judgments of Steps 1 to 10 occurred during a single sweep These signals are output when the sweep measurement is completed e Control Output Signals INDEX analog measurement completed signal and EOM end of measurement signal The timing when INDEX and EOM are asserted is as follows different from that used for the comparator function e in the SEQ sweep mode INDEX is asserted when the last step of an analog mea surement of a sweep measurement is completed EOM is asserted when all of the comparison results are valid after a sweep measurement e In the STEP sweep mode INDEX is asserted after each step of analog measurement in a sweep measurement is completed EOM is asserted after each step measurement including comparison time is completed The contact assignments and a brief description of signals used for the list sweep function are given in Tabie 2 2 and Figure 2 2 pin assignments for the list sweep comparator function are the same as for the comparator function The timing diagram is shown in Figure 2 5 NOTE The back slash in the signal name means that the signal is asserted when LOW 2 6 OPERATION Table 2 2 Contact Assignments for List Sweep Comparator Function Failed out of limit at sweep Point 1 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 2 Failed out o
170. INTERFACE BOARD 2 11 Sea eee aes SECTION 3 OPERATION INTRODUCTION 3 1 BASIC PROCEDURE 3 1 ACTIVATING SCANNER INTERFACE 3 3 CORRECTION MODE 3 4 TEST FREQUENCY AND REFERENCE VALUE ENTRY a oun CORRECTION DATA SELECTION Channel Selection Using Interface Connector Channel Selection Using HP IB Monitoring Current Channel CORRECTION DATA MEASUREMENTS ACTIVATING THE CORRECTION FUNCTION CORRECTION DATA CONFIRMATION CO WW WW H ONN O SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION INTRODUCTION This operation note provides the information necessary to use the HP 4284A Precision LCR Meter Option 301 Scanner Interface Refer to the HP 4284A Operation Manual for specific HP 4284A operating procedures DESCRIPTION When the HP 4284A is used with the Option 301 Scanner Inter face up to 128 sets of correction measurement data OPEN SHORT and LOAD for up to 3 user defined frequencies can be stored and used These 128 sets of correction data can be used for each measurement using the multi correction func tion modeled in Figure 1 1 The HP 4284A can correct for stray admittance residual impedance and other errors for each chan nel from the calibration plane depends on the CABLE LENGTH selected to the connection contacts at the device Option 301 uses an Amphenol 14 pin connector to interface between the HP 4284A and the scanner Therefore an Option 301 HP 4284A can accurately measure impedance values without any degr
171. Interface Function Test Set up Handler Interface Function Check SW1 and SW2 settings Scanner Simulator Connections AT Board Location A7 Digital Board Location Write Protection Switch Required Delay Time After Changing the Measurement Range 1 Required Delay Time After Changing the Measurement Range 2 Required Delay Times After Changing the Measurement Range 3 Required Delay Times After Changing the DC Bias 1 Loe Loe eee 8 76 8 78 9 1 9 7 9 8 9 12 9 13 9 15 9 22 9 26 9 27 10 5 10 6 10 6 10 9 10 9 10 12 10 13 10 21 10 23 10 24 10 25 10 26 10 27 10 28 10 28 10 29 10 31 10 31 10 32 10 34 10 34 10 36 E 2 E 3 G 3 G 4 G 5 G 6 Contents 19 Contents 20 G 5 Required Delay Time After Changing the DC Bias G 6 Required Delay Times For Short Circuit Recovery 1 G 8 G 7 Required Delay Times For Short Circuit Recovery 2 G 9 G 8 Short Circuit Recovery Delay Times 3 G 10 Tables 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 4 1 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 1 7 8 1 8 2 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 4284A Contents Line Voltage Selection Fuse Selection Rack Mount Kits Measurement Function Oscillator Level and Resolution Std Oscillator Level and Resolution Opt 001 DC bias and Resolution Opt 001 DC Bias and
172. Introduction This appendix lists all available test frequency points from 1 kHz to 1 MHz Frequency Points The available test frequency points from 1 kHz to 1 MHz are as listed from the next page The available test frequency points below 1 kHz 20 Hz to 1 kHz can be calculated using the following formula m F Hz 7 Where m 6000 6250 or 7500 n 13 to 3750 Integer Test Frequency Point F 1 1 00000 MHz 960 000 kHz 800 000 kHz 666 667 kHz 640 000 kHz 600 000 kHz 500 000 kHz 480 000 kHz 400 000 kHz 333 333 kHz 320 000 kHz 300 000 kHz 250 000 kHz 240 000 kHz 200 000 kHz 166 667 kHz 160 000 kHz 150 000 kHz 125 000 kHz 120 000 kHz 100 000 kHz 96 0000 kHz 85 7143 kHz 83 3333 kHz 80 0000 kHz 75 0000 kHz 72 4286 kHz 68 5714 kHz 66 6666 kHz 62 5000 kHz 60 0000 kHz 59 5556 kHz 54 5455 kHz 53 3333 kHz 50 0000 kHz 48 0000 kHz 46 1538 kHz 45 4545 kHz 43 6364 kHz 42 8571 kHz 41 6667 kHz 40 0000 kHz 38 4615 kHz 37 5000 kHz 36 9231 kHz 35 7143 kHz 35 2941 kHz 34 2857 kHz 33 3333 kHz 32 0000 kHz 31 5789 kHz 31 2500 kHz 30 0000 kHz F 2 Test Frequency Point 29 4118 kHz 28 5714 kHz 28 2353 kHz 27 7778 kHz 27 2727 kHz 26 6667 kHz 26 3158 kHz 26 0870 kHz 25 2632 kHz 25 0000 kHz 24 0000 kHz 23 8095 kHz 23 0769 kHz 22 8571 kHz 22 7272 kHz 22 2222 kHz 21 8182 kHz 21 7391 kHz 21 4286 kHz 20 8696 kHz 20 8333 kHz 20 6897 kHz 20 0000 kHz 19 2308 kHz 18 7500 kHz 18 4615 kHz 17 8571 kHz 17 6471
173. LAY System Menu SYS MENU Deviation Measurement A Mode DEV A Deviation Measurement B Mode DEV B Reference Value for the Deviation Measurement A REF A Reference Value for the Deviation Measurement B REF B Some fields on the MEAS SETUP page are the same as the fields on the MEAS DISPLAY page as follows So these fields are not described in this Chapter and the other functions on the MEAS SETUP page are described in the following paragraphs MEAS SETUP Menu 4 1 Measurement Function FUNC Measurement Range RANGE Test Frequency FREQ Oscillator Level LEVEL DC Bias BIAS Integration Time INTEG The available fields and the softkeys which corresponded to each field on this page are shown in Figure 4 1 and Figure 4 2 U Cp D 1 00000kHz y 1 00 V INI O ms 123 450 p O 00005 L1094001 Figure 4 1 Available Fields on the MEAS SETUP Page 4 2 MEAS SETUP Menu L1004002 lt MEAS SETUP gt MEAS SETUP CORRECTION LIMIT TABLE LIST SETUP Cp D Cp a Cp Cp Rp more 1 6 gt Cs D Cs Q Cs Rs more 2 6 gt r Lp D F Le a F
174. LOAD correction reference data and actual data at each frequency m Control settings on the SYSTEM CONFIG page o Beeper on off o GPIB address o Talk Only on off o Handler I F on off o Scanner I F on off Perform the following steps to store the control settings to the internal non volatile memory or to the external memory card 1 Select and set all control settings on the MEAS DISPLAY page 2 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 3 Insert a memory card in the MEMORY card slot if you are going to store the data to the memory card 4 Press STORE The message Enter record number to STORE will be displayed on the system message line 5 Enter a record number using the numeric entry keys and ENTER to store the current control settings Then when the record is stored in the internal EEPROM the record number can be set from 0 to 9 When the record is stored in the memory card record numbers from 10 to 19 can be set used Perform the following steps to load the control settings from the internal non volatile memory or from an external memory card 1 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 2 Insert the memory card into the MEMORY card slot if you are going to use a memory card DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 19 Note i Y 3 20 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 Press LOAD The message Enter record number to LOAD will be displayed on the system message line 4 Enter record number you want to load using the numeric entry
175. LOCAL LOCKOUT 7 REMOTE REMOTE sets the 4284A to the remote mode When this command is sent front panel with the exception of LCL will be disabled For example REMOTE 717 SPOLL SPOLL is the serial polling command SPOLL is used to place the status byte of the addressed instrument on the bus The eight bits of the status byte can be masked off and read to determine the 4284A s operating state For example Var SPOLL 717 SERVICE REQUEST The 4284A can send an SRQ Service Request control signal when it requires the controller to perform a task An SRQ can be thought of as an interrupt which informs the controller that information is ready to be transmitted or that an error condition exists in the instrument When the 4284A sends an SRQ it also sets Bit 6 of the status byte Bit 6 is the RQS Request Service bit sometimes referred to as the status bit in connection with polling When the 4284A is serially polled it clears the RQS bit and the SRQ line one of the five management control lines of the system interface Any bit in the status byte can initiate an SRQ The status byte may be masked by the user to determine which bits caused the 4284A to set the SRQ line For more information on the status byte refer to Status Byte TRIGGER GET Enables the 4284A to the TRIGGER bus command This command may be sent to a selected device or to all devices addressed as listeners on the GPIB bus The 4284A must first b
176. Lay MAX Returned Format is lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG DEL 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END INITiate Subsystem INITiate Subsystem The INITiate subsystem command group controls initiation of the triggering system Figure 8 9 shows the command tree of the INITiate subsystem command group INI Tiate IMMediate CONTinuous O O L2o09014 Figure 8 9 INITiate Subsystem Command Tree IMMediate The IMMediate command changes the trigger state to the IDLE STATE to the WAIT FOR TRIGGER STATE for one trigger sequence For details refer to Trigger System in Chapter 7 Command Syntax INITiate IMMediate Example OUTPUT 717 INIT OUTPUT 717 INIT IMM Command Reference 8 43 INITiate Subsystem CONTinuous Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 44 Command Reference The CONTinuous command sets the trigger system to the CONTinuous ON or OFF condition In the CONTinuous ON condition after reading the measurement data by a controller the IDLE STATE is automatically set to the WAIT FOR TRIGGER STATE For details refer to Trigger System in Chapter 7 The CONTinuous query responds the current condition of the CONTinuous ON or OFF ON OFF INITiate CONTinuous 0 Where 1 decimal 49 When the function is ON O decimal 48 When the function is OFF OUTPUT 717 INIT CONT ON INIT
177. Lp G F Lp Re more 3 6 7 Ls D Ls Q Ls Rs more 4 63 i R Z 8l deg Z 8 rad more 5 6 7 r G B r Y 8 deg F Y 8 rad more 6 6 4 FREQ INCR ft INCR t DECR Numer ic Entry DECR Q DECR Ob LEVEL INCR ff Numeric Entry SYS MENU M CLEAR SETUP PRINT DISP SYSTEM RESET more 2 2 CANCEL more 1 2 l AUTO HOLD INCR ff DECR 4 INCR tf DECR J AVG INCR ff H DECR JL ON Numeric Entry Numeric Entry Numeric Entry MEASURE Numeric Entry p n u m more 1 2 gt more 2 2 A more 2 2 more Figure 4 2 Available Softkeys on the MEAS SETUP Page MEAS SETUP Menu 4 3 Comment Note i Y Trigger Mode 4 4 MEAS SETUP Menu Description You can enter a comment using the numeric entry keys 0 to minus period on the comment line field This comment line is stored to the internal non volatile memory or to the external memory card with the 4284A control settings Also this comment line is loaded from the internal non volatile memory or from the external memory card with the control settings A comment can be up to 30 characters long When you want to enter the ASCII characters on the comment line only the DISPlay LINE GPIB command must be sent via GPIB Front Panel Operation for Entering a Comment Number Perform the following
178. Message e Description Solution 61 Clear the table first e Illegal operation the sweep parameter of the LIST SWEEP SETUP is changed when the sweep list for other parameter exists Clear the existing list first 62 Bias off Turn bias on Illegal operation DC bias sweep was attempted while the DC BIAS is OFF Press to set DC bias to on 70 Handler I F not installed Illegal operation HANDLER I F set to ON when Option 201 or 202 was not installed Install Option 201 or 202 Illegal operation HANDLER I F test was performed when Option 201 or 202 were not installed Install Option 201 or 202 71 Scanner I F not installed Illegal operation SCANNER I F set to ON when Option 301 was not installed Install Option 301 Illegal operation Scanner I F EEPROM R W test or Scanner I F I O test were performed when Option 301 was not installed Install Option 301 72 GPIB I F not installed Illegal operation GPIB interface used when Option 109 was installed Install the GPIB interface 73 I BIAS I F not installed Illegal operation BIAS Current I F I O test performed when Option 002 is not installed Install the Option 002 Bias Current interface 74 Illegal test setup Illegal operation ACCESSORY CONTROL I F test performed when the 4284A and the 42841A are connected with the accessory control interface cable Discon
179. Monitor on off Deviation Measurement A B AABS A off Deviation Measurement A B Reference Value Bias Current Isolation on off ontrol settings on the LIMIT TABLE page E Q Measurement Function Swap Parameter Nominal Value Limit Mode for the Primary Parameter Auxiliary Bin on off Comparator Function on off Low High Limits for Each Bin m Control setting on the BIN COUNT DISPLAY page Bin Count Capability on off ontrol settings on the LIST SWEEP SETUP page E Q Sweep Mode All Sweep Points All Low High Limits including the limit mode A or B a Comment Line a Display page format Note Note Y Y ON OFF condition on the front panel cannot be stored in non volatile memory When the memory card is inserted into the MEMORY card slot and the 4284A is turned on the 4284A s Auto Load function will load the control settings stored in record number 10 If there are no control settings stored in record number 10 the power on default settings will be used the same ones loaded without the memory card The following items are stored in internal nonvolatile memory without using the load store function m Control settings on the CORRECTION page o OPEN SHORT LOAD correction on off o OPEN SHORT correction data for all test frequencies o OPEN SHORT LOAD correction data at FREQ 1 FREQ 2 FREQ 3 OPEN correction data at each frequency SHORT correction data at each frequency and
180. NCEL m PRINT DISP BIN No BIN COUNT LIST SWEEP CLEAR TABLE more 2 2 CANCEL more 1 2 4 rn ru rm more 1 2 A more 2 2 more 1 2 SWAP PARAM H Numeric Entry p k P more 2 2 TOL ABS TOL SEQ MODE CLEAR LINE CLEAR LINE Numeric Entry Numeric Entry p Fn Hu Hm more 1 2 gt more 2 2 L more 1 2 more 2 2 more 2 2 more sa A more 2 2 more a L1004014 Figure 4 16 Available Softkeys on the LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page Swap Parameter Function Description The swap parameter function is used to swap the primary parameter for the secondary parameter in the FUNC field For example when the measurement function is C D the swap parameter function sets the measurement function to D C Refer to Figure 4 17 Then the comparison limits for D are a maximum of nine pairs of comparison limits and the comparison limits for Cp are now one pair 4 36 MEAS SETUP Menu Limit Mode for Comparator Primary Secondary Primary Secondary Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter D Swap Parameter LRG Figure 4 17 Swap Parameter Function Front Panel Operation for Swapping the Primary Parameter for the Secondary Parameter Perform the following steps to swap the primary parameter for the secondary parameter 1 Move the cursor to the FUNC field The following softkey will be displayed m SWAP PARAM
181. ON O asi fa N _ 2 KEY_LOCK The KEY_LOCK signal pin 25 is connected to the cathode of the LED in an optocoupler All of the HP 4284A s front panel keys are disabled when the KEY_LOCK signal is asserted The LED s anode can be connected to the internal 5V or 12V supplies or can be connected to an external voltage source EXT DCV2 which is connected to pin 15 or 16 on the handler interface connector The OFF state voltage high level of the KEY_LOCK pin 25 and EXT_TRIG pins 12 13 signals depends on the pull up voltage selected using jumper J4 A diagram for the input signals is shown in Figure 2 8 The electrical characteristics of the signals are listed in Table 2 4 HANDLER INTERFACE CONNECTOR HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD H12V 5V Factory shipped jumper setting NOTE If the internal pull up voltage is selected COM2 circuit common must be connect ed to the HP 4284A s circuit common by setting jumper J5 to right position Figure 2 8 Handler Interface input Signal Diagram OPERATION 2 13 Table 2 4 Typical Electrical Characteristics Input Voltage Input Current Low Pull up Voltage iow mon ov vray ar internal Pull up Voltage HP 4284A circuit common EXT_TRIG lt 1V 5V 15V 4 114 1mA 10 5mA 13 5mA KEY_LOCK ae 14 5mA 18 5mA External Pull up Voltage COM2 Internal Pull up Voltage HP 4284A circuit common External
182. ORR TOL NOM 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END COMParator Subsystem TOLerance BIN lt n gt Command Syntax Note i 7 Example Query Syntax Query Resopnse Example The TOLerance BIN lt n gt command sets the low high limit values of each BIN for the comparator function tolerance mode These limits can be set only when the limit mode is set to the tolerance mode The TOLerance BIN lt n gt query returns the current settings of the low high limit values of each of the BINs COMParator TOLerance BIN lt n gt lt low limit gt lt high limit gt Where lt n gt 1 to 9 NR1 BIN number lt low limit gt NR1 NR2 or NR3 format low limit value lt high imit gt NR1 NR2 or NR3 format high limit value The low limit value should be lower than the high limit value If the low limit value is set higher than the high limit a warning message is displayed when this command is received an error does not occur OUTPUT 717 COMP TOL BIN1 5 5 OUTPUT 717 COMP TOL BIN2 10 10 COMParator TOLerance BIN lt n gt Returned Format is lt low limit gt lt high imit gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 COMP TOL BIN1 20 ENTER 717 4 B 30 PRINT A B 40 END Command Reference 8 69 COMParator Subsystem SEQuence BIN Command Syntax Note i 7 Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 70 Command Reference The SEQuence BIN command sets the low high limit values of the
183. OT enter a value which is lower than the LOW limit into the HIGH limit in the tolerance sorting mode If you do the warning message Warning Improper high low limits will be displayed this isn t an error and the 4284A will not sort a DUT into the BINs you specify The limit values for sequential mode sorting can be set without setting the lower higher limits of BIN1 For example a BIN 1 Low Limit L1 only BIN 2 High Limit H2 BIN 3 High Limit H3 L1 H2 H3 BIN 1 BIN 2 O BIN 3 O OUT OF BINS e O L1004022 a BIN 1 High Limit H1 only BIN 2 High Limit H2 BIN 3 High Limit H3 H1 H2 H3S BIN 1 e BIN 2 O BIN 3 O OUT OF BINS O L1004023 MEAS SETUP Menu 4 43 4 44 MEAS SETUP Menu BIN 2 High Limit H2 BIN 3 High Limit H3 BIN 2 _ BIN 3 O OUT OF BINS O Lie04024 Front Panel Operation for Setting the Low High Limits Perform the following steps to set the bin sorting limits 1 Set the measurement function for the comparator function the nominal value and the the limit mode for the primary parameter Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field and perform the clear table function Move the cursor to the BIN 1 LOW field When you use the tolerance mode perform steps 4 through 7 When you use the sequential mode perform steps 8 through 12 Tolerance Mode is used
184. OTE The assertion level of the following signals is selected by the jumper settings W3 through W13 Refer to SECTION 3 for jumper setting details The contact assignments and a brief description of each signal used for the comparator function are given in Table 2 1 and Fig ure 2 2 The timing diagram is shown in Figure 2 3 Table 2 1 Pin Assignments For Comparator Function 1 Common Isolated Common 2 Bin sorting results Opto lsolated 3 open collector output 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 e EOC End of Conversion A D output l BIN10 Bin 10 Sorting result same as BINO 9 1 ion i 6 7 5 V output when jumper W1 is installed 8 ER BUSY BUSY conversion calculation output 2 2 OPERATION Primary parameter O oO 5 N O N ZS Secondary parameter Figure 2 1 BINO BIN10 Limit Map For The Comparator Function HHHHH E 19 36 NO CONNECTION HHHH E HHH HHHHH es iY NC 5V WHEN W1 JUMPERED TIATA ATTTITTT Signal information used for the list sweep comparator function is different from that used for the compara tor function Figure 2 2 Handler Interface Connector Pin Assignments OPERATION 2 3 W8 12 or aes W9 10 13 l START IN TE i W8 13 or Wws 10 12 Data Valid I t 1 t g Data Previous Data Valid i a measurement i a measurement Measurement Timing Delay 7 A Display 1
185. OWN Terminals and short the measurement contacts together Press MEAS SHORT The 4284A will measure the short impedance inductance and resistance at the preset frequency points The time required to measure the short correction data is approximately 90 s During the SHORT correction measure cycle the following softkey is available m ABORT This softkey is used to stop the short correction data measurement The previous SHORT correction data is still stored 3 Press ON to perform SHORT correction calculations on subsequent measurements when the FREQ1 FREQ2 and FREQ3 fields are set to OFF When the FREQ1 FREQ2 and FREQ3 fields are set to ON and the test frequency is equal to FREQ1 2 3 the SHORT correction data at FREQ1 2 3 is used Refer to Appendix D 4 Press OFF to halt SHORT correction calculations on subsequent measurements Description The 4284A s LOAD correction capability corrects for the other errors by using the transmission coefficient derived from the relationship between a standard s premeasured reference value to the actual measurement value at the frequency points you specify up to three frequency points So OPEN SHORT LOAD corrections can be performed at the frequency points you specify Refer to Figure 4 13 The three frequency points can be set in the FREQ1 FREQ2 and FREQS fields The standard s reference values are set in the REF A and B fields Before entering the standard s reference
186. P 001 a Bias current interface Option 002 installed not installed 7 BIAS I F 002 a 2m 4m cable operation Option 006 installed not installed 2m 4m CABLE 006 a Handler Interface Option 201 or 202 installed not installed HANDLER I F 201 or 202 m Scanner Interface Option 301 installed not installed SCANNER I F 301 The available fields and the softkeys which correspond to each field on this page are shown in Figure 5 4 and Figure 5 5 Catalog System Configuration 5 5 I O ER AM I BIAS I em 4m CABLE HANDLER I SCANNER I L1005003 Figure 5 4 Available Fields on the SYSTEM CONFIG Page 5 6 Catalog System Configuration lt SYSTEM CONFIG gt CATALOG SYS MENU PRINT DISP SYSTEM CONFIG SELF TEST BEEPER ON OFF HP IB ADDRESS Numeric Data only TALK ONLY ON OFF HANDLER I F SCANNER I F L1005004 Figure 5 5 Available Softkeys on the SYSTEM CONFIG Page Beeper Function ON OFF Description The 4284A has a beeper which it beeps if any of the following conditions occur m ADCERR is displayed m An error has occurred m Warning message is displayed m Correction data measurement at 48 preset
187. PAN TABLE OF CONTENTS Le SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS h mh h t i h h SS SECTION 2 OPERATION INTRODUCTION 2 1 SIGNAL LINE DEFINITION 2 1 Signal Line Used for Comparator Function 2 1 Signal Line Used for List Sweep Comparator Function 2 5 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS 2 9 DC isolated Outputs 2 9 DC Isolated Inputs 2 1 OPERATION 2 1 Setting Procedure For Comparator Function 2 14 Setting Procedure For List Sweep Comparator Function 2 15 cae SS re SECTION 3 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD INTRODUCTION GENERAL CONFIGURATION General Configuration Procedure CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES Standard Configuration Palomar Model M16 Palomar Model M11 Q Corporation RTR2 Isumeca 83 EA Model M015 1 i 6 tt 4 t sate st O N N WD SO a w a g u O R Ww HH SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION INTRODUCTION This operation note provides the information necessary to use the HP 4284A precision LCR Meter Option 202 Handler Interface Refer to the HP 4284A Operation Manual for HP 4284A specific operating procedures O ge 5 53 N e N DESCRIPTION The Option 202 Handler Interface can be configured to physically and electrically interface the HP 4284A to the following compo nent handlers Palomar Model M16 Handler Palomar Model M11 Handler Q Corporation RTR2 Handler lsumeca 83 Handler EA Model M015 Handler The HP 4284A Option 202 is a Handler Interface
188. PEN SHORT LOAD correction at the frequencies you specify can performed The FREQ1 FREQ2 and FREQ3 frequency points are dependent on the correction mode SINGLE MULTI This MODE field allows you to select the single correction mode or the multi correction mode For more information about the multi correction mode refer to Chapter 3 option 301 scanner interface operation note In the case of the multi correction mode the channel number for selecting the correction data is displayed at the CH No monitor area Front Panel Operation for Setting the Correction Mode to the Multi Correction Mode 1 Press CATALOG SYSTEM and SYSTEM CONFIG to display the SYSTEM CONFIG page 2 Move the cursor to the SCANNER INTERFACE SETTING field 3 Press ON to make the scanner interface function valid 4 Press MEAS SETUP and CORRECTION to return to the CORRECTION page 5 Move the cursor to the MODE field The following softkeys will be displayed m SINGLE m MULTI 6 Press MULTI to select the multi correction mode If you want to set the single correction mode press SINGLE MEAS SETUP Menu 4 31 Cable Length Selection System Menu 4 32 MEAS SETUP Menu Description The 4284A has two reference planes to the UNKNOWN Terminals 0m and to the end of the 16048A B test leads 1m When Option 006 2m 4m Cable Length Operation is installed the 4284A has four reference planes to the UNKNOWN Terminals 0m to the
189. Performance Tests 10 23 Note a DC power for the bias interface simulator can be supplied from the 4284A instead of from an external DC power supply For further details see Supplying DC Power to the Simulator 3 Interconnect the bias interface simulator and bias interface connector on the rear panel of the 4284A with the bias interface cable as shown in Figure 10 10 BIAS VF SIMULATOR DC POWER SUPPLY GND edt DA Idi TES 4284A To BIAS CURRENT INTERFACE olloa o e Connector o ooo oo onon a ogojo co0009 o 5 5 CO C Figure 10 10 Bias Current Interface Function Test Setup Note Y 10 24 Performance Tests Turn the 4284A ON Press the CATALOG SYSTEM MENU key Press the SELF TEST softkey to display the SELF TEST page Use the CURSOR arrow keys to move the cursor to the TEST MENU field Press the 7 and the keys to select the Bias Current I F I O test Check the settings of S1 and 2 described in the step 1 if the 4284A s LCD displays E74 Illegal test setup 10 11 12 Confirm the RESET LED on the bias interface simulator turns ON Confirm CS0 and CS1 LEDs on the simulator turn ON as the 4284A s output signal is displayed on the LCD Refe
190. Q and 100 kQ When Option 001 is installed the 4284A has nine measurement ranges 10 100 1000 3000 1 kQ 3 KQ 10 KQ 30 kQ and 100 kQ The measurement range is selected according to the DUT s impedance even if measurement parameter is capacitance or inductance Figure 3 3 shows the display range and effective measuring range for each measurement range while in the impedance mode Z R X For example 50 kQ DUT impedance can be measured using from the 100 Q to the 30 kQ range but the 4284A s measurement accuracy specification is only met by using the 30 kQ range If this DUT is measured by the 100 kQ range UNBAL will be displayed Displays UNBAL Unmeasurable Displays AANA AAA ANA AAAS Displays UNBAL Unmeasurable i ll i ll ll ll li 3k Wk 30k 100k 1M 10M 100M Impedance a Effective Measuring Range 4 Displayable Range LPW Figure 3 3 Effective Measuring Range for Each Measurement Range Figure 3 4 and Figure 3 5 show the effective measuring range of each measurement range in which the 4284A s measurement accuracy meets its specification When the measurement range is set manually the optimum measurement range should be selected by matching the DUT s impedance to the effective measuring range shown in Figure 3 4 and Figure 3 5 When the measurement range is set to AUTO the opt
191. RECTION must be performed completely described in Cable Length Selection in Chapter 4 LCR Meter CABLE LENGTH 1 m OPEN SHORT NY we 16048A 1m Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 17 m Precise measurements to be referenced to a working standard Use the working standard as the LOAD reference DUT and perform the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction LCR Meter OPEN SHORT LOAD oom Standard for LOAD correction xw v 16047A m Measurements using a test fixture that has complicated impedance characteristics In this case use the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction When you combine a scanner the 4284A with Option 301 scanner interface provides powerful error correction functions for up to three sets of OPEN SHORT LOAD correction data for 128 channels OPEN SHORT LOAD a Standard LCR Meter for LOAD correction Scanner 6 18 Measurement Procedure and Examples Performing OPEN Correction Performing SHORT Correction To perform an OPEN correction data measurement set up an OPEN condition nothing is connected to the test fixture When the OPEN measurement is being performed don t touch or move your hands near the test fixture To perform a SHORT correction data measurement set up a SHORT condition u
192. RX Sets function to R X CSQ Sets function to Cs Q ZTD Sets function to Z 0 deg CSRS Sets function to Cs Rs ZTR Sets function to Z rad LPQ Sets function to Lp Q GB Sets function to G B LPD Sets function to Lp D YTD Sets function to Y deg LPG Sets function to Lp G YTR Sets function to Y rad Example OUTPUT 717 FUNC IMP GB Set to the G B function Query Syntax FUNCtion IMPedance TYPE Query Response Returned format is lt function gt lt NL END gt Example 10 OUTPUT 717 FUNC IMP 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END 8 24 Command Reference FUNCtion Subsystem MPedance RANGe Command Syntax Note a Y Example Query Syntax Query Response Example The IMPedance RANGe command sets the measurement range Any value can be used as the setting value The 4284A selects an appropriate measurement range for the setting value The IMPedance RANGe query returns the current measurement range even if the measurement range is set to AUTO Refer to Appendix G FUNCtion IMPedance RANGe lt value gt Where lt value gt is the impedance value of DUT in the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format A suffix multiplier and a suffix unit OHM can be used with this command If this command is received while auto range is ON the auto range function is automatically set to OFF and the range will be held at the range dictated by the received command OUTPUT 717 FUNC IMP RANG SKOHM FUNCtion IMPedance R
193. Regulatory compliance information This product complies with the essential requirements of the following applicable European Directives and carries the CE marking accordingly The Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC amended by 93 68 EEC The EMC Directive 89 336 EEC amended by 93 68 EEC To obtain Declaration of Conformity please contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office agent or distributor MANUAL CHANGES 4284A MANUAL IDENTIFICATION Precision LCR Meter Date Printed January 2000 A Part Number 04284 90040 Operation Manual This supplement contains information for correcting manual errors and for adapting the manual to newer instruments that contains improvements or modifications not documented in the existing manual To use this supplement 1 Make all ERRATA corrections 2 Make all appropriate serial number related changes listed below SERIAL PREFIX OR NUMBER MAKE MANUAL SERIAL PREFIX OR NUMBER MAKE MANUAL CHANGES CHANGES CHANGES 1 CHANGE 1 contains the information needed to adapt the 4284A s manual MODEL 4284A PRECISION LCR METER OPTION 201 HANDLER INTERFACE OPERATION NOTE Page 2 6 Signal Line Used for List Sweep Comparator Function Change the description as follows Comparison Output Signals BIN1 BIN9 and AUX_BIN indicate IN OUT judgements for each sweep point refer to Figure 2 4 OUT_OF_BINS indicates pass fail judgement one or more failed judgements of Steps 1 to 10 occurred durin
194. SETUP Menu 4 11 Level Monitor Function Note 4g Deviation Measurement Function 4 12 MEAS SETUP Menu Description The level monitor function allows you to monitor the actual voltage level across the device under test or the actual current level though the device under test The voltage monitor value is only displayed on the MEAS DISPLAY page at Vm monitor area The current monitor value is only displayed on the MEAS DISPLAY page at Im monitor area The correction function interacts with the level monitor function So the monitor value may be changed by the correction data change or the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction ON OFF condition change Front Panel Operation for Setting the Level Monitor Function Perform the following steps to set the level monitor function to ON or OFF 1 Move the cursor to the Vn field The following softkeys will be displayed m ON m OFF 2 Press ON to set the voltage level monitor function to ON Press OFF to set the voltage level monitor function to off 3 Move the cursor to the Im field The following softkeys will be displayed m ON m OFF 4 Press ON to set the current level monitor function to ON Press OFF to set the current level monitor function to OFF Description The deviation measurement function allows you to display the deviation value instead of the actual measurement value The deviation value is the value calculated by taking the difference between the actual meas
195. SPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 31 Keylock Function Perform the following steps to disable all front panel operations on the BIN COUNT DISPLAY page m Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field m Press more 1 3 and press more 2 3 m Press KEY LOCK a toggle type softkey The key mark will be displayed on the left side of KEY LOCK and the message Keys locked will be displayed on the system message line m Press KEY LOCK again if you want to enable the front panel keys LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page 3 32 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu The 4284A s LIST SWEEP function permits entry of up to ten frequencies signal levels or DC bias levels and the measurement limits on the LIST SWEEP SETUP page under the MEAS SETUP page These points are automatically swept and the measurement results are compared to the limits set When you press DISPLAY FORMAT and LIST SWEEP the LIST SWEEP DISPLAY page will be displayed On the LIST SWEEP DISPLAY page the sweep points are swept and the measurement results are compared to the limits During a sweep an asterisk mark will appears on the left side of the current measuring list sweep point The following measurement controls can be set from this page Each field in parenthesis is used when that control is set m Sweep Mode of the List sweep Measurement MODE m System Menu SYS MENU So there are three fields on this page lt LIST SWEEP DISPLAY gt MODE and SYS MENU fields The system menu is descri
196. Standard ygs or an equivalent standards group or 2 calibrated directly by an authorized calibration organization such as NBS The calibration cycle depends on the stability specification of each component Performance Tests 10 1 Performance Test Record Note Calibration Cycle 10 2 Performance Tests Y Record the results of each performance test in the Performance T est Record located at the end of this chapter The performance record lists each test parameters tested and acceptable tolerance limits Keep a record of past performance test results for comparison purposes to help indicate any possible areas of developing trouble The test limits indicated in each performance test do not take into account the measurement errors induced by the st equipment used Be sure to consider this when determining whether or not the 4284A meets is indicated specifications The 4284A required periodic performance verification How often you verify performance depends on the operating and envioremental conditions Check the 4284A using the performance tests described in this chapter at least once a year To minimize instrument down time and to ensure optimum operation perform preventive maintenance and calibration at least twice a year Table 10 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Requirements Recommmended Model Electronic Counter RMS Voltmeter DC Voltmeter Standard Capacitor Standar
197. T BAND1 A 10 20 OUTPUT 717 LIST BAND3 OFF LIST BAND lt n gt Returned format is lt parameter gt lt low limit n gt lt high limit n gt 10 DIM A 30 20 OUTPUT 717 LIST BAND3 30 ENTER 717 A 40 PRINT A 50 END APERture Subsystem APERture The APERture command sets the integration time of the A D Subsystem converter and the averaging rate The APERture query returns the current integration time and the averaging rate settings Command Syntax SHORt APERture 4 MEDium lt value gt LONG Where SHORt Short integration time MEDium Medium integration time LONG Long integration time lt value gt 1 to 128 NR1 Averaging rate Example OUTPUT 717 APER SHOR OUTPUT 717 APER MED 64 Query Syntax APERture Query Response Returned format is SHOR MED lt NR1 gt lt NL7END gt LONG Example 10 OUTPUT 717 APER 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 39 TRIGger Subsystem The TRIGger subsystem command group is used to enable a measurement or a sweep measurement and to set the trigger mode and the trigger delay time Figure 8 8 shows the command tree of the TRIGger subsystem command group TRIGger IMMediate m SOURce INTernal ExTernal BUS HOLD Flay lt value gt MIN MAX L2009013 Figure 8 8 TRIGger Subsystem Command Tree IMMediate The IMMediate command causes the trigger to execute a measurement or a
198. T D Display measurement data END Figure 7 29 Sample Program List Sweep Using BINARY Format Remote Control 7 39 Command Reference Introduction Notation Conventions and Definitions This chapter provides descriptions of all the 4284A s available GPIB commands which correspond to Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments scPr command sets listed in functional subsystem order Use this chapter as a reference Each command description contains the following paragraphs Field A field name corresponding to a SCPI command Command Syntax The way you must type in the command including all of the required and optional parameters Query Syntax The way you must type in the query including all of the required and optional parameters Query Response 4284A s response data format Example A case serving as a typical model for the more common uses of the command The following conventions and definitions are used in this chapter to describe GPIB operation lt gt Angular brackets enclose words or characters that are used to symbolize a program code parameter or an GPIB command Square brackets indicates that the enclosed items are optional The square brackets with the asterisk for example lt value gt means the enclosed item lt value gt repeats until the maximum counted number When several items are enclosed by braces one and only one of these elements may be selected The
199. TA SELECTION The correction data for each scanner channel is stored in the internal memory and each set of correction data is assigned a channel number To select correction data the channel number must be set using the CHO to CH7 signals and the CH_ VALID signal on the rear panel connector or the CORRection USE com mand via HP IB Channel Selection Using Interface Connector The channel number correction data selection can be selected with the channel selection signals CHO to CH7 and the channel valid signal CH_ VALID The CHO to CH7 signals are the 8 bit binary signals CHO is the LSB and CH7 is the MSB For example JCHO CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CHANNEL No 1 O 0 0 0 0 0 O 1 O 1 O 0 0 O 0 O 2 0 O 1 0 0 O 0 O 4 0 0 O 1 0 O O O 8 0 0 O 0 1 0 0 O 16 0 O 0 0 0 1 0 0 32 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 o 64 1 1 1 1 1 0 127 1 LOW 0 HIGH If CH_VALID is set to HIGH when the channel number is set using the CHO to CH7 signals the HP 4284A cannot acknowledge the channel number and the HP 4284A will use the currently specified correction data 3 6 OPERATION NOTE ge a 3 C9 ok In case of the channel number selection using the interface connector when the HP 4284A is triggered or when the HP 4284A starts a correction data measurement for exam ple when the MEAS OPEN softkey is pressed the HP 4284A acknowledges the channel number So if CHO to CH7 signal and CH_VALID signal a
200. TALOG page 5 4 Catalog System Configuration SYSTEM CONFIG Page 2 Insert the memory card into the MEMORY card slot if you are going to purge the settings from a memory card 3 Press more 1 2 and PURGE The message Enter record number to PURGE will be displayed on the system message line 4 Use the numeric entry keys and ENTER to enter the record number at which the control settings will be PURGED When you press CATALOG SYSTEM and SYSTEM CONFIG the SYSTEM CONFIG page will be displayed On this SYSTEM CONFIG page the status of GPIB interface and the options are displayed and the following control functions can be set from this page The field in parenthesis is used to set the control function m Beeper function ON OFF BEEPER m GPIB address GPIB ADDRESS a GPIB talk only mode ON OFF TALK ONLY m Handler Interface Option 201 or 202 ON OFF HANDLER I F m Scanner Interface Option 301 ON OFF SCANNER I F m System Menu SYS MENU So there are seven fields on this page lt SYSTEM CONFIG gt BEEPER GPIB ADDRESS TALK ONLY HANDLER IJF SCANNER I F and SYS MENU fields Each control function is described in the following paragraphs This page also the following information as a monitor These conditions is set depending on the status of the options installed in the instrument a GPIB interface installed not installed GPIB I F a Power Amplifier Option 001 installed not installed POWER AM
201. TEST gt and TEST MENU Each test is described in the following paragraphs The available fields and the softkeys which corresponded to the field on this page are shown in Figure 5 7 and Figure 5 8 Catalog System Configuration 5 11 EST M emory card ED display tes LCD display tes Handler I F tes Scanner ROM R W test Scanner I F 1 0 test Bias Current I F I O test L1005005 Figure 5 7 Available Fields on the SELF TEST Page lt SELF TEST gt CATALOG SYSTEM CONFIG SELF TEST TEST MENU Numeric Data only TEST START Lo END Figure 5 8 Available Softkeys on the SELF TEST Page L1005006 5 12 Catalog System Configuration Memory Card R W Test Description This test is used to check the read and write functions of the memory card When this test is started a bit pattern is written to the lower address of the memory card then pattern is read back and checked This write pattern check is repeated from the low to high memory addresses How to Perform the Memory Card R W Test Perform the following steps to perform the memory card R W test 1 Move the cursor to the TEST MENU field on the SELF TEST page 2 Press 1 and ENTER to select test number 1 The MEMORY CARD R W TEST screen will be displayed and the following information indicating the address of
202. TION Chapter 6 Measurement Basics Chapter 7 Remote Control Chapter 8 Command Reference Chapter 9 General Information Chapter 10 Performance Test vi This manual the Operation Manual for the 4284A Precision LCR Meter contains ten chapters plus appendixes organized for the convenience of the first time user After you receive your 4284A begin with Chapter 1 Chapter 1 provides unpacking initial inspection and preparation information necessary for you to know before you apply AC power Chapter 2 provides information including a product overview and a tour of the front panel which will help you to quickly learn how to operate the 4284A Chapter 3 provides detailed information for the display format and measurement function corresponding to DISPLAY FORMAT menu key Chapter 4 provides detailed information for the measurement condition setup corresponding to MEAS SETUP menu key Chapter 5 provides detailed information for the internal external memory and system configuration catalog of the 4284A corresponding to CATALOG SYSTEM menu key Chapter 6 provides the basic measurement procedure with the general impedance theory and measurement techniques and practical measurement examples Chapter 7 provides information to control the 4284A using the GPIB interface Chapter 8 provides detailed information for each of the 4284A GPIB commands Chapter 9 provides the specifications rack mount handle kit
203. TION The CORRECTION page will now be displayed c Move the cursor to the OPEN field ON OFF and MEAS OPEN will be displayed d Press MEAS OPEN to perform the OPEN correction data measurement Wait until the message OPEN measurement completed is displayed on the system message line e Press ON to set the OPEN correction function to ON f Connect a shorting bar to the 16047A to set up the SHORT condition as shown in Figure 6 20 Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 25 Figure 6 20 Connecting A Shorting Bar g Move the cursor to the SHORT field ON OFF and MEAS SHORT will be displayed h Press MEAS SHORT to perform the SHORT correction data measurement Wait until the message SHORT measurement completed is displayed on the system message line i Press ON to set the SHORT correction function to ON 5 Connect DUT to the test fixture Insert the DUT into the 16047A s measurement contacts deeply as shown in Figure 6 21 6 26 Measurement Procedure and Examples Figure 6 21 Connecting DUT 6 Perform the measurement Press DISPLAY FORMAT Measurements are performed continuously by the internal trigger and the capacitors measured C and D values are displayed as large characters as shown in Figure
204. TRIG between 9V to 15V or J4 is set to the center position Trigger current limiting resister is 5119 This position should be set when EXT DCV2 is between 6V to 9V Trigger current limiting resister is 3162 This position should be set when EXT DCV2 is between 5V to 6V or J4 is set to left position When shipped from the factory each jumper is set to the N position marked N on the handler interface board OPERATION 2 15 Procedure 2 16 OPERATION NOTE When the internal 5V pin 16 18 of the handler interface connector is used by the handler either jumper J2 or J5 must be set to lower position and either COM1 or COM2 must be used as the 5 V common Figure 2 9 Jumper Locations To set up the jumpers and pull up resistors perform the following steps 1 Disconnect the power cable from the HP 4284A and allow enough time a few minutes for the internal capacitors to discharge DANGEROUS ENERGY VOLTAGE EXISTS WHEN THE HP 4284A IS IN OPERATION AND JUST AFTER IT S POWERED DOWN ALLOW A FEW MINUTES FOR THE INTERNAL CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE 2 Disconnect the two rear feet which lock the top cover and rear panel together 3 Fully loosen the top cover retaining screws located on the rear of the top cover 4 Slide the top cover towards the rear and lift it off The top shield plate will be visible 5 Remove the top shield plate to expose the PC boards 6 Disconnec
205. The power on default display page is the MEAS DISPLAY page For more information under DISPLAY FORMAT refer to Chapter 3 MEAS SETUP MENU key This MENU key has the following four pages a MEAS SETUP a CORRECTION a LIMIT TABLE SETUP 2 8 Overview a LIST SWEEP SETUP These display pages are used for setting the measurement conditions including the correction function or setting the bin sorting limits When one of these display pages are being displayed the 4284A cannot perform measurement and also cannot perform bin sorting judgments The 4284A can only measure a device under test and can perform the bin judgments from the display pages under DISPLAY FORMAT When is pressed the MEAS SETUP page must be displayed and the softkeys used to select the other three pages are displayed The cursor will be positioned at the MEAS SETUP field For more information about MEAS SETUP refer to Chapter 3 CATALOG SYSTEM menu key This MENU key has the following three pages a CATALOG a SYSTEM CONFIGURATION a SELF TEST These display pages are used for operating conditions other than main measurement control When CATALOG SYSTEM is pressed the CATALOG page will be displayed and the softkeys used to select the other two pages are displayed The cursor will be positioned at the CATALOG field For more information about CATALOG SYSTEM refer to Chapter 5 Starting from the next paragraph a summary for each display page w
206. UT OF BIN count gt lt AUX BIN count gt lt NL7END gt Where lt BIN1 9 count gt NRI format count result of BINI 9 lt OUT OF BINS count gt NRI format count result of OUT OF BINS lt AUX BIN count gt NRI format count result of AUX BIN 10 OPTION BASE 1 20 DIM A 11 30 OUTPUT 717 COMP BIN COUN DATA 40 ENTER 717 A 50 PRINT A 60 END BIN COUNt CLEar Command Syntax Example The BIN COUNt CLEar command clears all BIN counts COMParator BIN COUNt CLEar OUTPUT 717 COMP BIN COUN CLE Command Reference 8 75 Mass MEMory Subsystem 2009019 The Mass MEMory subsystem command group loads or stores setting data from to the internal EEPROM and the external memory card Figure 8 14 shows the command tree of the Mass MEMory subsystem command group e lt record number gt e lt record number gt Figure 8 14 Mass MEMory Subsystem Command Tree LOAD STATe Command Syntax Example The LOAD STATe command loads the setting data from the internal EEPROM or a memory card MMEMory LOAD STATe lt value gt Where lt value gt O to 9 NR1 record number for internal EEPROM 10 to 19 NR1 record number for memory card OUTPUT 717 MMEM LOAD STAT 10 STORe STATe Command Syntax Example 8 76 Command Reference The STORe STATe command stores the setting data to the internal EEPROM or to the memory card MMEMory STORe STATe lt value
207. adation of repeatability or differences between channels Timing synchronization is also provided OPEN SHORT LOAD XY HY correction correction correction W ka Case NX 59 oy Figure 1 1 Multi Correction Data Memory Model GENERAL INFORMATION 1 1 xe T O 3 w O SPECIFICATIONS Table 1 1 and 1 2 list the HP 4284A Option 301 specifications and supplemental performance characteristics Other specifications are the same as those for a standard HP 4284A Table 1 1 Specifications Interface Connector Amphenol 14 pin connector Maximum Number of Channels 128 Output signal INDEX Analog measurement complete 1 bit EOM Full measurement complete 1 bit Input Signal CHO to CH7 8 bit parallel input signals for selecting the channel CH_VALID Signal valid or invalid for CHO to CH7 EXT TRIG External trigger signal 1 bit Multi Channel Correction The multi channel correction function can store OPEN SHORT LOAD correction data for each channel independently and correct each channel The correction data at 3 test frequencies can be taken and stored in non volatile memory 1 2 GENERAL INFORMATION Table 1 2 Supplemental Performance Characteristics gt ma W O oS Electrical Characteristics Input Signal Characteristics Opto isolated negative true Signal Name input fare jay External High Pull up Voltage CHO to CH7 Pull up lt 5 to 15 V 5 to 20 mA CH_VALID V
208. age Example SYSTEM RESET Function This function allows you to set all of the control settings to the power on default values For more detail information about the default settings refer to Appendix C Perform the following steps to execute the SYSTEM RESET function 1 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field on the MEAS SETUP page 2 Press more 1 2 3 Press SYSTEM RESET The message Resetting system Are you sure will be displayed and the following softkeys will be displayed m YES NO 4 16 MEAS SETUP Menu 4 Press YES to reset the 4284A MEAS SETUP Menu 4 17 CORRECTION Page 4 18 MEAS SETUP Menu When you press MEAS SETUP and CORRECTION the CORRECTION page will be displayed On the CORRECTION page the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction for correcting the stray admittance the residual impedance and the other errors can be performed and also the cable length can be selected The correction function has two kinds of correction methods In one method the open and short correction can be performed at all of the frequency points using the interpolation method and in the other method the open short and load correction can be performed at the frequency points you specify The following operations can be performed from this page The field is in parenthesis OPEN Correction OPEN SHORT Correction SHORT LOAD Correction LOAD Cable Length Selection CABLE Multi Single Correction Mode Selection MO
209. al memory card or load the control settings from the internal non volatile memory or the external memory card 1 Set all controls 2 ON the BIN No DISPLAY page move the cursor to the SYS MENU field using the CURSOR keys 3 If you are going to store the settings on a memory card insert a memory card to the MEMORY card slot DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 25 4 Press STORE when you want to use the STORE function The message Enter record number to STORE will be displayed on the system message line Press LOAD when you want to use the LOAD function Then the Enter record number to LOAD will be displayed on the system message line 5 Use the numeric entry keys and ENTER to enter the record number at which the current control settings will be STORED to or LOADED from Printer Function Perform the following steps to print out the displayed page or the measurement data using the PRINT DISP mode or PRINT DATA mode 1 Connect the 4284A to the printer using an GPIB cable 2 Set the printer to the listen only mode 3 Set the talk only mode to ON on the SYSTEM CONFIG page 4 Press DISPLAY FORMAT and press BIN No to display the BIN No DISPLAY page Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 6 Press more 1 2 Or 7 Press PRINT DISP when you want to print out the displayed page The displayed page is printed out as shown in Figure 3 8 Press PRINT DATA when you want to print out the measurement data The marker will
210. aler Betrieb nach DIN 45635 T 19 Manufacturer s Declaration ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION LpA lt 70 dB operator position normal operation per ISO 7779 Safety Summary When you notice any of the unusual conditions listed below immediately terminate operation and disconnect the power cable Contact your local Agilent Technologies sales representative or authorized service company for repair of the instrument If you continue to operate without repairing the instrument there is a potential fire or shock hazard for the operator E Instrument operates abnormally E Instrument emits abnormal noise smell smoke or a spark like light during the operation E Instrument generates high temperature or electrical shock during operation E Power cable plug or receptacle on instrument is damaged E Foreign substance or liquid has fallen into the instrument Safety notice supplement This equipment complies with EN IEC61010 1 2001 This equipment is MEASUREMENT CATEGORY I CAT I Do not use for CAT II II or IV Do not connect the measuring terminals to mains This equipment is POLLUTION DEGREE 2 INDOOR USE product This equipment is tested with stand alone condition or with the combination with the accessories supplied by Agilent Technologies against the requirement of the standards described in the Declaration of Conformity If it is used as a system component compliance of related regulations and safety requireme
211. alue can be set but this has no meaning in the sequential mode Front Panel Operation for Setting the Nominal Value Perform the following steps to set the nominal value 1 Move the cursor to the NOM field 2 Enter the nominal value using the numeric entry keys When the numeric data is entered the suffix softkeys p n p m K M can be used instead of ENTER MEAS SETUP Menu 4 39 Comparator Function ON OFF 4 40 MEAS SETUP Menu Description The 4284A s built in comparator can sort devices into a maximum of ten bins BIN 1 to BIN 9 and the OUT OF BINS bin using a maximum of nine pairs of primary limits and one pair of secondary parameter limits Also a device whose primary parameter is within limits but whose secondary parameter measurement result is not within limits can be sorted into the AUXiliary BIN The comparator function is especially useful when using the 4284A with a component handler handler interface option is installed Front Panel Operation for Setting the Comparator Function to ON or OFF Perform the following steps to set the comparator function to ON or OFF 1 Move the cursor to the COMP field The following softkeys will be displayed a ON m OFF 2 Use the softkeys to set the comparator function to ON or OFF Auxliary Bin ON OFF Description When the secondary parameters affect the sorting results the limits for the secondary parameter can be set in 2nd LOW HIGH fields So there a
212. ambient temperature range of 23 C 5 C Multiply the temperature induced setting error listed in Table F for the temperature range of 0 C to 55 C Test Signal Level lt 2 Vrms Voltage Range Resolution Setting Accuracy 0 000 to 4 000 V 1 mV 0 1 of setting 1 mV 4 002 to 8 000 V 2 mV 0 1 of setting 2 mV 8 005 to 20 000 V 5 mV 0 1 of setting 5 mV 20 01 to 40 00 V 10mV 0 1 of setting 10 mV Test Signal Level gt 2 Vrms Voltage Range Resolution Setting Accuracy 0 000 to 4 000 V 1 mV 0 1 of setting 3 mV 4 002 to 8 000 V 2 mV 0 1 of setting 4 mV 8 005 to 20 000 V 5 mV 0 1 of setting 7 mV 20 01 to 40 00 V 10mV 0 1 of setting 12 mV General Information 9 19 Other Options Furnished Accessories Power Requirements 9 20 General Information Setting accuracies apply when the bias current isolation function is set to OFF When the bias current isolation function is set to ON add 20 mV to each accuracy value DC bias current lt 1 pA Bias Current Isolation Function A maximum DC bias current of 100 mA typical value can be applied to the DUT DC Bias Monitor Terminal Rear panel BNC connector Option 002 Option 006 Option 008 Option 009 Option 109 Option 201 Option 202 Option 301 Option 907 Option 908 Option 909 Option 910 Option W30 Operation Manual
213. ame The short form is obtained using the following rules m If the long form has four characters or less the long form and short form are the same m If the long form has more than 4 characters o If the 4th character is a vowel the short form is the first 3 characters of the long form o If the 4th character is not a vowel the short form is the first 4 characters For example BIAS abbreviates to BIAS TRIGger abbreviates to TRIG LEVel abbreviates to LEV FREQuency abbreviates to FREQ m If the long form mnemonic is defined as a phrase rather than a single word then the long form mnemonic is the first character of the first word s followed by the entire last word The above rules when the long form mnemonic is a single word are then applied to the resulting long form mnemonic to obtain the short form For example Percent TOLerance abbreviates to PTOL The long form is PTOLERANCE Note ll The 4284A accepts the three forms of the same SCPI commands all 3 upper case all lower case and mixed upper and lower case 8 4 Command Reference Header and The GPIB control commands consists of a command header and Parameters parameters See the following Interface Command Select Code Header Parameter OUTPUT 717 FREQ 1 25KHZ Suffix Controller HP IB Address Numeric Multiplier Output Data Mnemonic Statement Unit White Space Figure 8 2 Command Header and Parameter
214. and LIMIT TABLE to display the LIMIT TABLE SETUP page Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 6 Press more 1 2 Or 7 Press PRINT DISP The display page is printed out to the printer as shown in Figure 4 20 lt LIMIT TABLE SETUP gt SYS MENU FUNC Cp D NOM 100 000pF MODE AUX ON COMP ON BIN LOW HIGH 001 001 002 005 010 020 050 100 200 500 000010 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 tee ee ete t 200000000 000000 Figure 4 20 LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page Example MEAS SETUP Menu 4 47 LIST SWEEP SETUP Page 4 48 MEAS SETUP Menu When you press MEAS SETUP and LIST SETUP the LIST SWEEP SETUP page will be displayed The 4284A has a list sweep measurement function which permits up to ten test frequencies oscillator levels or DC bias points to be automatically measured On the LIST SWEEP SETUP page the following control settings of the list sweep measurement can be set Each field in parenthesis is used when that control is set m Sweep Mode MODE m Sweep Parameter Selection FREQ Hz LEVEL V LEVEL A BIAS V or BIAS A m Sweep Point Settings sweep point a Limit Parameter Selection LMT a Low High Limit Values LOW HIGH There are following fields on this page lt LIST SWEEP SETUP gt MODE FREQ Hz LEVEL V LEVEL A BIAS V or BIAS A LMT LOW HIGH SYS MENU and sweep points These functions are described in the following paragraphs The available fiel
215. and to enter the record number where the current control setting are to be stored When the data is to be stored in the internal EEPROM record numbers 0 to 9 are used and when the record is stored in a memory card record numbers 10 to 19 are used Perform the following steps to load the control settings from the internal non volatile memory or from an external memory card 1 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 2 Insert the appropriate memory card into the MEMORY card slot if you are going to load the settings from a memory card 3 Press LOAD The message Enter record number to LOAD will be displayed on the system message line DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 35 4 Enter the record number using the numeric entry keys and ENTER Printer Function Perform the following steps to print out the display page or to list sweep measurement results using the PRINT DISP mode or PRINT DATA mode 1 Connect the 4284A to the printer using an GPIB cable 2 Set the printer to the listen only mode 3 Set the talk only mode to ON from the SYSTEM CONFIG page 4 Press DISPLAY FORMAT and press LIST SWEEP to display the LIST SWEEP DISPLAY page Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 6 Press more 1 2 Or 7 Press PRINT DISP to print out the display page The displayed page will be printed out as shown in Figure 3 18 lt LIST SWEEP DISPLAY gt SYS MENU MODE SEQ FREQ Hz Cpl F DL J 00000k 99 6257p 008338 00000k 99 8398
216. anges by Firmware s Version Version Make Manual Changes 1 11 and below 1 Manual Changes A 1 CHANGE 1 Caution y CHANGE2 A 2 Manual Changes 4284A Operation Manual Page 5 2 Figure 5 1 CATALOG Page Add the following description Memory card for 4285A is compatible to 4284A However 4284A ignores the 4285A s data record status and displays Memory Status 0 Which means NO record To prevent overriding the 4285A s data check the card s Memory Status using 4285A before storing the A284A s data 4284A Operation Manual Page 1 2 Table 1 1 4284A Contents Change the following table Table 1 1 4284A Contents Description Qty Agilent Part Number 4284A Power cable 1 Memory Card 1 04278 89001 Operation Manual 1 04284 90020 Option 201 Fuse Fuse 2 2110 0046 Option 907 Handle Kit Handle kit 1 5061 9690 Option 908 Rack Flange Kit Rack Flange Kit 1 5061 9678 Option 909 Rack Flange amp Handle Kit Rack Flange amp Handle Kit 1 5061 9684 1 Power Cable depends on where the instrument is used see Power Cable in Chapter 1 Error and Warning Messages Introduction This appendix lists the 4284A s error and warning messages with brief descriptions and solutions and lists the sysstem messages in alphabetical order Error Messages Operation Errors GPIB Errors The 4284A displays error messages on
217. ao aooo A 5 sesame ea ao2 000 ajoe ainn jame i co Dei e 8 ce BNC m BNC ca Cable l a __ INTERFACE 80x AT a pe SIGNAL DC BIAS Figure 10 2 Test Signal Level Accuracy Test Setup Using an Interface Box 4284A MULTIMETER BNC tf dual banana plug Adapter aag cono Go oace 2 ho ooo oDooo0ngo aq oaooo O a ono I Soup oKG oo 9on00 O00 BNC m BNC m o EZ Cabl are BNC m BNCIn x shcia 2Ncina Direct connection no cable Cable NEI NC m Tee BNC mifXf Adapter Figure 10 3 Test Signal Level Accuracy Test Setup Without an Interface Box Note a The BNC to BNC cables used in this test should be shorter than 30 oe Equipment Interface Box Agilent PN 04284 65007 Multimeter 3458A Cable BNC m to BNC m 30 cm Agilent PN 8120 1838 BNC f to dual banana plug Adapter Agilent PN 1251 2277 10 6 Performance Tests Procedure 1 Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 10 2 Note ll If the Interface Box is not available use the following cables and 3 adapters as a substitute Figure 10 3 shows the test setup without the interface box BNC m to BNC m Cable 30 cm Agilent PN 8120 1838 2ea Tee BNC m f Adapter Agilent PN 1250 0781 2 Set the multimeter to ACV 3 Perform a SYSTEM RESET as described in System Reset 4 Set 4284A s controls as follows Test Frequency 1 25 kHz High Power Optio
218. appear beside PRINT DATA The measurement results are printed out on subsequent measurements lt BIN No DISPLAY gt SYS MENU FUNC Cp D RANGE AUTO FREQ 1 00000MHz BIAS 1 000 V LEVEL 1 00 V INTEG MED COMP ON Cp 99 9609pF D 000387 CORR OPEN SHORT LOAD CH O Figure 3 11 BIN No DISPLAY Page Example 3 26 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu Keylock Function Perform the following steps from the BIN No DISPLAY page to disable all front panel operation 1 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 2 Press more 1 2 3 Press KEY LOCK which is a toggle type softkey The key mark will be shown on the left side of KEY LUCK and the Keys locked message will be displayed on the system message line 4 Press KEY LOCK again to enable all front panel keys DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 27 BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page 3 28 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu When you press DISPLAY FORMAT and BIN COUNT the BIN COUNT DISPLAY page will be displayed On the BIN COUNT DISPLAY page the comparator s count results are displayed and the following measurement controls can be set m System Menu SYS MENU So there are two fields on this page lt BIN COUNT DISPLAY gt and SYS MENU fields The system menu is described in the following paragraphs This page also provides the following information in monitor areas the monitor areas look like fields but they are not These conditions can be set from the LIMIT TABLE page For more details
219. ary parameter is within limits but whose secondary parameter measurement result not within limits can be sorted into an AUXiliary BIN The comparator function is especially useful when using the 4284A with a component handler handler interface option is installed These limit settings for bin sorting are only set on this LIMIT TABLE SETUP page m Measurement Function FUNC a Comparator Function s Limit Mode MODE MEAS SETUP Menu 4 33 4 34 MEAS SETUP Menu Nominal Value for tolerance mode NOMINAL Auxiliary bin ON OFF AUX Comparator Function ON OFF COMP Low Limit Value of each bin LOW High Limit Value of each bin HIGH Each function is described in the following paragraphs The available fields and the softkeys which correspond to the fields on this page are shown in Figure 4 15 and Figure 4 16 SYS MENU 100 000 pF COMP ON J C Z O O HIGH O10 020 030 O40 050 060 O O 080 090 000005 W H Z OLOO oO OoOo 2 3 4 5 6 l 8 9 n DO L190 4013 Figure 4 15 Available Fields on the LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page MEAS SETUP Menu 4 35 lt LIMIT TABLE SETUP gt MEAS DISP SYS MENU CA
220. ault setting of the high power mode is ON When the low test signal level measurement is performed without using dc bias the measurement value at the high power mode OFF may be more stable than the measurement value at the high power mode ON When the 42841A is connected to the 4284A the high power mode is set to OFF and Option 001 is disabled Front Panel Operation for Setting the High Power Mode Perform the following steps to set the high power mode to ON or OFF when Option 001 is installed 1 Move the cursor to the Hi PW field The following softkeys will be displayed a ON m OFF 2 Press ON to set the high power mode to ON Press OFF to set the high power mode to OFF MEAS SETUP Menu 4 9 Bias Current Isolation Function Note i Y 4 10 MEAS SETUP Menu Description Refer to Appendix G When Option 001 Power Amplifier DC Bias is installed the dc bias can be set up to 40 V The dc bias current through the device under test can be calculated using the following formula _ Vs 100 Rac _ Is x 100 100 Rac Tac Where Ide Actual Bias Current A Rde DUT s DC resistance Q Vs Setting Value of the dc bias V Is Setting Value of the de bias A This bias current isolation function prevents the DC current from affecting the measurement input circuit The DCT ISO field allows you to set the bias current isolation function to ON or OFF When the bias current isolation fun
221. bed in the following paragraphs The list sweep point can not be set from this page but can only be set from the LIST SWEEP SETUP page The available fields and the softkeys which corresponded to each field on this page are shown in Figure 3 15 and Figure 3 16 11003010 lt LIS SW P DISPLAY gt oooocceocooo g Measurement Comparison Results of p Measurement Field Figure 3 15 Available Fields on the LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 33 SYS MENU BIN COUNT lt LIST SWEEP DISPLAY gt MEAS DISP BIN No LIST SWEEP L1003011 CANCEL more 1 2 CANCEL m PRINT DISP m PRINT DATA r KEY LOCK more 2 2 Figure 3 16 Available Softkeys on the LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page Sweep Mode The 4284A s List Sweep Measurement function permits up to 10 test frequencies oscillator levels or DC bias points to be automatically measured There are two measurement modes for list sweep measurements sequential SEQ mode and step STEP mode In the case of SEQ mode when the 4284A is triggered once all sweep points are automatically swept In the case of the STEP mode each time the 4284A is triggered the sweep point is swept by one step Sweep Parameter A Trigger Sweep Parameter A
222. ble Length Selection Description Contents 4 4 9 4 9 4 9 4 9 4 10 4 10 4 10 4 11 4 11 4 11 4 11 4 11 4 11 4 12 4 12 4 12 4 12 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 16 4 18 4 21 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 23 4 24 4 24 4 24 4 25 4 28 4 28 4 29 4 31 4 31 4 31 4 32 4 32 Front Panel For Selecting the Cable Length System Menu e Printer Function LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page Swap Parameter Function Description Front Panel Operation for Swapping the Primary Parameter for the Secondary Parameter Limit Mode for Comparator Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Limit Mode for the Comparator Nominal Value for Tolerance Mode Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Nominal Value Comparator Function ON OFF Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Comparator Function to ON or OFF a Auxliary Bin ON OFF Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the AUX BIN to ON or OFF o e Low High Limits Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Low High Limits Loe ee System Menu Load Store Function Clear Table Function Printer Function LIST SWEEP SETUP Page Sweep Mode Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the List Sweep Measurement Mode Loe ee List Sweep Parameter Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the List Sweep Parameter Loe ee Sweep Points and Limit Mode Description Front Panel Operation for Setting the Sweep Points Loe ee System Menu Loa
223. ble to regulate 0 1 2 OUT OF BINS BIN 1 BIN 2 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 21 Note i Y 3 22 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 BIN 3 8 BIN 8 9 BIN 9 10 AUX BIN BIN number data is valid only when the comparator function is set to ON When the comparator function is set to OFF the BIN number data isn t output as shown below lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt lt STATUS gt lt CR gt lt LF gt In the talk only mode the 4284A waits for the completion of the handshake before starting the next measurement The measurement cycle of the 4284A depends on the printer s speed When the lt STATUS gt is 1 or 2 the measurement data is 9 937 When the lt STATUS gt is 0 3 or 4 the actual measurement data are output Use the PRINT DISP mode and perform the following steps to print out all of information on the display page except for the softkey labels 1 Connect the 4284A to the printer using an GPIB cable 2 Set the printer to the listen only mode 3 Set the talk only mode to ON from the SYSTEM CONFIG page 4 Press DISPLAY FORMAT to display the MEAS DISPLAY page 5 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 6 7 Press more 1 2 Press PRINT DISP Use the PRINT DATA mode and perform the following steps to print out the measurement results to the printer m Connect the 4284A to the printer using an GPIB cable m Set the printer to the listen only mode m Set the talk only mode to ON from the SYSTEM CONFIG
224. board s location Write Protection E 1 A7 Digital Control Board with Black and Violet board extractors Caution y E 2 Write Protection Figure E 1 A7 Digital Board Location Semiconductor components are installed on the A7 board When handling the A7 board be aware that electrostatic discharge can damage these components 8 Set A753 6 to the right most position ON to disable 4284A s STORE function Set A7S3 6 to the left most position OFF to enable storing Refer to Figure E 2 9 Set A753 7 to the right most position ON to disable to change all of the correction settings on the CORRECTION page Set A753 7 to the left most position OFF to enable to change all of the correction settings on the CORRECTION page Refer to Figure E 2 Enable Storing Disable Storing Enable Correction Data Change Disable Correction Data Change 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure E 2 Write Protection Switch Note Do not change any of the other switch settings on the A7 board Y 10 Install the configured A7 board into the 4284A 11 Replace the top shield plate top cover and rear feet Write Protection E 3 F Test Frequency Point
225. bration value at 1 kHz CNC multiplied by 1 0003 Option 001 only Copyright 2012 Agilent Technologies Change 2 Change the value of 100pF standard for OSC Level 510 mV 125 Hz on MINIMUM Cp value on page 10 42 Change the minimum and maximum value of 100pF standard for OSC Level 510mV 48 kHz on D value on page 10 42 100pF Standard C V Cal Value at 1 kHz OSC Level 510 mV dee ovENeN MINIMUM ACTUAL 125 Hz Cp C V 1 759 pF D 0 01739 1 kHz Cp C V 0 312 pF D 0 00293 12 5 kHz Cp C V 0 137 pF D 0 00130 48 kHz Cp C V 0 162 pF D 0 00190 96 kHz Cp C V 0 122 pF D 0 00116 1 MHz Cp C V 0 102 pF D 0 00082 OSC Level 20 mV PASS FAIL OSC Level 5 1 V Option 001 only PASS FAIL Copyright 2012 Agilent Technologies MAXIMUM C V 1 759 pF 0 01739 C V 0 312 pF 0 00293 C V 0 137 pF 0 00130 C V 0 162 pF 0 00190 C V 0 122 pF 0 00116 C V 0 102 pF 0 00082 Agilent 4284A Precision LCR Meter Maintenance Manual Manual Change Agilent Part No N A Sep 2012 Change 1 On Page 9 24 two lines from the bottom of the page change Table A to read Table 9 7 as follows Where P is the coefficient listed on Table 9 7 Change 2 On Page 9 25 eight lines from the bottom of the page change Table A to read Table 9 1 as follows P 15 according to Table 9 1 Change 3 On Page
226. bsystem The MEMory subsystem command group controls the 4284A s data buffer Figure 8 11 shows the command tree of the MEMory subsystem command group F lt value gt Figure 8 11 MEMory Subsystem Command Tree DIM Command Syntax Example The DIM command clears the data buffer memory and sets the size of the data buffer memory For details refer to Data Transfer in Chapter 7 MEMory DIM DBUF lt value gt Where lt value gt 1 to 128 NR1 Number of data sets OUTPUT 717 MEM DIM DBUF 3 Specify the DBUF size for 3 sets of measurement data FILL Command Syntax Example The FILL command enables the data buffer memory to store the measurement data After execution of the FILL command all measurement data will be stored in the data buffer memory For details refer to Data Transfer in Chapter 7 MEMory FILL DBUF OUTPUT 717 MEM FILL DBUF Command Reference 8 49 MEMory Subsystem CLEar Command Syntax Example The CLEar command clears the data buffer memory After execution of this command measurement data will not be stored in the data buffer memory until execution of the FILL command For details refer to Data Transfer in Chapter 7 MEMory CLEar DBUF OUTPUT 717 MEM CLE DBUF READ Query Syntax Example 8 50 Command Reference The READ query places the data i
227. ce 2 R Resistance Q X Reactance Q Z Magnitude of Impedance Phase of Impedance deg or rad Rs Series Resistance Q 6 2 Measurement Procedure and Examples a Voltage Current b Vector Representation and Impedance of Impedance Imaginary Part JX 9 R Real part Figure 6 1 Definition of Impedance The following parameters can be used to represent the reactance X 2rfL Where f Frequency Hz L Inductance H In addition to these parameters the Quality Factor Q and Dissipation Factor D are used to describe the quality of components Where Q Quality Factor D Dissipation Factor In some case the reciprocal of impedance Admittance Y is used Figure 6 2 shows the vector representation of admittance As Z Impedance Y contains a real and an imaginary part and is expressed in rectangular form as Conductance and Susceptance or in polar form as magnitude of Admittance and Phase The following are expressions for Admittance Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 3 1 Y Z Y G jB Y 4 1 Y VG B z B ob arc a o B 2afC _ 1 _ Bl 5 G 1 G Rp Where Y Admittance S G Conductance S B Susceptance S Y Magnitude of Admittance Q Phase of Admittance deg or rad C Capacitance F Rp Parallel Resistance Q The Y measurement function of the 4284A can obtain the Y and Note A
228. checks the read and write functions of EEPROM for the Option 301 Scanner Interface When this test is started a bit pattern is written to the lower address of the EEPROM then the write pattern is checked by reading back the bit pattern This write pattern check is repeated from low to high EEPROM addresses How to Perform the Scanner I F EEPROM R W Test Perform the following steps to perform the scanner interface EEPROM R W test 1 Move the cursor to the TEST MENU field on the SELF TEST page 2 Press 5 and ENTER to set the test number to 5 The SCANNER I F EEPROM R W TEST screen will be displayed and the following messages indicating the address of the scanner interface EEPROM are displayed START ADRS HEX Start address as a hexadecimal expression END ADRS HEX End address as a hexadecimal expression TEST ADRS HEX Current testing address as a hexadecimal expression The Data stored in the EEPROM is retained when this test is performed 3 Press TEST START to start the test To abort the test press TEST END If the test failed the test is aborted and TEST ADRS HEX on the display will show the address at which the test failed Restart from step 1 If the test passed the message Test completed will be displayed on the system message line 4 Press TEST END to exit from the SCANNER I F EEPROM R W TEST screen Catalog System Configuration 5 15 Scanner I F I O Test Bias Cu
229. collector outputs The combination of pull up resistor and pull up voltage must result in a current through the optocoupler of less than 6 mA Refer to Table 2 3 Table 2 3 Output Signal Electrical Characteristics Signal Name External Pull up Voltage Maximum Current INDEX 15 V max 6 mA EOM A schematic of the INDEX and EOM output circuits is shown in Figure 2 6 l SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD SCANNER I F CONNECTOR U5 1 16 EJ US 3 14 Cbs Figure 2 6 Simplified Diagram of the Output Circuits INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION a SETTING UP THE SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD When you use the rear panel scanner I O connector you must set two switches on the scanner interface board according to the external dc voltage EXT _DCV used Perform the following steps O O a O 3 w O h 1 Disconnect the power cable from the HP 4284A and allow enough time a few minutes for the internal capacitors to discharge DANGEROUS ENERGY VOLTAGE EXISTS WHEN THE HP 4284A IS IN OPERATION AND JUST AFTER IT IS POWERED DOWN ALLOW A FEW MINUTES FOR THE INTERNAL CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE 2 Disconnect the two rear feet which lock the top cover and rear panel together 3 Fully loosen the top cover retaining screws located on the rear of the top cover 4 Slide the top cover towards the rear and lift it off The top Shield plate will be visible 5 Remove the top shield plate to expose the PC boards 6 D
230. configure the Option 202 Handler Interface Board for a handler that is not listed Palomar Model M16 Palomar Model M11 Q Corporation RTR2 Isumeca 83 EA Model M015 O is 3 N I Figure 3 1 shows the location of the handler interface board in the HP 4284A Figure 3 2 shows the locations of the pull up resistors on the handier interface board and Figure 3 3 shows the locations of the handler interface jumpers SEETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 3 3 1 Disconnect the HP 4284A s power cord and allow enough time a few minutes for the internal supply filter capacitors to discharge DANGEROUS ENERGY VOLTAGE EXISTS WHEN 4284A IS IN OPERATION AND JUST AFTER IT IS POWERED DOWN ALLOW A FEW MINUTES FOR THE INTERNAL CAPACI TORS TO DISCHARGE 2 Disconnect the two rear feet which lock the top cover and rear panel together l 3 Fully loosen the top cover retaining screws located at the rear of the top panel 4 Slide the top cover towards the rear and lift it off to expose the top shield plate 5 Remove the top shield plate to gain access to the PC boards 6 Disconnect the flat cable connected to the handler interface board which has Brown and Orange extractors as shown in Figure 3 1 Front Rear Handler I F board Figure 3 1 Handler Interface Board Location 3 4 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 7 If the comparison output signals are TTL levels signals a
231. connector used to input the positive going TTL pulse signal to trigger the 4284A The trigger mode must be set to EX Ternal 5 LINE Input Receptacle AC power cord receptacle 6 AN LINE Fuse Holder Fuse holder for the 4284A s line fuse Refer to CHAPTER 1 to determine the correct line fuse rating 7 LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR The switch used to match the 4284A to the AC operating voltage being used Refer to CHAPTER 1 to determine the correct operating voltage Overview 2 5 Display Display Area Definition 2 6 Overview The following paragraphs define the display areas and fields and describes the LCD s display pages The 4284A uses a 40 character by 16 line Liquid Crystal Display LCD and the display area on the LCD is divided into the areas shown in Figure 2 3 Display Page Format Field System Menu Field Softkey Area Comment Field EN Meas F lt MEAS DISPLAY gt SYS MENU M SEUNG Cp D RANGE AUTO FREQ 1 00000kHz BIAS 0 000 V BIN Measurement Data LEVEL 1 50 V INTEG MED No Condition Area Cp 484 101 pF BIN D 017368 Vm 1 431 V Im 2 4 280mA CORR OPEN SHORT LOAD LIST SWEEP Input Line System Message Line L1002003 Figure 2 3 Display Area Definition Display Page Area This is the display page area This area identifies the current display page System Menu Field The system menu area is always displayed on all pages except for the SEL
232. ction is set to ON the bias current through the device can be up to 100 mA When the bias current isolation function is set to OFF the current through the device can be set to the values listed in Table 4 1 When the current through a device exceeds the values listed in Table 4 1 normal measurement can t be performed Table 4 1 Maximum DC Bias Current Measurement Range 1000 3002 1kQ 3 kQ 10 kQ 30 kQ 100 kQ Max current 2mA 2 mA 1 mA 300 pA 100 pA 30 pA 10 pA The bias current isolation function influences the measurement accuracy Refer to Relative Measurement Accuracy with Bias Current Isolation in Chapter 9 So when measuring a high impedance device at low frequency with low bias current the bias current isolation function should be set to OFF Front Panel Operation for Setting the Bias Current Isolation Function Perform the following steps to set the bias current isolation function to ON or OFF when high power mode is set to ON 1 Move the cursor to the DCLISO field The following softkeys will be displayed a ON m OFF Averaging Rate Delay Time 2 Press ON to set the bias current isolation function to ON Press OFF to set the bias current isolation function to OFF Description The 4284A s averaging rate function arithmetically averages the results of two or more A D conversions The A D conversion time can be set in the INTEG field The number of convers
233. ctor resolution is 0 000001 on every range With its built in comparator the 4284A can output comparison decision results for sorting components into a maximum of ten bins By using the handler interface and scanner interface options the 4284A can easily be combined with a component handler a scanner and a system controller to fully automate component testing sorting and quality control data processing The 4284A s new list sweep function permits entry of up to ten frequencies test signal levels or bias level points to be automatically measured The GPIB interface is a standard interface on the 4284A and can be used to build an automatic test system to completely characterize new components and materials and to fully automatic production line testing The 4284A with Option 002 can apply a 0 to 20A Maximum 40A When two 42841As are paralleled DC current bias to the DUT Device Under Test So high current biased impedance measurement of coils or transformers can be performed easy fast and safe Overview 2 1 A Tour of the Front Panel Figure 2 1 shows the brief description of each key on the 4284A s front panel 4 5 6 ee pute 2 42842 2DHz 1MHz FRECIAON LCR mi rra 4 ENTER ogoogo 7 8 E 9 Jeo MEMORY Use He sracime mon come way A SS 1
234. current lt lt 1 mA P 15 according to Table A A of relative measurement accuracy without bias current isolation is 0 22 Refer to relative measurement accuracy of specification 15x 159x103 100x 103 x 1 20x 10 3 x10 4 0 12 Relative Capacitance measurement accuracy is 0 22 0 12 4 0 34 General Information 9 25 DC Bias Settling Time When DC bias is set to ON add the settling time listed in the following table to the measurement time This settling time does not include the DUT charge time Test Bias Current Isolation Frequency fm ON OFF 20 Hz lt fm lt 1 kHz 210 ms 1 kHz lt fm lt 10 kHz 70 ms 20 ms 10 kHz lt fm lt 1 MHz 30 ms Sum of DC bias settling time plus DUT capacitor charge time is shown in the following figure Bias Bias Current Test Frequency fm Source Isolation D Standard On Off 20 Hz lt fm lt 1 MHz Option 001 Off 20 Hz lt fm lt 1 MHz On 10 kHz lt fm lt 1 MHz 1 kHz lt fm lt 10 kHz 20 Hz lt fm lt 1 kHz 100sec o E a cC D n 210msec L 100msec E TOmsec F 30msec 20msec BREEN x F OOOO 1uF 10 uF 100 pF 1 mF 10 mF DUT Capacitance Figure 9 8 Measurement Time 9 26 General Information Rack Handle Installation The 4284A can be rack mounted and used as a component of a measurement
235. d December 1988 1 0 0 0 00 cece cence eee eee eens First Edition April 1991 ccc ccc een nee nee eennes Second Edition December 1991 2 2 ieee eee nanenane Third Edition March 1994 2 0 eee cece eee nnn eens Fourth Edition December 1996 2 0 0 eee eee ene een nes Fifth Edition August 1998 Sixth Edition part number 04284 90040 January 2000 Seventh Edition part number 04284 90040 January 2001 Eighth Edition part number 04284 90040 Safety Summary Note 4g Note i Y Ground The Instrument DO NOT Operate In An Explosive Atmosphere Keep Away From Live Circuits DO NOT Service Or Adjust Alone DO NOT Substitute Parts Or Modify Instrument The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific WARNINGS elsewhere in this manual may impair the protection provided by the equipment In addition it violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument The Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements 4284A complies with INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and POLLUTION DEGREE 2 in IEFC1010 1 4284A is INDOOR USE product LEDs in this product are Class 1 in accordance with IEC825 1 CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT To avoid electric shock hazard the instrumen
236. d Store Function Clear Table Function Printer Function 4 32 4 32 4 33 4 33 4 36 4 36 4 37 4 37 4 37 4 38 4 39 4 39 4 39 4 40 4 40 4 40 4 41 4 41 4 42 4 43 4 43 4 44 4 45 4 46 4 46 4 47 4 48 4 50 4 50 4 51 4 51 4 51 4 51 4 52 4 52 4 53 4 54 4 54 4 54 4 55 Contents 5 5 Catalog System Configuration Introduction 2 CATALOG Page System Menu Media Specifying Load Store Function Printer Function Purge Function SYSTEM CONFIG Page Beeper Function ON OFF Description How to Set the Beeper to ON or OFF GPIB Setting Description How to Set the GPIB Address How to Set the Talk Only Mode Handler Interface Setting Description How to Set the Handler Interface to ON or OFF Scanner Interface Setting Description How to Set the Scanner Interface to ON o or OFF System Menu Printer Function SELF TEST Page Memory Card R W Test Description How to Perform the Memory Card Rw Test LED Display Test a a Description How to Perform the LED Display Test LCD Display Test re Description How to Perform the LCD Display Test Handler I F Test Loe Description Scanner I F EEPROM R W Test Description How to Perform the Scanner I F E EEPROM R W Test Scanner I F I O Test Description Bias Current I F 1 0 Test Description Contents 6 5 1 5 1 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 5 5 7 5 7 5 7 5 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 5 9 5 9 5 9 5 9 5 10 5 10
237. d Resister DC Power Source Adapter Cable Test Leads GPIB Cable Computer Memory Card Bias IF Simulator Handler Simulator Scanner Simulator Simulator Cable Bias IF Cable Frequency 20 Hz to 1 MHz Accuracy lt lt 0 01 Frequency 20 Hz to 1 MHz Voltage Range 5 mVims to 20 Vrms Accuracy lt lt 3 0 Voltage range 40 V to 40 V Accuracy lt lt 0 1 No substitute No Substitute 45 V 0 1A BNC f to BNC f Tee BNC m f f BNC f to Dual Banana BNC m to BNC m 30 cm 2 BNC m to 3 alligator clips 4 BNC m Cable Length 1 m 4 BNC m Cable Length 2 m 4 BNC m Cable Length 4 m GPIB cable 1 m HP Technical Computer furnished accessory No substitute No substitute No substitute No substitute GP IO Cable 5334B 3458 A 3458 A 16380A 16380C 16074A 6214C Agilent PN 1250 0080 Agilent PN 1250 0781 Agilent PN 1251 2277 Agilent PN 8120 1838 Agilent PN 8120 1661 16048A 16048D 16048E 10388A HP 9000 Series 200 Model 226 Agilent PN 04278 89001 Agilent PN 42841 65001 Agilent PN 04278 65001 Agilent PN 04278 65301 Agilent PN 04278 61635 Agilent PN 42841 61640 Performance Tests 10 3 System Reset Procedure 10 4 Performance Tests By using SYSTEM RESET function the 4284A can be set easily for the performance test SYSTEM RESET can be performed using the following procedure 1 Press MEAS SETUP to display MEAS SETUP page 2 Use CURSOR keys to move th
238. data is 9 9E37 The Source MONitor IAC query sets the latest measured current Source MONitor IAC monitor data into the 4284A s output buffer Query Syntax FETCh SMONitor IAC Query Response Returned format is lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt Example 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG SOUR BUS 20 TRIGGER 717 30 OUTPUT 717 FETC SMON IAC 40 ENTER 717 A 50 PRINT A 60 END Note ll If this query is received when the current level monitor is set to OFF returned data is 9 9E37 8 46 Command Reference ABORt Subsystem ABORt Subsystem Command Syntax Example The ABORt command sets the trigger system to reset and the trigger state is in the IDLE STATE on the state diagram For detail refer to Trigger System in Chapter 7 ABORt OUTPUT 717 ABOR Command Reference 8 47 FORMat Subsystem Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 48 Command Reference The FORMat command sets the data output format For details refer to Data Transfer in Chapter 7 The FORmat query returns the current data format setting ASCii FORMat DATA REAL 64 Where ASCii is set by the ASCII data format REALL 64 is set by the IEEE 64 bit floating point data format OUTPUT 717 FORM REAL FORMat DATA Returned data format is ASG lt NL END gt REAL 64 10 OUTPUT 717 FORM 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END MEMory Subsystem MEMory Su
239. ds and softkeys which corresponded to the fields on this page are shown in Figure 4 21 and Figure 4 22 lt LIST Sw ODE REQ HZ 1 00000 2 00000k 5 00000 10 0000 20 0000 50 0000 100 000 200 000 500 000 1 00000 lt gt D gt gt gt gt IS SSSI L1004026 Figure 4 21 Available Fields on the LIST SWEEP SETUP Page MEAS SETUP Menu 4 49 lt LIST SWEEP SETUP gt MEAS SETUP PRINT DISP CORRECTION H LIMIT TABLE L LIST SETUP CLEAR TABLE J more 2 2 more 1 2 Sweep Parameter LIMIT DATA A LIMIT DATA B OFF Sweep Points DELETE LINE o DELETE LINE HIGH F LINE Numeric Entry k kK FREQ Hz M Ly M Numeric Entry pu more 2 2 Numer ic Entry p Hm L more 1 2 e more 2 2 more 1 2 am A more 2 2 more 1 2 A more 2 2 more 1 2 BIAS V LEVEL V Numeric Entry BIAS A LEVEL A Numeric Entry L1004027 Figure 4 22 Available Softkeys on the LIST SWEEP SETUP Page Sweep Mode Descri
240. e LEVel MIN MAX Where lt value gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format MIN Sets to the minimum DC bias voltage level 0V MAX Sets to the maximum DC bias voltage level When Hi PW mode is OFF 2V When Hi PW mode is ON 40V OUTPUT 717 BIAS VOLT 1 5V MIN BIAS VOLTage LEVel MAX Returned format is lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 BIAS VOLT MAX 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END A suffix multiplier and a suffix unit V volt can be used with this command If this query is received when the DC bias level is set toa current level error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur Command Reference 8 21 BIAS Subsystem CURRent Command Syntax Note i 7 Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 22 Command Reference The CURRent command sets the DC bias current Setting BIAS CURRent does not implicitly turn the DC bias ON The CURRent query returns the current DC bias current setting value This command is effective when the Option 001 DC Bias is installed or the 42841A and the 42842A B are combined lt value gt BIAS CURRent LEVel 4 MIN MAX Where lt value gt NR1 NR2 or NR3 format MIN Sets or returns the minimum DC bias current level OV MAX Sets or returns the maximum DC bias current level When Hi PW mode is ON 100mA A suffix multiplier and a suffix unit A ampere can be used with this command If this query is received when the DC bias le
241. e 4284A instead of an external DC power supply For further details see Supplying DC Power to the Simulator 7 Connect the scanner simulator to the scanner interface connector on the 4284A s rear panel as shown in Figure 10 20 SCANNER SIMULATOR To 4284A SCANNER DC POWER SUPPLY pe TP2 GND INTERFACE oll oo ol o TPI Vee Connector 2 z5 500 b oon SIFT Oooo re LJ Figure 10 21 Scanner Simulator Connections 8 Replace the top shield plate rear feet and top cover Turn the 4284A ON 10 34 Performance Tests Caution y 11 12 13 14 15 Press the CATALOG SYSTEM MENU key 10 Press the SELF TEST softkey to display the SELF TEST page Use the CURSOR arrow keys to move the cursor to the TEST MENU field Press the 6 and ENTER keys to select the Scanner I F 1 0 test Press the TEST START softkey Confirm that LEDs on the scanner simulator board turn ON in accordance with the 4284A settings displayed in the LCD Press the TEST END softkey Do not execute any SELF TEST except for the Bias Current I F I O Test or the 4284A will become inoperative The remaining SELF TEST are for serviceuse only 16 17 Remove the top cover top shield plate and expose the scanner interface board Set SW1 and SW2 on the scanner interface board to thei
242. e EOM signal of the last sweep point is asserted See Figure 2 5 Same as the assignments for the comparator function Refer to Table 2 1 OPERATION 2 7 Pass area OUT_OF_ BINS 10 BINS Z EIERS ESEESE BS OOOO RN Sse Ne LAAAAAAAS ACS KABA PSESE PR PSSS SSS pSeSeSeSe PS 252526252626 26262609 5680 IBINT BIN8 BIN6 ming BINS BIN3 BIN2 BIN1 Cc o E A ES Z x LY o D 3 3 2 KS I E Sweep point Figure 2 4 Signal Area Example For The List Sweep Comparator Function 2 8 OPERATION SEQ Sweep Mode Loz uondo EXT_TRIG ANDEX i j EOM i Previous Sweep s Data Valid Data Valid a sweep a measurement Measurement Timing a measurement Settling Delay i Time Time Measurement Time Display Time STEP Sweep Mode f JEXT_TRIG j INDEX f J T2 T 4 i EOM f j Previous Sweep s Data Valid Data Valid a sweep _ameagurement a measurement Measurement Timing Settling Comparison and Time Delay Display Time Time Measurement Time NOTE Setting Time includs Correction Data Switching Time Comparison and Display Time is approx 4 5 ms Refer to Figure 2 3 for information of T1 T2 T3 Figure 2 5 Timing Diagram OPERATION 2 9 E ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS As mentioned in the previous pa
243. e PASS FAIL Function Test Option 002 only 10 46 Performance Tests A Manual Changes Introduction This appendix contains the information required to adapt this manual to earlier versions or configurations of the 4284A than the current printing date of this manual The information in this manual applies directly to 4284A Precision LCR Meter whose serial number prefix is listed on the title page of this manual Manual Changes To adapt this manual to your 4284A refer to Table A 1 and Table A 2 and make all of the manual changes listed opposite your instrument s serial number and ROM based firmware s version Instruments manufactured after the printing of this manual may be different than those documented in this manual Later instrument versions will be documented in a manual changes supplement that will accompany the manual shipped with that instrument If your instrument serial number is not listed on the title page of this manual or in Table A 1 it may be documented in a yellow MANUAL CHANGES supplement Refer to the description of the IDN query in IDN in Chapter 8 for confirmation of the ROM based firmware s version For additional information on serial number coverage refer to Serial Number in Chapter 9 Table A 1 Manual Changes by Serial Number Serial Prefix Make Manual Changes or Number 2940J02282 and below 1 2940J02284 1 2940J08389 and below 2 Table A 2 Manual Ch
244. e addressed as a listener second the trigger mode is set to the BUS trigger mode before the trigger message is sent For example SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 17 Remote Control 7 5 TRIGGER 7 Standard Standard Commands for Programmable Instrument scP1 is the new universal command set adopted by Agilent Technologies for test and Commands for measurement instrumentation by extending IEEE 488 2 1987 SCPI Programmable is equal to TMSL Test and Measurement Systems Language which Instruments SCPI developed by Agilent Technologies This language uses standard GPIB hardware and will be used in many future Agilent Technologies Products SCPI uses easy to learn self explanatory commands and is flexible for both beginners and expert programmers Detailed SCPI command descriptions are given in Chapter 8 System System Component X BUS Component Y Device Dependent Messages Common Commands and Queries Syntax and Data Structures Remote IF Messages D C BoA A BC EEE 488 2 IEEE 488 2 Standard IEEE 488 1 Standard Standard SCPI SCPI WHERE Layer D represents Device Functions Layer C represents Common System Functions Layer B represents Message Communication Functions Layer A represents Interface Functions IF LAQO7O17 Figure 7 3 Functional Layers Diagram 7 6 Remote Control Data Transfer The 4284A offers two data formats for GPIB da
245. e command INITiate CONTinuous OFF Figure 7 13 Triggering System and Data Transfer Remote Control 7 15 Data Buffer Memory Initialize E 90 100 L10070 The 4284A has data buffer memory capability The data buffer memory can hold up to 128 sets of measurement results and all buffered measurement results are transferred at once to the controller using the MEMory READ DBUF command as shown in Figure 7 14 So the overall data transmission time will be greatly reduced 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 LI OPTION BASE 1 DIM D 5 4 ASSIGN REMOTE OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT Meter TO 717 Meter Meter RST CLS Meter FORM ASCII Meter TRIG SOUR BUS Meter DISP PAGE MEAS Meter MEM DIM DBUF 5 Meter MEM FILL DBUF FOR I 1 TO 5 OUTPUT Meter TRIGGER IMMEDIATE NEXT I OUTPUT Meter MEM READ DBUF ENTER Meter D PRINT D OUTPUT Meter MEM CLE DBUF END Measurement lt DATA 5 Transfer All Data DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 E 140 150 LINE 170 Figure 7 14 Buffered Data Transfer Sample Program and Description 7 16 Remote Control Y Note When the data buffer memory is used use the following rules m The measurement data after sending
246. e cursor to the SYS MENU field 3 Press more 1 2 softkey to display SYSTEM RESET 4 Press SYSTEM RESET 5 Press YES to perform a SYSTEM RESET This test verifies that the accuracy of the 4284A s test frequency is Test Frequency y quency Accuracy Test within 0 01 ELECTRONIC COUNTER goo oO u0 noo gappi Hoo aogonoa ooo o o BNCin BNC m Cable 30 cm Figure 10 1 Test Frequency Accuracy Test Setup Equipment Electronic Counter BNC m to BNC m Cable 30 cm 5334B Agilent PN 8120 1838 Procedure 1 Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 10 1 2 Perform a SYSTEM RESET as described in System Reset 3 Set the Test Frequency in accordance with Table 10 2 and confirm that the counter readings are within the test limits given in the table Table 10 2 Test Frequency Test limits Test Frequency Test Limits 1 kHz 8 kHz 20 kHz 80 kHz 400 kHz 1 MHz 0 9999 kHz to 1 0001 kHz 7 9992 kHz to 8 0008 kHz 19 998 kHz to 20 002 kHz 79 992 kHz to 80 008 kHz 399 96 kHz to 400 04 kHz 0 9999 MHz to 1 0001 MHz Performance Tests 10 5 Test Signal This test verifies the 4284A s test signal level and test signal level Level Level Monitor nitor accuracy Accuracy Test MULTIMETER BNC f dual banana 4284A eee plug Adapter see ee pl ee i 5
247. easure ment data of OPEN correction at FREQ 1 2 38 lt opent 2 3 B gt Secondary parameter measure ment data of OPEN correction at FREQ 1 2 83 lt short1 2 3 A gt Primary parameter measure ment data of SHORT correction at FREQ 1 2 3 lt shorti 2 3 B gt Secondary parameter measure ment data of SHORT correction at FREQ 1 2 3 lt load1 2 3 A gt Primary parameter measure ment data of LOAD correction at FREQ 1 2 3 lt load1 2 3 B gt Secondary parameter measure ment data of LOAD correction at FREQ 1 2 83 lt NL END gt Terminators the EO line is asserted while the New Line or ASCII Line Feed character is being sent on the bus In addition to the query the following querys are useful to con firm status of the multi channel correction mode e CORRection SPOT 1 2 3 STATe query returns ON OFF condition of FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQS correction e CORRection SPOT 1 2 3 FREQuency query i returns the correction frequency of FREQ1 FREQ2 or FRES 3 10 OPERATION 240 e CORRection SPOT 1 2 3 LOAD STANdard query returns the reference values of the standard for FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQS Refer to SECTION 8 COMMAND REFERENCE of the HP 4284A OPERATION MANUAL for details The following procedure and sample program are a guide to reading the correction frequency reference values for LOAD correction and a channel s correction data via HP IB 1 Set the HP 4284A s HP IB addre
248. ected CORRection USE lt channel number gt Where lt channel number gt is 1 channel number OUTPUT 717 CORR USE 10 CORRection USE Returned format is lt channel number gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 CORR USE 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END to 127 NR1 NR2 or NR3 Set to channel number 10 Command Reference 8 63 COrrection Subsystem USE DATA Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 64 Command Reference The USE DATA query returns the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction measurement data at FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 CORRection USE DATA lt channel number gt Where lt channel number gt is 1 to 127 NR1 Returned format is lt openl A gt lt openl B gt lt shortl A gt lt shortl B gt lt load1 A gt lt loadl B gt lt open2 A gt lt open2 B gt lt short2 A gt lt short2 B gt lt load2 A gt lt load2 B gt lt open3 A gt lt open3 B gt lt short3 A gt lt short3 B gt lt load3 A gt lt load3 B gt Where lt openl 2 3 A gt NR3 format primary OPEN correction data at FREQI 2 3 lt openl 2 3 B gt NR3 format secondary OPEN correction data at FREQI 2 3 lt short1 2 3 A gt NR3 format primary SHORT correction data at FREQI 2 3 lt short1 2 3 B gt NR3 format secondary SHORT correction data at FREQI 2 3 lt load1 2 3 A gt NR3 format primary LOAD correction data at FREQI 2 3 lt load1 2 3 B gt NR3 format
249. ed but the low high limit values aren t entered The comparison results is always LOW under the following conditions which are equal to the condition at lt STATUS gt 0 in the data format Analog Bridge is unbalanced A D converter isn t working Signal source is overloaded ALC is unable to regulate Note Y Do NOT enter a value which is lower than the LOW limit into the HIGH limit If you do the warning message Warning Improper high low limits will be displayed this isn t an error The comparison results are as follows m Measurement results lt LOW limit Result LOW m Measurement results gt LOW limit Result HIGH Front Panel Operation for Setting the Sweep Points Perform the following steps to set the sweep points and measurement limits 1 Move the cursor to the sweep parameter field and set the sweep parameter 2 Move the cursor to the sweep point field 3 Enter the sweep point using the numeric entry keys When the one of the numeric entry keys is pressed the unit softkeys u m k and M are available so you can use these softkeys to enter the unit and terminate the entry without hitting ENTER 4 The cursor will move automatically to the LMT field after you enter a sweep point The following softkeys will be displayed m LIMIT DATA A This softkey is used to set the limit parameter to the primary parameter of the measurement function When this softkey is pressed
250. ed and used as a component in a measurement system Figure 1 3 shows how to rack mount the 4284A Table 1 4 Rack Mount Kits Option Description Agilent Part Number 907 Handle Kit 5061 9690 908 Rack Flange Kit 5061 9678 909 Rack Flange amp Handle Kit 5061 9684 1 6 Installation and Set Up Guide Option 907 Handle Kit Option 908 Rack Flange Kit 5 zel hy wi O TAZA D om Figure 1 3 Rack Mount Kits Installation Option 907 is a handle kit containing a pair of handles and the necessary hardware to attach them to the instrument Installing the Handle 1 Remove the adhesive backed trim strips from the left and right front sides of the 4284A Refer to Figure 1 3 2 Attach the front handles to the sides using the screws provided 3 Attach the trim strips to the handles Option 908 is a rack flange kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to mount them to the instrument in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches horizontal spacing Mounting the Rack 1 Remove the adhesive backed trim strips from the left and right front sides of the 4284A Refer to Figure 1 3 2 Attach the rack mount flange to the left and right front sides of the 4284A using the screws provided 3 Remove all four feet lift bar on the inner side of the foot and slide the foot toward the bar Installation and Set Up Guide 1 7 Option 909 Rack Flange Option 909 is a rack mou
251. ed from the factory the default GPIB address is 17 For more information refer to How to Set the GPIB Address in Chapter 5 The 4284A will respond to the following bus commands which are given as HP 9000 series 200 300 BASIC statements ABORT 1 O IFC ABORT I O IFC control line TRUE halts all bus activity and deselects the 4284A For example ABORT 7 CLEAR LOCKOUT SET LOCAL CLEAR LOCKOUT SET LOCAL REN control line false releases devices on the bus from the lockout mode and returns them to local front panel control The difference between CLEAR LOCKOUT SET LOCAL and LOCAL is in the addressing method used For example LOCAL 7 DEVICE CLEAR SDC or DCL This command can be used with an address to clear a particular device SDC selected device clear or used without an address DCL clears all devices The 4284A will initialize the following items only when it receives this command Then the m Input buffer is cleared m Output data buffer is cleared a Bit 4 MAV bit of the status byte is set to 0 For example CLEAR 7 LOCAL GTL LOCAL returns control of a listening device to front panel control For example LOCAL 717 LOCAL LOCKOUT LLO LOCAL LOCKOUT disables the LOCAL operation 4284A Pressing LcL of all devices on the bus After this command is sent you will be unable to operate the 4284A from the front panel Execute the LOCAL command to undo LOCAL LOCKOUT For example
252. el to be used 1 2 10 11 3 8 OPERATION Select the scanner channel Set the HP 4284A s channel number equal to that selected in step 1 Press the MEAS SETUP MENU key and the CORRECTION softkey The CORRECTION page will be displayed OPEN Correction Open the measurement contacts of the selected scanner channel Move the cursor to the FREQ1 field and press the MEAS OPEN softkey to measure OPEN condition at the FREQ1 Wait for the end of OPEN correction measurement If necessary repeat step 5 for the FREQ2 and FREQ3 fields SHORT Correction Short the measurement contacts of the selected scanner channel Move the cursor to the FREQ1 field and press the MEAS SHORT softkey to measure the SHORT condition at the FREQ1 Wait for the end of SHORT correction measurement If necessary repeat step 8 for the FREQ2 and FREQ3 fields LOAD Correction Connect the standard for the FREQ1 correction to the measurement contacts of the selected scanner channel Move the cursor to the FREQ1 field and press the MEAS LOAD softkey to measure the standard at the FREQ1 Wait for the end of LOAD correction measurement 12 If necessary repeat steps 10 and 11 for the FREQ2 and FREQS corrections S 3 Ww O 13 Change the scanner s and the HP 4284A s channel and repeat steps 4 through 12 until this procedure has been performed for all sca
253. em 8 76 MAV Message Available Bit 7 21 MEAS DISPLAY Page 2 10 3 1 MEAS SETUP Menu 4 1 MEAS SETUP Page 2 10 4 1 Measurement Functions 8 23 Procedure 6 1 Measurement Accuracy Absolute 9 5 Relative 9 7 Measurement Complete Bit 7 25 8 79 8 81 MEASUREMENT state 7 15 Measuring Bit 7 24 8 80 Measuring Correction Data Bit 7 24 8 80 Index 5 Index 6 Media Monitor Area 5 3 Media Type 5 3 Memory LOAD See Load PURGE See Purge STORE See Store Memory Card 5 3 Memory Card R W Test 5 13 MEMORY Card Slot 2 3 MEMory Subsystem 8 49 MENU Keys 2 2 2 8 MSS Master Summary Bit 7 21 Multiple Command Rules 8 3 Notation Conventions 8 1 NRI Format 8 6 NR2 Format 8 6 NR3 Format 8 6 Numeric Data 8 5 0PC Command 8 88 OPEN SHORT LOAD Correction 8 51 Operation Complete Command 8 88 Operation Complete OPC Bit 7 29 Operation Environment 1 5 Operation Errors B 1 Operation Status Registers Group 7 23 8 78 Operation Status Summary Bit 7 26 Option 9 18 Option 001 Power Amp DC Bias 9 18 Option 201 Handler Interface 5 8 Option 202 Handler Interface 5 8 Option 301 Scanner Interface 5 9 OPTion Identification Query 8 92 OPT Query 8 92 Oscilator Level 3 12 Oscillator Automatic Level Control aLc 4 6 OUTPut Subsystem 8 17 Parallel Series Circuit Mode 6 5 Parameters 8 5 Performance Test Record 10 2 10 37 Performance Tests 10 1 Power Cable 1 2 Power On PON Bi
254. ement function for your standard Refer to the next paragraph Measurement function for the standard Move the cursor to the REF A field of your specified frequency Enter the premeasured value of your standard s primary parameter using the numeric entry keys and the unit softkeys Move the cursor to the B field on the right side of your set REF A field Enter your standard s premeasured secondary parameter value using the numeric entry keys and the unit softkeys Move the cursor to the FREQ 1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 field at which you specified the frequency Connect the standard to the measurement contacts Note A 1G 23 Press MEAS LOAD The 4284A will perform a LOAD correction measurement and display the LOAD correction data on the system message line 24 Move the cursor to the LOAD field 25 Press ON to enable the LOAD correction calculations for subsequent measurements at the specified frequency points The relationship between the CORRECTION page and OPEN SHORT LOAD correction function are as follows lt CORRECT LON SYS MENU MEAS TD OPEN ON CABLE 1m SETUP ISHORT ON j MODE SINGLE ILOAD N CH No Foe FUNC Cp D CORREC O TION FREQL 1 00000kHz REF A 100 000pF B 0 00010 LIMIT MEA A 100 001pF B 0 00011 TABLE L FREQ 10 0000kHz REF A 100 020pF B 0 00012 Ia EA A 100 021pF B 0 00013 FREQ3 100 000kHz SETUP REF A 100 040pF B 0
255. en the 4284A and the scanner to pass control output signals and channel selection signals for multi channel correction Refer to the 4284A Option 301 Operation Note The status of the scanner interface installed not installed is monitored on this SYSTEM CONFIG page SCANNER I F 301 How to Set the Scanner Interface to ON or OFF When the scanner interface is set to ON the scanner interface signals through the interface connector are enabled Perform the following steps to set the handler interface to ON or OFF To set the correction mode to MULTI this procedure must be performed even if the multi channel correction function is used without the interface connector on the rear panel for example in the case of controlling a scanner and the 4284A via GPIB 1 Move the cursor to the SCANNER I F 301 field on the SYSTEM CONFIG page The following softkeys will be displayed in the softkey label area a ON m OFF Catalog System Configuration 5 9 2 Use the softkeys to set the scanner interface function to ON or OFF System Menu The system menu on this page allows you to perform the following functions a Printer The printer function is the same as the function of PRINT DISP of the system menu on the MEAS DISPLAY page The description of the function is given in System Menu in Chapter 4 So only the setting procedures for this function are described in the following paragraphs Printer Function Perform
256. end an output data message when it is in the local or remote modes when it is addressed to talk or in the talk only mode The data message contains the message returned by the query command and the terminators Terminators defined as follows NL END The EOI line is asserted while the New Line or Line Freed character 10 decimal is being sent on the bus Command All commands in this reference are fully explained and listed in the Reference following functional command order 4284A Subsystem Commands e DISPlay e OUTPut e TRIGger e MEMory e FREQuency e BIAS e INITiate e CORRection e VOLTage e FUNCtion FETCh e COMParator e CURRent e LIST e ABORt e Mass MEMory e AMPLitude e APERture e FORMat e SYSTem e STATus GPIB Common Commands e CLS e SRE e 0PC e TST e ESE e STB e WAI e TRG e ESR e IDN e RST e LRN e 0PT The explanation of each subsystem command is patterned as follows Subsystem command name Command Tree Subsystem command only Compound Command Name Command Description Command Syntax Example Using The Above Command Syntax Query Syntax Query Response Example Using The Above Query Syntax COON DoF WM eR Command Reference 8 9 DISPlay Subsystem The DISPlay subsystem command group sets the display page and enters ASCII characters on the comment line Figure 8 3 shows the command tree of the DISPlay subsystem command group ASurement NUMb
257. ent Data Measurement Data Cleared Cleared Not Affected List Sweep Data Cleared Cleared Not Affected V I Monitor Data Cleared Cleared Not Affected BIN Count Data Cleared Cleared Not Affected Initial Settings and System Memory C 3 C 4 Functions Initialize Method Power ON RST Device Clear GPIB Data Buffer Cleared Cleared Not Affected Memory Data Format ASCII ASCII Not Affected Input Buffer Cleared Not Affected Cleared Output Buffer Cleared Not Affected Cleared Error Queue Cleared Not Affected Not Affected Status Byte Bit 7 0 Not Affected Not Affected Bit 6 0 Not Affected Not Affected Bit 5 0 Not Affected Not Affected Bit 4 0 Not Affected 0 Enable Resister 0 Not Affected Not Affected Operation Status Bit 4 0 0 Not Affected Register Bit 3 0 0 Not Affected Bit 0 0 0 Not Affected Enable Resister 0 Not Affected Not Affected Standard Event Bit 7 1 Not Affected Not Affected Status Register Bit 6 0 Not Affected Not Affected Bit 5 0 Not Affected Not Affected Bit 4 0 Not Affected Not Affected Bit 3 0 Not Affected Not Affected Bit 2 0 Not Affected Not Affected Bit 0 0 Not Affected Not Affected Enable Resister 0 Not Affected Not Affected Others comment Cleared Cleared Not Affected KEY LOCK OFF OFF Not Affected 1 Any other bits described in this table are not used always 0 Initial Settings and System Memory Correction Data D Introduction Te
258. ent function from Cp D to Cp G in the FUNC field 5 Use the CURSOR arrow keys to move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 6 Press the STORE softkey to store the 4284A s control settings to the memory card as data record number 10 7 Press the CLEAR SETUP softkey to clear the set up and then confirm that FUNC is set to Cp D 8 Press the LOAD softkey to load data record number 10 from the memory card 9 Confirm that the measurement function is set to Cp G GPIB Interface Test This test verifies the 4284A S GPIB function GPIB COMPUTER Equipment Procedure Figure 10 8 GPIB Interface Test Setup Personal Technical Computer HP 9000 Series 200 Model 226 GPIB Cable 10833A 1 Set the 4284A s GPIB address to 17 Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 10 8 Use the computer s interface Select Code 7 Load BASIC and input the following program but do not RUN the program yet 10 DIM A 38 20 OUTPUT 717 IDN 30 ENTER 717 A 40 PRINT AS 50 OUTPUT 717 SRE328 60 OUTPUT 717 ABC 70 PRINT SPOLL 717 80 END Press the computer s STEP key three times to single step to line 20 Confirm that the LTN and RMT lamps are ON and that the softkey label page cannot be changed by pressing the MENU keys Press the LCL key on the 4284A Confirm that the LTN lamp stays ON the RMT lamp is OFF and the
259. ent value is less than the low limit value of BIN1 BINS See Figure 2 1 Secondary Parameter Reject The measurement vatue is not within the range of the secondary parameter limit See Figure 2 1 No Connection No Connection 2 2 OPERATION Table 2 1 Contact Assignments for Comparator Function sheet 2 of 2 UNBAL Unbalance The bridge is unbalanced KEYLOCK When this line is asserted all of the HP 4284A s front panel key functions are disabled cre Nocomen oo External DC Voltage 1 DC voltage supply pins for DC isolated open collector outputs BIN1 BIN9 AUX_BIN OUT_OF_BINS PHI PLO SREJ UNBAL The setting of internal jumpers must be changed when using the internal voltage supply O S fa a N oO pane EXT DCV1 EXT DCV1 ALARM is asserted when a POWER FAILURE occurs INDEX signal is asserted when an analog mea surement is complete and the HP 4284A is ready for the next DUT to be connected to the UN KNOWN terminals The measurement data however is not valid until EOM is asserted See Figure 2 3 End Of Measurement This signal is asserted when the measurement data and comparison results are valid See Figure 2 3 Common for EXT DCV1 OPERATION 2 3 Primary parameter PHI couto sins SREJ SREJ BIN 6 BIN 8 BIN 9 PLO OUT_OF BINS AUX_BIN AUX_BIN ro Secondary parameter
260. ep parameter is set to anything other than bias current error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur LIST Subsystem MODE Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example The MODE command sets the sweep mode of the List Sweep measurement function The MODE query returns the current mode setting of the List Sweep measurement function SEQuence LIST MODE STEPped Where SEQuence Sets to sequence mode STEPped Sets to stepped mode OUTPUT 717 LIST MODE SEQ LIST MODE Returned format is SEQ lt NL END gt STEP 10 OUTPUT 717 LIST MODE 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 37 LIST Subsystem BAND lt n gt Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 38 Command Reference The BAND lt n gt command sets the limit values of the limit function for the list sweep measurement The BAND lt n gt query returns the current limit value settings LIST BAND lt n gt lt parameter gt lt low limit n gt lt high limit n gt Where lt n gt lt parameter gt is lt low limit n gt lt high limit n gt 1 to 10 NR1 Sweep point number A Limit setting enable for primary parameter B Limit setting enable for secondary parameter OFF Limit setting disable NR1 NR2 or NR3 format low limit for sweep point lt n gt NR1 NR2 or NR3 format high limit for sweep point lt n gt OUTPUT 717 LIS
261. ep point is stored as one set of measurement data So when two or more sweep points are the same and are adjacent the 4284A measures the device once but the number of data sets stored is equal to the number of sweep points m When the limit function of the list sweep measurement is set to OFF at a sweep point lt IN OUT gt is 0 Also when the comparator function is set to OFF the lt BIN No gt is 0 There are two formats returned by MEMory READ DBUF query ASCII and BINARY Each format is described below The sample programs using the data buffer memory returned format ASCII and BINARY are shown later in this chapter a ASCII Format When the ASCII format is selected as a data format the returned format is as follows The lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt lt STATUS gt Remote Control 7 17 lt BIN No gt or lt IN OUT gt data format and meaning are the same as the ASCII data format described in ASCII Format SN NNNNNESNN lt DATA A gt L1007012 4 bytes SN NNNNNESNN lt DATA B gt S gt 6j lt BIN No gt or Figure 7 15 ASCII Format Buffer Memory a BINARY Format When the BINARY format is selected as the data format the returned format is as follows The lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt lt STATUS gt lt BIN No gt or lt IN OUT gt data format and meaning are the same as the BINARY data format described in Binary Fo
262. er COunt IST easurement SE Correction SETup imit TABle ist SE 9 SYSTem CATalog SELF test E lt string gt Figure 8 3 DISPlay Subsystem Command Tree 8 10 Command Reference DISPlay Subsystem PAGE Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example The PAGE command sets the display page The PAGE query returns the abbreviated page name currently displayed on the LCD screen DISPlay PAGE lt page name gt Where lt page name gt is MEASurement Sets display page to MEAS DISPLAY BNUMber Sets display page to BIN No DISPLAY BCOunt Sets display page to BIN COUNT DISPLAY LIST Sets display page to LIST SWEEP DISPLAY MSETup Sets display page to MEAS SETUP CSETup Sets display page to CORRECTION LTABle Sets display page to LIMIT TABLE SETUP LSETup Sets display page to LIST SWEEP SETUP CATalog Sets display page to CATALOG SYSTem Sets display page to SYSTEM CONFIG SELF Sets display page to SELF TEST OUTPUT 717 DISP PAGE BCO Set to the BIN COUNT DISPLAY DISPlay PAGE Returned data format is lt page name gt lt NL7END gt Where lt page name gt Return the abbreviated name of the current display page as shown in the preceding list 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP PAGE 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 11 DISPlay Subsystem LINE Command Syntax Example Qu
263. ery Syntax Query Response Example 8 12 Command Reference The LINE command enters an arbitrary comment line of up to 30 ASCII characters in the comment field The LINE query returns the comment line characters DISPlay LINE lt string gt Where lt string gt is ASCII character string maximum of 30 characters OUTPUT 717 DISP LINE This is a comment DISPlay LINE Returned data format is lt string gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 DISP LINE 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END FREQuency Subsystem FREQuency Subsystem Command Syntax Note i Y Example Query Syntax Query Response Example The FREQuency command sets the oscillator frequency The FREQuency query returns the current test frequency setting lt value gt FREQuency CW 4 MIN MAX Where lt value gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format MIN Sets to the minimum value 20 Hz MAX Sets to the maximum value 1 MHz A suffix multiplier and a suffix unit HZ hertz can be used with this command Either MAHZ and MHZ can be used as the suffix multiplier for MHz 1E6 Hz OUTPUT 717 FREQ 1KHZ Set to 1 kHz OUTPUT 717 FREQ MIN Set to 20 Hz OUTPUT 717 FREQ MAX Set to 1 MHz FREQuency CW he MAX Returned Format is lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 FREQ MIN 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 13 VOLTage Subsystem The VOLTage command sets
264. ery returns the contents of the standard operation status condition register Reading a condition register using this query does not clear its contents STATus OPERation CONDition Returned Format is lt value gt lt NL7 END gt Where lt value gt NRI format decimal expression of the contents of the operation status condition register The definition of each bit in the operation status condition register is as follows Bit No Description 15 5 Always 0 zero 4 Measuring Bit 3 Sweeping Bit 1 Always 0 zero 0 Measuring Correction Data Bit 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT OPER COND 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END STATus Subsystem OPERation ENABle Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example The OPERation ENABle command sets the enable bits of the standard operation status event register that allows true conditions in the event register to be reported in the summary bit of the status byte register The OPERation ENABle query returns the current setting of the enable bits of the operation status event register STATus OPERation ENABle lt value gt Where lt value gt NRI format decimal expression of enable bits of the operation status event register The definition of each bit in the operation status event register is as follows Bit No Description 15 5 Always 0 zero 4 Measurement Complete Bit 3 List Sweep Measurement Complete
265. ess TEST START to start the test The five LED indicators RMT LTN TLK SRQ and DC BIAS will be toggled ON and OFF once per second 4 Press TEST END to stop the test and to exit from the PEED DISPLAY TEST screen LCD Display Test Description This test checks the front panel LCD When this test is started all LCD characters used are displayed and toggled between the normal and inverse modes once per second How to Perform the LCD Display Test Perform the following steps to perform the LCD display test 1 Move the cursor to the TEST MENU field on the SELF TEST page 2 Press 3 and ENTER to set the test number to 3 The LCD DISPLAY TEST screen and all LCD characters will be displayed 3 Press TEST START to start the test The display will toggle between the normal and inverse modes once per second 4 Press TEST END to stop the test and to exit from the LCD DISPLAY TEST screen Handler I F Test Description This test checks the output signals of the Option 201 or 202 Handler Interface When this test is started each of the handler output signals is sequentially asserted for one second until all output signals have been asserted then the sequence is repeated until TEST END is pressed This test using the Handler Simulator Agilent PN 5 14 Catalog System Configuration Scanner I F EEPROM R W Test Note Note Y Y 04278 65001 is described on CHAPTER 10 PERFORMANCE TEST Description This test
266. ession is Improper 171 Invalid expression Invalid expression was received for example illegal character in expression 178 Expression data not allowed Expression data is not allowed Query Error 400 Query error Query is Improper 410 Query INTERRUPTED Query is followed by DAB or GET before the response was completed 420 Query UNTERMINATED Addressed to talk incomplete program message received 430 Query DEADLOCKED Input buffer and output buffer are full cannot continue 440 Query UNTERMINATED error after indefinite response The query which requests arbitrary data response IDN and OPT queries is sent before usual queries in a program message for example FREQ IDN was expected but IDN FREQ is recieved B 10 Error and Warning Messages System Message System messages are displayed on the System Message Line to provide operation instructions for the user and to report on the 4284A s status There are two categories of system messages warning messages and instruction messages Warning Messages The 4284A displays warning messages on the System Message Line when an inappropriate operation is attempted or when the setting is changed automatically due to an inappropriate operation The warning operation should not set an error bit The following list describes the 4284A s warning messages Wa
267. est 16 Press the TEST START softkey 17 Confirm that the LEDs on the handler simulator turn ON in accordance with the 4284A s output signals displayed on the LCD The LEDs turns ON light in the sequence shown in Figure 10 15 v Z l H OO 1I A ur tot we 1 Zn 375 4 QO I E IILE TON 4 Sms s moO wee ceSeyuxrvyag rrr Aeks6 2 ear SS544S5444442 yUUU YU TH mw j NAA TOoOoOmMmmMmnammmammmm ooo 0 ooo ooo o0o0 O00 0 000 0 e i LED OFF Figure 10 16 Handler Interface Function Check 18 Press the TEST END softkey Caution Do not execute any SELF TEST except for the Bias Current I F I O Test or the 4284A will become inoperative The remaining SELF TEST are for serviceuse only 19 Return the jumper settings on the handler interface board to their original settings Performance Tests 10 29 Handler Interface Function Test Option 202 only Equipment Procedure Caution y Note i Y 10 30 Performance Tests Perform this test only when troubleshooting the Option 202 handler interface board This test verifies the Option 202 handler interface functions When this test is performed the following LEDs WILL NOT turn ON because the signals they represent are not used by the Option 202 handler interface board PHI PLO SREJ UNBAL and ALARM Handler Simulator Agilent PN 04278 65001 Cable Agilent PN 04278 61635 1 Perform steps 1 through 5 described Procedure 2 Disc
268. est frequencies listed in Table 10 10 Press the TRIGGER key Confirm that the 4284A s reading is within the test limits listed in Table 10 10 Table 10 10 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Limits for 2 m and 4 m Cable Length Operation Setting Test Limits Cp Signal Test 2 m Cable 4 m Cable Level Frequency 510 mV 20 Hz C V 432 10 pF C V 432 11 pF 125 Hz C V 3 06 pF C V 3 07 pF 1 kHz C V 1 00 pF C V 1 01 pF 12 5 kHz C V 1 14 pF C V 1 15 pF 48 kHz C V 1 18 pF C V 1 19 pF 96 kHz C V 1 34 pF C V 1 37 pF 1 MHz C V 1 1 80 pF C V 1 2 06 pF 20 mV 1 kHz C V 2 54 pF C V 2 56 pF 1 MHz C V 1 2 90 pF C V t 3 20 pF 5 1V 20 Hz C V 28 97 pF C V 29 02 pF 1 kHz C V 1 53 pF C V 1 58 pF 1 MHz C V t 2 92 pF C V t 3 81 pF C V Standard s calibration value at DC C V 1 C V multiplied by 1 0003 Option 001 only Performance Tests 10 19 Store and Load Function Test Equipment Procedure Note i Y 10 20 Performance Tests This test verifies the 4284A s ability to store information to and load information from a memory card Memory Card Agilent PN 04278 89001 1 Perform a SYSTEM RESET as described in System Reset 2 Insert a memory card into the MEMORY card slot 3 Display the MEAS SETUP page This test should be performed from the MEAS SETUP page 4 Change the measurem
269. et frequency points independent of the test frequency ies you set and the SHORT correction data for each measurement point other than those present frequency points are calculated using the interpolation method Refer to Figure 4 11 All preset frequency points 48 frequency points are as same as the preset frequencies for the OPEN correction using the interpolation method To take the SHORT correction data at the preset frequency points MEAS SHORT which is displayed when the cursor is moved to the SHORT field is used m The SHORT correction data which is taken at the frequency points you specify You can set up to three frequency points in the FREQI FREQ2 and FREQS fields To take the SHORT correction data at the frequency points you specify MEAS SHORT which is displayed when the cursor is moved to the FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQS field is used MEAS SETUP Menu 4 23 LOAD Correction 4 24 MEAS SETUP Menu Front Panel Operation for the Short Correction There are two procedures SHORT correction at all frequency points and SHORT correction at user specified frequency points Perform the following steps to execute the SHORT correction for all frequency points When you want to execute the short correction at the user specified frequency points refer to LOAD Correction 1 Move the cursor to the SHORT field The following softkeys will be displayed a ON m OFF m MEAS SHORT 2 Connect the test fixture to the UNKN
270. f limit at sweep Point 3 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 4 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 5 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 6 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 7 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 8 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 9 OUT_OF_BINS Failed out of limit at sweep Point 10 11 AUX_BIN AUX_BIN is asserted when one or more fail judgments of Steps 1 to 10 occur in a single sweep 19 21 Not Used Off state HIGH level i INDEX In the SEQ sweep mode INDEX is asserted when an analog measurement of the 31 EOM QO fa N _ oP ODNANRWOND last sweep step is completed and the HP 4284A is ready for the next DUT to be connected to the UNKNOWN terminals The measurement data however is not valid until EOM is asserted See Figure 2 5 In the STEP sweep mode INDEX is asserted when each analog measurement is complete and the HP 4284A is ready for the next sweep step The measurement data however is not valid until EOM is asserted See Figure 2 5 End Of Measurement In the SEQ sweep mode EOM is asserted when the measurement data and com parison results are valid after the last step measurement is completed See Figure 2 5 In the STEP sweep mode EOM is asserted when each step measurement includ ing the comparison times is completed and the mea surement data is valid The comparison results are valid after th
271. fic Error B 1 Device Specific Error DDE Bit 7 29 Display Area Definition 2 6 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 1 Display Pages 2 8 DISPlay Subsystem 8 10 Electromagnetic Compatibility 1 5 ENTRY Keys 2 3 Equivalent Circuit See Parallel Series Circuit Mode Error Handling B 2 Messages B 1 ESE Command 8 83 ESR Query 8 84 Exclusive Remedies ix Execution Error B 1 Execution Error EXE Bit 7 29 External Memory Card 8 76 EXT TRIGGER Connector 2 5 FETCh Subsystem 8 45 FORMat Subsystem 8 48 Four Terminal Pair Measurement 6 9 FRAME Terminal 2 4 FREQuency Subsystem 8 13 Front Panel 2 2 FUNCtion Subsystem 8 23 Fuse Selection 1 4 Index 3 G General Infomation 9 1 General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB 7 1 GPIB Addressing 7 4 Bus Capability 7 4 Command See Command Common Commands 8 2 8 82 Connection 7 1 Connector Signal Pin 7 2 Errors B 1 Interconnect Cables 7 2 Interface Capability 7 3 Interface Connector 2 5 Status Indicator 2 3 Typical Interconnection 7 3 GPIB ADDRESS Field 5 8 GPIB Interface Test 10 21 Group Execute Trigger GET 7 5 GTL 7 4 H handle 1 6 HANDLER I F 201 2202 Field 5 8 Handler I F Test 5 14 Handler Interface Function Test Option 201 10 26 Option 202 10 30 Header 8 5 How To Use This Manual vi l IDLE state 7 12 IDN Query 8 87 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands 7 6 8 82 754 Floating Point Format 7 10 standard 488 1 1987 7 1 standard 488 1978 7
272. fined header Undefined header or an unrecognized command was received operation not allowed 121 Invalid character in number Invalid character in numeric data 123 Numeric overflow Numeric data value was too large exponent magnitude gt 32k 124 Too many digits Numeric data length was too long more than 255 digits received 128 Numeric data not allowed Numeric data not allowed for this operation 131 Invalid suffix Units are unrecognized or the units are not appropriate 138 Suffix not allowed A suffix is not allowed for this operation 141 Invalid character data Bad character data or unrecognized character data was received 144 Character data too long Character data is too long maximum length is 12 characters 148 Character data not allowed Character data not allowed for this operation 150 String data error String data is improper Error and Warning Messages B 9 Error Error Message String No Description 151 Invalid string data Invalid string data was received for example END received before close quote 158 String data not allowed String data is not allowed 160 Block data error Block data is improper 161 Invalid block data Invalid block data was received for example END received before length satisfied 168 Block data not allowed Block data is not allowed 170 Expression error Expr
273. following definitions are used lt NL END gt Terminators the EOI line is asserted by New Line or ASCII Line Feed character decimal 10 White space Single ASCII character 0 9 11 32 decimal For example Carriage Return 13 decimal or Space 32 decimal Command Reference 8 1 Command Structure 8 2 Command Reference The 4284A commands are divided into two types GPIB common commands and SCPI commands The GPIB common commands are defined in IEEE std 488 2 1987 and these commands are common for all devices The SCPI commands are used to control all of the 4284A s functions The SCPI commands are tree structured three levels deep The highest level commands are called the subsystem commands in this manual So the lower level commands are legal only when the subsystem commands have been selected A colon is used to separate the higher level commands and the lower level commands See Figure 8 1 for a sample FUNCtion IMPedance FUNC IMP CPD RANGe VAC IAC FUNC IMP RANG 100 FUNC SMON VAC ON FUNC SMON IAC ON AUTO FUNC IMP RANG AUTO ON Figure 8 1 Command Tree Example The basic rules of the command tree are as follows m Letter case upper and lower is ignored For example FUNC IMP CPD func imp CpD FuNc IMp cPd m Spaces U used to indicate a space must not be placed bef
274. follows e Table 10 7 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Limits 1 of 2 at page 10 14 Signal Level 510 mV Test Frequency 20 Hz Parameter D 1000 pF Standard Wrong limit 0 00319 Correct limit 0 03190 Change 6 Change Performance Test Record for Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test as follows e Performance test record for 100 pF Standard at page 10 42 OSC Level 510 mV e Change 125 Hz Cp MINIMUM test limit as below Wrong limit C V 1 7595 pF Correct limit C V 1 759 pF e Performance test record for 1000 pF Standard at page 10 43 OSC Level 510 mV e Change 20 Hz D MINIMUM test limit as below Wrong limit 0 00319 Correct limit 0 03190 e Change 20 Hz D MAXIMUM test limit as below Wrong limit 0 00319 Correct limit 0 03190 e Performance test record for 0 01 F Standard at page 10 44 OSC Level 510 mV Delete 20 Hz test limits from the table e Delete 125 Hz test limits from the table e Change 1 kHz MINIMUM test limit as below Wrong limit C V x 0 0082 nF Correct limit C V 0 0082 nF e Performance test record for 0 1 F Standard at page 10 44 OSC Level 510 mV e Delete 20 Hz test limits from the table e Delete 125 Hz test limits from the table e Performance test record for 1 F Standard at page 10 45 OSC Level 510 mV e Delete 20 Hz test limits from the table e Delete 125 Hz test limits from the table e Change 1 kHz MINIMUM test limit as below Wrong limit 0 081 nF Correct limit 0 8
275. for MHz 1E6 Hz CORRection SPOT lt n gt FREQuency Returned format is lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 CORR SPOT1 FREQ 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END If this query is received when the List Sweep parameter is set to anything other than frequency error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur Command Reference 8 59 COrrection Subsystem SPOT lt n gt OPEN Command Syntax Example The SPOT lt n gt 0PEN command executes the OPEN correction data measurement for the specified frequency point FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 correction CORRection SPOT lt n gt 0PEN Where lt n gt is 1 State setting for FREQI point 2 State setting for FREQ2 point 3 State setting for FREQ3 point OUTPUT 717 CORR SPOT1 OPEN SPOT lt n gt SHORt Command Syntax Example 8 60 Command Reference The SPOT lt n gt SHORt command executes the SHORT correction data measurement for the specified frequency point FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 correction CORRection SPOT lt n gt SHORt Where lt n gt is 1 State setting for FREQ1 point 2 State setting for FREQ2 point 3 State setting for FREQ3 point OUTPUT 717 CORR SPOT1 SHOR COrrection Subsystem SPOT lt n gt LOAD The SPOT lt n gt LOAD command executes the LOAD correction data measurement for the specified frequency point FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 correction Command Syntax CORRection SPOT lt n gt LOAD Where lt
276. formation pertaining to the handler under discus sion will now be given Setup examples are given for the following handlers Standard Configuration default setting Palomar Model M16 Palomar Model M11 Q Corporation RTR2 isumeca 83 EA Modei M015 O is 3 N l Standard Configuration The default setting is the standard configuration of the Option 202 handler interface board as it is shipped from the factory The timing for the default setup is shown in Figure 3 4 for reference START IN pa Eade EOC BUSY BIN Data Figure 3 4 Timing for Standard Configuration Used with The Comparator Function SEETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 3 7 Standard Configuration Procedure 1 Perform steps 1 through 6 of the General Configuration Procedure on page 3 3 2 Configure the following interface signals by installing the jumpers as shown in Figure 3 5 START IN install jumper at W9 W10 and W13 BUSY Install jumper at W6 EOC Install jumper at W4 Figure 3 5 Jumper and Pull Up Resistor Locations for Standard Configuration 3 Install the configured handler interface board into the HP 4284A 4 Replace the top shield plate rear feet and top cover 3 8 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD L Palomar Model M16 START IN EOC BUSY The Palomar M16 timing diagram is shown in Figure 3 6 for reference Palomar mode M16 Falling Edge Trigger
277. frequencies is completed m Comparison judgment Result is out of bin m Failed sweep comparison judgment Key lock ON OFF is switched How to Set the Beeper to ON or OFF Perform the following steps to set the beeper function to ON or OFF 1 Move the cursor to the BEEPER field on the SYSTEM CONFIG page The following softkeys will be displayed in the softkey label area Catalog System Configuration 5 7 a ON m OFF 2 Use the softkeys to set the beeper function to the ON or OFF GPIB Setting Description All 4284As except those with Option 109 Delete GPIB Interface are equipped with an GPIB interface so they can be controlled via the GPIB bus The 4284A can be linked to other instruments and computers to form an automated measurement system The status of the GPIB interface installed not installed is monitored on this SYSTEM CONFIG page GPIB I F The GPIB address and the Talk Only mode can be set on this page How to Set the GPIB Address Perform the following steps to set GPIB address 1 Move the cursor to the GPIB ADDRESS field on the SYSTEM CONFIG page 2 Enter the GPIB address using the numeric entry keys and press ENTER How to Set the Talk Only Mode Perform the following steps to set the 4284A to the Talk Only mode ON To set the 4284A to the addressable mode perform the following steps to set the Talk Only mode to OFF 1 Move the cursor to the TALK ONLY field on the SYSTEM CONFIG page The follo
278. g a single sweep NOTE Manual change supplement are revised as often as necessary to keep manuals as current and accurate as possible Agilent Technologies recommends that you periodically request the latest edition of this supplement Free copies are available from all Agilent Technologies offices When requesting copies quote the manual identification information from your supplement or the model number and print date from the title page of the manual Date Div January 2000 33 Meas Page 1 of 2 oo wees Agilent Technologies PRINTED IN JAPAN a aye Page 2 7 Table 2 2 Contact Assignments for List Sweep Comparator Function Change a part of the table 2 2 as follows Pin No Signal Name Description 7BINi Failed limit Point 1 BIN2 Failed limit Point 2 BIN3 Fai led limit Point 3 BIN4 Fai led limit Point 4 BIN5 Fai led limit Point 5 BING Failed limit Point 6 BIN7 Fai led limit Point 7 BIN8 Fai led limit Point 8 BIN9 Fai led limit Point 9 AUX_BIN Failed out of limit at Point 10 1 10 OUT_OF_BINS OUT_OF_BINS is asserted when one or more fail judgements of Step 1 to 10 occur in a single sweep Page 2 8 Figure 2 4 Signal Area Example For The List Sweep Comparator Function Change the figure as follows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 _ i ACEEA TTET RANY value Higher limit Pass area Lower limit Sweep point MANUAL CHANGES 4284A MANUAL IDENTIFICATION Precision LCR Meter Date Prin
279. ge This sample program sets all of the setting controls on the LIMIT TABLE SETUP page 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 ASSIGN REMOTE OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT END Meter TO 717 Meter Meter DISP Meter FUNC Meter COMP Meter COMP Meter COMP Meter COMP Meter COMP Meter COMP Meter COMP Meter COMP Meter COMP Meter COMP Meter COMP Meter COMP Meter COMP Meter COMP PAGE LTAB IMP CPD TOL NOM 10E 12 on ABIN ON MODE PTOL TOL TOL TOL TOL TOL TOL TOL TOL TOL SLIM 0 0 Figure 7 22 LIMIT TABLE SETUP page BIN1 BIN2 BIN3 BIN4 BINS BING BIN7 BIN8 BIN9 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 00005 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 ASSIGN REMOTE OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT END Meter TO 717 Meter Meter DISP Meter LIST Meter LIST Meter LIST Meter LIST Meter LIST Meter LIST Meter LIST Meter LIST Meter LIST Meter LIST Meter LIST Meter LIST LIST SWEEP SETUP page This sample program sets all of the setting controls on the LIST SWEEP SETUP page PAGE LS
280. gt Where lt value gt 0 to 9 NR1 record number for EEPROM 10 to 19 NR1 record number for memory card OUTPUT 717 MMEM STOR STAT 5 SYSTem ERRor SYSTem ERRor Query Syntax Query Response Example The SYSTem ERRor query returns the existing error numbers with the error messages for the errors in the 4284A s error queue The 4284A s error queue stores errors generated by the 4284A As errors are generated they are placed in the error queue which stores up to five errors This is a first in first out queue FIFO If the error queue overflows the last error in the queue is replaced with error 350 Too many errors Anytime the queue overflows the least recent errors remain in the queue and the most recent errors are discarded When all errors have been read from the queue further SYSTem ERRor queries will return error 0 no errors Reading an error from the queue removes that error from the queue opening a position in the queue for a new error if one is subsequently generated SYSTem ERRor Returned Format is lt number gt lt message gt Where lt number gt NRI format error number For details refer to Appendix B lt message gt ASCII string error message For details refer to Appendix B 10 DIM A 50 20 FOR I 1 to 5 30 OUTPUT 717 SYST ERR 40 ENTER 717 A 50 PRINT A 60 NEXT I 70 END Command Reference 8 77 STATus Subsystem The STATus subs
281. gth of cable must not exceed 20 meters a A maximum of 15 devices can be connected on one bus system m There are no restrictions on how the cables are connected together However it is recommended that no more than four piggyback connectors be stacked together on any one device The resulting structure could exert enough force on the connector mounting to damage it For example a system containing six devices can be connected together with cables that have a total length of less than or equal to 12 meters six devices Xx 2m device 12 meters The individual length of cable may be distributed in any manner desired as long as the total length does not exceed the allowed maximum If more than ten devices are to be connected together cables shorter than two meters must be used between some of the devices to keep the total cable length less than 20 meters Figure 7 1 shows an GPIB interface connector The 4284A uses all of the available GPIB lines therefore damage to any connector pin will adversely affect its GPIB operation Remote Control 7 1 1 2 oa DIO cor Dav NRFD Do N P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 6 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 7 GROUNDED NEAR NDAC P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 8 TERMINATION OF Fo 7 a P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 9 OTHER WIRE OF sra ae TWISTED PAIR WITH 10 TWISTED PAIR aw P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 11 SHIELD SIGNAL GROUND Oooononooooon DOUUUUUUUUUUO CONNECTED TO
282. h limit gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format high limit value The low limit value should be lower than the high limit value If the low limit value is set higher than the high limit a warning message is displayed when this command is received an error does not occur OUTPUT 717 COMP SLIM 0 001 0 002 COMParator SLIMit Returned Format is lt NR3 gt lt NR3 gt lt NL7 END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 COMP SLIM 20 ENTER 717 4 B 30 PRINT A B 40 END Command Reference 8 71 Secondary LIMit Auxiliary BIN Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 72 Command Reference The Auxiliary BIN command sets the auxiliary BIN counting function of the comparator to ON or OFF The Auxiliary BIN query responds the current ON OFF condition of the auxiliary BIN counting function ON La OFF COMParator Auxiliary BIN 0 Where O decimal 48 When the function is OFF 1 decimal 49 When he function is ON OUTPUT 717 COMP ABIN ON COMParator Auxiliary BIN Returned Format is lt NR1 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 COMP ABIN 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END COMParator Subsystem SWAP Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example The SWAP command sets the swap parameter function to ON 9 BIN settings for secondary parameter or OFF 9 BIN settings for primary parameter The SWAP query responds the current ON OFF conditio
283. he HP 4284A is ready for the next DUT EOC is asserted HIGH when the measurement is completed and the HP 4284A is ready for the next DUT EOC is asserted LOW while the measurement data and comparison re sults are invalid w1 w2 w3 W4 w5 W6 BUSY is asserted HIGH while the measurement data and comparison results are invalid i W7 ws Wit W12 W13 BUSY is asserted LOW while the measurement data and comparison results are invalid Sets the START IN input to operate at TTL levels W9 and W10 must be left open W9 W10 Opto isolates the START IN input both W9 and W10 must have jumpers installed and W8 must be left open owi Adds a 0 1 uF capacitor to filter out noise on the START IN input 3 2 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD Sets the HP 4284A to trigger on the falling edge of the START IN input signal Opto isolator i Sets the HP 4284A to trigger on the raising edge of the START IN input signal TTL Sets the HP 4284A to trigger on the raising edge of the START IN input Opto Isolator Sets the HP 4284A to trigger on the falling edge of the START IN input signal TTL General Configuration i Procedure If you are using one of the handlers listed below perform steps 1 through 6 of the following generali configuration procedure and then go to page 3 7 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES for your handler and install the pull up resistors and jumpers as directed Use the com plete procedure to
284. ias Level Accuracy Test Setup without the Interface Box page 10 9 as follows MULTIMETER Oo o o o Alligator Clips Test Lead 2 BNCs m 3 alligator clips Test Lead Tee BNC m f f Direct connection no cable Adapter 04284aue0001 Copyright 2007 Agilent Technologies QlZaF7 Fry Ee l DONA KF A Lyi ERR EE 4 Ve 7 eA Ry 7 AREA OB 10 5 S Y 10 9 SLL FIZ BEELTFAV HP 4284A JOJY t FAR SUK 2 BNC m 3 J O Wy BHERRLET FAF Y F BNC m f f 7 JIVISERLEA THATS 04284auj0001 Copyright 2007 Agilent Technologies Agilent 4284A Precision LCR Meter Maintenance Manual Manual Change Agilent Part No N A Apr 2012 Change 1 Change the test limits of 100pF standard for 510mV 20 Hz on D value on page 10 14 Change the test limits of 100pF standard for 510mV 48 kHz on D value on page 10 14 Table 10 7 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Limits 1 of 2 Setting Test Limits Cp D Signal Test 10pF standard 100 pF standard 1000 pF standard Level Frequency C V 32 09 pF 0 03190 C V 1 759 pF C V 3 05 pF a re C V 0 312 pF C V 1 00 pF aE E a Cp C V 0 0318 pF C V 0 137 pF C V 1 13 pF Cp C V 0 0246 pF C V 0 162 pF C V 1 16 pF Cp C V 0 0275 pF C V 0 122 pF C V 1 31 pF ee C V 0 0249 pF C V 0 102 pF C V 1 53 pF C V 0 0297 pF C V 0 152 pF C V 2 03 pF C V Standard s cali
285. iate CONTinuous Returned format is lt NR1 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 INIT CONT 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END FETCh Subsystem FETCh Subsystem The FETCh subsystem command group is a sensor only command which retrieves the measurement data taken by measurement s initiated by a trigger and places the data into the 4284A s output buffer Figure 8 10 shows the command tree of the FETCh subsystem command group IMP i Source MONitor 7 Figure 8 10 FETCh Subsystem Command Tree IMP Query Syntax Example The IMP query sets the latest measurement data of the primary and secondary parameters into the 4284A s output buffer For the returned format refer to Data Transfer in Chapter 7 FETCh IMP 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG SOUR BUS 20 OUTPUT 717 TRIG 30 OUTPUT 717 FETC 40 ENTER 717 A4 B C 50 PRINT A B C 60 END Command Reference 8 45 FETCh Subsystem The Source MONitor VAC query sets the latest measured voltage Source MONitor VAC monitor data into the 4284A s output buffer Query Syntax FETCh SMONitor VAC Query Response Returned format is lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt Example 10 OUTPUT 717 TRIG SOUR BUS 20 OUTPUT 717 TRIG 30 OUTPUT 717 FETC SMON VAC 40 ENTER 717 A 50 PRINT A 60 END If this query is received when the voltage level monitor is set to OFF Note a 3 returned
286. ient state This appendix describes the measurement condition changes which cause the transient states and lists the delay times required for various transient states Refer to Table G 1 Table G 1 Measurement Condition Changes Change in DC BIAS OFF DC BIAS ON measurement condition DCI ISO OFF DCI ISO ON Frequency 1 Meas Range 2 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 DC Bias Voltage 3 1 3 2 Short circuit 4 1 4 2 Recovery 1 Test Frequency f lt 1kHz only Transient States Caused by Measurement Condition Changes G 1 i When the test frequency is changed from range A to range C the anging tne les g 8 g Frequency minimum required delay time is 50 ms Delay times of greater than 150 ms aren t required A B C 20 Hz 100 Hz 100 kHz 1 MHz 20 Hz lt A lt 100 Hz 100 kHz lt C lt 1 MHz L10019001 Note ll A delay time isn t necessary for range changes other than a range A to C change G 2 Transient States Caused by Measurement Condition Changes Changing the When the measurement range frequency is set below 1 kHz use the Measurement Range appropriate delay time as shown below 1 After changing the measurement range under the following conditions use the delay times shown in Figure G 1 Test Frequency lt 1kHz DC Bias O Test Signal Voltage 2 05 20 mV icp gt 5 oo 50mVv DC
287. if you are going to store or load the settings to or from a memory card Catalog System Configuration 5 3 4 Press STORE when you want to use the STORE function The message Enter record number to STORE will be displayed on the system message line Press LOAD when you want to use the LOAD function The message Enter record number to LOAD will be displayed on the system message line 5 Use the numeric entry keys and ENTER to enter the record number at which the current control settings will be STORED to or LOADED from Printer Function Perform the following steps to print out the displayed page using the PRINT DISP mode 1 Connect the 4284A to the printer using an GPIB cable Set the printer to the Listen Only mode Set the Talk Only mode to ON from the SYSTEM CONFIG page 2 3 4 Press CATALOG SYSTEM to display the CATALOG page 5 6 7 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field Press more 1 2 Press PRINT DISP to print out the displayed page The displayed page is printed out as shown in Figure 5 3 lt CATALOG gt SYS MENU MEDIA CARD No 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 COMMENT 470pF Ceramic Capacitor Magnetic Head test 9140 401 oo oO 0 0 0F RPrRH MN Figure 5 3 CATALOG Page Example Purge Function Perform the following steps to purge the control settings from the internal non volatile memory or from the external memory card 1 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field on the CA
288. igure 3 14 for reference 9 ast z l N D START IN Falling Edge Trigger BUSY Figure 3 14 EA M015 I O Timing eo Used with The Comparator Function SEETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 3 17 EA Model M015 Configuration Procedure 1 Perform steps 1 through 6 of the General Configuration Procedure on page 3 3 2 Configure the following interface signais by installing the jumpers as shown in Figure 3 15 7 START IN install jumper at W9 W10 and W12 BUSY Install jumper at W6 EOC Install jumper at W4 Figure 3 15 EA M015 Jumper and Pull Up Resistor Locations 3 Install the configured handler interface board into the HP 4284A 4 Replace the top shield plate rear feet and top cover 3 18 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 4284A PRECISION LCR METER OPERATION NOTE Option 301 Scanner Interface ae ees Agilent Technologies Printed in JAPAN TABLE OF CONTENTS D E meee SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION INTRODUCTION 1 1 DESCRIPTION 1 1 1 2 SPECIFICATIONS E SECTION 2 INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION INTRODUCTION 2 1 SCANNER INTERFACE SIGNAL INPUT OUTPUT CONNECTOR 2 Channel Selection Input Signals 2 Control Output Signals 2 Control Input Signals 2 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS 2 Channel Selection Input Siganals Optocoupled 2 8 External Trigger Input Signals Optocoupled 2 8 Control Output Signals Optocoupled 2 10 SETTING UP THE SCANNER
289. ill be given Overview 2 9 Summary of Pages 2 10 Overview Figure 2 5 shows all display pages Each summary of each page is shown below MEAS DISPLAY under DISPLAY FORMAT This display page provides the measurement result information and control settings are entered from this page The 4284A measures the device under test from this page and displays the measurement results in large characters BIN No DISPLAY under DISPLAY FORMAT This display page provides the bin sorting result information the measurement results and comparator function on off settings The 4284A measures the device under test from this page The bin number is displayed in large characters and the measurement results are displayed in normal characters BIN COUNT DISPLAY under DISPLAY FORMAT This display page provides the limit table s conditions and the comparator s bin counter results The 4284A can measure the device under test from this page but the measurement results will not be displayed LIST SWEEP DISPLAY under DISPLAY FORMAT This display page provides the list sweep measurement results and the sweep mode step seq selection The 4284A measures the device under test according to the list sweep conditions in the LIST SWEEP SETUP page An asterisk shows the current measuring point in the list sweep points The list sweep point cannot be set from this page You must use the LIST SWEEP SETUP in MEAS SETUP page to
290. ims with a resolution as listed in Table 3 3 or the oscillator current level can be set from 0 Arms to 200 mA ms with a resolution as listed in Table 3 3 It is possible to make the option 001 valid or invalid from the MEAS SETUP page When the option 001 function is used the high power mode must be set to ON in the MEAS SETUP page For more information refer to Chapter 4 Note Y Table 3 3 Oscillator Level and Resolution Opt 001 Mode Oscillator Level Resolution Voltage 0 Vrms 5 MVrms to 200 MVrms 1 mVrms 210 mVrms to 2 Vims 10 mVems 2 1 Vrms to 20 V rms 100 mVrms Level 0 Arms 50 pArms to 2 MArms 10 pArms 2 1 mArms to 20 mArms 100 H rms 21 mArms to 200 mArms 1 mArms The 4284A can measure a device using a constant voltage or current level by using the automatic level control function The automatic level control function ALC field can be set to ON from the MEAS SETUP page When a constant voltage or current level measurement is performed the asterisk mark is located at the head of the oscillator level value For more information about the automatic level control function refer to Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation for Setting the Oscillator Level There are two ways to set the oscillator level One is to use the softkeys and the other is to use the use the numeric entry keys Perform the following steps to set the oscillator level 1 Move the cursor to the LEVEL field The fol
291. imum measurement range is automatically selected according to the impedance of each DUT DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 7 dons 4 100nS dus 10uS 100uS ims ADMITTANCE 10mS 100mS 10s 100s IMPEDANCE 10N Range o o Xo of wee we x Xo Be D a oa Zon S 100MN 4 Ox z ss town 4 100k2 Range z 9 o L IMA o 100k Q oN 3OKN Range Ko Ka 10k Q Range amp 10k A 4 Ax gt 3kKN Range J J z LA 1k Q Range gt z 1k 5 bh 5 g 300 N Range a L 3 Z lt Ka O 100A 4 Sa Oj 100 Range lt K y D X 10n St X X X X 4 Oy S 1a H an zo 10 9 Range RS o 100m A EN tom N 20 100 1k 10k 100k 300k 1 Hz Frequency when oscillator level lt 0 1V or lt 1mA 3 8 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu Figure 3 4 Effective Measuring Range Oscillator Level lt 2V or lt 20 mA L100300A x o Z N x aD O Q O Ke On I a ST oa x SOQ Ss 10ns 4 100MM gt KN Z ss 1oons 4 toma 4 xX 100k Range Re 0 a ius IMM xs 7 o R 1ousS 100k Q 4 EN 30k Range x Z 10k N Range S amp 1oous 10k AS S k 3k A Range Lu uu Lu 6 g Q 6 Z 2 Z 1k Range Z E im 5 1kn 5 5 5 fan x 3002 Range 2 2 5 l 2 So Q o toms 100 Q 4 KN s 100 2 Range Z Re p 100mS 1025 SjJ X gt X gt 10 19 Range 2 Yo amp i
292. in operation and for a time after it is powered down Allow 1 minute for the internal capacitors to discharge Warning y Page 3 4 Add the following CAUTION after the procedure 6 Cantici The interface board contains electronic components that can be damaged by static electricity through electrostatic discharge ESD To prevent ESD damage maintain frequent contact with any bare sheet metal surface on the chassis A grounding wrist strap or similar device is useful for this purpose Handle the board carefully at all times Avoid touching electronic components or circuit paths MODEL 4284A PRECISION LCR METER OPTION 301 SCANNER INTERFACE OPERATION NOTE Page 2 11 PROCEDURE 1 and Warning Change the procedure 1 and warning as follows 1 Disconnect the power cable from the 4284A and allow 1 minute for the internal capacitors to discharge Dangerous energy voltage exists when the 4284A is in operation and for a time after it is powered down Allow 1 minute for the internal capacitors to discharge Warning y Page 2 12 Add the following CAUTION after the procedure 7 Sudon The interface board contains electronic components that can be damaged by static electricity through electrostatic discharge ESD To prevent ESD damage maintain frequent contact with any bare sheet metal surface on the chassis A grounding wrist strap or similar device is useful for this purpose Handle the board carefully at all times Avoid touching electr
293. in the internal circuits to convert the analog signal to a digital signal The Integration Time is the time required to perform an A D conversion Generally a longer conversion time will result in more stable and accurate measurement results SHORT MEDIUM or LONG integration times can be selected The measurement time of each integration time is shown in Measurement Time in Chapter 9 Front Panel Operation for Setting the Integration Time Perform the following steps to set the integration time 1 Move the cursor to the INTEG field The following softkeys will be displayed m SHORT MED m LONG 2 Use the preceding softkeys to select and set the integration time DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 17 System Menu 3 18 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu The system menu allows you to perform the following functions Load Store Decimal fixed point Printer Keylock This paragraph describes each function in the order listed above Load Store Function The 4284A uses two types of non volatile memory the internal EEPROM and an external memory card for storing and retrieving a maximum of 20 sets of instrument control settings The following data will be stored in non volatile memory as one record m Control settings on the MEAS SETUP page Measurement Function Test Frequency Measurement Range Oscillator Level DC Bias Integration Time Averaging Rate Delay Time Trigger Mode ALC on off Hi PW mode on off V Monitor on off I
294. installation and other general information on the 4284A Chapter 10 provides the performance tests for the 4284A used for incoming inspection and verification that your instrument is completely calibrated Appendix A Manual Changes Appendix B Error and Warning Messages Appendix C Initial Settings and System Memory Appendix D Correction Data Appendix E Write Protection Appendix F Test Frequency Points Appendix G Transient States Caused by Measurement Condition Changes Appendix A contains Manual Changes and provides information for using this manual with an 4284A manufactured before the printing date of the manual Appendix B lists the 4284A s error and warning messages with brief descriptions and solutions and the system messages Appendix C lists the 4284A s initial settings and functions whose status is stored in internal system memory Appendix D provides information about the relationship between the test frequency and the correction data Appendix E provides the procedure for write protecting all of the stored data in the 4284A s memory card and internal EEPROM memory Appendix F lists all available test frequency points from 1 kHz to 1 MHz Appendix G describes the measurement condition changes which cause the transient states and lists the delay times required for various transient states Typeface Conventions Bold Boldface type is used when a term is defined For example ico
295. int at which the DUT will connected 3 Keep connections between the point at which the shielding ends and DUT as short as possible Leur Lror H POT Hour PRPP 4284A four terminal pair configuration L1006097 Figure 6 7 Measurement Contacts The following paragraphs will give you some techniques for using the four terminal pair configuration effectively and efficiently 6 10 Measurement Procedure and Examples Capacitance To Ground To measure capacitors of 10 pF or less the stray capacitance when the conductors are grounded this is capacitance to ground between the measurement contacts and the conductors near the capacitor will influence the measurement as shown in Figure 6 8 Ch can be ignored Cl can not be ignored Cl Ch Grounded Conductor L100 Figure 6 8 Model of Capacitance to Ground To minimize the stray capacitance of the test leads the center conductor of the test leads should be kept as short as possible as shown in Figure 6 9 A If four terminal pair connections are close to the point where contact is made with the DUT interconnect the shields of the measurement terminals to the conductor to reduce the influence of the stray capacitance to ground as shown in Figure 6 9 B Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 11 Shield to the Tip as short as possible Grounded Cond Grounded Conductor L100
296. ion from electrical shock the power cable ground must not be defeated The power plug must be plugged into an outlet that provides a protective earth ground connection Installation and Set Up Guide OPTION 900 United Kingdom Plug BS 1363 A 250V 10A Cable 8120 1351 8120 8705 OPTION 902 Continental Europe Plug CEE 7 Standard Sheet VII 250V 10A Cable 8120 1689 OPTION 904 U S Canada Plug NEMA 6 15P 250V 6A Cable 8120 0698 OPTION 912 Denmark Plug SR 107 2 D 250V 10A Cable 8120 2956 OPTION 918 Plug JIS C 8303 125V 12A Cable 8120 4753 OPTION 921 Plug CEI 23 16 250V 10A Cable 8120 6978 OPTION 901 Australia New Zealand Plug AS 3112 250V 10A Cable 8120 1369 OPTION 903 U S Canada Plug NEMA 5 15P 125V 10A Cable 8120 1378 OPTION 906 Switzerland Plug SEV Type 12 250V 10A Cable 8120 2104 OPTION 917 India Republic of S Africal Plug IEC 83 B1 250V 10A Cable 8120 4211 OPTION 920 Argentina Plug Argentine Resolution 63 Annex IV 250V 10A Cable 8120 6870 OPTION 922 China Plug GB 1002 250V 10A Cable 8120 8376 NOTE Each option number includes a family of cords and connectors of various materials and plug body configurations straight 90 etc Figure 1 1 Power Cable Supplied Installation and Set Up Guide 1 3 p ng dN 32S pue uogejjesu Line Voltage and Figure 1 2 illustrates the line voltage selection switch
297. ion is given in System Menu in Chapter 3 So only the procedure is given in the following paragraphs LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page Printer Function Perform the following steps to print out the information of the CORRECTION page using the PRINT DISP mode Connect the 4284A to the printer using an GPIB cable Set the printer to the Listen Only mode Set the Talk Only mode to ON from the SYSTEM CONFIG page Press MEAS SETUP and CORRECTION to display the CORRECTION page Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 6 Press PRINT DISP to print out the display page The display page is printed out to the printer as shown in Figure 4 14 gt e WwW N e n lt CORRECTION gt SYS MENU OPEN ON CABLE Om SHORT ON MODE MULTI LOAD ON CH No 0 FUNC Cp D FREQ1 1 00000kHz REF A 100 000pF B 000000 MEA A 99 6222pF B 008178 FREQ2 2 00000kHz REF A 100 000pF 000000 MEA A 99 8350pF 003234 FREQ2 1 Q0Q000MHz REF A 100 000pF 000003 MEA A 99 9439pF 000266 Figure 4 14 CORRECTION Page Example When you press MEAS SETUP and LIMIT TABLE the LIMIT TABLE SETUP page will be displayed The LIMIT TABLE SETUP page allows you to set the 4284A s comparator The 4284A s built in comparator can sort devices into a maximum of ten bins BIN 1 to BIN 9 and one OUT OF BINS using a maximum of nine pairs of primary limits and one pair of secondary parameter limits Also devices whose prim
298. ions averaged can be set from 1 to 256 in steps of 1 Front Panel Operation for Setting the Averaging Rate Perform the following steps to set the averaging rate 1 Move the cursor to the AVG field The following softkeys will be displayed INCR ft This softkey is used to increment the averaging rate 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 m DECR This softkey is used to decrement the averaging rate 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 2 Use the softkeys to set the averaging rate or enter the averaging rate using the numeric entry keys and ENTER Description Refer to Appendix G The 4284A s delay time function allows you to set a trigger delay so the 4284A will delay the start of the measurement after it is triggered When the list sweep measurement is performed the 4284A will delay the start of the measurement at each sweep point using the trigger delay time The trigger delay time can be set from 0 s to 60 s in 1 ms steps This function is useful if a component handler triggers the 4284A before stable contact is made with the device under test DUT Front Panel Operation for Setting the Delay Time Perform the following steps to set the delay time 1 Move the cursor to the DELAY field 2 Enter the delay time using the numeric entry keys When one of the numeric entry keys is pressed the following unit softkeys will be displayed these can be used instead of ENTER E msec E sec MEAS
299. is different for each instrument The contents of this manual apply to instruments with the serial number prefix es listed under the serial numbers on the title page Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd SER NO JP1KG12345 AK MADE INJAPAN 33 Figure 9 1 Serial Number Plate An instrument manufactured after the printing of this manual may have a serial number prefix that is not listed on the title page This unlisted serial number prefix indicates the instrument is different from those described in this manual The manual for this new instrument may be accompanied by a yellow Manual General Information 9 1 Change supplement or have a different manual part number This sheet contains change information that explains how to adapt the manual to the newer instrument In addition to change information the supplement may contain information for correcting errors Errata in the manual To keep this manual as current and accurate as possible Agilent Technologies recommends that you periodically request the latest Manual Changes supplement The supplement for this manual is identified by this manual s printing date and its part number both of which appear on the manual s title page Complimentary copies of the supplement are available from Agilent Technologies If the serial prefix or number of an instrument is lower than that on the title page of this manual see Appendiz A MANUAL CHANGES For i
300. is bit is set to 1 when reading data from the output buffer and no data was present or when the data was lost 1 2 Request Control RQC Bit always 0 zero 0 1 Operation Complete OPC Bit This bit is set to 1 when the 4284A has completed all selected pending operations before sending the OPC command Remote Control 7 29 Enabling the Event Status Register 7 30 Remote Control An event status register summary bit bit 6 of the status byte will be set to 1 when any enable bit in the standard event status register is set to 1 To enable disable any bits of the standard event status register you can set the bits in the standard event status enable register These bits correspond to bits in the standard event status enable register When a bit is set in the standard event status enable register it enables the corresponding bit in the standard event status register and sets bit 6 of the status byte event status register summary bit to 1 To set any bit in the standard event status enable register the ESE command is used The syntax of the ESE command is ESE lt n gt Where lt n gt decimal number 0 to 255 For example If lt n gt is equal to 34 00100010 bit 1 and bit 5 are enabled as follows Bit No of Event MSB LSB Status Register 76543210 Bit Pattern for ESE command 00100010 When either bit 1 or 5 of the standard event status register is set to
301. is entered as a normal oscillator level Note a The automatic level control is achieved using feedback with the level E monitor function as shown in Figure 4 4 The feedback operation performs a level measurement OSC level adjustment 2 to 6 times per measurement The time required n in the following formula depends on the device being tested The more non linear the device is the greater the time required When the ALC function can t regulate the level using 6 output level measurement adjustment cycles when a device has non linear characteristics the ALC function may stop before the 6 output level measurement adjustment cycles the ALC function stops and a warning message ALC unable to regulate is displayed and sets the oscillator level to equal your setting value open loop the output level will be the same as when ALC is set to OFF The time required for the ALC function to operate is calculated using the following formula meas time SHORT approx 115 msec X n Where n 2 min n 6 max 4 6 MEAS SETUP Menu Feedback Loop a HIGH 0 V L1004094 Figure 4 4 Feedback Circuit The available operation range for the ALC function is shown in Figure 4 5 The solid line shows the operation range for a resistor as the DUT and the dotted line shows the operation range for a capacitor or inductor as the DUT The uncertainty of the limitation of the
302. isconnect the flat cable connected to the scanner interface NOTE The scanner interface board is the one with the BLACK and YELLOW extractors See Figure 2 7 INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION 2 11 7 Rear SCANNER I F board Figure 2 7 Scanner Interface Board Location 7 Remove the scanner interface board 8 Set switches SW1 and SW2 according to Table 2 4 The location switches SW1 and SW2 are shown in Figure 2 8 9 Replace the scanner interface board top shield plate rear feet and top cover 2 12 INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION o 3 WO i SW2 SW1 O o Q OO0OO0O0O0O lt TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TPS EXT EXT COM VOC GND eti DCV UR mane E a SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD Figure 2 8 SW1 and SW2 Switch Locations INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION 2 13 Table 2 4 SW1 and SW2 Settings 5to6V Factory shipped Setting 9to 15 V 2 14 INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION O SECTION 3 3 OPERATION ees peter nee INTRODUCTION This section provides information necessary for the HP 4284A to operate using the Option 301 Scanner Interface eran eee BASIC PROCEDURE Figure 3 1 shows a sample procedure to use the scanner inter face Follow this flow chart referring to the following paragraphs describe details OPERATION 3 1 START Set the measurement conditions Make the scanner interface valid e Set the correction mode to MULTI n Define the correction frequency ies e Defi
303. ists the 4284A s initial settings and functions whose status is stored in system memory There are three ways to initialize the 4284A a POWER ON Turn the LINE ON OFF switch ON a RST Press SYSTEM RESET in the SYS MENU field of MEAS SETUP page or send the RST common command via GPIB a DEVICE CLEAR Send the device clear bus command SDC selected device clear or DCLiclears all devices via GPIB The following list indicates the differences between the three initialization methods on the functions to be initialized Functions whose status are stored in internal system memory are indicated by Sys Memory on the POWER ON column in the following list Initial Settings and System Memory C 1 C 2 Functions Initialize Method Power ON RST Device Clear Settings MEAS SETUP FUNC Cp D Cp D Not Affected FREQ 1 kHz 1 kHz Not Affected LEVEL 1V 1V Not Affected RANGE AUTO AUTO Not Affected BIAS 0V 0V Not Affected On Off OFF OFF Not Affected INTEG MED MED Not Affected TRIG INT INT Not Affected ALC OFF OFF Not Affected Hi PO W Opt 001 ON ON Not affected installed Hi PO W Opt 001 OFF OFF Not affected not installed DCI ISO OFF ISO OFF Not affected AVG 1 1 Not Affected Vm ON ON Not Affected Im ON ON Not Affected DELAY Os Os Not Affected DEV A OFF OFF Not Affected REF A 0 0 Not Affected DEV B OFF OFF Not Affected REF B 0 0 Not Affected Initial Settings and System Memory
304. kHz 17 1429 kHz 16 6667 kHz 16 0000 kHz 15 7895 kHz 15 6250 kHz 15 0000 kHz 14 7059 kHz 14 2857 kHz 14 1176 kHz 13 8889 kHz 13 6364 kHz 13 3333 kHz 13 1579 kHz 13 0435 kHz 12 6316 kHz 12 5000 kHz 12 0000 kHz 11 9048 kHz 11 5385 kHz 11 4286 kHz 11 3636 kHz 11 1111 kHz 10 9091 kHz 10 8696 kHz 10 7143 kHz 10 4348 kHz 10 4167 kHz 10 3448 kHz 10 0000 kHz 9 61538 kHz 9 37500 kHz 9 23077 kHz 8 92857 kHz 8 82352 kHz 8 57243 kHz 8 33333 kHz 8 00000 kHz 7 89474 kHz 7 81250 kHz 7 50000 kHz 7 85294 kHz 7 14286 kHz 7 05882 kHz 6 94444 kHz 6 81818 kHz 6 66666 kHz 6 57895 kHz 6 52174 kHz 6 31579 kHz 6 25000 kHz 6 00000 kHz 5 95238 kHz 5 76923 kHz 5 71429 kHz 5 68182 kHz 5 95556 kHz 5 45455 kHz 5 43478 kHz 5 85714 kHz 5 21739 kHz 5 20833 kHz 5 17241 kHz 5 00000 kHz 4 80769 kHz 4 68750 kHz 4 61538 kHz 4 46429 kHz 4 41176 kHz 4 28571 kHz 4 16667 kHz 4 00000 kHz 3 94737 kHz 3 90625 kHz 3 75000 kHz 3 67647 kHz 3 97143 kHz 3 92942 kHz 3 47222 kHz 3 40909 kHz 3 33333 kHz 3 28947 kHz 3 26087 kHz 3 15789 kHz 3 12500 kHz 3 00000 kHz 2 97619 kHz 2 88462 kHz 2 85714 kHz 2 84091 kHz 2 77778 kHz 2 72727 kHz 2 71739 kHz 2 67857 kHz 2 60870 kHz 2 60417 kHz 2 58621 kHz 2 50000 kHz 2 41935 kHz 2 40385 kHz 2 40000 kHz 2 84375 kHz 2 31481 kHz 2 30769 kHz 2 27273 kHz 2 23214 kHz 2 22222 kHz 2 20588 kHz 2 15517 kHz 2 14286 kHz 2 08333 kHz 2 06897 kHz 2 02703 kHz 2 01613 kHz 2 00000 kHz 1 97368 k
305. key The scanner interface is now valid to output input signals OPERATION 3 3 CORRECTION MODE To use the multi correction function set the correction mode to MULTI as follows NOTE Before setting the multi correction function it is necessary to set the scanner interface to ON 1 Press the MEAS SETUP MENU key and the CORRECTION softkey The CORRECTION page is displayed 2 Use the CURSOR arrow keys to move the cursor to the MODE field The following softkeys will be displayed on the softkey label area e SINGLE e MULTP 3 Press the MULTI softkey to use the multi channel correc tion function 3 4 OPERATION TEST FREQUENCY AND REFERENCE VALUE ENTRY The correction data can be stored at three test frequencies These test frequencies are defined and monitored on the COR RECTION page Er 5 w O a Also on this page the reference values REF A and REF B of the standards used for LOAD correction are defined at three frequen cies The reference values can be stored with appropriate func tion FUNC For example to use the standard capacitor which has reference parallel capacitance and D values the reference values should be stored with Cp D function Also the function of reference values can be stored on the CORRECTION page NOTE The function of the standard on the CORRECTION page can be defined independently of the measurement function set on the MEAS SETUP page For e
306. lator Agilent PN 04278 65001 1 Disconnect the power cable from the 4284A and allow 1 minute for the internal capacitors to discharge Dangerous energy voltage exists when the 4284A is in operation and for a time after it is powered down Allow 1 minutes for the internal capacitors to discharge 2 Disconnect the two rear feet which lock the top cover and rear panel together 3 Fully loosen the top cover retaining screws located on the rear of the top cover 4 Slide the top cover toward rear and lift it off The top shield plate will be visible 5 Remove the top shield plate to expose the PC boards 6 Disconnect a flat cable from the handler interface board which has an ORANGE and a BLACK or an ORANGE and a RED extractors See Figure 10 12 i m o o J te Gl TI o REAR PANEL SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 10 26 Performance Tests Figure 10 12 Interface Board Locations 7 Remove the handler interface board Caution Note The interface board contains electronic components that can be damaged by static electricity through electrostatic discharge ESD To prevent ESD damage maintain frequent contact with any bare sheet metal surface on the chassis A grounding wrist strap or similar device is useful for this purpose Handle the board carefully at
307. lemental performance characteristics are not specifications but are typical characteristics included as supplemental information for the operator MEDIUM integration time and operating temperature at 23 C 5 C IZ Y L C R lt 0 01 day D lt 0 0001 day General Information 9 21 Temperature Coefficient MEDIUM integration time and operating temperature at 23 C 5 C Test Signal Level Z Y L C R D gt 20 mVrms lt 20 mMVims lt 0 0025 C lt 0 000025 C lt 0 0075 C lt 0 000075 C Settling Time Frequency fm lt 70 ms fm gt 1 kHz lt 120 ms 100 Hz lt fm lt 1 kHz lt 160 ms fm lt 100 Hz Test Signal Level lt 120 ms Measurement Range lt 50 ms range shift fm gt 1 kHz Input Protection Internal circuit protection when a charged capacitor is connected to the UNKNOWN terminals The maximum capacitor voltage is Vinaw y 200 150 100 50 0 C Where Vimar lt 200 V C is in Farads Voltage v 10 100 1000 Capacitance pF Figure 9 7 Maximum Capacitance Voltage 9 22 General Information Measurement time ms Measurement Time Typical measurement times from the trigger to the output of EOM at the Handler Interface EOM End of Measurement Integ Test Frequency Time 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 1 MHz SHORT 270 ms 40 ms 30 ms 30 ms MEDIUM 400 ms 190 ms 180 ms 180 ms LONG
308. lowing softkeys will be displayed INCR 1 Press this softkey to increases the oscillator s output level DECR Press this softkey to decreases the oscillator s output level 2 Select and set the oscillator level using either the softkeys or the numeric entry keys When the oscillator level is entered using the numeric entry keys the softkey labels are changed to the available units labels mV V uA mA and A and you can use these softkeys to enter the units and enter the data instead of ENTER When ENTER is used the numeric data is entered with V or A as the default unit When you want to change the oscillator level from voltage to current or from current to voltage the numeric entry keys and units softkeys must be used DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 13 DC Bias Note i Y Note i Y 3 14 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu Description The 4284A has internal dc bias voltage selections of 0 V 1 5 V and 2 0 V When option 001 is installed the de bias voltage can be set from 0 V to 40 V with a resolution as listed in Table 3 4 or the DC bias current can be set from 0 A to 100 mA with a resolution as listed in Table 3 4 Option 001 can be made valid or invalid from the MEAS SETUP page When the option 001 function is used the high power mode must be set to ON from the MEAS SETUP page For more information refer to Chapter 4 Table 3 4 DC bias and Resolution Opt 001
309. mV OSC Level 5 1 V Option 0 001 only 1000 pF Standard OSC Level 510 mV OSC Level 20 mV OSC Level 5 1 V Option 0 001 only 0 01 uF Standard OSC Level 510 mV OSC Level 20 mV OSC Level 5 1 V Option 0 001 only 0 1 uF Standard a OSC Level 510 mV OSC Level 20 mV OSC Level 5 1 V Option 0 001 only 1 uF Standard Loe OSC Level 510 mV OSC Level 20 mV OSC Level 5 1 V Option 0 001 only 100 Q Standard OSC Level 510 mV OSC Level 20 mV OSC Level 5 1 V Option 0 001 only 1k Q Standard OSC Level 510 mV OSC Level 20 mV 1 m Cable Length Operation 2 m Cable Length Operation Option 006 only 4 m Cable Length Operation Option 006 only Store and Load Function Test Loe ee GPIB Interface Test Bias Current Interface Function Test Option 002 only o es 10 38 10 38 10 39 10 39 10 40 10 40 10 40 10 41 10 41 10 41 10 41 10 42 10 42 10 42 10 42 10 42 10 43 10 43 10 43 10 43 10 44 10 44 10 44 10 44 10 44 10 44 10 44 10 44 10 45 10 45 10 45 10 45 10 45 10 45 10 45 10 45 10 46 10 46 10 46 10 46 10 46 10 46 10 46 10 46 10 46 Manual Changes Introduction aoa a a ee A 1 Manual Changes a a De ee A 1 CHANGE aaa aa L A 2 CHANGE aoaaa aa L A 2 Error and Warning Messages Introduction e ee B 1 Error Messages oaa a a a ee ee B 1 Operation Errors Lo ek B 1 GPIB Errors 2 B 1 Sample Program to Detect the Err
310. ms BIN COUNT DISPLAY page approx 0 5 ms Figure 2 2 Timing Chart for Normal Measurements INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION 2 5 SEQ Sweep Mode EXT_TRIG INDEX EOM CH No CH_VALID a sweep a measurement uremen Measurement a measurement Timing 1 Settling Time Delay Time Measurement Time Comparison and Display Time STEP Sweep Mode T2 73 1 TY Y i i EXT_TRIG CH No ICH_VAUD a Sweep a measurement measurement Measurement Timing Settling Time Comparison and Delay 2 Display Time Time Measurement Time NOTE Settling Time includs Correction Data Switching Time refer to Table 1 2 Comparison and Display Time is approx 4 5 ms Refer to Figure 2 2 for infor mation on T1 T2 T3 T4 and T5 Figure 2 3 Timing Diagram for List Sweep Measurements 2 6 INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION The scanner system setup for the preceding procedure is shown E in Figure 2 4 5 6 SCANNER CHO CH7 CONTROLLER Channel Selection Channel Selector f Control Timing V Trigger Generator SCANNER Measurement Cable Figure 2 4 Scanner System Example INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION 2 7 2 8 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS The electrical characteristics of the I O signals are as follows Channel Selection Input Signals l Optocoupled The CHO to CH7 and CH VALID signals are optocoupled to isolate inputs at
311. n OFF 5 Display the MEAS DISPLAY page 6 Set the Oscillator Level in accordance with Table 10 3 and confirm that the Multimeter reading and the Level Monitor reading are within the test limits given in the table 7 Set the Test Frequency to 960 kHz and perform step 6 Note A Steps 8 through 11 should be performed only when the 4284A is 3 equipped with Option 001 8 Set the controls of the 4284A as follows Test Frequency 1 25 kHz High Power Option ON 9 Display the MEAS DISPLAY page 10 Set the Oscillator Level in accordance with Table 10 4 and confirm that the Multimeter reading and the Level Monitor reading are with in the test limits given in Table 10 3 11 Set the Test Frequency to 960 kHz and perform step 10 Performance Tests 10 7 Table 10 3 Test Signal Level Level Monitor Test Limits Hi PW OFF Test Signal Test Limits Level Multimeter Reading Level Monitor Reading 5 mV 5 mV 1 5 mV M R 3 0 5 mV 10 mV 10 mV 2 mV M R 3 0 5 mV 20 mV 20 mV 3 mV M R 8 0 5 mV 50 mV 50 mV 6 mV M R 8 0 5 mV 100 mV 100 mV 11 mV M R 8 0 5 mV 200 mV 200 mV 21 mV M R 8 0 5 mV 250 mV 250 mV 26 mV M R 8 0 5 mV 500 mV 500 mV 51 mV M R 8 0 5 mV 1V 1 V 101 mV M R 8 0 5 mV 2 V 2 V 201 mV M R 3 0 5 mV M R is the Multimeter Reading for the 4284A s output signal level
312. n D measured D value lt 0 1 Q Accuracy Q accuracy is given as Q x Da 1F Qr xX Da Where is the measured Q value D is the absolute D accuracy Accuracy applies when Q X Da lt 1 General Information 9 5 0 Accuracy 0 accuracy is given as be Ocal deg Where 9 is the relative 0 accuracy deg calis the calibration accuracy deg G Accuracy When D measured D value lt 0 1 G accuracy is given as B X Da S 1 B 2 z TIC 2r f Le Where B is the measured B value S C is the measured C value F L is the measured L value H D is the absolute D accuracy f is the test frequency Hz G accuracy described in this paragraph applies to the C G and L G combinations only Rp Accuracy When D measured D value lt 0 1 Rp accuracy is given as pr X Da De F Da 9 Where Rpsis the measured R value 9 D is the measured D value D is the absolute D accuracy Rs Accuracy When D measured D value lt 0 1 Rs accuracy is given as Xe X Da Q 1 X 2r f Lr Tf 2r fCy Where X is the measured X value Q C is the measured C value F L is the measured L value H D is the absolute D accuracy f is the test frequency Hz 9 6 General Information Relative Measurement Accuracy Relative measurement accuracy includes stability temperature coefficient linearity repeatability and calibration interpolation error Relative measureme
313. n below to Recover ery recover from the short circuit 1 To recover from a short circuit condition under the following conditions use the appropriate delay times as shown in Figure G 6 and Figure G 7 DC Bias O Bias Current Isolation O Test Signal Voltage 20 mV 1 0 0 8 poe o D 100 mV 0 6 DC BIAS 2V gt 500 mV DC I ISO OFF S 0 4 Ta ra A Q2 po 1V i a a a S l LII 20 100 1K Frequency Hz L1001007 Figure G 6 Required Delay Times For Short Circuit Recovery 1 A delay time is unnecessary when the test signal voltage is gt 1Vrms Note al 3 a delay time is unnecessary G 8 Transient States Caused by Measurement Condition Changes Delay Time sec DC Bias ON Bias Current Isolation OFF 10 1k 10 k 100 kf range og 1002 range i DC BIAS 40V i DC I ISO OFF 0 5 l 4 0 3 1k 10 k 100 kN range 0 2 100M range 0 1 puiit puiit oira piiitl 1 lL Ii Ii illn 20 100 k 10 k 100 k 300 k Frequency Hz L1001008 Figure G 7 Required Delay Times For Short Circuit Recovery 2 2 Use the delay times shown in Figure G 8 to recover from a short circuit under the following conditions Transient States Caused by Measurement Condition Changes G 9 DC Bias ON Bias Current Isolation ON 100 kM range DC BIAS 40 V 6
314. n measure the device but the data format used will not hold the calculated results INFINITY This message is displayed when an attempt is made to divide by zero during parameter calculation For example if you set the A measurement function without setting the reference value this message will be displayed Input Line Area This area is the input line where numeric input data entered with the front panel keys is displayed System Message Area This area is where system messages comments and error messages are displayed Overview 2 7 MENU keys and Display The 4284A has three MENU keys which are used to define the LCD Page display pages ee O l DISPLAY EAS CATALOG FORMAT SETUP SYSTEM J Figure 2 4 MENU keys Each MENU key has three or four display pages as follows DISPLAY FORMAT MENU key This MENU key has the following four pages a MEAS DISPLAY a BIN No DISPLAY a BIN COUNT DISPLAY a LIST SWEEP DISPLAY These display pages are used for displaying the measurement results and displaying the sorting results Some controls for each display page can be set from the display page Only from the above display pages can the 4284A measure a device under test When DISPLAY FORMAT is pressed the MEAS DISPLAY page will be displayed on the LCD screen and the softkeys used to select the other three pages are displayed The cursor will be positioned at the MEAS DISPLAY field
315. n of the auxiliary BIN counting function ON OFF 1 0 COMParator SWAP Where O decimal 48 When the function is OFF 1 decimal 49 When the function is ON OUTPUT 717 COMP SWAP ON COMParator SWAP Returned Format is lt NR1 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 COMP SWAP 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END BIN CLEar Command Syntax Example The BIN CLEar command clears all of the limit value settings COMParator BIN CLEar OUTPUT 717 COMP BIN CLE Command Reference 8 73 COMParator Subsystem BIN COUNt STATe Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 74 Command Reference The BIN COUNt STATe command sets the BIN count function to ON or OFF The BIN COUNt STATe query responds with the current ON OFF condition of the BIN count function ON OFF COMParator BIN COUNt STATe Where O decimal 48 When the function is OFF 1 decimal 49 When the function is ON OUTPUT 717 COMP BIN COUN ON COMParator BIN COUNt STATe Returned Format is lt NR1 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 COMP BIN COUN 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END COMParator Subsystem BIN COUNt DATA Query Syntax Query Response Example The BIN COUNt DATA query returns the comparator BIN count results COMParator BIN COUNt DATA Returned Format is lt BIN1 count gt lt BIN 2 count gt lt BIN9 count gt lt O
316. n the data buffer memory into the output buffer If the data buffer memory is not filled to the specified size specified by the DIM command the data locations in which data is not stored will be set to 1 no data For details of the returned data format refer to Data Transfer in Chapter 7 MEMory READ DBUF OUTPUT 717 MEM READ DBUF CORRection Subsystem CORRection The CORRection subsystem command group sets the correction Subsystem function including the cable length correction settings and the y OPEN SHORT LOAD correction settings Figure 8 12 shows the command tree of the CORRection subsystem command group CORRection LENGth lt value gt ETHod SINGle MULTiple vov rouvre P ooo gJ TD TR STATe ON 1 OFF 0 FREQuency lt value gt OPEN SHORt LOAD STANdard lt REF A gt lt R lt channel number gt DATA lt channel number gt Figure 8 12 CORRection Subsystem Command Tree Command Reference 8 51 CORRection Subsystem LENGth Command Syntax Note i 7 Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 52 Command Reference The LENGth command sets the cable length correction setting The LENGth query returns the current settings of the cable length correction CORRection LENGth lt value gt Where lt value gt 0 1 or 2 is Cable length in m A suffix with a
317. nce to Ground Contact Resistance Extending The Four Terminal Pair Test Leads Measurement Contacts for Test Leads Extension Example DUT Guard Plate Connection Guard Shield Sample Shorting Plate Shorting Plate Connection Parasitic Impedance Model Using the 16047A C D Typical Characteristics of Components a Connecting the 16047A Connecting A Shorting Bar Connecting DUT Measurement Results of A 470 pF Capacitor Connecting the 16047A 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 25 4 33 4 35 4 36 4 37 4 38 4 45 4 47 4 49 4 50 4 51 4 52 4 55 5 2 5 2 5 4 5 6 5 7 5 10 5 12 5 12 6 3 6 4 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 15 6 19 6 20 6 22 6 23 6 25 6 26 6 27 6 27 6 29 Contents 17 Contents 18 6 24 6 25 6 26 7 1 Typical GPIB System Interconnection 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 Binary Data Format For List Sweep Measurement 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 22 7 23 7 24 7 25 7 26 7 27 7 28 7 29 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 Connecting A Shorting Bar Connecting DUT Measurement Results of The Magnetic Cored Inductor GPIB Connector Signal Pin Configuration Functional Layers Diagram ASCII Format 1 ASCII Format 2 List Sweep BINARY Format 1 Trigger State Diagram INITiate Subsystem Commands and Trigger Sys
318. nd if i these signals are not pulled up by the handler determine the pull up resistor value 1 78 KQ is recommended and refer ring to Figure 3 2 for the locations of the BIN pull up resis tors install the pull up resistors 8 If the control outputs EOC BUSY are to be TTL level signals and if these signals are not pulled up by the handler determine the pull up resistor value 1 78 KQ is recommended and referring to Figure 3 2 for the locations of R112 EOC and R113 BUSY install the pull up resistors O 5 2 a 3 N o Figure 3 2 Pull Up Resistor Locations SEETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 3 5 3 6 10 11 12 Refer to Table 3 2 to determine which jumpers to install to configure the EOC and BUSY outputs Use Figure 3 3 to locate the location of the required jumpers and install the jumpers Refer to Table 3 2 to determine the jumpers required to configure the START IN input Use Figure 3 3 to find the location of the required jumpers and install the jumpers Figure 3 3 Configuration Jumper Locations 13 14 Install the configured handier interface board into the HP 4284A Replace the top shield plate rear feet and top cover SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES Setup example information consisting of handler interface board configuration timing diagrams list of signals used logic levels used and other special in
319. ndex 8 System Reset 10 4 See also Reset Function TALK ONLY Field 5 8 Terminators 8 8 test and Measurement System Language TMSL Command See Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI Test Equipment 10 1 Test Frequency Accuracy Test 10 5 Test Signal Level Accuracy Test 10 6 TMSL Command See Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI Tolerance mode 4 37 TRG Command 8 90 Trigger Command 8 90 System 7 12 TRIGGER 7 5 TRIGGER Key 2 3 TRIGger Subsystem 8 40 TST Query 8 89 Typeface Conventions vii UNBAL 2 7 UNKNOWN Terminals 2 4 UNLOCK Button 2 3 ventilation requirement 1 6 VOLTage Subsystem 8 14 WAI Command 8 88 WAITING FOR TRIGGER state 7 13 Warning Messages B 1 B 11 Warranty vill White Space 8 7 Write Protection E 1 Index 9 4284A PRECISION LCR METER OPERATION NOTE Option 201 Handler Interface ibe Agilent Technologies Printed in JAPAN TABLE OF CONTENTS pee eer ae SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION INTRODUCTION 1 1 DESCRIPTION 1 1 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS eee eee SECTION 2 OPERATION INTRODUCTION 2 1 SIGNAL LINE DEFINITION 2 1 Signal Line Used for Comparator Function 2 1 Signal Line Used for List Sweep Comparator Function 2 6 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS 2 10 DC Isolated Outputs Opto coupled 2 10 DC isolated Inputs Opto coupled 2 12 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 2 14 Procedure 2 16 OPERATION 2 23 Setting Procedure For Comparator
320. ne the reference standard values Select the channel number o Perform an OPEN correction measurements at FREQ1 FREQ2 FREQ3 Perform a SHORT correction measurements at FREQ1 FREQ2 FREQ3 Perform a LOAD correction measurements at FREQ1 FREQ2 FREQ3 Make the correction function valid Select the channe number Perform measurements Figure 3 1 Basic Procedure Channel change Channel change 3 2 OPERATION Reference Paragraph ACTIVATING SCANNER INTERFACE CORRECTION MODE TEST FREQUENCY AND REFERENCE VALUE ENTRY CORRECTION DATA SELECTION CORRECTION DATA MEASUREMENTS ACTIVATING CORREC TION FUNCTION CORRECTION DATA SELECTION 5 ACTIVATING o SCANNER K INTERFACE Make the scanner interface valid to perform multi channel correc tion and to input output signals through the interface connector on the HP 4284A s rear panel NOTE To use the multi correction function this procedure must be performed even if the multi correction function is used without the interface connector on the rear panel for exam ple in the case of controlling a scanner and the HP 4284A via HP IB 1 Press the CATALOG SYSTEM MENU key and the SYSTEM CONFIG softkey The SYSTEM CONFIG page is displayed 2 Use the CURSOR arrow keys to move the cursor to the SCANNER I F 301 field The following softkeys will be displayed in the softkey label area ON e OFF 3 Press the ON soft
321. nect the interface cable from the 42841A 80 Setup data protected Setup data write protected by DIP switch A7SW3 Refer to Appendix E Set bit 5 of DIP switch A7SW3 to the OFF position B 6 Error and Warning Messages Error Displayed Message e Description No i Solution 81 No memory card e Illegal operation attempted to store data in record No 10 to 19 when a memory card was not inserted Insert a memory card or store to record No 0 to 9 internal memory 82 Store failed e Memory card hardware failure storing function occurred Use another memory card e Internal EEPROM hardware failure storing function occurred Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office 83 No data to load e Memory card is not inserted Insert the memory card completely e No setup data to load in the record number entered Confirm the CATALOG and retry 84 Load failed e Memory card hardware failure loading function occurred Use another memory card e Internal EEPROM hardware failure loading function occurred Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office 90 Data buffer overflow e The amount of data to be stored into the data buffer memory DBUF exceeded the defined data buffer size Re define the data buffer memory size or clear DBUF 100 Printer down e Data sent to the output b
322. nese 009 Delete Operation Manual 910 Extra Operation Manual ABA Add Operation Manual English 915 Add Service Manual same as the left number 109 Delete GPIB Interface 5 1 In the previous system an option for the Power Amplifier DC Bias was available only for the Power Amplifier DC Bias option In the new option system it is available for the standard power and Power Amplifier DC Bias requiring the customer to select either of them 2 Although option 001 and 002 can be installed on the 4284A main unit you cannot use their functions at the same time 3 In the new option system up to 2 types of interfaces can be installed allowing arbitrary combination Note that options 201 and 202 cannot be installed at the same time When installing 1 type of interface on the 4284A choose 1 as the quantity of option 710 When installing 2 types of interfaces on the 4284A choose 0 as the quantity of option 710 When installing no interface choose 2 as the quantity of option 710 4 No selection of addition deletion is required for the operation manual set because it is only available as an optional accessory in the new option system 5 In the new option system the GP IB interface is installed on the 4284A as standard equipment Copyright Agilent Technologies 2004 Agilent 4284A Precision LCR Meter Operation Manual Manual Change Agilent Part No N A July 2007 Change 1 Change the figure 10 5 of DC B
323. nformation concerning a serial number prefix that is not listed on the title page or in the Manual Change supplement contact the nearest Agilent Technologies office Specifications Measurement Functions 9 2 General Information The complete 4284A specifications are listed below These specifications are the performance standards or limits against which the instrument is tested When shipped from the factory the 4284A meets the specifications listed in this section The specification test procedures are covered in Chapter 10 Measurement Parameters Z Absolute value of impedance Y Absolute value of admittance Inductance Capacitance Resistance Conductance Dissipation factor Quality factor Equivalent series resistance Parallel resistance Reactance Susceptance Phase angle sw ZA OUND AM Combinations Z Y L C BE A deg rad D Q Rs Rp G X B Test Signal Mathematical Functions The deviation and the percent of deviation of measurement values from a programmable reference value Equivalent Measurement Circuit Parallel and Series Ranging Auto and Manual Hold Up Down Trigger Internal External BUS GPIB and Manual Delay Time Programmable delay from the trigger command to the start of the measurement 0 to 60 000 sec in 1 msec steps Measurement terminals Four terminal pair Test Cable Length Standard 0 m and 1 m selectable
324. ng is out of the ALC s available range the LEVEL setting is changed to be within the ALC s available range Warning Signal source overload When the signal source is overloaded the measurement data is not guaranteed to be valid The data status is set to 3 Reduce the LEVEL Warning DCI Isolation turned off When Hi PW mode is set to OFF and DCI ISO ON is set DCI is automatically set to ISO OFF Error and Warning Messages B 11 Instruction Messages The following is a list of the instruction messages in alphabetical order A C B 12 Error and Warning Messages Auto load completed Clearing setup Are you sure Clearing table Are you sure Enter comment Enter record number to LOAD Enter record number to PURGE Enter record number to STORE Enter REF value or select MEASURE Enter test number Enter V or I value Enter value Enter value or INCR DECR Enter value or select Fixed decimal point mode Frequency changed re measure GPIB error occurred Keys locked LOAD measurement completed LOAD measurement in progress OPEN measurement completed OPEN measurement in progress Press ENTER Press ENTER or select a unit Press ENTER or select CANCEL Resetting count Are you sure Resetting system Are you sure Saving correction data SHORT measurement completed SHORT measurement in progress Storing Use softkeys to select C Initial Settings and System Memory Introduction This appendix l
325. nge Option 001 only Connect the 1 m Test Leads 16048A to the UNKNOWN terminals Press the MEAS SETUP MENU key and the CORRECTION softkey to display the CORRECTION page Set the CABLE length selection switch to 1 m Store the OPEN CORRECTION data and the SHORT CORRECTION data referring to Steps 4 through 9 In this procedure the OPEN termination and the SHORT termination should be connected to the 1 m Test Leads 16048A Set the 4284A to the manual trigger mode Set the measurement function to Cp D Connect the 1000 pF standard to the 1 m Test Leads 16048A Perform Step 28 through 29 for all the test frequencies listed in Table 10 9 Press the TRIGGER key 29 Confirm that 4284A s reading is within the test limits in Table 10 9 Table 10 9 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Limits for 1 m Cable Length Operation Setting Test Limits Cp i Signal Level Test Frequency 510 mV 20 Hz C V 432 10 pF 125 Hz C V 3 06 pF 1 kHz C V 1 00 pF 12 5 kHz C V 1 14 pF 48 kHz C V 1 17 pF 96 kHz C V 1 32 pF 1 MHz C V 1 1 66 pF 20 mV 1 kHz C V 2 54 pF 1 MHz C V 2 72 pF 5 1 V 20 Hz C V 28 94 pF 1 kHz C V 1 50 pF 1 MHz C V 1 2 47 pF C V Standard s calibration value at DC C V C V multiplied by 1 0003 Option 001 only Note ll Steps 30 through 49 should be performed only when the 4284A is equipped with Option 006 Pe
326. nner channels ACTIVATING THE CORRECTION FUNCTION To set the correction function to ON performing the correction using the correction data set as follows 1 Press the MEAS SETUP MENU key and the CORRECTION softkey The CORRECTION page will be displayed 2 Confirm the correction frequencies FREQ1 FREQ2 and FRE3 to be used are set to ON frequency and reference values are displayed the OFF will not be displayed 3 Move the cursor to the OPEN field 4 Press the ON softkey to set the OPEN correction function to ON 5 Move the cursor to the SHORT field 6 Press the ON softkey to set the SHORT correction func tion to ON 7 Move the cursor to the LOAD field 8 Press the ON softkey to set the LOAD correction function to ON OPERATION 3 9 CORRECTION DATA CONFIRMATION To confirm the measurement data for each channel correction read the data via HP IB using the following query The syntax of which is CORRection USE DATA lt channel number gt Where lt channel number gt 0 to 127 integer Query response lt openi A gt lt open1 B gt lt shorti A gt lt short1 B gt lt loadi A gt lt load1 B gt lt open2 A gt lt open2 B gt lt short2 A gt lt short2 B gt lt load2 A gt lt load2 B gt lt open3 A gt lt open3 B gt lt short3 A gt lt short3 B gt lt load3 A gt lt load3 B gt lt NL END gt where lt openi 2 3 A gt Primary parameter m
327. not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Addresses are provided at the back of this manual Contents Installation and Set Up Guide Incoming Inspection Power Requirements Power Cable Line Voltage and Fuse Selection Line Voltage Selection Neuse Selection Operation Environment Electromagnetic Compatibility Ventilation Requirements Instruction for Cleaning Rack Handle Installation Option 907 Handle Kit Installing the Handle Option 908 Rack Flange Kit Mounting the Rack Option 909 Rack Flange amp Handle Kit Mounting the Handle and Rack Overview Introduction Product Introduction A Tour of the Front Panel 1 LINE On Off 2 LCD SOFTKEYs MENU Keys CURSOR Keys ENTRY Keys GPIB Status Indicators EcL Key RIGGER Key 0 1 2 MEMORY Card Slot and UNLOCK Button Dc BIAS Key a CONTRAST Control Knob 14 FRAME Terminal Tour of the Rear Panel 1 GPIB Interface Connector 2 Interface Connectors 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 8 1 8 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
328. ns are symbols Italics Italic type is used for emphasis and for titles of manuals and other publications Italic type is also used for keyboard entries when a name or a variable must be typed in place of the words in italics For example copy filename means to type the word copy to type a space and then to type the name of a file such as file1 Computer font is used for on screen prompts and messages Computer Labeled keys on the instrument front panel are enclosed in HARDKEYS vii Certification Warranty viii SOFTKEYS Softkeys located to the right of the Liquid Crystal Display LCD are enclosed in Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST to the extent allowed by the Institute s calibration facility or to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members This Agilent Technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of shipment except that in the case of certain components listed in Components not Covered by Warranty in Chapter 9 of this manual the warranty shall be for the specified period During the warranty period Agilent Techn
329. nsist of the RMT remote TLK talk LTN listen and SRQ service request indicators These indicators are used to show the 4284A s GPIB status when it is interfaced to a controller via GPIB 8 C Key This is the Local LCL key which sets the 4284A to local front panel control if it was in REMOTE and if the GPIB controller had not invoked a local lockout is the only front panel key that is active when the 4284A is in REMOTE state 9 TRIGGER Key This is the TRIGGER key used to manually trigger the 4284A when it is set to the Manual Trigger mode 10 MEMORY Card Slot and UNLOCK Button The MEMORY card slot is where you insert the memory cards The UNLOCK button is used to eject a memory card 11 Oc Bias Key This is DC BIAS used to enable the DC bias output isa toggle type switch and the DC BIAS ON OFF LED indicator is located above Dc BIAS When Dc BIAS is set to ON the DC BIAS ON OFF LED indicator is ON When Dc BIAS is set to OFF the DC BIAS ON OFF LED indicator is OFF If c BIAS is set to OFF even though the DC bias is set to ON according to the LCD display the DC bias isn t output 12 CONTRAST Control Knob This knob is used to adjust the LCD s CONTRAST Overview 2 3 Caution y A Tour of the Rear Panel 13 UNKNOWN Terminals These are the UNKNOWN Terminals used to connect a four terminal pair test fixture or test leads for measuring the device under test Available fou
330. nt accuracy is specified when all of the following conditions are satisfied 1 Warm up time gt 30 minutes 2 Test cable length 0 m 1 m 2 m or 4 m 16048 A B D E For 2 m or 4 m cable length operation test signal voltage and test frequency are set according to Figure A 2 m and 4 m cable can be used only when Option 006 is installed 3 OPEN and SHORT corrections have been performed 4 Bias current isolation OFF For accuracy with bias current isolation refer to supplemental performance characteristics 5 Test signal voltage and DC bias voltage are set according to Figure B 6 The optimum measurement range is selected by matching the DUT s impedance to the effective measuring range shown in Table 3 1 1 page 3 7 For example if the DUT s impedance is 50 kQ the optimum range is the 30 kQ range 2m cable 4m cable a gt V Ow ae oO gt 1 oS Z uy a a V 2 20 100 ik 10k 100k Frequency Hz Figure 9 2 Test Signal Voltage and Test Frequency upper Limits to apply measurement accuracy to 2 m and 4 m Cable Length Operation General Information 9 7 9 8 General Information DC resistance 1kohm DC resistance 100 ohm DC resistance 10 ohm ww E D D 5 gt T Z D v Ww wv H pore torte te dt Ne 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 DC Bias Voltage Setting v D Figure 9 3 Test Signal Voltage and DC Bias Voltage Upper Limits Ap
331. nt is performed FETCh query received after INITiate command was received and a trigger was not received Send the FETCh command after the trigger is received FETCh query received after the trigger was received in the list sweep mode and the table was not setup Setup the list sweep table Setting value query for example VOLTage BIAS CURRent LIST VOLTage received when the setting mode is mismatched Send a setting value query command which matches the current setting mode B 8 Error and Warning Messages GPIB Errors Error Error Message String Description No Command Error 100 Command error Improper command 101 Invalid character Invalid character was received 102 Syntax error Unrecognized command or data type was received 103 Invalid message unit separator The message unit separator for example is improper 104 Data type error Improper data type used for example string data was expected but numeric data was received 105 GET not allowed GET is not allowed inside a program message 108 Parameter not allowed Too many parameters for the command received 109 Missing parameter A command with improper number of parameters received 112 Program mnemonic too long Program mnemonic is too long maximum length is 12 characters 113 Unde
332. nt kit containing a pair of flanges and the amp Handle Kit necessary hardware to mount them to an instrument which has handles attached in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches spacing Mounting the Handle and Rack 1 Remove the adhesive backed trim strips 1 from the left and right front sides of the 4284A 2 Attach the front handle 3 and the rack mount flange 5 together on the left and right front sides of the 4284A using the screws provided 3 Remove all four feet lift bar on the inner side of the foot and slide the foot toward the bar 1 8 Installation and Set Up Guide Overview 2 Introduction This Chapter provides the information you will need to know before operating the Agilent 4284A Precision LCR Meter Before using the 4284A read through this Chapter so you can quickly and efficiently learn the 4284A s operation Product Introduction The 4284A is a general purpose LCR meter for incoming inspection of components quality control and laboratory use The 4284A is used for evaluating LCR components materials and semiconductor devices over a wide range of frequencies 20 Hz to 1 MHz and test signal levels 5 mV to 2 Vins 50 uA to 20 mArms With Option 001 the 4284A s test signal level range spans 5 mV to 20 Vims and 50 pA to 100 mAmns The 4284A offers C D measurements with a basic accuracy of 0 05 C 0 0005 D at all test frequencies with six digit resolution the dissipation fa
333. nts are to be confirmed by the builder of the system Agilent 4284A PRECISION LCR METER OPERATION MANUAL Including Option 001 002 006 201 202 301 SERIAL NUMBERS This manual applies directly to instruments with the serial number prefix of 2940J02283 02285 and above and whose ROM based firmware is version 01 20 For additional important information about serial numbers read Serial Number in Chapter 9 of this Operation Manual re ee Agilent Technologies Agilent Part No 04284 90040 Printed in JAPAN January 2001 Eighth Edition Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of the Agilent Technologies Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Component Test PGU Kobe 1 3 2 Murotani Nishi ku Kobe shi Hyogo 651 2241 Japan Copyright 1988 1991 1994 1996 1998 2000 2001 Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Manual Printing History The manual printing date and part number indicate its current edition The printing date changes when a new edition is printed Minor corrections and updates which are incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change The manual part number changes when extensive technical changes are incorporate
334. nu on the MEAS DISPLAY page The description of each function is given in System Menu in Chapter 3 So in the case of the MEDIA SPECIFYING and the PURGE functions the description and setting procedures are described in the following paragraphs only the procedure is described for the other functions Media Specifying On the CATALOG page the catalog of the 4284A s internal memory EEPROM or the external memory card which are inserted into the MEMORY card slot on the front panel are displayed with memory status records stored or no record in the memory and the comments displayed on the comment line for each settings To specify the media of memory to be displayed the catalog CAT INT or CAT CARD can be used Perform the following steps to specify the media of memory 1 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field using the CURSOR arrow keys The following softkeys will be displayed in the softkey label area m CAT INT m CAT CARD 2 Select the memory media using CAT INT for the internal memory or CAT CARD for the memory card Load Store Function Perform the following steps to store the current control settings to the internal non volatile memory or to the external memory card or to load the control settings from the internal non volatile memory or from the external memory card 1 Set all controls 2 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field on the CATALOG page 3 Insert the memory card into the MEMORY card slot
335. o 10 OUTPUT 717 STB 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END IDN Query Syntax Query Response Example Note Y IDN The IDN query returns the 4284A ID IDN Returned format is lt manufacturer gt lt model gt lt serial no gt lt firmware gt lt NL END gt Where lt manufacturer gt HEWLETT PACKARD lt model gt 4284A lt serial number gt 0 not available lt firmware gt REVdd dd dd dd ROM firmware revision number 10 DIM A 30 20 OUTPUT 717 IDN 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END This string data is an arbitrary ASCII response So this command should not be sent before a normal query in a program message For example IDN FREQ can not accepted FREQ IDN should be sent Command Reference 8 87 IDN OPC The 0PC command operation complete command tells the 4284A to set bit 0 OPC bit in the standard event status register when it completes all pending operations The 0PC command tells the 4284A to place an ASCII 1 decimal 49 in the 4284A s output buffer when it completes all pending operations Command Syntax OPC Example OUTPUT 717 0PC Set the 4284A to set OPC bit when the operation executed by previous command is completed Query Syntax OPC Query Response Returned format is 1 lt NL END gt Where 1 1 ASCII decimal 49 Example 10 OUTPUT 717 CORR OPEN Perform OPEN correction measuremen
336. o two types in this trigger system Refer to Figure 7 10 2 TRG common command and GET RIGGER bus command TRIGger Command WAIT FOR TRIGGER State lt lt lt TRIGger MEASUREMENT WAIT FOR TRIGGER State MEASUREMENT p State TRG or GET State L1907009 Command Figure 7 10 Trigger System and Trigger Commands 1 TRIGger IMMediate SCPI command Either the WAIT FOR TRIGGER state or the IDLE state the 4284A is triggered by sending the TRIGger IMMediate command When the measurement results can be read by a Remote Control 7 13 7 14 Remote Control controller under the IDLE state the FETCh command must be used 2 TRG common command or Group Execution Trigger GET bus command In the WAIT FOR TRIGGER state the 4284A is triggered by sending the TRG common command or GET bus command and the measurement results in one trigger sequence can be read without sending the FETCh command under the IDLE state Thus TRG TRIGger IMMediate FETCh Figure 7 11 and Figure 7 12 shows the difference between the TRIGger IMMediate command and TRG or GET command by using the sample programs 10 ASSIGN Meter TO 717 20 REMOTE Meter 30 OUTPUT Meter RST CLS 40 OUTPUT Meter TRIG SOUR BUS 50 OUTPUT Meter ABORT INIT 60 OUTPUT Meter TRIGGER IMMEDIATE 70 OUTPUT Meter
337. of the other functions only the procedure is given Load Store Function Perform the following steps on the LIST SWEEP SETUP page to Load Store the control settings from to internal non volatile memory or an external memory card 1 Set all controls 2 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field on the LIST SWEEP SETUP page 3 If you are using a memory card insert the memory card to the MEMORY card slot 4 Press STORE when you want to use the store function The message Enter record number to STORE will be displayed on the system message line Press LOAD when you want to use the load function The message Enter record number to LOAD will be displayed on the system message line 5 Enter the record number using the numeric entry keys and ENTER to Load Store the current control settings Clear Table Function This function allows you to clear all of the list sweep points and limits When you change from the current sweep parameter to the other sweep parameter this function must be used Perform the following steps to set only all of the operations on the LIST SWEEP SETUP page to the power on default settings 1 Move the CURSOR to the SYS MENU field 2 Press CLEAR TABLE Then the message Clearing table Are you sure will be displayed and the following softkeys will be displayed m YES N0 3 Press YES to clear all of the list sweep points and limits Printer Function Perform the following steps to print out
338. ol 7 37 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 BINARY Format The sample programs using the BINARY data format are in the following three patterns The contents of the sample programs are same as the contents of the ASCII format s sample programs m Measurement data transfer when the comparator function of the limit table is set to ON Figure 7 27 m Measurement data transfer using the buffer memory function when the comparator function of the limit table is set to ON Figure 7 28 m Measurement data transfer when the list sweep measurement is performed Figure 7 29 INTEGER Header_1 Header_2 Term ASSIGN ASSIGN REMOTE OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT Meter TO 717 FORMAT ON Binary TO 717 FORMAT OFF Meter Meter RST CLS Meter FORM REAL 64 Setup Meter TRIG SOUR BUS Measurement Meter COMP ON Condition Meter INIT CONT ON FOR I 0 TO 9 TRIGGER Meter Perform measurement ENTER Binary Header_1 Header_2 A B C D Term Transfer data PRINT A B C D Display measurement result NEXT I END Figure 7 27 Sample Program Comparator Using BINARY Format 7 38 Remote Control 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 INTEGER Header_1i Header_2 Header_3 Term DIM D 127 3 ASSIGN Meter TO 717 FORMAT ON
339. ol settings to the internal non volatile memory or to the external memory card 1 Set all controls 2 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field on the LIMIT TABLE SETUP page 3 Insert the memory card to the MEMORY card slot if you are using a memory card 4 Press STORE when you want to use the store function The message Enter record number to STORE will be displayed on the system message line Press LOAD when you want to use the load function The message Enter record number to LOAD will be displayed on the system message line 5 Enter the record number using the numeric entry keys and ENTER to store the current control settings or load the control settings Clear Table Function This function allows you to clear all of the limit values So when you change the limit mode this function must be used Perform the following steps to clear all of bin sorting limits on the LIMIT TABLE SETUP page 1 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 2 Press CLEAR TABLE The message Clearing table Are you sure will be displayed and the following softkeys will be displayed m YES NO 3 Press YES to clear all of the bin sorting limits Printer Function Perform the following steps to print out the display page using the PRINT DISP mode 1 Connect the 4284A to the printer using the GPIB cable 2 Set the printer to the Listen Only mode 3 Set the talk only mode to ON on the SYSTEM CONFIG page 4 Press MEAS SETUP
340. ollowing illustration there can be openings and there can be duplications Nominal Value o O HM L2 L3 H2 H3 L5 HS L6 L4 H6 H4 E S a S a B 1 ee B 2 e e B 3 O e B 4 o ___ B 5 oe B 6 eo OUT OF BINS o o o O O O O Oo L10947 Front Panel Operation for Setting the Limit Mode for the Comparator Perform the following steps to set the limit mode for the comparator 1 Move the cursor to the MODE field Then the following softkeys will be displayed 4 38 MEAS SETUP Menu m TOL This softkey is used to set the limit mode to the tolerance mode the ratio in percent m ABS TOL This softkey is used to set the limit mode to the tolerance mode parameter value m SEQ This softkey is used to set the limit mode to the sequential mode 2 Select and set the limit mode using the softkeys Nominal Value for Tolerance Mode Description When the tolerance mode is used as a limit mode for the primary parameter the nominal value must be set The nominal value can be set within the range of the following measurement range of the primary parameter Primary Parameter and Display Range Parameter Range Z R X 10 01 mQ to 99 9999 MQ IY G B 0 01 nS to 99 9999 S C 0 01 fF to 9 99999 F L 0 01 nH to 99 9999 kH D 0 000001 to 9 99999 Q 0 01 to 99999 9 0 180 000 to 180 000 When the limit mode for the primary parameter is the sequential mode the nominal v
341. ologies will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instruction when property installed on that instrument Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance No other warranty is expressed or implied Agilent Technologies specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Exclusive Remedies The remedies provided herein are buyer s sole and exclusive remedies Agilent Technologies shall
342. oltage EXT TRIG Pull up lt 1V 5to 15V 6 3 to 15 MA Voltage Output Signal Characteristics Opto isolated negative true Signal Name External Pull Up Voltage oaser Measurement Time Correction Data Switching Time Measurement frequency is equal to FREQ 1 approx 3 6 ms Measurement frequency is equal to FREQ 2 approx 4 0 ms Measurement frequency is equal to FREQ 3 approx 4 8 ms Measurement frequency is not equal to FREQ 1 2 3 a correction not performed approx 3 0 ms When multi channel correction is performed correction data switching times are added to the measurement time Correction frequency GENERAL INFORMATION 1 3 NOTES 1 4 GENERAL INFORMATION SECTION 2 INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION INTRODUCTION This section provides information necessary to use the Option 301 Scanner Interface including description of the interface sig nal lines and their electrical characteristics SCANNER INTERFACE SIGNAL INPUT OUTPUT CONNECTOR The scanner interface I O connector a standard 14 contact female Amphenol connector is mounted on the HP 4284A s rear panel for interconnection between the HP 4284A and your scan ner The scanner interface I O signals are divided into three types as follows Channel Selection Input Signals These signals are used to select the correction data which cor 3 responds to the channel number of the scanner e CHO to CH7 Channel Selection 8 bit binary input
343. omplete Bit This bit is set to 1 when the OPEN SHORT or LOAD correction data measurement is completed When you read the contents of the operation status event register using the STATus OPERation EVENt query the operation status event register is cleared and bit 7 of the status byte is set to 0 Remote Control 7 25 7 26 Remote Control Standard Operation Status Event Enable Register A operation status summary bit bit 7 of the status byte will be set when any enable bit in the operation status event register is set to 1 To enable disable any bits of the operation status event register the standard operation event enable register is used The standard operation event enable register is the same length as the standard operation event register When a bit is set in the operation status event register it enables the corresponding bit in the operation event register to request service To set any bit in the operation status event enable register The STATus OPERation ENABle command is used The syntax of the STATus OPERation ENABle command is STATus OPERation ENABle lt n gt Where lt n gt decimal number 0 to 65535 For example If lt n gt is equal to 8 0000000000001000 in binary bit 3 is enabled as follows Bit No of MSB LSB Event Register 15 14131211109 8 76543210 Event Enable Register 0000000000 00 10 0 0 In this case when either bit 3 of the operation statu
344. on the following controls refer to Chapter 4 a Nominal Value m Measurement Function a Bin Sorting Low High Limits The available fields and the softkeys which corresponded to each field on this page are shown in Figure 3 12 and Figure 3 13 BIN COUNT DISPLAY gt NO AUX 999999 OUT 999999 a Field Monitor L1003008 Figure 3 12 Available Fields on the BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page MEAS DISP SYS MENU y COUNT ON CANCEL PRINT DISP BIN No COUNT OFF L PRINT DATA BIN COUNT I KEY LOCK LIST SWEEP RESET COUNT more 4 3 more 3 3 lt BIN COUNT DISPLAY gt CANCEL more 2 3 L1003009 Figure 3 13 Available Softkeys on the BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 29 System Menu 3 30 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu The system menu on this page allows you to perform the following functions m Counter ON OFF a Load Store m Printer a Keylock These functions except for the counter function are the same as the functions displayed on the system menu of the MEAS DISPLAY page Refer to page 3 19 System Menu So in the case of the counter function the description and setting procedures are described in the following paragraphs for the other functions only the procedure is described Counter Function The 4284A has bin counting capability When many de
345. onents Follow the procedure to perform impedance measurements referring to the paragraphs noted on right side of each step Procedure Reference Paragraph Start Setup the 4284A measurement conditions IMPEDANCE PARAMETERS a PARALLEL SERIES CIRCUIT MODE SIGNAL LEVEL Connect the test fixture to a FOUR TERMINAL PAIR the 4284A CONFIGURATION a MEASUREMENT CONTACTS Setup the correction function s CORRECTION FUNCTION Connect DUT to the test a PARASITICS INCIDENT TO DUT fixture CONNECTION Perform measurement a CHARACTERISTICS EXAMPLES Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 1 Impedance Parameters All circuit components resistors capacitors or inductors have parasitic components lurking in the shadows waiting for the unwary for example unwanted resistance in capacitors unwanted capacitance in inductors and unwanted inductance in resistors Thus simple components should be modeled as complex impedances for in fact that is what they are Figure 6 1 A shows the impedance definitions and B shows vector representation of impedance Impedance Z is the total opposition that a circuit or device offers to the flow of alternating current at a given frequency Z contains a real and an imaginary part and it is expressed in rectangular form as Resistance and Reactance or in polar form as magnitude of Impedance and Phase as follows Z R jX Z 26 Z VR X X 6 arctan arc a R R Rs Z Impedan
346. onic components or circuit paths Agilent 4284A Precision LCR Meter Manual Change Agilent Part No 04284 90041 September 2004 Printed in Japan Change 1 Change Z Y L C R X G and B Accuracy on page 9 8 as follows IZI IYI L C R X G and B Accuracy Z IYI L C R X G and B accuracy Ae is given as Ae A Ka Kaa Kb x Kbb Kc x100 Kd Ke A Basic Accuracy Refer to Figure 9 4 and 9 5 Ka Impedance Proportional Factor Refer to Table 9 1 Kaa Cable Length Factor Refer to Table 9 2 Kb Impedance Proportional Factor Refer to Table 9 1 Kbb Cable Length Factor Refer to Table 9 3 Ke Calibration Interpolation Factor Refer to Table 9 4 Kd Cable Length Factor Refer to Table 9 6 Ke Temperature Factor Refer to Figure 9 6 L C X and B accuracy applies when Dx measured D value lt 0 1 R and G accuracy applies when Qx measured Q value lt 0 1 When Dx gt 0 1 multiply Ae by i Dx for L C X and B accuracy When Qx gt 0 1 multiply Ae by J Qx for R and G accuracy When measured value lt 10 mQ Z R and X accuracy Ae is given as Ae Ka Kaa Kc x100 Kd x Ke Ka Impedance Proportional Factor Refer to Table 9 1 Kaa Cable Length Factor Refer to Table 9 2 Kc Calibration Interpolation Factor Refer to Table 9 4 Kd Cable Length Factor Refer to Table 9 6 Ke Temperature Factor Refer to Figure 9 6 X accuracy applies when Dx
347. only when the suffix unit is HZ Table 8 2 Suffix Units and Available Commands Suffix Unit Available Command HZ FREQuency LIST FREQuency CORRection SPOT lt n gt FREQuency V VOLTage BIAS VOLTage LIST VOLTage LIST BIAS VOLTage A CURRent BIAS CURRent LIST CURRent LIST BIAS CURRent OHM FUNCtion IMPedance RANGe M CORRection LENGth S TRIGger DELay The header separator is placed between the header and its parameter This is one white space which is defined as a single ASCII character in the range 0 through 9 or 11 through 32 decimal This includes the ASCII space 32 decimal code Command Reference 8 7 Terminators Program Message Terminators Response Message Terminators 8 8 Command Reference There are two kinds of the terminators program message terminators and response message terminators The 4284A responds to the input data message when it is in the remote mode REN control line true and is addressed to listen The input data message contain a string of GPIB commands and terminators The GPIB commands are executed after the terminators are received The terminators defined as follows lt white space gt White Space Single ASCII character 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal For example Carriage Return 13 decimal or Space 32 decimal NL New Line Line Feed 10 decimal END EOI is asserted with the last byte is sent The 4284A can s
348. onnect the flat cable from the handler interface board The handler interface board has brown and an orange extractors and its location is shown in Figure 10 12 3 Remove the handler interface board The interface board contains electronic components that can be damaged by static electricity through electrostatic discharge ESD To prevent ESD damage maintain frequent contact with any bare sheet metal surface on the chassis A grounding wrist strap or similar device is useful for this purpose Handle the board carefully at all times Avoid touching electronic components or circuit paths Before performing step 4 note the jumper settings in order to return them to the same setting at the end of this function test 4 Set the jumpers on the handler interface board the same settings as when the board is shipped from the factory referring to Figure 10 16 OPEN W1 W4 W5 W7 W8 W11 W12 SHORT W2 W3 W6 W9 W10 W13 OPEN remove R101 thru R113 5 Replace the handler interface board top shield board rear feet and the top cover 6 Turn the 4284A ON 7 Connect the handler interface connector on the 4284A s rear panel with the handler simulator as shown in Figure 10 17 4284A HANDLER SIMULATOR Figure 10 18 Handler Interface Function Test Set up 8 Press the CATALOG SYSTEM MENU key 9 Press the SELF TEST softkey to display the SELF TEST page Performance Tests 10 31
349. or 2 B 2 Operation Errors 2 2 2 2 eee B 3 GPIB Errors gt aoa B 9 System Message ooa a ee B 11 Warning Messages a a 7 B 11 Instruction Messages looo a a aa B 12 Initial Settings and System Memory Introduction aoa a a a a C 1 Correction Data Introduction 2 a a D 1 Test Frequency and Correction Frequency D 1 Single Channel Correction Mode D 2 Multi Channel Correction Mode D 3 CORRECTION FUNCTION SETTING D 4 Write Protection Introduction 2 a a E 1 Write Protection Procedure o 0a aa aa aa E 1 Test Frequency Point Introduction aoa a a a a F 1 Frequency Points a a a 2 208 F 1 Transient States Caused by Measurement Condition Changes Introduction 2 a eee ee G 1 Changing the Test Frequency 2 G 2 Changing the Measurement Range G 3 CHANGING THE DC BIAS VOLTAGE G 6 Short Circuit Recovery 2 2022 G 8 Index Contents 15 Figures Contents 16 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 17 3 18 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 Power Cable Supplied Line Voltage Selector Rack Mount Kits Installation Front Panel Overview Rear Panel Overview Display Area Definition MENU keys Lo Display Pages 1 3 CURSOR Keys and Field Operation Example
350. ore and or after the colon For example wrong FUNCLI JIMP CPD right FUNC IMP CPD m The command can be completely spelled out or in abbreviated The rules for command abbreviation are described later in this section For example FUNCTION IMPEDANCE CPD FUNC IMP CPD m The command header should be followed by a question mark to generate a query for that command For example FUNC IMP The semicolon can be used as a separator to execute multiple commands on a single line The multiple command rules are as follows a Commands at the same level and in the same subsystem command group can be separated by a semicolon on a multiple command line For example FUNC SMON VAC ON IAC ON a To restart commands from the highest level a semicolon must be used as the separator and then a leading colon which shows that the restarted command is a command at the top of the command tree must follow For example FUNC IMP CPD FUNC SMON VAC ON a The GPIB common commands can restart only after a semicolon on a multiple command line For example FUNC IMP CPD SRE 32 a The GPIB common commands keeps the previous commands level in a multiple command line For example FUNC IMP CPD SRE 32 SMON VAC ON IAC ON Command Reference 8 3 Command Every command and character parameter has at least two forms a Abbreviations short form and a long form In some cases they will be the s
351. orrect additional error due to the test fixture and the test leads Table 6 2 lists the Correction functions with a brief description Table 6 2 Correction Functions Correction Description Typical Usage Selection Cable Length Correct phase shift e Measurements using the Correction error due to the 1 or 16048A D 2 m test Leads OPEN Correct for stray e High impedance measurements Correction admittance due to the test fixture SHORT Correct for residual e Low impedance measurements Correction impedance due to test fixture OPEN Correct the stray e Precise measurements SHORT admittance and Correction residual impedance due to the test fixture OPEN Correct any error e Measurements to be referenced to SHORT due to the test a standard LOAD fixture and test leads Correction by using the e Measurements using a test fixture standard that has complicated impedance characteristics For example the 4284A combined with the scanner 6 16 Measurement Procedure and Examples m Simple measurements using an Agilent supplied direct connecting test fixture In this case LOAD correction is not required OPEN SHORT correction is enough to correct the residual errors LCR Meter OPEN SHORT oN ad 16047A m Measurements using Agilent test leads and a test fixture In this case CABLE LENGTH and OPEN SHORT correction is used Of course CABLE COR
352. ot perform OPEN correction Obtains OPEN interpolation data Performs SHORT correction using SHORT data or FREQI 2 3 SHORT data Not perform SHORT correction Obtains SHORT interpolation SHORT data Performs LOAD correction using FREQ1 2 3 LOAD data Not perform LOAD correction Field Softkey Command Description D FREQI ON CORR SPOTI STAT ON Use FREQ OPEN SHORT LOAD data OFF CORR SPOTI STAT OFF Not use FREQ OPEN SHORT LOAD data MEAS CORR SPOT1 OPEN Obtains FREQI OPEN data OPEN MEAS CORR SPOT1 SHOR Obtains FREQ SHORT data SHORT MEAS CORR SPOT1 LOAD Obtains FREQI LOAD data E FREQ2 ON CORR SPOT2 STAT ON Use FREQ2 OPEN SHORT LOAD data OFF CORR SPOT2 STAT OFF Not use FREQ2 OPEN SHORT LOAD data MEAS CORR SPOT2 O0PEN Obtains FREQ2 OPEN data OPEN MEAS CORR SPOT2 SHOR Obtains FREQ2 SHORT data SHORT MEAS CORR SPOT2 LOAD Obtains FREQ2 SHORT data LOAD F FREQ3 ON CORR SPOT3 STAT ON Use FREQ3 OPEN SHORT LOAD data OFF CORR SPOT3 STAT OFF Not use FREQ3 OPEN SHORT LOAD data MEAS CORR SPOT3 OPEN Obtains FREQ3 OPEN data OPEN MEAS CORR SPOT3 SHOR Obtains FREQ3 SHORT data MEAS CORR SPOT3 LOAD Obtains FREQ3 LOAD data LOAD G MODE SINGLE CORR METH SING Sets the single channel correction mode MULTI CORR METH MULT Sets the multi channel correction mode Correction Data D 5 Write Protection E Introduction Write Protection Procedure Warning The 4284A
353. p 003280 00000k 99 8841p 002077 00000k 99 9033p 001570 00000k 99 9187p 001228 00000k 100 021p 000936 94444k 100 016p 000787 00000k 100 002p 000691 92857k 100 015p 000646 10 0000k 100 014p 000810 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 8 8 Figure 3 18 LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page Example Press PRINT DATA to print out the measurement results A marker will appear beside PRINT DATA The measurement results will be printed out on subsequent measurements according to the following data format This format is as same as the ASCII format of the data transfer via GPIB For more details refer to Chapter 7 lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt lt STATUS gt lt IN OUT gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt DATA A gt The measurement results of the main parameter IZI IYI C L R G 12 ASCII characters SN NNNNNESNN 3 36 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu Note Y lt DATA B gt lt STATUS gt lt IN OUT gt Measurement results of the sub parameter 6 D Q G Rs X B 12 ASCII characters SN NNNNNESNN 0 Analog Bridge is unbalance e ww Ne Normal Measurement A D converter doesn t work Signal source overload ALC unable to regulate 1 LOW 0 1 IN HIGH When the sequential sweep mode is used the above formats are repeated at each sweep point When the lt STATUS gt is 1 or 2 9 9E37 is output as the measurement data When the lt STATUS gt is 0 3 or 4 the actual measurement results are out
354. perature Range 30 C to 70 C Storage Humidity Range 30 to 85 50 C Do NOT shock or stress memory cards When storing or moving your 4284A be sure the memory card slot is empty no memory card inserted Do NOT touch the connector contact surface of a memory card and do NOT use chemical liquids to clean the contacts 3 HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD OPTION 201 If the 5V internal voltage pin 16 17 or 18 of the handler interface connector is not output a fuse on the handler interface board A32F1 has blown and must be replaced Two replacement fuses are furnished with the 4284A option 201 Additional fuses are available from Agilent Technologies Order PN 2110 0046 Fuse Mpm Time Delay 0 5A 12 5V If you need this fuse contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office To replace A32F1 perform the following procedure 1 To remove the handler interface board A32 perform procedure I through 7 on page 10 26 2 Remove A32F1 indicated in Figure A from socket and carefully insert the new fuse 3 Replace the handler interface board top shield plate rear feet and top cover If the handler interface continues not to output 5V after A32F1 has been replaced contact the nearest Agilent Technologies office A32F1 fuse 69060 CO86066006900005 BCCevseoe Seer oresCr on Figure A Handler interface Board Herstellerbescheinigung GERAUSCHEMISSION LpA lt 70 dB am Arbeitsplatz norm
355. ply for Measurement Accuracy Range 1 Measurement accuracy can apply Range 2 The limits applied for measurement accuracy differ according to DUT s DC resistance Three dotted lines show the upper limits when the DC resistance is 10 Q 100 Q and 1 KQ Z Y L C R X G and B Accuracy Z Y L C R X G and B accuracy A is given as Ae HA Ka Kaa Ky X Ku Ke xX 1004 Ki x Ke A Basic Accuracy Refer to Figure C and D K Impedance Proportional Factor Refer to Table A Kya Cable Length Factor Refer to Table B K Impedance Proportional Factor Refer to Table A K Cable Length Factor Refer to Table C K Calibration Interpolation Factor Refer to Table D Ky Cable Length Factor Refer to Table E K Temperature Factor Refer to Table F L C X and B accuracies apply when D measured D value lt 0 1 R and G accuracies apply when Q measured Q value lt 0 1 When D gt 0 1 multiply A by 4 1 D 2 for L C X and B accuracies When Qr gt 0 1 multiply A by 1 Q for R and G accuracies G accuracy described in this paragraph applies to the G B combination only D accuracy D accuracy D is given as Ae 100 Accuracy applies when D measured D value lt 0 1 When D gt 0 1 multiply De by 1 D De 4 Q Accuracy Q accuracy is given as Q2 x De 1FQ xX De Where is the measured Q value D is the relative D accuracy
356. ption The 4284A has a List Sweep measurement function which permits up to 10 test frequencies oscillator levels or DC bias points to be automatically measured There are two sweep modes for the list sweep measurements sequential SEQ mode and step STEP mode In the case of the sequential mode when the 4284A is triggered once the device is automatically measured at all sweep points In the case of the step mode the sweep point is incremented each time the 4284A is triggered 4 50 MEAS SETUP Menu Y Note List Sweep Parameter Sweep Sweep Parameter Parameter A A y Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger SIEP mode L1004028 Figure 4 23 SEQ mode and STEP mode When two or more sweep points are the same and are adjacent the 4284A measures the device once and then the measurement result is compared to limits set for each sweep point Front Panel Operation for Setting the List Sweep Measurement Mode Perform the following steps to set the list sweep measurement mode to the sequential mode or to the step mode 1 Move the cursor to the MODE field The following softkeys will be displayed m SEQ m STEP 2 Select and press a softkey to set the list sweep measurement mode Description The sweep point parameter for the list sweep measurement can be set to the test frequency oscillator level and DC bias This field allows you to set the parameter of
357. put Keylock Function Perform the following steps from the LIST SWEEP DISPLAY page to disable all front panel operation 1 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field 2 Press more 1 2 3 Press KEY LOCK a toggle type softkey A key symbol will be displayed on the left side of KEY LOCK and the Keys locked message will be displayed on the system message line 4 Press KEY LOCK again if you want to enable all front panel keys DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 37 4 MEAS SETUP Menu Introduction MEAS SETUP page This Chapter provides information for each page s function under MEAS SETUP MEAS SETUP have four display pages as listed below MEAS SETUP CORRECTION LIMIT TABLE SETUP LIST SWEEP SETUP This Chapter describes each function of each page in the order of the preceding list When you press MEAS SETUP the MEAS SETUP page will be displayed On this MEAS SETUP page all of the following measurement control functions can be set Each field in parenthesis is used when each control is set Comment Line comment line Measurement Function FUNC Measurement Range RANGE Test Frequency FREQ Oscillator Level LEVEL DC Bias BIAS Integration Time INTEG Trigger Mode TRIG Automatic Level Control ALC High Power Mode ON OFF Hi PW Bias Current Isolation Mode ON OFF DCTI ISO Averaging Rate AVG Voltage Level Monitor ON OFF Vm Current Level Monitor ON OFF Im Delay Time DE
358. quipment Lo ee a Procedure Handler Interface Function Test Option 202 only Equipment Procedure Scanner Interface Function Test Option 301 only Equipment Lo ee Procedure Supplying DC Power to the Simulator Procedure Performance Test Record Test Signal Frequency Accuracy Test Test Signal Level Level Monitor Accuracy Test Multimeter Reading Signal Frequency 1 25 klz Hi PW OFF Level Monitor Reading Signal Frequency 1 25 kHz Hi PW OFF Multimeter Reading Signal Frequency 960 kHz Hi PW OFF 9 28 10 1 10 1 10 2 10 2 10 4 10 4 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 6 10 6 10 7 10 9 10 9 10 10 10 12 10 12 10 12 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 21 10 21 10 21 10 23 10 23 10 23 10 26 10 26 10 26 10 30 10 30 10 30 10 33 10 33 10 33 10 36 10 36 10 37 10 37 10 37 10 37 10 37 10 38 Contents 13 Contents 14 Multimeter Reading Signal Frequency 1 25 klz Hi PW ON Option 001 ONLY Level Monitor Reading Signal Frequency 1 25 kHz Hi PW ON Option 001 ONLY Multimeter Reading Signal Frequency 960 kHz Hi PW ON Option 001 ONLY Level Monitor Reading Signal Frequency 960 kHz Hi PW ON Option 001 ONLY DC Bias Voltage Accuracy Test Hi PWOFF Hi PW ON Option 001 only Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test 10 pF Standard OSC Level 510 mV OSC Level 20 mV OSC Level 5 1 V Option 0 001 only 100 pF Standard OSC Level 510 mV OSC Level 20
359. r STATe Returned format is lt NR1 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 COMP 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END COMParator Subsystem MODE The MODE command sets the limit mode of the comparator function The MODE query returns the current settings of the limit mode ATOLerance COMParator MODE 4 PTOLerance SEQuence Command Syntax Where ATOLerance Set the absolute tolerance mode parameter value PTOLerance Set the percent tolerance mode the ratio in percent SEQuence Set the sequential mode Example OUTPUT 717 COMP MODE ATOL Query Syntax COMParator MODE Query Response Returned format is ATOL PTOL lt NL END gt SEQ Example 10 OUTPUT 717 COMP MODE 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 67 COMParator Subsystem TOLerance NOMinal Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 68 Command Reference The TOLerance NOMinal command sets the nominal value for the tolerance mode of the comparator function This can be set only when the limit mode is set to the tolerance mode The TOLerance NOMinal query returns the current settings of the nominal value for the tolerance mode COMParator TOLerance NOMinal lt value gt Where lt value gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format nominal value OUTPUT 717 COMP TOL NOM 100E 12 COMParator TOLerance NOMinal Returned Format is lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 C
360. r O O L20 Figure 8 4 OUTPut Subsystem Command Tree High POWer The High POWer command sets the high power mode to ON or OFF which means that Option 001 Power Amplifier DC Bias is valid or invalid when Option 001 is installed The High POWer query returns the current high power mode setting Refer to Appendix G Command Syntax ON OUTPut HPOWer 1 0 Where 1 decimal 49 When the function is ON O decimal 48 When the function is OFF Example OUTPUT 717 QUTP HPOW ON OUTPUT 717 OUTP HPOW O Query Syntax OUTPut HPOWer Query Response Returned format is lt NR1 gt lt NL7 END gt Example 10 OUTPUT 717 0UTP HPOW 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 17 OUTPut Subsystem DC ISOLation Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 18 Command Reference The DC ISOLation command sets the bias current isolation to ON ot OFF The DC ISOLation query returns the current setting of the bias current isolation function Refer to Appendix G ON OFF OUTPut DC ISOLation 0 Where 1 decimal 49 When the function is ON O decimal 48 When the function is OFF OUTPUT 717 QUTP DC ISOL ON OUTPUT 717 0UTP DC ISOL 0 OUTPut DC I1SOLation Returned format is lt NR1 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 0UTP DC ISOL 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END BIAS Subsystem BIAS Subsystem The BIAS subsystem
361. r is as follows Bit No Description Power On PON Bit User Request URQ Bit Command Error CME Bit Execution Error EXE Bit Device Dependent Error DDE Bit Oo wo e OO OD N Query Error QYE Bit 1 Request Control RQC Bit 0 Operation Complete OPC Bit Example OUTPUT 717 ESE 36 Bit 2 and 5 enabled Query Syntax ESE Query Response Returned format is lt value gt lt NL END gt Example 10 OUTPUT 717 ESE 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 83 ESR Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 84 Command Reference The ESR query returns the contents of the standard event status register Using the ESR query command to read the standard event status register clears its contents ESR Returned format is lt value gt lt NL END gt Where lt value gt NRI format decimal expression of the contents of the event status register The definition of each bit of the event status register is as follows Bit No Description Power On PON Bit User Request URQ Bit Command Error CME Bit Execution Error EXE Bit Device Dependent Error DDE Bit oOo wo e oO OD N Query Error QYE Bit 1 Request Control RQC Bit 0 Operation Complete OPC Bit 10 OUTPUT 717 ESR 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END SRE The SRE command Service Request Enable command sets the enable bits of the status byte register The
362. r settings before this test Replace the top shield plate rear feet and top cover Performance Tests 10 35 Supplying DC Power to the Simulator Procedure Warning This paragraph shows the procedure supplying 5 V DC to the Bias Interface Simulator or the Scanner Simulator from the 4284A interior 1 Disconnect the power cable from the 4284A and allow 1 minutes for the internal capacitors to discharge Dangerous energy voltage exists when the 4284A is in operation and for a time after it is powered down Allow 1 minutes for the internal capacitors to discharge 2 Disconnect the two rear feet which lock the top cover and rear panel together 3 Fully loosen the top cover retaining screws located on the rear of the top cover 4 Slide the top cover towards the rear and lift it off The top shield plate will be visible FRONT PANEL TPI TP REAR PANEL A7 DIGITAL CONTROL BOARD 2 i 10 36 Performance Tests With black and purple extractors Figure 10 22 A7 Board Location 5 Connect TP2 GND on the A7 digital control board to the TP2 GND on the simulator board Then connect TP1 on the A7 board to TP1 5 V or Vcc on the simulator board Figure 10 21 shows the location of TP1 and TP2 on the A7 board Performance Test Record l Agilent Technologies 4284A Pre
363. r terminal pair test fixtures or test leads are refer to the Accessories Selection Guide For Impedance Measurements Catalog number 5963 6834E INSTALLATION CATEGORY I AN Do not apply DC voltage or current to the UNKNOWN terminals Doing so will damage the 4284A Before you measure a capacitor be sure the capacitor is fully discharged 14 FRAME Terminal This is the FRAME Terminal which is tied to the instrument s chassis and which can be used for measurements that require guarding Figure 2 2 shows a brief description of the 4284A s rear panel 2 ao gt gt i Be 2 4 Overview Figure 2 2 Rear Panel Overview 1 GPIB Interface Connector This is the GPIB interface connector used when operating on the General Purpose Interface Bus 2 Interface Connectors When interface options are installed the interface connectors will be installed as shown When the 4284A is not equipped with an interface option blank covers are installed 3 INT DC BIAS MONITOR Connector This BNC connector is the internal DC BIAS monitor connector used for monitoring the DC bias voltage applied to the device under test This connector is installed only when Option 001 is installed 4 EXT TRIGGER Connector This BNC connector is the external trigger
364. r to Figure 10 11 Confirm that ADRS1 ADRS6 LEDs on the simulator turn ON in laccordance with the hexadecimal number displayed on the LCD One of the 6 LEDs turns ON in sequence as shown in Figure 10 11 Confirm that DO0 DO7 LEDs on the simulator turn ON in accordance with the hexadecimal number displayed on the LCD One of the 8 LEDs turns ON in sequence as shown in Figure 10 11 Ow se OWN e o VNNNQQOU Coeoereoe Mm OW TON CO N aoa0qaqana Oooo ocoo oO OO LAAI AA L anoangangncaa OOOO 00 00 OOOO 0O0 00 en oe Figure 10 11 Bias Current Interface Function Test 13 Confirm that DIO TO 7 and DI8 TO 15 on the LCD of the 4284A display hexadecimal number FF 14 Set switches S1 and S2 on the bias interface simulator to 0 Then confirm that hexadecimal number 00 is displayed by DIO TO 7 and DI8 TO 15 Note a The states of 1 DI0 TO 7 and 52 DI1 TO 8 are displayed as a 3 hexadecimal number on the 4284A s LCD 15 Press the TEST END softkey Caution Do not execute any SELF TEST except for the Bias Current I F I O Test or the 4284A will become inoperative Performance Tests 10 25 Handler Interface Function Test Option 201 only Equipment Procedure Warning FRONT PANEL y A Perform this test only when troubleshooting the Option 201 Handler Interface Board This test verifies the handler interface functions Handler Simu
365. ragraph the meaning of some of the signalis is different for the the comparator function and the list sweep comparator function However the electrical charac teristics of these signals are identical for the two operations The following descriptions apply to both the comparator function and the list sweep comparator function DC Isolated Outputs Opto coupled Each DC output pins 1 through 11 pins 19 through 24 pins 29 through 31 is isolated using an open collector output optocou pler The output voltage of each line is set by a pull up resistor on the handier interface board The pull up resistors can be connected to the internally supplied voltages 5 V and 12 V or to an externally applied voltage EXT DCV 1 5 V to 24 V EXT DCV 2 5 V to 15 V by setting jumpers refer to page 2 15 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD The electrical characteristics of the DC isolated outputs are di vided into two types See Table 2 3 Since the power source for the Comparison Output and Control Output signals are different two circuit commons COM1 COM2 are made available Table 2 3 DC Isolated Output Electrical Characteristics Output Signals Comparison Signals BIN1 BIN9 Internal pull up AUX_BIN voltage HP 4284A OUT_OF_BINS circuit common PHI PLO External voltage UNBAL EXT DCV 1 COM1 Control Signals Internal pull up INDEX voltage HP 4284A EOM lt 0 circuit common ALARM External voltage EXT D
366. re sent the HP 4284A will not set the channel number until it is triggered or until it starts a correction data measurement Channel Selection Using HP IB The channel number used to select the correction data can be set using the CORRection USE command via HP IB The syntax of this command is CORRection USE lt channel number gt where lt channel number gt O to 127 integer For example the sample program for the channel number 20 is as follows 10 OUTPUT 717 CORR METH MULT Set the multi compen mode 20 OUTPUT 717 CORR USE 20 Set the CH No to 20 30 END NOTE In case of the channel number selection using the CORRec tion USE command the HP 4284A acknowledges the chan nel number when the HP 4284A receives this command So if the CORRection USE 10 command is sent via HP IB the HP 4284A will set the channel number when the HP 4284A will receive the command Monitoring Current Channel You can monitor current channel number selected for correction on the CORRECTION page and the MEAS DISPLAY page CH No on these pages indicates current channel selected for correction OPERATION 3 7 a CORRECTION DATA MEASUREMENTS itis necessary to perform correction data measurements OPEN SHORT and LOAD data measurements at 3 test frequencies for each channel The following is a sample procedure for performing correction measurements for a channel Repeat the following procedure for each scanner chann
367. re three patterns for the sorting area of the secondary parameter m When the secondary parameter limits are not specified on the LIMIT TABLE SETUP page Devices will be sorted according to primary parameter comparison results Secondary Parameter OUT BIN OUT OF Sortin OF BINS I BINS Lower Higher Primary uoosote Limit Limit Parameter m When the secondary parameter limits are set and AUX BIN are set to OFF Only devices with secondary limits are sorted by the primary parameter result Devices not within the secondary parameter limits are sorted OUT OF BINS even if the device s primary parameter is within limits Secondary Parameter 4 OUT OF BINS Higher Limit OUT OUT OF 7 ing OF Lower BINS BINS BINS Lower Higher Primary Loosen Limit Limit Parameter MEAS SETUP Menu 4 41 Note Y 4 42 MEAS SETUP Menu m When the secondary parameter limits are set and AUX BIN are set to ON Devices whose primary parameter is not within limits are sorted OUT OF BINS Devices whose primary parameter is within limits but whose secondary parameter is out of limits are sorted into the AUX BIN Secondary Parameter AUX BINS Higher Limit OUT OUT OF a ing oF Lower BINS BINS Limit AUX BINS Lower Higher Primary L04020 Limit Limit Parameter When only the lower limit of the secondary parameter is set and the AUX BIN are set to ON the devices whose primar
368. rement Function 3 4 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu Description The 4284A measures two components of the complex impedance parameters at the same time in a measurement cycle The measurement parameters are listed as follows a Primary Parameters Z absolute value of impedance Y absolute value of admittance L inductance C capacitance R resistance G conductance m Secondary Parameters dissipation factor quality factor ESR equivalent series resistance equivalent parallel resistance w reactance susceptance phase angle SOKA ROS The primary parameter measurement result is located on the upper line as two large character lines on this page and the secondary parameter measurement result is located on the lower line as two large character lines on this page The combinations of primary and secondary parameters including the equivalent parallel and serial combinations are listed in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Measurement Function Primary Serial Mode Parallel Mode Parameter Z Z 0 rad Z 0 deg Y Y 0 rad Y 0 deg C Cs D Cp D Cs Q Cp Q Cs Rs Cp G Cp Rp L Ls D L D L Q L Q Le Rs L G Lp Rp R X Front Panel Operation for Setting the Measurement Function Perform the following steps to set the measurement function 1 Use the CURSOR arrow keys to move the cursor to the FUNC field The following softkeys will be displayed m Cp D m Cp
369. rformance Tests 10 17 10 18 Performance Tests 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Al 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Connect the 2 m Test Leads 16048D to the UNKNOWN terminals Press the MEAS SETUP MENU key and the CORRECTION softkey to display the CORRECTION page Set the CABLE to 2 m Store the OPEN CORRECTION data and the SHORT CORRECTION data referring to Step 4 through 9 In this procedure the OPEN termination and the SHORT termination should be connected to the 2 m Test Leads 16048D Set the 4284A to the Manual Trigger mode Set the measurement function to Cp D Connect the 1000 pF standard to the 2 m Test Leads 16048D Perform Steps 38 through 39 for all the test frequencies listed in Table 10 10 Press the TRIGGER key Confirm that the 4284A s reading is within the test limits in Table 10 10 Connect the 4 m Test Leads 16048E to the UNKNOWNterminals Press the MEAS SETUP MENU key and the CORRECTION softkey to display the CORRECTION page Set the CABLE to 4 m Store the OPEN CORRECTION data and the SHORT CORRECTION data referring to steps 4 through 9 In this procedure the OPEN termination and the SHORT termination should be connected to the 4 m Test Leads 16048E Set the 4284A to the Manual Trigger mode Set the measurement function to Cp D Connect the 1000 pF standard to the 4 m Test Leads 16048E Perform Steps 48 through 49 for all the t
370. ription of each function is given on page 3 19 system menu So in the case of the clear setup function and the system reset function the description and setting procedure are given while in the case of the other functions only the procedure is given Load Store Function Perform the following steps on the MEAS SETUP page to store the control settings to the internal non volatile memory or the external memory card or to load the control settings from the internal non volatile memory or the external memory card 1 Set all controls 2 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field on the MEAS SETUP page 3 If you are using a memory card insert the memory card into the MEMORY card slot 4 Press STORE when you want to use the store function The message Enter record number to STORE will be displayed on the system message line Press LOAD when you want to use the load function The message Enter record number to LOAD will be displayed on the system message line Enter the record number using the numeric entry keys and to store the current control settings or load the control settings Clear Setup Function This function allows you to set all of the operation on the MEAS SETUP page to the power on default settings The control settings on the other pages are not initialized Figure 4 6 shows the MEAS SETUP page after performing the clear setup function Hi PW ON When Option 001 is installed EAS SETUP gt C o
371. rmat N QUT gt No of bytes to transfer lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt 6 bytes 11007013 7 18 Remote Control 8 bytes 8 bytes lt STATUS gt m 8 bytes lt BIN No gt or lt IN OUT gt pO ae 8 bytes Figure 7 16 BINARY Format Buffer Memory 2 bytes Each data format has a different data transfer rate Table 7 3 shows the typical time required from sending the FETCh command or the MEM READ DBUF command to enter the data using the ENTER command with an HP 9000 series 300 computer Table 7 3 Data Format and Data Transfer Time Format Data Type Time ASCII Data without BIN No 10 ms Data with BIN No 11 ms List Sweep Data 10 points 75 ms Data Buffer Memory 128 sets of data 960 ms BINARY Data without BIN No 8 ms Data with BIN No 8 8 ms List Sweep Data 10 points 34 ms Data Buffer Memory 128 sets of data 406 ms Remote Control 7 19 Status Byte The status byte register contains an 8 bit word that the 4284A places on the GPIB bus when it is serially polled The value of each bit indicates the status of an internal 4284A function and two bits of the status byte are used as the summary bits of the registers Refer to Figure 7 17 Bits are set to 1 and reset to 0 Status Summary Messages Service Request Generation
372. rning Message Description Warning 1 I bias unit When the 4284A finds one current bias unit connected this message is displayed Warning 2 I bias unit When the 4284A finds two curremt bias units connected this message is displayed Warning ALC turned off When the LEVEL setting is out of the ALC s available range the ALC function is automatically turned OFF Set the LEVEL to be within the ALC s available range and then set ALC to ON Warning ALC unable to regulate When the LEVEL setting is inappropriate for use with the ALC function the ALC function will not work the operation will be the same as if the ALC function is turned OFF The data status is set to 4 Set the LEVEL appropriate for the device Warning Correction not effective When the MULTI correction mode is used and the measurement frequency is not equal to FREQI 3 correction frequency correction will not be performed Warning Deviation measurement ON The deviation measurement is set to ON when the display page is changed to the BIN No DISPLAY BIN COUNT DISPLAY or LIMIT TABLE SETUP page Warning I bias unit disconnected This message is displayed when the status is changed after the current bias unit is disconnected Warning Improper high low limits The high limit value is less than the low limit value of the limit table Warning Level changed for ALC When the ALC is turned on and the LEVEL setti
373. rough 6 of the General Configuration Procedure on page 3 3 2 Configure the following interface signals by installing the jumpers as shown in Figure 3 9 START IN Instali jumper at W8 and W12 BUSY Install jumper at W6 EOC Install jumper at W4 Figure 3 9 Palomar M11 Jumper and Pull up Resistor Locations 3 All 1 O signals are TTL level so you must install all pull up resistors to 5 V install pull up resistors R101 R113 Refer to Figure 3 9 for the pull up resistor locations 4 Bring 5V out through pins 12 and 17 of the handler inter face rear panel connector install a jumper at W1 for 5 V and at W2 for the COMMON connection Refer to Figure 3 9 for the locations of W1 and W2 5 Install the configured handler interface board into the HP 4284A 6 Replace the top shield plate rear feet and top cover 3 42 SETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD es Q Corporation RTR2 The RTR2 timing diagram is shown in Figure 3 10 for reference Q corporation RTR2 Raising Edge START IN Trigger _ BUSY Figure 3 10 RTR2 I O Timing Used with The Comparator Function SEETTING UP THE HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD 3 13 Q Corporation RTR2 Configuration Procedure 1 Perform steps 1 through 6 of the General Configuration Procedure on page 3 3 3 11 igure in F hown 2 Configure the following interface signals by installing the jumpers as s Install jumper at W9 W10 and
374. rrent I F I O Test Description This test checks the input output signals of the Option 301 Scanner Interface When the test is started two scanner output signals INDEX and EOM are asserted alternately and the input signals CH No and CH_VALID are read when only the status of these signals is switched These sequence is repeated until TEST END is pressed This test uses the Scanner Simulator Agilent PN 04278 65301 described on CHAPTER 10 PERFORMANCE TEST Description This test checks the input output signals of the Option 002 Bias Current Interface When the test is started the CS_0 and CS_1 output signals are alternately asserted and ADDRESS and DOO to DO7 output signals are changed in ascending order Input signals DIO to DI15 are read when only the status of these signals is switched This sequence is repeated until TEST END is pressed This test uses the Bias Current Interface Simulator Agilent PN 42841 65001 described on Chapter 10 5 16 Catalog System Configuration Measurement Procedure and Examples Introduction Basic Measurement Procedure This Chapter provides basic measurement procedures basic L C and R measurement theory and measurement hints After the descriptions of basic measurement procedures practical measurement examples are given using the 4284A The following description shows the basic procedures used to measure the impedance of capacitors inductors resistors and other comp
375. rrent test fixture exceeded its limit Turn the DC BIAS off to let the 42842A B cool down 23 Fixture OPEN det defective e Fixture cover open detection wire is open Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office 24 Fixture cover open e The cover of the 42842A B is open Close the cover of the 42842A B 25 DC bias I source overload e The DC bias source current is overloaded If this message is displayed all the time when measuring a DUT which conforms to specifications contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office 26 DC bias I sink overload e The DC bias sink current is overloaded If this message is displayed all the time when measuring a DUT which conforms to specifications contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office 40 Scanner I F disabled e Illegal operation MULTI channel correction mode set or CORRection USE command is sent via GPIB when the SCANNER I F is not installed or to OFF Install the SCANNER I F and set it to ON B 4 Error and Warning Messages Error Displayed Message e Description Solution 41 Measurement aborted Correction data measurement aborted Re measure 42 2m 4m opt not installed Illigal operation 2m 4m CABLE length set when Option 006 is not installed Install Option 006 or set Om CABLE length and use the OPEN S
376. s Headers can be of the long form or the short form The long form allows easier understanding of the program code and the short form allows more efficient use of the computer Parameters may be of two types as follows m Character Data and String Data Character data consists of ASCII characters The abbreviation rules are the same as the rules for command headers String data consists of ASCII characters enclosed by double quotes a Numeric Data Integer NR1 fixed point NR2 or floating point NR3 These three numeric data types are defined in IEEE 488 2 1988 Refer to the syntax diagrams on the next page The available range for numeric data is 9 9E37 Command Reference 8 5 NR1 lt digit gt For example 123 123 12345 NR2 lt digit gt For example 12 3 1 234 123 4 NR3 lt digit gt For example 1 23E 5 123 4E 56 When numeric data is used as a parameter the suffix multiplier mnemonics and suffix units The suffix multiplier must be used with the suffix unit can be used for some commands as follows 8 6 Command Reference Table 8 1 Multiplier Mnemonics Definition Mnemonic 1E18 EXA EX 1E15 PETA PE 1F12 TERA T 1E9 GIGA G 1E6 MEGA MA 1E3 KILO K 1E 3 MILLI M 1E 6 MICRO U 1E 9 NANO N 1 12 PICO P 1E 15 FEMTO F 1E 18 ATTO A 1 M or MA is available
377. s resistance is recommended a For inductance measurements A standard inductor whose inductance is nearly equal to DUT s inductance is recommended Reference Values of the LOAD Standard Enter specified reference values of the standard as the REF A and REF B values using the appropreate function on the CORRECTION page For example When using a standard capacitor which has 6 20 Measurement Procedure and Examples Note A 1G a specified parallel capacitance and D values enter the specified parallel capacitance value as the REF A value and the specified D value as the REF B value with C D function If the REF A and REF B values are entered with the Cp D function measurements with other functions such as the Z function can be performed Using the Pre Measured Device for the LOAD Even if you have no standard which has specified reference values you can perform a LOAD correction using a device such as a general purpose capacitor or resistor The pre measured values of a device are used for the REF A and REF B values Follow the procedure shown in below to use a device for the LOAD standard 1 Prepare a device whose impedance is as close as possible to the DUT s impedance for the LOAD standard 2 If the device has BNC connectors constructed in the four terminal pair configuration measure the device directly do not use a test fixture connect it directly to the 4284A Measurement Procedure and Examples
378. s 4 1a 4 a 4 gt 1 2 Range o 1os 4 100m Q a 1005 tom 4 T T T T t 20 400 1k 10k 100k 300k 1 Hz Frequency L100300B Figure 3 5 Effective Measuring Range Oscillator Level gt 2V or gt 20 mA Note The measurement range is limited by the test frequency setting when the oscillator level is equal to 2 V or less than 2 V When the measurement range and the test frequency are set under the above conditions the test frequency must be set first and then the measurement range If you set the measurement range first and then frequency the resulting measurement range may not be the one you wanted to set Front Panel Operation for Setting the Measurement Range Perform the following procedure to set the measurement range 1 Move the cursor to the RANGE field using the CURSOR keys The following softkeys will be displayed DISPLAY FORMAT Menu 3 9 Test Frequency 3 10 DISPLAY FORMAT Menu AUTO This softkey is used to set the measurement range to AUTO HOLD This softkey is used to change the measurement range from the AUTO mode to the HOLD mode When the measurement range is set to the HOLD mode the impedance range is fixed at the current range setting and the impedance range is displayed in the RANGE field INCR t This softkey is used to increment the measurement range in the HOLD fixed range mode DECR This softkey is used to decrement the measurement range in the HOLD fixed range mode
379. s event register is set to 1 the operation status summary bit bit 7 of the status byte is set to 1 The default setting is STATus OPERation ENAB1le 0 all bits of the operation status event register are disabled Bit 1 bit 2 and bits 5 to 15 are always 0 zero Thus it is meaningless to mask these bits Standard Event The standard event status register contains the 16 bits of the Status Register operation status report which is defined in IEEE 488 2 1987 as shown in Figure 7 19 If one or more enable bits of the standard event status register is set to 1 bit 5 standard event status register summary bit of the status byte is set to 1 Each bit of the standard event status register is shown on the next page When each error bit bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 and bit 5 of the standard event status register is set to 1 an error message with the following error numbers is input to the error queue For details refer to Appendix B Bit No Error No 5 Command Error 100 to 178 4 Execution Error 211 to 230 3 Device Specific Error 10 to 101 310 311 2 Query Error 400 to 440 When you read the contents of the standard event status register using the ESR command the standard event status register is cleared and bit 5 of the status byte is set to 0 Remote Control 7 27 xecution Error ser Request Deveice Dependent Error Power On Command Error
380. s of inductance the reactance becomes relatively small compared with that of a large inductance so the series resistance component is more significant So the series equivalent circuit mode L D or L Q is the appropriate choice 6 6 Measurement Procedure and Examples a Large L high Z Z m Less L1006004 More significant b Small L Rp low Z S po m More significant Less significant significant Figure 6 4 Inductance Circuit Mode Selection The following is a rule of thumb for selecting the circuit mode according to the impedance of the inductor use series circuit mode use parallel circuit mode follow the manufacturer s recommendation eBelow approx 1002 e Above approx 10 kQ e Between above values For example to measure a 1 mH inductor at the 1 kHz impedance may be approximately 6 3 Q Ls D or Ls Q function is suitable Signal Level Signal Level Across The DUT Most components have impedance characteristics that are dependent on the applied signal level So the oscillator level setting should be set appropriate for the DUT Figure 6 5 shows a simplified model of the 4284A and a DUT The signal level across the DUT depends on the oscillator level the source resistance of the 4284A and the impedance of the DUT as follows Zx Vin x Vose Rso 4 Zyl Vose In Rso T Zyl Where Vosc oscillator voltage level of the 4284A Rso
381. s with the required current rating and of the specified type as replacements DO NOT use a mended fuse or short circuit the fuse holder in order to by pass a blown fuse Find out what caused the fuse to blow The 4284A must be operated under within the following environment conditions and sufficient space must be kept behind the 4284A to avoid obstructing the air flow of the cooling fans Temperature 0 C to 55 C Humidity less than 95 RH at 40 C The 4284A must be protected from temperature extremes which could cause condensation within the instrument This product has been designed and tested to the requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 89 336 EEC To use a properly shielded cable or shielded coaxial cable such as those recommended in the General Information and the Performance Test to connect each of the ports to their respective controllers peripherals equipments or devices may ensure to meet the requirements Installation and Set Up Guide 1 5 Ventilation Requirements To ensure adequate ventilation make sure that there is adequate clearance around the 4284A Instruction for Cleaning To prevent electrical shock disconnect the 4284A power cable from the receptacle before cleaning Use a dry cloth or a cloth slightly dipped in water to clean the casing Do not attempt to clean the 4284A internally Rack Handle Installation The analyzer can be rack mount
382. set the list sweep points MEAS SETUP under MEAS SETUP This display page provides all of the measurement control settings The 4284A cannot perform a measurement from this page and the measurement result can not be displayed on this page When you measure the device under test using the control settings on this page use one of the display pages from DISPLAY FORMAT CORRECTION under MEAS SETUP This display page provides the correction function The correction function must be used to measure the device under test accurately The 4284A cannot measure the device under test from this page and the measurement results will not be displayed When you measure a device under test use one of the display pages from DISPLAY FORMAT LIMIT TABLE SETUP under MEAS SETUP This display page provides the limit table settings for bin sorting The 4284A cannot perform a measurement from this page and the comparison results can not be displayed When you want to see the comparison results either the BIN No DISPLAY page under DISPLAY FORMAT or the BIN COUNT DISPLAY page under DISPLAY FORMAT must be used LIST SWEEP SETUP under MEAS SETUP This display page provides the control settings for the List Sweep measurement function The 4284A cannot measure the device under test from this page and the list sweep measurement results can not be displayed from this page When you measure the device under test using the control se
383. shipment Temperature 20 C to 60 C Humidity lt 95 RH at 40 C To prevent condensation from taking place on the inside of the 4284A protect the instrument against temperature extremes Containers and packing materials identical to those used in factory packaging are available through your closest Agilent Technologies sales office If the instrument is being returned to Agilent Technologies for servicing attach a tag indicating the service required the return address the model number and the full serial number Mark the container FRAGILE to help ensure careful handling In any correspondence refer to the instrument by model number and its full serial number The following general instructions should be used when repacking with commercially available materials 1 Wrap the 4284A in heavy paper or plastic When shipping to a Agilent Technologies sales office or service center attach a tag indicating the service required return address model number and the full serial number 2 Use a strong shipping container A double walled carton made of at least 350 pound test material is adequate 3 Use enough shock absorbing material 3 to 4 inch layer around all sides of the instrument to provide a firm cushion and to prevent movement inside the container Use cardboard to protect the front panel 4 Securely seal the shipping container 5 Mark the shipping container FRAGILE to help ensure careful handling 6 In any
384. sing a shorting bar to short between high terminal and low terminal of the UNKNOWN terminals Figure 6 15 shows a sample shorting bar Agilent Part Number 5000 4226 for the 16047A C D test fixtures Material Brass Thickness 1 0mm Unit mm Figure 6 15 Sample Shorting Plate The shorting bar should have very low residual impedance so a high conductivity metal plate that is not easily corroded is recommended for the shorting plate It must be clean Measurement Procedure and Examples 6 19 Inserting a shorting plate into the 16047A Figure 6 16 Shorting Plate Connection Performing LOAD To perform LOAD correction data measurement connect the LOAD Correction standard to the measurement contacts Preparing the Standard It is necessary to prepare the working standard such as a standard resistor and standard capacitor It is recommended that you select a standard whose impedance is as close as possible to DUT s impedance The following are recommendations for selecting standards a For capacitance measurements A standard capacitor whose capacitance is nearly equal to the DUT capacitance is recommended a For resistance measurements A standard resistor whose resistance is nearly equal to DUT
385. sision LCR Meter Test Signal Frequency Accuracy Test FREQUENCY RESULT PASS FAIL Test Signal Level Level Monitor Multimeter Reading 80 kHz 400 kHz 1 MHz Accuracy Test Signal Frequency 1 25 kHz Hi PW OFF PASS Level Monitor Reading Signal Frequency 1 25 kHz Hi PW OFF OSC MULTIMETER LEVEL READING 0 97 x M R 0 5 mV 5 mV MAXIMUM 1 03xM R 0 5 mV 10 mV 20 mV 50 mV 100 mV 200 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1V 2 V M R is the Multimeter Reading for the 4284A s test signal level Performance Tests 10 37 OSC LEVEL 5 mV 10 mV 20 mV 50 mV 100 mV 200 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1V 2V OSC LEVEL 10 mV 1V Multimeter Reading Signal Frequency 960 kHz Hi PW OFF PASS FAIL MULTIMETER MINIMUM ACTUAL MAXIMUM READING 0 97 x M R 0 5 mV 1 03 x M R 0 5 mV M R is the Multimeter Reading for the 4284A s test signal level Multimeter Reading Signal Frequency 1 25 kHz Hi PW ON Option 001 ONLY PASS FAIL Level Monitor Reading Signal Frequency 1 25 kHz Hi PW ON Option 001 ONLY MULTIMETER MINIMUM ACTUAL MAXIMUM READING 0 97xM R 0 5 mV 1 03xM R 0 5 mV 0 9
386. solation function is set to ON add the display fluctuation N given in the following equation to the Ae of relative measurement accuracy Refer to relative measurement accuracy of specification The following equation is specified when all of the following conditions are satisfied DUT impedance gt 100 Q Test signal level setting lt 1 Vrms DC bias current gt 1 mA Integration time MEDIUM DUTim eqance Q DC jas curren A 1 ped x b t m x x 1074 Measurement Range Q Test signal level Vins yn Where P is the coefficient listed on Table A n is the number of averaging When the DC bias current is less than 1 mA apply N value at 1 mA When integration time is set to SHORT multiply N value by 5 When integration time is set to LONG multiply N value by 0 5 Table 9 7 Coefficient Related to Test Frequency and Measurement Range Meas Test Frequency fm Hz Range 99 lt lt 100 100 lt f lt 1 k 1 k lt f lt 10 k 10 k lt f lt 1 M 100 Q 0 75 0 225 0 045 0 015 300 Q 2 5 0 75 0 15 0 05 1 kQ 7 5 2 25 0 45 0 15 3 kQ 25 7 5 1 5 0 5 10 kQ 75 22 5 4 5 1 5 30 KQ 250 75 15 5 100 kQ 750 225 45 15 Calculation Example Measurement Conditions DUT 100 pF Test signal level 20 mVims Test frequency 10 kHz Integration time Then Then N Therefore MEDIUM DUT s impedance 1 27x104x100x101 159 kQ Measurement range is 100 kQ DC bias
387. ss to 17 2 Load BASIC and input the following program This program can be used with HP 9000 series 200 or 300 computers OPTION BASE 1 DIM State 3 Freq 3 Ref_a 3 Ref_b 3 Corr_data 3 6 OUTPUT 717 CORR METH MULT Set MULTI correction mode FOR I 1 TO 3 OUTPUT 717 CORR SPOT B amp VALS I08 STAT FREQ Status amp freq queries ENTER 717 State I Freq I OUTPUT 717 CORR SPOT amp VALS I 08 LOAD STAN Reference value query ENTER 717 Ref_a I Ref_b I1 NEXT I OUTPUT 717 CORR USE DATA 10 Correction measurement data query ENTER 717 Corr_data FOR I 1 TO 3 PRINT FREQ BVALS IT 8 Freq I Hz State 1 PRINT REF Ref_a I 3 i Ref_b TI PRINT MEAS DATA PRINT OPEN A Corr_data I 1 B Corr_data I 2 PRINT SHORT A Corr_data I 3 B Corr_data I 4 PRINT LOAD A Corr_data I 5 B Corr_data 1I 6 PRINT NEXT I END NOTE In this example channel 10 is selected OPERATION 3 11 cT O 3 w 3 12 OPERATION 3 RUN the program The correction data for channel 10 will be displayed on the computer as follows FREQI 1000 Hz 1 REF 1909 4 MEAS DATA OPEN A 0993735 SHORT A 12764 LOAD A 2611 29 FREQ2 2000 Hz REF 1389 23 MEAS DATA OPEN A 0393439 SHORT A 0750794 LOAD A 6663 75 FREQS 5000 Hz REF 3 1139 MEAS DATA l OPEN A 0993221 SHORT A 0244617 LOAD A 617 982 1 59117E 6 B 9 36
388. ssignments and a brief description of each are given in Table 2 1 CHO CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHS CH6 CH7 CH VALID EXT_TRIG INDEX EOM EXT DCV COMMON Figure 2 1 Control Assignments 2 2 INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION Table 2 1 Contact Assignments Channel Selection Signals Input D ag O ey O S Channel Valid Signal Input Signal This signal makes the channel selection signals valid or invalid CH_VALID Analog Measurement Complete Signal Output INDEX is asserted when a measurement is com pleted and the HP 4284A is ready for the next DUT to be connected to the UNKNOWN ter minals The measurement data is not valid until INDEX EOM is asserted EXT DCV External DC voltage 8 l 9 10 Channel Selection Signal Input 11 CH7 EXT TRIG External Trigger Signal Input is asserted when the measurement is completed and the measurement data and comparison Assertion timing for these signals is different for normal measurements and list 13 JEOM End of Measurement Signal Output This signal results are valid sweep measurements Refer to Figure 2 3 INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION 2 3 2 4 The scanner system will operate more efficiently when the input output control signals are used as follows 1 re Set the scanner channel CHANNEL O the first scanner channel Set the channel selection signals CHO to CH7 and
389. st Softkey controllable Provides a means to confirm proper operation Option 001 Power Amp DC Bias Increases test signal level and adds the variable dc bias voltage function Test Signal Level Mode Range Setting Accuracy Voltage Non constant 5 mV to 20 Vrms 10 1 mV Constant 10 mV to 10 Vrms 10 1 mV E Current Non constant 50 pA to 200 mArms Constant 100 pA to 100 mArms 10 10 pA 10 10 pA 1 Automatic Level Control Function is set to ON Output Impedance 100 Q 6 Test Signal Level Monitor Mode Range Accuracy Voltage gt 2 Vims 3 of reading 5 mV 5 mV to 2 Vims 3 of reading 0 5 mV 0 01 mV to 5 mVrms 11 of reading 0 1 mV Current gt 20 M rms 3 of reading 50 pA 50 pA to 20 mArms 3 of reading 5 pA 0 001 pA to 50 pArms 11 of reading 1 pA 1 Add the impedance measurement accuracy to the voltage level monitor accuracy when the DUT s impedance is lt 100 Q 2 Add the impedance measurement accuracy to the current level monitor accuracy when the DUT s impedance is gt 100 2 Accuracies apply when test cable length is 0 m or 1 m Additional error for 2 m or 4 m test cable length is given as L Inx 5 M Where fm is test frequency MHz L is test cable length m DC Bias Level The following DC bias level accuracy is specified for an
390. st Frequency and Correction Frequency This appendix provides information about the relationship between the test frequency and the correction data There are two types of correction data for the OPEN SHORT LOAD correction interpolation correction data and spot frequency FREQ1 FREQ2 and FREQ3 correction data These correction data are selected automatically depending on the correction mode and the test frequency The details for interpolation correction data are described in SECTION 4 OPEN correction SHORT correction and for spot frequency correction data in SECTION 4 LOAD correction The relationship between the test frequency and the correction data for the single multi correction modes are described on the following page Correction Data D 1 Single Channel Correction Mode When the correction mode is set to SINGLE the OPEN SHORT interpolation correction data or the FREQ1 FREQ2 FREQ3 correction data are selected automatically depending on the test frequency and the settings of the OPEN SHORT LOAD FREQ1 FREQ2 and FREQ3 fields Table D 1 shows the correction data selection rules for the SINGLE mode and corresponding test frequencies Table D 1 Correction Data Selecting Rule for SINGLE Mode Test FRQ1 2 3 OPEN SHORT LOAD Frequency setting ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Test Freq FRQ1 0N FRQ1 Not FRQ1 Not FREQ1 Not FRQ1 OPEN data performed SHORT performed LOA
391. st Limits Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Limits for 1 m Cable Length Operation Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Limits for 2 m and 4 m Cable Length Operation Manual Changes by Serial Number Manual Changes by Firmware s Version Correction Data Selecting Rule for SINGLE Mode Correction Data Selecting Rule for MULTI Mode Measurement Condition Changes 10 15 10 16 10 17 10 19 A 1 A 1 D 2 D 3 G 1 Installation and Set Up Guide Incoming Inspection Warning This chapter provides the information necessary for performing an incoming inspection and setting up the 4284A The main topics in this chapter are m ncoming Inspection m Power requirements m Line Voltage and Fuse Selection m Operation Environment a Electromagnetic Compatibility a Ventilation Requirements m Instruction for Cleaning a Rack Handle Installation To avoid hazardous electrical shock do not turn on the 4284A when there are signs of shipping damage to any portion of the outer enclosure for example covers panel or display Inspect the shipping container for damage If the shipping container or cushioning material is damaged it should be kept until the contents of the shipment have been checked for completeness and the 4284A has been checked mechanically and electrically The contents of the shipment should be as listed in Table 1 1 If the contents are incomplete if there is mechanical damage or defect or if
392. steps to enter a comment 1 Move the cursor to the comment line field 2 Enter the comment using the numeric entry keys then press ENTER Description The 4284A has four trigger modes INTernal EXTernal MANual and BUS When the trigger mode is set to INT trigger mode the 4284A continuously repeats measurements on any display page under DISPLAY FORMAT When the trigger mode is set to MAN trigger mode the 4284A performs a single measurement on any display page under DISPLAY FORMAT every time TRIGGER on the front panel is pressed When the trigger mode is set to EXT trigger mode the 4284A performs a single measurement on any display page under DISPLAY FORMAT every time a positive going TTL pulse is applied to the EXT TRIGGER connector on the rear panel External triggering can be also be achieved by momentarily switching the center conductor of the EXT TRIGGER connector to chassis ground center conductor circuit contains a pull up resistor Figure 4 3 shows the required TTL pulse Note Y Input Voltage 2 0V lt V lt 5 0V OV lt Vi lt 0 5V Input Current Max 0 1mA V IH 5 0V Max 0 4mA ViIL 0 4 V Pulse Width Tp gt 100us Figure 4 3 External Trigger Pulse The 4284A ignores triggers that are applied while a measurement is in progress Trigger the 4284A after the measurement is completed Select the EXT trigger mode when the 4284A is triggered via an optional interface When
393. suffix unit M meter can be used with this command OUTPUT 717 CORR LENG 1M CORRection LENGth Returned format is lt NR1i gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 CORR LENG 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END COrrection Subsystem METHod Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example The METHod command sets the correction mode The METHod query returns the current settings of the correction mode SINGle CORRection METHod MULTi Where SINGle Sets or returns the single channel correction mode MULTi Sets or returns the multi channel correction mode OUTPUT 717 CORR METH MULT CORRection METHod Returned format is SING lt NL END gt MULT 10 OUTPUT 717 CORR METH 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END OPEN Command Syntax Example The OPEN command executes 51 presetted OPEN correction data measurement points CORRection OPEN OUTPUT 717 CORR OPEN Command Reference 8 53 COrrection Subsystem OPEN STATe Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example The OPEN STATe command sets the OPEN correction function to ON or OFF The OPEN STATe query returns the current ON OFF condition of the OPEN correction ON OFF CORRection 0OPEN STATe 0 Where 1 decimal 49 When the function is ON O decimal 48 When the function is OFF OUTPUT 717 CORR OPEN STAT ON CORRection OPEN STATe Returned
394. system Following figure shows how to rack mount the 4284A Table 9 8 Rack Mount Kits Option Description Kit Part Number 907 Handle Kit Agilent Part Number 5061 9690 908 Rack Flange Kit Agilent Part Number 5061 9678 909 Rack Flange amp Handle Kit Agilent Part Number 5061 9684 7 Y AAO RA om O Figure 9 9 Rack Mount Kits Installation 1 Remove the adhesive backed trim strips from the left and right front sides of the 4284A 2 HANDLE INSTALLATION Attach the front handles 3 to the sides using the screws provided and attach the trim strip to the handle 3 RACK MOUNTING Attach the rack mount flange to the left and right front sides of the 4284A using the screws provided 4 HANDLE AND RACK MOUNTING Attach the front handle and the rack mount flange 6 together on the left and right front sides of the 4284A using the screws provided General Information 9 27 5 When rack mounting the 4284A 3 and 4 above remove all four feet lift bar on the inner side of the foot and slide the foot toward the bar Storage and Repacking Environment Original Packaging Other Packaging 9 28 General Information This paragraph describes the environment for storing or shipping the 4284A and how to repackage the 4284A for shipment when necessary The 4284A should be stored in a clean dry environment The following environmental limitations apply for both storage and
395. t 20 OUTPUT 717 0PC Wait for OPEN correction 30 ENTER 717 A measurement completed 40 END WAI The WAI command the wait to continue command makes the 4284A wait until all previously sent commands are completed The 4284A then continues executing the commands that follow the WAI command Command Syntax WAI Example OUTPUT 717 WAI 8 88 Command Reference RST Command Syntax Example The RST command reset command sets the 4284A to its initial settings The initial settings set by the RST command are given in Appendix C When the 4284A receives a RST command it aborts all pending operations and forgets about any previously received OPC commands and OPC queries RST OUTPUT 717 RST TST Query Syntax Query Response Example The TST query self test query causes the device to execute an internal self test and reports whether or not it detected any errors In the case of the 4284A the response to this query is always 0 no error TST Returned format is O lt NL END gt Where 0 0 NR1 format 10 OUTPUT 717 TST 20 ENTER 717 A 30 END Command Reference 8 89 TRG Command Syntax Example 8 90 Command Reference The TRG command trigger command performs the same function as the Group Execute Trigger command refer to Trigger System in Chapter 7 This command also moves the primary and secondary parameter measurement data into the 4284
396. t 7 29 Power Requirements 1 2 Print Out BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page 3 31 BIN No DISPLAY Page 3 26 CATALOG Page 5 4 CORRECTION Page 4 33 LIMIT TABLE SETUP Page 4 47 NNN LIST SWEEP DISPLAY Page 3 36 LIST SWEEP SETUP Page 4 55 MEAS DISPLAY Page 3 20 MEAS SETUP Page 4 16 SYSTEM CONFIG Page 5 10 Program Message Terminators 8 8 Purge CATALOG Page 5 4 Query ESR 8 84 IDN 8 87 LRN 8 91 0PT 8 92 STB 8 86 TST 8 89 Query Error B 1 Query Error QYE Bit 7 29 rack 1 6 Rear Panel 2 4 REF A Field See Deviation REF A Field REF B Field See Deviation REF B Field Reference value See Deviation Reference value REMOTE 7 5 Remote Control 7 1 Reset Command 8 89 Response Message Terminators 8 8 Rp See Parallel Series Circuit Mode RQS Request Service Bit 7 5 7 21 Rs See Parallel Series Circuit Mode RST Command 8 89 Safety Summary iv Symbols v Sample Programs 7 31 SCANNER I F 301 Field 5 9 Scanner I F EEPROM R W Test 5 15 Scanner I F I O Test 5 16 Scanner Interface Function Test 10 33 SCPI Basic Rules 8 3 SCPI Command See Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI SDC Selected Device Clear 7 4 SELF TEST Page 2 11 5 11 Self test Query 8 89 Sequential mode 4 37 Serial Number 9 1 Serial Polling 7 5 Series Circuit Mode See Parallel Series Circuit Mode Index 7 Service Request Enable Command 8 85 SERVICE REQUEST SRQ 7 5
397. t chassis and cabinet must be connected to a safety earth ground by the supplied power cable with earth blade Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gasses or fumes Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by qualified maintenance personnel Do not replace components with the power cable connected Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable removed To avoid injuries always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform unauthorized modifications to the instrument Return the instrument to a Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warning Safety Symbols Warnings such as the example below precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed Dangerous voltages capable of causing death are present in this instrument Use extreme caution when handling testing and adjusting this
398. t the flat cable connected to the handler interface board NOTE The handler interface board has the red and orange extrac tors See Figure 2 10 7 Reinstall the handler interface board a Eas BR Front ete a Rear Handler I F board Figure 2 10 Handler Interface Board Locations OPERATION 2 17 Q D fans 5 a N 8 Use the following flow chart to set the jumpers for the com parison output signals The pull up voltage for the output signals 1 1 Use the internal voltage 2 Use the external voltage 2 Pull Up Voltage Pull Up Resistors 1 Use 5V 2 Use 12V 1 Mount on the handler I F board 2 Mount on the handler 9 Install jumpers according to Table 2 6 See Figure 2 11 10 Mount the pull up resistors for the comparison output sig nals when pull up resistors are called for in Table 2 6 Table 2 6 Jumper Setting 1 Number RS a ae resistor voltage lo La Upper N Right N COM1 Required EXT DCV 1 2 18 OPERATION QO o 5 N oO NOTE Use the following equation to determine the value of the pull up resistors VpIv R kQ Where Vp Pull up voltage R Pull up resistor The typical pull up resistor values are Pull Up Voltage Pull Up Resistor HP Part Number PN 0757 0278 aa PN 0698 3154 PN 0757 0441 Figure 2 11 How to Set Up the Handler Interface Board
399. ta output formats for lt STATUS gt uses the 2 ASCII character fixed length format as follows SN S N 0 to 4 When the lt STATUS gt is 1 1 or 2 the measurement data is 9 9E37 When the lt STATUS gt is 0 3 or 4 the actual measurement data is output a lt BIN No gt Format The lt BIN No gt data shows the bin sorting results as follows Data Sorting Results 0 OUT_OF_BINS 1 BIN 1 2 BIN 3 BIN 4 BIN 5 BIN 6 BIN 7 BIN 8 BIN 9 BIN 10 AUX_BIN Oo CON DMD oO eA WW The lt BIN No gt data is output with the measurement data only when the comparator function is set to ON The data output formats for lt BIN No gt uses a 2 or 3 ASCII character data length format as follows SN or SNN S N 0 to 9 The ASCII data output format on the LIST SWEEP DISPLAY page is described in Figure 7 5 The data loop is repeated for the number of the sweep points SN NNNNNESNN lt DATA A gt 11007004 Binary Format SN NNNNNESNN lt DATA B gt Figure 7 5 ASCII Format 2 List Sweep The lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt lt STATUS gt formats are the same as the formats on the MEAS DISPLAY BIN No DISPLAY or BIN COUNT DISPLAY page So the only the lt IN OUT gt format will be described a lt IN OUT gt format The lt IN OUT gt data shows the result of the list sweep
400. ta transfer to the controller ASCH and BINARY The data transfer rates for these data formats are different ASCII Format The ASCII data format is the default output format When the FORMat DATA ASCII command is executed the 4284A transfers data in the ASCII format The ASCII data output format on the MEAS DISPLAY BIN No DISPLAY or BIN COUNT DISPLAY page is described in Figure 7 4 COMP OFF COMP ON SN NNNNNESNN SN NNNNNESNN G gt SN or SNN J wa lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt lt BIN No gt L1097003 Figure 7 4 ASCII Format 1 The lt DATA A gt lt DATA B gt lt STATUS gt and lt BIN No gt formats are as follows a lt DATA A gt and lt DATA B gt format The data output formats for lt DATA A gt primary parameter s measurement data and lt DATA B gt secondary parameter s measurement data uses the 12 ASCII character fixed length format as follows SN NNNNNESNN S N 0 to 9 E Exponent Sign a lt STATUS gt Format The lt STATUS gt data shows the measurement status when getting the measurement data as follows Remote Control 7 7 Note 7 8 Remote Control Y Status Description 1 No data in the data buffer memory 0 Normal measurement data 1 Analog bridge is unbalanced 2 A D converter is not working 3 Signal source overloaded 4 ALC unable to regulate The da
401. tability Temperature Coefficient Settling Time Frequency fm Test Signal Level Measurement Range Input Protection Measurement Time Display Time GPIB Data Output Time DC Bias 1 5 V 2 V Option 001 Power Amp DC Bias DC Bias Voltage DC Bias Current Relative Measurement Accuracy with Bias Current Isolation Calculation Example Measurement Conditions DC Bias Settling Time Rack Handle Installation Storage and Repacking Environment Original Packaging 9 18 9 18 9 18 9 18 9 18 9 18 9 18 9 18 9 19 9 19 9 20 9 20 9 20 9 20 9 20 9 20 9 20 9 20 9 21 9 21 9 21 9 21 9 21 9 21 9 21 9 21 9 21 9 21 9 21 9 22 9 22 9 22 9 22 9 22 9 22 9 23 9 23 9 23 9 24 9 24 9 24 9 24 9 24 9 25 9 25 9 26 9 27 9 28 9 28 9 28 10 Other Packaging Performance Tests Introduction Test Equipment Performance Test Record Calibration Cycle System Reset Procedure Test Frequency Accuracy Test Equipment Procedure Test Signal Level Level Monitor Accuracy Test Equipment Lo ee a Procedure DC Bias Level Accuracy Test Equipment Procedure Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Equipment Procedure Store and Load Function Test Equipment Procedure GPIB Interface Test Equipment Procedure Bias Current Interface Function Test Option 002 only Equipment Loe ee Procedure Handler Interface Function Test Option 201 only E
402. ted Ja Part Number 04284 90040 Operation Manual This supplement contains information for correcting manual errors and for adapting the manual to newer instruments that contains improvements or modifications not documented in the existing manual To use this supplement 1 Make all ERRATA corrections 2 Make all appropriate serial number related changes listed below SERIAL PREFIX OR NUMBER MAKE MANUAL SERIAL PREFIX OR NUMBER MAKE MANUAL CHANGES CHANGES CHANGES 1 CHANGE 1 contains the information needed to adapt the 4284A s manual Changed the company name from YOKOGAWA HEWLETT PACKARD LTD or its abbreviation YHP to Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd NOTE Manual change supplement are revised as often as necessary to keep manuals as current and accurate as possible Agilent Technologies recommends that you periodically request the latest edition of this supplement Free copies are available from all Agilent Technologies offices When requesting copies quote the manual identification information from your supplement or the model number and print date from the title page of the manual Date Div January 2000 33 mabe Page 1 of 3 ea g Agilent Technologies PRINTED IN JAPAN sre The pink sheet titled CAUTION ON OPERATION Change the page title as follows AN CAUTION ON OPERATION 3 HANDLER INTERFACE BOARD OPTION 201 Add the following information Fuse Non Time Delay 0 5A 125V If you need this fuse contact
403. tem Trigger System and Trigger Commands TRIGger IM Mediate Command Sample Program TRG or GET Command Sample Program Triggering System and Data Transfer Buffered Data Transfer Sample Program and Description Loe ee ASCII Format Buffer Memory BINARY Format Buffer Memory Status Byte Register Operation Status Register Structure Standard Event Status Register MEAS SETUP Page CORRECTION page LIMIT TABLE SETUP page LIST SWEEP SETUP Sample Program Comparator Using ASCII Format Sample Program Buffer Memory Using ASCII Format Sample Program List Sweep Using ASCH Format Sample Program Comparator Using BINARY Format Sample Program Buffer Memory Using BINARY Format a Sample Program List Sweep Using BINARY Format Loe ee Command Tree Example Command Header and Parameters DISPlay Subsystem Command Tree OUTPut Subsystem Command Tree BIAS Subsystem Command Tree FUNCtion Subsystem Command Tree LIST Subsystem Command Tree TRIGger Subsystem Command Tree INITiate Subsystem Command Tree FETCh Subsystem Command Tree MEMory Subsystem Command Tree CORRection Subsystem Command Tree COMParator Subsystem Command Tree 6 30 6 31 6 31 7 2 7 3 7 6 1 7 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 14 7 15 7 16 7 18 7 18 7 20 7 23 7 28 7 32 7 33 7 34 7 35 7 36 7 37 7 37 7 38 7 39 7 39 8 2 8 5 8 10 8 17 8 19 8 23 8 31 8 40 8 4
404. tep is complete and the HP 4284A is ready for the next DUT to be connected to the UNKNOWN ter minals The measurement data however is not valid until the BUSY line is asserted See Figure 2 5 In the STEP sweep mode EOC is asserted when each analog measurement is complete and the HP 4284A is ready for the next sweep step The measurement data however is not valid until the BUSY line is asserted See Figure 2 5 BIN10 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 10 BUSY BUSY conversion calculation output 16 In the SEQ sweep mode This signal is asserted when the measurement data and comparison results are valid after the last step measure ment is completed See Figure 2 5 In the STEP sweep mode This signal is asserted when each step measurement including comparison time is completed and the mea surement data is valid The comparison results are valid after BUSY is asserted after the last sweep point See Figure 2 5 Same assignments as for the comparator function refer to Table 2 1 2 6 OPERATION Measurement value Higher limit O a3 N fa Pass area Lower limit Sweep point Figure 2 4 Signal Area Example For The List Sweep Comparator Function OPERATION 2 7 SEQ Sweep Mode W8 12 or W9 10 13 START IN W8 13 or W9 10 12 Previous Sweep s Data Valid Data Valid a sweep oo
405. the channel valid signal CH VALID to compensate CHAN NEL O Trigger the HP 4284A with a trigger pulse input through the scanner input output connector on the rear panel The HP 4284A will acknowledge the channel number as CHANNEL O and then measure the device connected to scanner channel O using the correction data for channel 0 Disassert CH_ VALID after disasserting INDEX Set the scanner channel channel selection signals and the channel valid signal to the next channel to be mea sured when INDEX is asserted After EOM is asserted the HP 4284A is ready to make the next measurement Repeat steps 4 through 6 The timing chart for the preceding procedure is shown in Figure 2 2 INTERFACE SIGNAL DEFINITION o 3 CO SES EXT_TRIG INDEX EOM CH No CH_ VALID a measurement a measurement Measurement Timing Data Switching Time 3 Deay Comparison 2 Measurement Time Time ne occ aos ts oe Trigger Pulse Width Measurement Start ae Time Delay Time 200 us 200 us CH_VALID Wait Time After Measurement Start Wait Time After EOM Output O us et CH_ VALID Pulse Width 50us 50us Refer to Table 1 2 Refer to the HP 4284A Operation Manual Typical comparison time is approximately 1 ms Typical display time for each display format is as follows MEAS DISPLAY page approx 8 ms BIN No DISPLAY page apporx 5
406. the SEQ sweep mode EOC is asserted when last step analog measurement of the sweep measurement is completed and BUSY is asser ee ted when the all of comparison results are valid after a sweep measurement e In the STEP sweep mode EOC is asserted when each step analog measurement of the sweep measurement is completed and BUSY is asser ted when each step measurement including comparing time is Completed The contact assignments and a brief description of signals used for the list sweep function are given in Table 2 2 and Figure 2 2 pin assignments for the list sweep comparator function is same to for the comparator function The timing diagram is shown in Figure 2 5 NOTE The assertion level of the following signals is selected by the jumper settings W3 through W13 Refer to SECTION 3 for jumper setting details OPERATION 2 5 Table 2 2 List Sweep Comparator Function Pin Assignments is asserted when one or more fail judgments of Step 1 to Step 10 occur BIN1 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 1 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 2 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 3 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 4 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 5 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 6 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 7 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 8 Failed out of limit at sweep Point 9 EOC In the SEQ sweep mode EOC is asserted when a analog measurement of last sweep s
407. the cursor will automatically move to the LOW field LIMIT DATA B This softkey is used to set the limit parameter to the secondary parameter of the measurement function When this softkey is pressed the cursor will move automatically to the LOW field m OFF This softkey is used to set the list sweep measurement s limit function to OFF for the sweep point When this softkey is pressed the cursor will move automatically to the next sweep point field 5 Press the softkey to set the limit parameter 6 The cursor will move automatically to the LOW field If you pressed OFF in the previous step the cursor will move automatically to the next sweep point field Enter the low limit value 7 The cursor will move automatically to the HIGH field Enter the high limit value using the numeric entry keys After entering the MEAS SETUP Menu 4 53 System Menu 4 54 MEAS SETUP Menu high limit value the cursor will move automatically to the next sweep point field Repeat steps 3 through 7 The system menu on this page allows you to perform the following control functions a Load Store a Clear Table a Printer These functions except for the clear table function are the same as the functions in the system menu on the MEAS DISPLAY page A description of each function is given in System Menu in Chapter 3 on page 3 19 So in the case of the clear table function the description and procedure are given and in the case
408. the handler the combination of the pull up resistor and the pull up supply voltage used must result in a current through the opto isolator of less than 80 mA The opto isolator common supply path can be connected to or isolated from the HP 4284A s system ground with jumper W2 Installing jumper W2 connects the opto isolator common to the HP 4284A s system ground Table 2 3 Electrical DC Characteristics of Opto isolated Outputs Output Signals Voltage Output Level Coe a Binning Signals BINO BIN10 Contro Signais EOC BUSY a Depends on the value of pull up voltage used The pull up voltage on the handler interface board is 5 V and up to 24 V can be used from an external source from the handier OPERATION 2 9 R2 RNI BBO BBI BB2 B83 BBS BBG N N 8 N BB8 BBS BBIO 2 10 OPERATION 2 2 2 2 2 IH rs 4 ojoj Q t j z njoj a zizi z N wlej e BIN i 4 INO 2 i B80 EO 14 BINI i 40 BBI Cee RT N BIN2 4 wD q BIN3 m eos O BBS N BIN4 g po A 8B2 RN BB4 2 a L z b b 5 BINS NG 7 BBS BING N 8B6 BINT j BB7 BINS D z O gt 8B8 BIN9 i RNIO 8B9 7 BINIO eS Figure 2 6 Simplified Binning Output Schematic HANDLER INTERFACE CONNECTOR JIA JIA 3 JIA 4 JIA 2 JIA S JIA JA 8
409. the list sweep measurement Front Panel Operation for Setting the List Sweep Parameter Perform the following steps to set the list sweep parameter 1 Move the cursor to the FREQ Hz LEVEL V LEVEL A BIAS V or BIAS A field The following softkeys will be displayed m FREQ Hz EVEL V LEVEL A m BIAS V MEAS SETUP Menu 4 51 Sweep Points and Limit Mode Note 4g Note a Note 4 52 MEAS SETUP Menu BIAS A 2 Select and press a softkey to set the list sweep measurement sweep parameter Description The list sweep function permits entry of up to 10 points and measurement limits Figure 4 24 shows the available fields for setting the sweep points the limit parameter and the high low limit values lt LIST SWEEP SETUP gt SYS MENU MODE SEQ FREQ HZ LMT 4 2 43 44 Li004029 Figure 4 24 List Sweep Settings When only the low limits of the sweep points are set the devices whose selected parameter s data are equal or are above the low limits are sorted as IN When only the high limits of the sweep points are set the devices whose selected parameter s data are equal or are below the high limits are sorted as IN The comparison results are always IN when the paramter selection for the limit function is perform
410. the memory card is displayed START ADRS HEX Start address as a hexadecimal expression END ADRS HEX End address as a hexadecimal expression TEST ADRS HEX Current testing address as a hexadecimal expression 3 Insert a memory card into the MEMORY card slot on the front panel Note a When this test is performed data stored on the memory card is 3 retained Caution While this test is in progress DO NOT remove the memory card and DO NOT turn the 4284A OFF If you do the data stored on the memory card may be lost 4 Press TEST START to start the test Note To abort the test press TEST END Y If the test failed the test is aborted and TEST ADRS HEX on the display shows the address at which the test failed Retry the test from step 1 If the test passed Test completed will be displayed on the system message line 5 Press TEST END to exit from the MEMORY CARD R W TEST display Catalog System Configuration 5 13 LED Display Test Description This test checks the five LEDs on the front panel When this test is started five LED indicators RMT LTN TLK SRQ and DC BIAS will be toggled ON and OFF once per second How to Perform the LED Display Test Use the following steps to perform the LED display test 1 Move the cursor to the TEST MENU field on the SELF TEST page 2 Press 2 and to select test number 2 The LED DISPLAY TEST screen will be displayed 3 Pr
411. the oscillator s output voltage level The VOLTage query returns the current oscillator voltage level Command Syntax lt value gt VOLTage LEVel MIN MAX Where lt value gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format MIN Sets or returns to the minimum oscillator voltage level 5mV MAX Sets or returns to the maximum oscillator voltage level When Hi PW mode is OFF 2V When Hi PW mode is ON 20V Note a A suffix multiplier and a suffix unit V volt can be used with this 3 command If this query is received when the oscillator level set to a current level error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur Example OUTPUT 717 VOLT 100 MV Set to 100 mV OUTPUT 717 VOLT MIN Set to 5 mV OUTPUT 717 VOLT MAX Set to 2 V the 4284A standard configuration Query Syntax VOLTage LEVel hel MAX Query Response Returned format is lt NR3 gt lt NL7 END gt Example 10 OUTPUT 717 VOLT MIN 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END 8 14 Command Reference CURRent Subsystem CURRent Subsystem Command Syntax Note i Y Example Query Syntax Query Response Example The CURRent command sets the oscillator s output current level The CURRent query returns the current oscillator current level lt value gt CURRent LEVel lt MIN MAX Where lt value gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format MIN Sets or returns the minimum oscillator current level 504A MAX Sets or returns the maximum oscilla
412. the specified frequency point correction FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 to ON or OFF The SPOT lt n gt STATe query responds the current ON OFF setting of the specified frequency point correction ON OFF CORRection SPOT lt n gt STATe Where 1 decimal 49 When the function is ON O decimal 48 When the function is OFF lt n gt is 1 State setting for FREQI point 2 State setting for FREQ2 point 3 State setting for FREQ3 point OUTPUT 717 CORR SPOT1 STAT ON CORRection SPOT lt n gt STATe Returned format is lt NR1 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 CORR SPOT1 STAT 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END SPOT lt n gt FREQuency Command Syntax Example Note Query Syntax Query Response Example Note Y Y COrrection Subsystem The SPOT lt n gt FREQuency command sets the frequency points FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 for the specified frequency point correction The SPOT lt n gt FREQuency query returns the current settings of the frequency points FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQ3 CORRection SPOT lt n gt FREQuency lt value gt Where lt value gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format lt n gt is 1 Frequency setting for FREQI point 2 Frequency setting for FREQ2 point 3 Frequency setting for FREQ3 point OUTPUT 717 CORR SPOT1 FREQ 2KHZ Set 2 kHz to FREQ1 A suffix multiplier and a suffix unit HZ hertz can be used with this command Either MAHZ and MHZ can be used as the suffix multiplier
413. tkey label area e ON e OFF 7 Press the ON softkey The handler interface can be used to output input the signals 8 Press the DISPLAY FORMAT MENU key To perform a measurement select the MEAS DISP BIN No or BIN COUNT softkey NOTE The comparator function ON OFF can be set on the BIN No DISPLAY page OPERATION 2 23 Setting procedure For List Sweep Comparator Function The following operation procedures are for using the handler interface with the list sweep comparator function 1 Press the MEAS SETUP MENU key and the LIST SETUP softkey The LIST SWEEP SETUP page will be displayed 2 Setup a list table including sweep steps and high low limits for the list sweep measurement refer to the HP 4284A Oper ation Manual for details 3 Press the CATALOG SYSTEM MENU key and the SYSTEM CONFIG softkey The SYSTEM CONFIG page will be displayed 4 Use the CURSOR arrow keys to move the cursor to the HANDLER I F 201 field The following softkeys will be displayed in the softkey label area e SON e OFF 5 Press the ON softkey Then the handler interface can be used to output input the signals 6 Press the DISPLAY FORMAT MENU key To perform list sweep measurements select the LIST SWEEP softkey 2 24 OPERATION 4284A PRECISION LCR METER OPERATION NOTE Option 202 Handler Interface ibe Agilent Technologies Printed in JA
414. tor current level When Hi PW mode is OFF 20mA When Hi PW mode is ON 200mA In case of ALC ON this command sets to ALC OFF and sets the maximum oscillator current level A suffix multiplier and a suffix unit A ampere can be used with this command If this query is received when the oscillator level set to a current level error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur OUTPUT 717 CURR 10MA Set to 10 mA OUTPUT 717 CURR MAX Set to 20 mA the 4284A standard configuration CURRent LEVel he MAX Returned format is lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 CURR MIN 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 15 AMPLitude Subsystem Command Syntax Example Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 16 Command Reference The AMPLitude command sets the Automatic Level Control ALC to ON or OFF The AMPLitude query returns the current ALC ON OFF state ON OFF AMPLitude ALC Where 1 decimal 49 When the function is ON O decimal 48 When the function is OFF OUTPUT 717 AMPL ALC ON AMPLitude ALC Returned format is lt NR1 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 AMPL ALC 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut Subsystem The OUTPut subsystem command sets the DC bias monitor function Figure 8 4 shows the command tree of the OUTPut subsystem group OUTPut m gt High POWer ON O High POWe
415. tructure of the operation status register group is shown in Figure 7 18 The operation status register group consists of the standard operation status condition register the standard operation status event register and the standard operation status event enable register Operation Status Measuring Correction Data Bit gt Measuring Bit w Sweeping Bit Condition Register Transition Filter XL Operation Status Event Register Logical OR Operation Status Event Enable Register Summary Message Operation Status Event Register Summary Bit Bit 7 of Status Byte Register L1007015 Figure 7 18 Operation Status Register Structure Remote Control 7 23 7 24 Remote Control Standard Operation Status Condition Register The standard operation status condition register consists of 16 bits and reflects these states in its condition bits So each time the 4284A s condition is changed its condition bit is changed from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 Each bit of the standard operation status condition register is shown below Table 7 5 Standard Operation Status Condition Register Assignments Bit No Bit Weight Description 15 5 always 0 zero 4 16 Measuring Bit 0 Measurement not in progress 1 Measurement in progress 3 8 Sweeping Bit 0
416. ttings on the LIST SWEEP SETUP page the LIST SWEEP DISPLAY page in DISPLAY FORMAT must be used CATALOG under CATALOG SYSTEM This display page provides the catalog of the stored contents in internal memory or a from the memory card SYSTEM CONFIG under CATALOG SYSTEM This display page provides the operation of either the GPIB interface or the 4284A s options and will also tell you the option installation information SELF TEST under cATALOG SYSTEM This display page provides the 4284A s self test utilities and the the Performance Test given in Chapter 10 Overview 2 11 MENU DISPLAY EAS FORMAT SETUP DISPLAY FORMAT MENU CATALOG SYSTEM MEAS DISPLAY page lt MEAS DISPLAY gt SYS MENU FUNC Cp D RANGE AUTO FREQ 1 00000kHz BIAS 0 000 V LEVEL 1 500 V INTEG MED Cp 484 101 pF D 017368 Vm 1 431 V Im 4 280mA CORR OPEN SHORT LOAD CBL Om BIN No DISPLAY page lt BIN No DISPLAY gt SYS MENU FUNC Cp D RANGE AUTO FREQ 41 00000kHz BIAS 1 5000 V LEVEL 1 00 V INTEG MED COMP ON BIN 1 Cp 123 456 pF D 0 412345 CORR OPEN SHORT LOAD CBL Om BIN COUNT DISPLAY page lt BIN COUNT DISPLAY gt SYS MENU FUNC Cp D NOM 100 000 pF BIN o HIGH COUNT 1 010 0 010 020 0 020 030 0 030 040 0 040 050 0 050 060 0 060 070 0 070
417. uffer when a printer was not connected to the 4284A with an GPIB cable or the printer was turned OFF Connect a printer to the 4284A with an GPIB cable or turn the printer ON e Printing speed of printer cannot keep up with the 4284A s data output transfer rate Set the 4284A s DELAY time appropriately or replace the printer with a higher speed printer that can match the 4284A s data transfer rate 101 TALK ONLY disabled e Data sent to the output buffer when the 4284A is addressable Set the 4284A to the talk only mode and set the printer to the listen only mode Error and Warning Messages B 7 Error Displayed Message No e Description Solution 310 System error e Severe error Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office 311 Memory error e Severe error Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office Execution Error 211 Trigger ignored e The 4284A Triggered before the previous trigger was executed Widen the time interval between triggers 222 Data out of range Data is out of the setting range Enter a value within the available setting range 230 Data corrupt or stale FETCh query received after the ABORt or the RST command was received or after the power on reset was performed Send the FETCh query during idle state and when the data is valid after a measureme
418. up sets the List Sweep measurement function including the sweep point settings the sweep mode and limit values for the limit function Figure 8 7 shows the command tree of the LIST subsystem command group REQuency lt sweep point gt lt sweep point gt VOLTage lt sweep point lt sweep point gt CURRent lt sweep point gt lt sweep point gt BIAS VOLTage lt sweep point gt lt sweep point gt i CURRent lt sweep point gt lt sweep point gt SEQuence STEPped D lt n gt Al lt low limit n gt lt high limit n gt B O Figure 8 7 LIST Subsystem Command Tree Command Reference 8 31 LIST Subsystem FREQuency Command Syntax Example Note i Y Query Syntax Query Response Example Note 8 32 Command Reference The FREQuency command clears the previous List Sweep point table and sets the frequency sweep points The FREQuency query returns the current settings of the frequency sweep points LIST FREQuency lt value gt lt value gt Repeat Max 10 sweep points Where lt value gt is the NR1 NR2 or NR3 format OUTPUT 717 LIST FREQ 1E3 2E3 3E3 4E3 Set 1kHz to point 1 4kHZ to point 4 A suffix multiplier and a suffix unit HZ hertz can be used with this command Either MAHZ and MHZ can be used as the suffix multiplier for MHz 1E6 Hz LIST FREQuency Returned format is
419. urement value and a previously stored reference value This function is useful when the change of a component s value versus changes in temperature frequency bias etc are being observed Deviation measurements can be made for either or both primary parameter and or secondary parameter measurements There are two types of deviation measurements m AABS Delta ABSolute deviation measurement The difference between the measured value of the DUT and a previously stored reference value are displayed The formula used to calculate the deviation is as follows AABS X Y Where X The measured value of the DUT Y The stored reference value A Delta percent deviation measurement The difference between the measured value of the DUT and a previously stored reference value are displayed as a percentage of the reference value The formula used to calculate the percent deviation is as follows A X Y Y x 100 Where X The measured value of the DUT Y The stored reference value Front Panel Operation for the Deviation Measurement Function Perform the following steps to execute the deviation measurement function 1 Move the cursor to the REF A field to enter the reference value for the primary parameter The following softkey will be displayed m MEA SURE When the device which has a reference value is connected pressing this MEA SURE the 4284A measures the device and the measurement results are entered as
420. vel is set to a current level error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur OUTPUT 717 BIAS CURR 1OMA MIN BIAS CURRent LEVel MAX Returned format is lt NR3 gt lt NL END gt 10 OUTPUT 717 BIAS CURR 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END FUNCtion Subsystem FUNCt ion jy FUNCtion Subsystem The FUNCtion subsystem command group sets the measurement function the measurement range monitor ON OFF control and the deviation measurement control Figure 8 6 shows the command tree of the FUNCtion subsystem command group IMPedance Source MONitor L20090 Figure 8 6 FUNCtion Subsystem Command Tree A p O ere B HDOUDOUVNHDOUDADND YD DO D R U ioe U ioe lt value gt AUTO O Solute Recent m lt value gt FILL Command Reference 8 23 FUNCtion Subsystem IMPedance TYPE The IMPedance command sets the measurement function The IMPedance query returns the current measurement function Command Syntax FUNCtion IMPedance TYPE lt function gt Where lt function gt is CPD Sets function to Cp D LPRP Sets function to Ly Rp CPQ Sets function to Cp Q LSD Sets function to L D CPG Sets function to C G LSQ Sets function to L Q CPRP Sets function to Cp Rp LSRS Sets function to Ls Rs CSD Sets function to C D
421. vices are being sorted into bins using the comparator function the number of devices sorted into each bin is counted The maximum count is 999999 the overflow message will be displayed when this value is exceeded The bin counter will still be operating so you can only get the count data via GPIB Perform the following steps to set the counter function to ON or OFF from the BIN COUNT DISPLAY page a Move the cursor to SYS MENU field on the BIN COUNT DISPLAY page Press COUNT ON to set the counter function to ON An arrow will be displayed at the left of COUNT Press COUNT OFF when you want to set the counter function to OFF The arrow will disappear Press RESET COUNT when all counts are reset to zero The message RESET COUNT do you proceed will be displayed on the system message line and YES and NO will be displayed Press YES Load Store Function Perform the following steps to store the current control settings to the internal non volatile memory or the external memory card and to load the control settings from the internal non volatile memory or the external memory card 1 Set all controls 2 Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field on the BIN COUNT DISPLAY page 3 Insert a memory card into the MEMORY card slot if you are going to store or load the settings to or from a memory card 4 Press more 1 3 5 Press STORE when you want to use the STORE function The message Enter record number to STORE
422. will be displayed on the system message line Press LOAD when you want to use the LOAD function Then the Enter record number to LOAD will be displayed on the system message line 6 Use the numeric entry keys and ENTER to enter the record number at which the current control settings will be STORED to or LOADED from Printer Function Use the PRINT DISP or PRINT DATA mode and perform the following steps to print out the display page or the measurement data 1 Connect the 4284A to the printer using an GPIB cable 2 Set the printer to the listen only mode 3 Set the talk only mode to ON on the SYSTEM CONFIG page 4 Press DISPLAY FORMAT and press BIN COUNT to display the BIN COUNT DISPLAY page Move the cursor to the SYS MENU field Or 6 Press more 1 3 and then press more 2 3 7 Press PRINT DISP when you want to print out the displayed page Figure 3 10 shows a sample print out of the display page Press PRINT DATA when you want to print out the measurement results The marker will appear beside PRINT DATA The measurement results are printed out on subsequent measurements lt BIN COUNT DISPLAY gt SYS MENU FUNC Cp D NOM 100 000pF BIN LOW HIGHL gt COUNT 1 001 001 003 005 010 030 050 100 500 000 000300 OUT 38 ooo oo 0 000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 000000 CNT AUX teeter eet fae N Figure 3 14 BIN COUNT DISPLAY Page Example DI
423. wing softkeys will be displayed in the softkey label area a ON OFF 2 Use the softkeys to set the Talk Only mode to ON Talk only or to OFF addressable Handler Interface Setting Description When the 4284A is equipped with an Option 201 or 202 Handler Interface the 36 pin Amphenol connector on the rear panel is used to interface between the 4284A and the handler to pass control input output signals and the comparator function bin judgment results Refer to the 4284A Option 201 or 202 Operation Note 5 8 Catalog System Configuration Scanner Interface Setting Note Y The status of the handler interface installed not installed is monitored on this SYSTEM CONFIG page HANDLER I F 201 or 202 How to Set the Handler Interface to ON or OFF When the handler interface is set to ON the handler interface signals through the interface connector are enabled Perform the following steps to set the handler interface signal input output to ON or OFF 1 Move the cursor to the HANDLER I F 201 field or the HANDLER I F 202 field on the SYSTEM CONFIG page The following softkeys will be displayed in the softkey label area a ON m OFF 2 Use the softkeys to set the handler interface function to ON or OFF Description When the 4284A is equipped with the Option 301 Scanner Interface the multi channel correction function can be used The 14 pin Amphenol connector on the rear panel is used to interface betwe
424. working standard calibrated device as a reference A maximum of 10 frequencies or test signal levels can be programmed Single or sequential test can be performed When Option 001 is installed DC bias voltages can also be programmed Ten bin sorting for the primary measurement parameter and IN OUT decision output for the secondary measurement parameter Sorting Modes Sequential mode Sorting into unnested bins with absolute upper and lower limits Tolerance Mode Sorting into nested bins with absolute or percent limits Bin Count 0 to 999999 List Sweep Comparator HIGH IN LOW decision output for each point in the list sweep table 0V 1 5 V and 2 V selectable Setting Accuracy 5 1 5 V 2 V General Information 9 17 Other Functions Options 9 18 General Information Store Load Ten instrument control settings including comparator limits and list sweep programs can be stored and loaded from and into the internal non volatile memory Ten additional settings can also be stored and loaded from each removable Memory Card GPIB All control settings measured values comparator limits list sweep program ASCII and 64 bit binary data format GPIB buffer memory can store measured values for a maximum of 128 measurements and output packed data over the GPIB bus Complies with IFEE 488 1 and 488 2 The programming language is SCPI Interface Functions SH1 AH1 T5 L4 5R1 RL1 DC1 DT1 C0 E1 Self Te
425. xample if the reference values are defined as the Cp D function entered with capac itance value and D value the Z parameter can be mea sured with performing the correction The following is the setting procedure 1 Press the MEAS SETUP MENU key and the CORRECTION softkey The CORRECTION page will be displayed 2 Move the cursor to the FUNC field 3 Use the softkeys to select the function to be used for enter ing the reference values 4 Move the cursor to the FREQ1 field 5 If the FREQ1 is set to OFF press the ON softkey to use the FREQ1 correction data 6 Enter the frequency value for the FREQ1 correction 7 Move the cursor to the REF A field under the FREQ1 field 8 Enter the reference value of the primary parameter at FREQ1 9 Move the cursor to B field on right side of REF A field 10 Enter reference value of the secondary parameter at the FREQ1 11 If necessary move the cursor to the FREQ2 field and repeat steps 4 to 10 at the second correction frequency OPERATION 3 5 12 If necessary move the cursor to the FREQ3 field and repeat steps 4 to 10 at the third correction frequency NOTE If measurement frequency is not equal to the correction frequency correction including OPEN SHORT and LOAD correction will not be performed So in this case the HP 4284A displays the raw measurement value including additional error due to the test fixture s residuals CORRECTION DA
426. y IZ Y L C R X G and B Accuracy D accuracy Q Accuracy 0 Accuracy G Accuracy Rp Accuracy R Accuracy Relative Measurement Accuracy IZ Y L C R X G and B Accuracy D accuracy Q Accuracy 0 Accuracy G Accuracy Rp Accuracy R Accuracy Example of C D Accuracy Calculation Measurement Conditions Specification Charts and Tables 4284A Calibration Accuracy Correction Functions Zero Open Zero Short Load List Sweep a Comparator Function Sorting Modes Bin Count List Sweep Comparator DC Bias Setting Accuracy Other Functions 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 4 9 4 9 4 9 5 9 5 9 5 9 5 9 5 9 6 9 6 9 6 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 9 11 9 11 9 12 9 16 9 17 9 17 9 17 9 17 9 17 9 17 9 17 9 17 9 17 9 17 9 17 9 18 Contents 11 Contents 12 Store Load GPIB Interface Functions Self Test Options Option 001 Power Amp DC Bias Test Signal Level Output Impedance Test Signal Level Monitor DC Bias Level Bias Current Isolation Function DC Bias Monitor Terminal Other Options Furnished Accessories Power Requirements Line Voltage Line Frequency Power Consumption Operating Environment Temperature Humidity Altitude Dimensions Weight Display Capable of Displaying Number of Display Digits Supplemental Performance Characteristics S
427. y parameter is within limits but whose secondary parameter is equal to or below the lower limit are sorted into the AUX BIN Also when only the higher limit of the secondary parameter is set and the AUX BIN are set to ON the devices whose primary paramter is within limits but whose secondary parameter is equal or above the higher limit are sorted into the AUX BIN See below Secondary Secondary Parameter 4 Parameter 4 AUX BINS BIN Higher our Sorting OUT Limit OUT OUT OF OF OF BIN OF Lower BINS BINS BINS Sorting BINS Limit AUX BINS Lower Higher Primary Lower Higher Primary 11004021 Limit Limit Parameter Limit Limit Parameter The AUX field allows you to set the AUX BIN to ON or OFF Front Panel Operation for Setting the AUX BIN to ON or OFF Perform the following steps to set the AUX BIN to ON or OFF 1 Move the cursor to the AUX field The following softkeys will be displayed Low High Limits Note i Y m ON m OFF 2 Select and press a softkey to set AUX BIN to ON or OFF Description The 4284A s built in comparator can sort devices into a maximum of ten bins BIN 1 to BIN 9 and OUT OF BINS using a maximum of nine pairs of primary parameter limits and one pair of secondary parameter limits These primary parameter low high limits can be set in the BIN 1 to BIN 9 LOW HIGH fields and the secondary parameter low high limits can be set in the 2nd LOW HIGH fields Do N
428. your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Dangerous voltage may be present in the 4284A even through the power switch is off Be sure to wait 1 minutes for the internal capacitors to discharge Warning MODEL 4284A PRECISION LCR METER OPTION 201 HANDLER INTERFACE OPERATION NOTE Page 2 16 Procedure 1 and Warning Change the procedure 1 and warning as follows 1 Disconnect the power cable from the 4284A and allow 1 minute for the internal capacitors to discharge A Dangerous energy voltage exists when the 4284A is in operation and for a 7 time after it is powered down Allow 1 minute for the internal capacitors to discharge Warning Page 2 17 Add the following CAUTION after the procedure 7 daien The interface board contains electronic components that can be damaged 1 by static electricity through electrostatic discharge ESD To prevent ESD damage maintain frequent contact with any bare sheet metal surface on the chassis A grounding wrist strap or similar device is useful for this purpose Handle the board carefully at all times Avoid touching electronic components or circuit paths MODEL 4284A PRECISION LCR METER OPTION 202 HANDLER INTERFACE OPERATION NOTE Page 3 4 Procedure 1 and Warning Change the procedure 1 and warning as follows 1 Disconnect the 4284A s power cord and allow 1 minute for the internal supply filter capacitors to discharge Dangerous energy voltage exists when the 4284A is
429. ys When pressing one of the numeric entry keys the softkey labels are changed to MEAS SETUP Menu 4 25 4 26 MEAS SETUP Menu 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 the available units Hz kHz and MHz so you can use these softkeys to enter the unit and terminate the entry without hitting ENTER When ENTER is used the numeric data is entered with Hz Connect the test fixture to the UNKNOWN Terminals OPEN correction Leave the connection contacts open Press MEAS OPEN The 4284A performs an OPEN correction measurement at the frequency points you specified After which the OPEN correction measurement data are displayed on the system message line Move the cursor to the OPEN field Press ON to perform the OPEN correction calculations for subsequent measurements at the specified frequency points SHORT correction Move the cursor to the FREQ FREQ2 or FREQS field at which you specified the frequency Short the connection contacts ogether t Press MEAS SHORT The 4284A will perform a SHORT correction measurement and display the SHORT correction data on the system message line Move the cursor to the SHORT field Press ON to perform the SHORT correction calculations for subsequent measurements at the specified frequency points LOAD correction Prepare the standard for measurement Move the cursor to the FUNC field Set the measur
430. ystem command group sets the Operation Status Registers which report events which are part of the 4284A s normal operation including measuring and sweeping Figure 8 15 shows the command tree of the STATus subsystem command group STATus L2oo9020 8 78 Command Reference FRation VENT Dition ENABle Figure 8 15 STATus Subsystem Command Tree STATus Subsystem OPERa tion EVENt Query Syntax Query Response Example The OPERation EVENt query returns the contents of the standard operation status event register Reading the event register using this query has the effect of clearing its contents but has no effect on the operation status condition register STATus OPERation EVENt Returned Format is lt value gt lt NL END gt Where lt value gt NRI format decimal expression of the contents of the operation status event register The definition of each bit of the operation status event register is as follows Bit No Description 15 5 Always 0 zero 4 Measurement Complete Bit 3 List Sweep Measurement Complete Bit 1 Always 0 zero 0 Correction Data Measurement Complete Bit 10 OUTPUT 717 STAT OPER 20 ENTER 717 A 30 PRINT A 40 END Command Reference 8 79 STATus Subsystem OPERa tion CONDition Query Syntax Query Response Example 8 80 Command Reference The OPERation CONDition qu
431. z 1kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 25 Hz 120 Hz 1 2 kHz 12 kHz 120 kHz 30 Hz 150 Hz 1 5 kHz 15 kHz 150 kHz 40 Hz 200 Hz 2kHz 20 kHz 200 kHz 50 Hz 250 Hz 2 5 kHz 25 kHz 250 kHz 60 Hz 300 Hz 3kHz 30 kHz 300 kHz 80 Hz 400 Hz 4kHz 40 kHz 400 kHz 500 Hz 5 kHz 50 kHz 500 kHz 600 Hz 6kHz 60 kHz 600 kHz 800 Hz 8 kHz 80 kHz 800 kHz To take the OPEN correction data at the preset frequencies MEAS OPEN displayed when the cursor is moved to the OPEN field is used m The OPEN correction data which is taken at the frequency points you specify allows you to set up to three frequency points in the FREQI FREQ2 and FREQS fields To take the OPEN correction data at the frequency points you specify MEAS OPEN displayed when the cursor is moved to the FREQ1 FREQ2 or FREQS field is used MEAS SETUP Menu 4 21 4 22 MEAS SETUP Menu Test Frequency Points 8610 points Preset Frequency Points 48 points OPEN SHORT OPEN SHORT data data OPEN SHORT data calculated using the interpolation method Ligo4o03 Figure 4 11 OPEN SHORT Correction Using The Interpolation Method Front Panel Operation for the Open Correction There are two procedures OPEN correction using the interpolation method and OPEN correction at the frequency points you specify Perform the following steps to execute the OPEN correction at all frequency points using the interpolation method When you want to execute the OPEN correction at a single frequency point refer to

Manual Change - Agilent Technologies

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents